JP2020168237A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suggesting a setting by a new method.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 1, a mode of stop control of variation display of a pattern displayed inside a display window 4 by a main CPU 101 differs depending on a setting value in a bonus state within an advantageous section. For example, when movement is performed from a pattern position "13" by a player's stop operation at the time of winning of a watermelon, the number of sliding pieces traveling until variation display of a pattern is stopped is 4 in setting values "4" to "6" while the number of sliding pieces traveling until variation display of a pattern is stopped is 3 in setting values "1" to "3".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 137

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game value such as medals and coins has been inserted, and requests the start of rotation of all reels. Output the signal to be. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process (internal lottery process) using random numbers is performed on the program, and based on the result of the lottery (internal winning combination) and the timing of the stop operation. To stop the rotation of the reel. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the game value (medals, etc.) is given, and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game value. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of giving game value, etc. can be mentioned.

Further, such a game machine has a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, but in recent years, the game machine has made it possible for the player to guess the set value set for the game machine. Is also known. For example, Patent Document 1 has a first replaying combination and a second replaying combination, and the probability that only the first replaying combination wins is different depending on the set value, and the first If the re-game combination and the second re-game combination are won at the same time, the symbols that make up the first re-game combination and the symbols that make up the second re-game combination are stopped on the effective line. A game machine has been proposed in which the symbols constituting the second re-game combination can be stopped on the effective line by pressing. In such a game machine, the player can estimate the set value by counting the number of times that the first re-game combination is established, and can improve the interest in the game machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-099567

By the way, in the conventional game machine, the setting difference is provided for the winning probability of a predetermined role, so that the player can guess the setting (in other words, the setting difference provided for the winning probability is used. The player has been annoyed because it is necessary to count the number of winnings of a predetermined combination having a setting difference in the winning probability. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a new setting suggestion method that has never existed before.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suggesting a setting by a new method.

The gaming machine according to the present invention controls a reel (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols and a variable display of the symbol according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that advances the game by doing so, and one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is set. Setting means (for example, setting key type switch 54) and state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a plurality of states (for example, normal section / advantageous section, bonus state / non-bonus state, etc.) related to the game. When a stop command for the variation display of the symbol is detected, the stop control means (for example, within the range of 4 sliding pieces) from the current symbol position to stop the variation display of the symbol. , Main CPU 101), and when the first set value (for example, settings 4 to 6) is set by the setting means, the stop control means has a specific combination (for example, watermelon) as a winning combination. When the stop command is detected at the specific symbol position (for example, symbol position "13") in the determined game in the specific state (for example, the bonus state in the advantageous section), the first movement amount destination from the symbol at the specific symbol position. The variation display of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol (for example, 4 frames ahead) is displayed, and a second set value (for example, settings 1 to 3) different from the first set value is set by the setting means. If this is the case, when the stop command is detected at the specific symbol position in the game in the specific state in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the symbol at the specific symbol position is different from the first movement amount. It is characterized in that the variation display of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol of the movement amount destination (for example, 3 frames ahead) is displayed.

According to such a game machine, in a game in which a specific combination is determined as a winning combination in a specific state, the amount of movement (number of sliding pieces) of the symbol accompanying the stop control differs depending on the set value, so that during stop control Setting suggestions can be made using the amount of movement of the symbol. Here, since the movement amount in which the setting difference occurs is the movement amount at the time of winning the same combination of the specific combination, the setting suggestion can be made without using the combination having the setting difference in the winning probability as in the conventional game machine. Since it is possible, the setting suggestion can be made by a new method that has never existed before.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the stop control means is a stop command in a game in a predetermined state (for example, a bonus state during a normal section) different from the specific state in which the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. When is detected, the variation display of the symbol is stopped based on the same movement amount depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value is set. And.

According to such a game machine, when the state related to the game is a predetermined state, it is not possible to suggest the setting using the movement amount of the symbol at the time of stop control, and when it is a specific state, it stops. Setting suggestions can be made using the amount of movement of the symbol during control.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific state is a state in which a notification state (for example, AT) capable of notifying the player of a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player can be executed (for example, an advantageous section). ).

According to such a game machine, it is possible to suggest the setting by using the movement amount of the symbol at the time of stop control while the notification state can be executed (so-called advantageous section).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suggesting a setting by a new method.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the selector provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of various registers which a main CPU has in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the security mode of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state between the bonus state and the non-bonus state of pachislot in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section, the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (stroke order), the display combination, etc. in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (stroke order), the display combination, etc. in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the hit request flag storage area, and the winning operation flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in a normal advantageous section in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of various tables referred to in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the ending effect performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between each game state, an internal winning combination, and navigation data in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing executed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game return processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change confirmation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change command generation storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data pointer update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of (external) processing at the time of power failure in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the checksum generation process (non-standard) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-standard) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-standard) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main control circuit of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the error processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number value acquisition processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the compressed data storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code acquisition processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the logical product operation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the illegal hit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning check, medal payout processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal payout number check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data transmission processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the WDT setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment LED drive processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment display data generation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the timer update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of power-on of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of inserting a medal of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 2) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 3) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 4) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 5) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows another example of the limiter of the advantageous section of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the control method of the number limiter of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the adjustment hitting method of the number limiter of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (7) of the playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows various data tables used in playability (7). It is a figure which shows various data tables used in playability (7). It is a figure which shows various data tables used in playability (7). It is a figure which shows the comparative example of the control by a playability (7), and other control. It is a figure for demonstrating another specification example which can realize playability (7). It is a figure for demonstrating another example (8) of the playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (9) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (10) of the playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (12) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (12) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (13) of the gametability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows various data tables used in playability (13). It is a figure which shows various data tables used in playability (13). It is a figure which shows various data tables used in playability (13). It is a figure which shows various data tables used in playability (13). It is a transition flow which shows the flow of the game in the advantageous section in another example (14) of the game property of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the addition zone transition lottery table in playability (14). It is a figure which shows the addition game number lottery table in playability (14). It is a figure which shows the addition zone release lottery table in playability (14). It is a figure which shows the game lock lottery table in playability (14). It is a figure which shows the main side production lottery table at the time of a lock in playability (14). It is a figure which shows the sub-side effect lottery table at the time of a lock in playability (14). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of a pachi-slot machine 1 in playability (14). It is a flowchart following FIG. 127. It is a flowchart which shows the game lock lottery processing in game playability (14). It is a flowchart which shows the state determination control process at the time of a game start in game playability (14). It is a flowchart which shows the lock processing at the start of a game in game playability (14). It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task in playability (14). It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a start command in playability (14). It is a figure which shows an example of the reel effect at the time of a game lock in game playability (14). It is a figure for demonstrating another example (15) of game playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (15) of game playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game example in gameability (15). It is a figure for demonstrating another specification example which can realize playability (15). It is a figure for demonstrating another specification example which can realize playability (15). It is a figure for demonstrating another specification example which can realize playability (15). It is a figure for demonstrating another example (16) of the playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (16) of the playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (16) of the playability of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another specification example which can realize playability (No. 16).

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having a bonus operation function, an AT function, and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, the game medium may be referred to as "game value" or "game value".

When a medal is inserted into a pachislot machine by a player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. In the following, the role related to the payout of medals will be referred to as a "small role", and the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) will be referred to as a "replay role". In addition, the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus game) is also referred to as a "bonus role". In addition, a winning combination (that is, a combination of symbols that are permitted to be established) may be simply referred to as a "winning combination", and the internal winning combination is a "winning combination", a "predetermined result", or Sometimes referred to as "derivation tolerance". Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determining means", a "winning combination determining means", a "predetermining means", or a "derivation permissible condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever shape such as a start lever, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. .. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button shape such as a stop button, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the stop operation. ..

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. In addition, the reel stop control means uses a specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol on the effective line when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be expressed as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. Stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels are stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

When all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped in this way, the winning determination means is such that the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line is related to winning (or other predetermined one). Judge whether or not there is. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the prize (or other predetermined combination of symbols) is established. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line simply corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. It may be present, or it may be determined whether or not it corresponds to the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently ensured, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted, so that if an erroneous winning occurs due to a reel defect or the like, the erroneous winning is performed. Can be detected, so that security can be improved.

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various effects are produced by displaying images by a display device, outputting light by various lamps, outputting sound by speakers, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later. Further, when the main control circuit described later determines the effect content, the effect content determining means may be one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body (game machine main body) 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet (housing) 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door (front door) 2b to which an opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are provided side by side in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (rotation direction of the reel). In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R may be expressed as "design display means", "variable display means", "variable display" and the like. Further, as these components, a symbol display area 4 described later may be included. Further, the "design" may be any information that can be visually identified by the player, and may be expressed as "identification information" in that sense.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1. The cabinet 2a can be simply referred to as a "box", and the front door 2b can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "front door". Further, since the cabinet 2a functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the front door 2b, it may be expressed as a "support body", a "support frame", or a "fixed frame". Further, the front door 2b may be composed of a plurality of door members. For example, it may be composed of an upper door member attached to the upper side of the opening of the cabinet 2a and a lower door member attached to the lower side of the opening of the cabinet 2a, or may be configured when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. The inner door member attached to the opening side of the cabinet 2a and the outer door member attached to the front side of the game machine may be used.

The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged to face the display device 11 which will be described later and is arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, by forming the display device cover 30 with a black translucent synthetic resin, the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a is suppressed, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper part of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and lights are turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in the LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has a symbol display area 4, various devices (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, 3 stop buttons 17L, 17C, which are to be operated by the player. 17R, settlement button (not shown), etc.) are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position on the player side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. A predetermined area in 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is arranged continuously among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is set in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the design is displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns).

Then, in the present embodiment, within the frame of the reel display window 4, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. The upper area, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R (top line), the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R. The line connecting the reels (bottom line) is defined (specified) as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won. The effective line may also be referred to as a "winning line" or a "judgment line".

In the present embodiment, for example, a line connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (cross-up line), and the left reel 3L. A line (cross-down line) connecting the upper region, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R may be further defined as an effective line. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective lines are the above-mentioned three lines (or may be five lines as described here), but the number of the lines can be increased or decreased as appropriate. For example, only one center line may be an effective line, or only two lines, a top line and a bottom line, may be effective lines. Further, when defining an effective line, it is possible to define as an effective line instead of each line in which the above-mentioned symbols are aligned, or together with this, a line in which the symbols are not aligned in a straight line. That is, if it is a line that passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols in each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or more lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a valid line.

For example, a line (irregular line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as an effective line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 effective lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a valid line.

The reel display window 4 is formed by the opening of the frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, a substantially horizontal pedestal region is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, the medal insertion slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used in one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the cabinet 2a. Inside the MAX bet button 15a, a bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided. Further, the settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1-bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are all referred to as "insertion operations".

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal region on the substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player (hereinafter referred to as "the number of medals to be paid out") as a privilege. For digitally displaying (notifying) information such as (hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is switched from the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out to the display mode of the error type information.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. Then, in the instruction monitor, the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player by turning on, blinking or turning off the 2-digit 7-segment LED in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified. To do.

The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, when the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)" is notified. When the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order "2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)" is notified, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order is displayed. When notifying "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The mode of notifying the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor (navigation data determined on the main side described later) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45 and the like described later.

Further, the information display 6 is a state display (not shown) for notifying that the information display 6 is an advantageous section advantageous for the player (including a “normal advantageous section” and an “advantageous section” described later; see FIG. 14 described later). Is provided. The status display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. As a general rule, the status indicator lights up at a predetermined timing during the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (for example, any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game), and the advantageous section continues. While it is on, the lighting continues. Then, when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends and the lights go out. As a result, all the players are notified that the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player starts, that the advantageous section is in the advantageous section, and that the advantageous section ends, so that the fairness of the game is guaranteed. ..

As shown in FIG. 6 described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly performed. It is controlled by the main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another means controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the information of the stop operation. Specifically, the information on the stop operation is notified by the display device 11 described later, which is composed of the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212 (see FIGS. 3 and 6 described later) described later.

When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said that the notification is direct). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value "1" that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like) display the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified to the user.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a configuration, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can be used to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. In addition, the presence or absence of notification of such stop operation information can be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, the stop operation information may not be notified in the game state (normal state) in the normal section described later, and the stop operation information may be notified in each game state in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section described later. it can.

Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially perpendicular to the pedestal region of the pedestal portion 13 in a substantially horizontal plane in the front portion of the door body 9. The sub-display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Has. The sub-display device 18 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

A medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided in the lower part of the door body 9. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the production are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, which will be described later. It is a figure which shows the structure of a selector 66.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. A display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 has a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projected member 212a on which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and displays an image by projection mapping. Specifically, the display device 11 generates image light based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projected member 212a, which is a three-dimensional object, and the image light is emitted by the projector mechanism 211 to the projected member. It is projected on the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, it is possible to perform an advanced and powerful effect. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member having a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212a, and one of the projected members is provided depending on the gaming state. , Used as a screen on which video light is projected. Therefore, the inside of the cabinet 2a is also provided with a function (not shown) for switching the projected member according to the gaming state. The display device 11 can also use various other display devices (for example, a liquid crystal display device) as long as it is a device capable of displaying an image for the player.

A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. Further, the medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged. A sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) described later is mounted on the sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57. The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described later.

The sub-relay board 61 is arranged above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71, which will be described later, is mounted. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub-control board 72 and various device units (units) is mounted.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which the wiring for connecting the above is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the front door 2b on the back surface side, and a reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is on the side opposite to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41. A main control board case 55 in which the board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIGS. 7 and 8 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. .. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the main control circuit 90 also controls processing related to determination regarding AT or ART, display processing of navigation information on an instruction monitor, transmission processing of various test signals, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device that detects medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, and also is a device that selects whether or not the inserted medals are appropriate medals, and is selected as an appropriate medal. In that case, the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side and driven so as to be housed in the hopper device 51, and if it is selected as not a proper medal, the medal is moved to the medal payout outlet 24 side. It is guided so that it is discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. That is, the selector 66 is also a device that distributes the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side.

As shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 includes a base 803 on which a medal rail (medal passage) 802 through which medals pass is formed, and a select plate that guides the inserted medals to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side. 804, a medal pusher 805 that pushes the inserted medal to the medal payout outlet 24 side when the inserted medal is not an appropriate medal, and an upstream medal sensor (first) that detects the inserted medal on the upstream side of the medal rail 802. It includes a medal sensor) 806 and a downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807 that detects the inserted medal on the downstream side of the medal rail 802.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 has a medal guide (which forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the hopper device 51 when the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side by the select plate 804. (Not shown) and a cancel chute (not shown) that forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the medal payout outlet 24 when the medal is placed on the medal payout outlet 24 side by the select plate 804 are removable. It is attached.

The select plate 804 is driven by a solenoid (not shown) included in the selector 66. The select plate 804 moves to a guide position that guides the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is driven, but does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is not driven. Move to the discharge position (that is, guide to the medal payout outlet 24 side). Specifically, when the solenoid is driven, the select plate 804 moves in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot 1 to guide the upper part of the medal, while when the solenoid is not driven, the select plate 804 is the pachi-slot 1. It moves forward and does not guide above the medal. The medal guide method using the select plate 804 is not limited to this, and for example, the guide position and the discharge position can be moved by using a mechanism that can move the pachislot 1 in the vertical direction. You may. That is, the select plate 804 has a guide position on the medal rail 802 that does not prevent the passing medal from moving toward the hopper device 51, and the passing medal moves toward the hopper device 51 by the solenoid or other drive source. Any mechanism can be adopted as long as it is a mechanism that prevents the movement from being performed and enables the transfer to the discharge position that guides the medal payout outlet 24 side.

For example, when the select plate 804 is moved to the guide position, the medal pusher 805 operates so as not to protrude in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the select plate 804 is not moved to the guide position (discharge position). In the case of (moving to), it operates so as to project in the rearward direction of the pachislot machine 1. That is, when the medal pusher 805 is in a position where it does not protrude in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1, it becomes a guide position for guiding the passing medal toward the hopper device 51, and when it is in a position where it protrudes in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1. It is a discharge position that does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side (that is, guides it to the medal payout outlet 24 side).

The upstream medal sensor 806 and the downstream medal sensor 807 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting that a medal has passed. Each medal sensor is composed of, for example, a pair or a plurality of pairs of light emitting elements and a reflective sensor composed of a light receiving element, irradiates the medal with light from the light emitting element, and emits the reflected light reflected from the medal. The passing of the medal is detected by the light receiving element receiving light. The configuration of the sensor can be changed as appropriate, and for example, a transmissive sensor or the like can be adopted. Further, the passage of medals may be detected only by the downstream medal sensor 807 without providing the upstream medal sensor 806. Further, specific control based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor will be described later.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b, which is a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 and below the reel display window 4 (FIG. 4 described later). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and the like. This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting each of the second interface boards 302 for a testing machine is mounted. Examples of various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 15a, a 1-bet button 15b, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, and a start switch 79.

<Control system of pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. The set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the lower the degree of the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player. In the present embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus combination described later, and the degree of the player's advantage can be changed. The higher the set value, the higher the AT or ART described later. It is also possible to change the degree of advantage of the player by increasing the winning probability of the lottery.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

Further, the pachislot 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, an auxiliary relay board 61, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and a second interface board 302 for a testing machine. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (throwing operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 has, for example, three LEDs (hereinafter, "first LED" to "1st LED") for displaying the number of medals inserted, which are lit according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as "the number of inserted medals"). An LED that lights a mark indicating that medals can be inserted, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for replaying a game, etc., based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81 (referred to as the third LED). Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights up, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light up, and three medals (game). When the number of startable medals is turned on, the first LED to the third LED are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1. Since these relay boards are not mounted on the Pachislot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the testing machine. Various electronic components required for connecting to the second interface board 302 for use are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by, for example, a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19, and a display unit 212 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projected member 212a constituting the display device 11 and another projected member having a curved display surface provided on the back side of the projected member 212a.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, image (video) for production, audio (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 that constitutes the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 90 functions as a game control unit that controls game operations, and includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role ratio monitor (power supply means). (Not shown).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for a game machine. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (hereinafter, referred to as "main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes") specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be specified in the program. In the present embodiment, the processing efficiency is improved and the program capacity is reduced by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by the main control circuit described later. To do.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). Then, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the "XSRST" terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 is a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means for outputting (power failure means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5 V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

The role ratio monitor (not shown) is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and the calculation circuit 107 described later performs a predetermined ratio calculation on the total result of the game information aggregated by the main CPU 101 described later. , The result of the ratio calculation is displayed as the ratio information. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculations are performed, and the combination ratio monitor sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the results.

In the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor, "abbreviation" which is the type information indicating the type of the ratio information is displayed, and in the lower two digits, the "ratio" which is the ratio information corresponding to the type information is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed. For example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "U" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "7U"). (When is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor, the ART function that occupies the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is activated (that is, the stop operation that is advantageous for the player) as the ratio information. The ratio of the number of games (advantageous section ratio) of the advantageous section in which the procedure of is notified is displayed. Specifically, when the effective interval ratio is 10%, "1" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "0" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed. In addition, the advantageous section ratio may display the ratio of the number of games in which the AT function and the ART function are activated.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Y" is displayed. (When "6Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, the number of consecutive characters to be paid out in the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times). An actuating device (BB in the present embodiment; if a bonus continuous actuating device (MB) for continuously operating a second-class special accessory (CB) is mounted, the same applies hereinafter). The ratio of the number of game media to be paid out by operating (medium-time continuous combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time continuous combination ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Y" is displayed. (When "7Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the roles in the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times). A thing (BB in this embodiment. In addition to the above-mentioned MB, when the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB) is mounted alone, the above-mentioned second-class special accessory (CB) is alone. If it is installed, if a normal accessory (SB) is installed, all of them are included. The same shall apply hereinafter) and the ratio of the number of game media paid out (medium-time bonus ratio) ) Is displayed. Specifically, when the ratio of medium-time accessories is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10th place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1st place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "" (When "6A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor, as ratio information, the combination of the characters in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is continuous. The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the operating device (total continuous combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total joint combination ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10th place) and "5" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1st place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "" (When "7A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the combinations in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the object (total accessory ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total accessory ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the main control circuit 90 directly includes the combination monitor is described as an example, but the display content of the combination monitor is controlled by the main control circuit 90. It suffices if the display content can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and a configuration that the main control circuit 90 does not directly provide can be adopted. For example, the combination monitor may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display contents via the game operation display board 81. Further, in this case, the role ratio monitor is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and one or more of them are used to display predetermined ratio information. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the advantageous section ratio, the medium-time continuous combination ratio, the medium-time bonus ratio, the total continuous combination ratio, and the total bonus ratio are given as examples. As described above, ratio information other than these may be displayed. For example, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio). , The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (medium time advantageous section acquisition ratio) , The ratio of the number of games in which the accessory continuous operation device is operated (medium-time continuous combination section ratio) to the specific total number of games (6000 times), and the ratio of the specific total number of games (6000 times), The ratio of the number of games in which all the characters are activated (medium-time character section ratio), and the ratio of the number of games in which the continuous character operation device is operated (total continuous combination section) among the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) The ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are operated (total bonus section ratio), etc., among the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) can also be displayed by performing the predetermined ratio calculation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor, the predetermined total number of games is set to "175,000 times" and the specific total number of games is set to "6000 times". However, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, as the parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios described above, the predetermined total number of games may be set to "17,500 times" and the specific total number of games may be set to "3000 times". .. However, various types of game machines are installed and operated in game stores, and the optimum number of games for ratio calculation may differ. Therefore, the number of games for calculating the above-mentioned various ratios is described above. It is not limited to the ones that have been made, but can be changed as appropriate. In this case, the number of games that can be the parameter (denominator) and the number of children (numerator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios can be arbitrarily set on the game store side. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the ART function is not included in all the accessories targeted in the medium-time bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio, but the operation of the ART function is a bonus. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the medium-time bonus and the total bonus ratio by regarding the operation of. It goes without saying that even if the information is other than the above, as long as it is useful information, the two values can be aggregated to perform the ratio calculation, and the result of the ratio calculation can be displayed as the ratio information. Absent. Further, in the description of the role ratio monitor, the part described as "the operation of the ART function" may include "the operation of the AT function" or may be excluded.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101 (arithmetic processing unit), a main ROM 102 (first storage unit), a main RAM 103 (second storage unit), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, and the like. It has an arithmetic circuit 107, a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the microprocessor 91 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 to control the game operation in general. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 described later.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 to an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is transmitted by another component (for example, a timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 is configured to include a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a "MUL" instruction on a program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on the "MUL" instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 obtains a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard-latch random number, a random number register 1 for obtaining a 2-byte soft-latch random number, and a 1-byte soft-latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 2 to 7. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) of signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, power management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is also connected to any of the input ports of PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and latches from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at the timing (on-edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. A signal is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101 has an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, and a timer based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Various interrupt processing such as update processing (see FIG. 79 described later) is performed.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-control means) mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 200 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 200 functions as an effect control unit that controls the effect operation, and basically includes a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay board 87.

The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, the main board communication task for controlling the communication with the main control circuit 90 and the effect registration for extracting the random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Includes various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of the LED.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and /. Alternatively, the sub-display device 18 is displayed. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Various registers of the main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 101.

As the main register, the main CPU 101 includes an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as "A register"), a flag register F (flag register), a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as "B register"), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as "B register"). General-purpose register D (hereinafter referred to as "D register"), general-purpose register E (hereinafter referred to as "E register"), general-purpose register H (hereinafter referred to as "H register"), and general-purpose register L (hereinafter referred to as "H register"). , "L register"). Further, the main CPU 101 has, as sub-registers, an accumulator A', a flag register F', a general-purpose register B', a general-purpose register C', a general-purpose register D', a general-purpose register E', a general-purpose register H', and a general-purpose register L'. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of 1-byte registers.

Further, in the present embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as "BC register"), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter referred to as "DE register"). Further, in the present embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as "HL register").

As shown in FIG. 10, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing and the like is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, bit 6 (D6) is set with data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the calculation result is "0" in the calculation result determination process. Specifically, when the calculation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the calculation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the calculation result determination process, the main CPU 101 makes a determination (YES / NO) with reference to the bit 6 data “0” / “1”.

Further, the main CPU 101 has an expansion register Q (hereinafter, referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of a 1-byte register. In this embodiment, as will be described in various processing flows described later, various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes for specifying an address using this Q register are provided on the program, and the instruction code of this instruction code is provided. By using it, the efficiency of processing and the capacity reduction of the main ROM 102 are realized. In various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes that specify an address using the Q register, the address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. Immediately after the reset of the main CPU 101, "F0H" is set in the Q register as an initial value. Further, in the "LDQ, n (8-bit data)" instruction using the Q register, the value of the Q register is changed by setting an arbitrary 1-byte data in "n" and executing the instruction. Can be done.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes an interrupt page address register I and a memory refresh register R composed of 1-byte registers, and an index register IX and an index register IY composed of 2-byte registers. , The stack pointer SP and the program counter PC are provided as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11C. 11A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 11A, from the head (0000H) side of the address, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and The XCS decoding areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 11B, the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are displayed from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102. They are placed at predetermined addresses in order.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player (for example, various data tables such as an internal lottery table and various sub-control circuits 200). Data for transmitting control commands (commands), etc.) are stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) composed of the program area and the data area is necessary for the control process (process related to the game property) related to the game playability of the game actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

Further, in the non-standard area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the playability) that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, programs and data used in the pachislot 1 certification test (test firing test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing at the time of power failure and thumb check processing at power recovery, and fraud countermeasure programs. And the data required for it are stored in the non-standard area.

Further, in the program management area and the security setting area, various settings and management information related to the execution of the control program or the security function are stored. For example, setting and management information of the start address and end address (that is, data range) of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information of the number of addresses of the RAM area that can be read, WDT reset setting and management information, Interrupt setting and management information, read permission / non-permission setting and management information of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information related to the activation and update method of the random number circuit 110, and security mode setting described later. And management information and the like are stored in the program management area and the security setting area. In the present embodiment, other settings and management information not related to the security function are stored in the program management area, and settings and management information related to the security function are stored in the security setting area. These settings and management information may be stored as a single management area, for example.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 11C, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and the non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary) from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103. Storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program related to the game playability performed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, and a non-standard stack. In the present embodiment, using this non-standard RAM area, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, such as a checksum process, are executed.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are used for the game in the main ROM 102. It is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at an address different from the ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 103 using an non-specified RAM area arranged at an address different from the game RAM area. ..

In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-standard ROM area) where the program or the like cannot be arranged according to the conventional rules. can do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

<Security mode>
Next, a security mode, which is a part of the security function of the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the security mode.

The security mode is, for example, an operating state in which the microprocessor 91 operates when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93. During this security mode, the startup of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area (that is, the main CPU 101 starts executing the process at power-on (see FIG. 46 described later). Delay that). By starting the main CPU 101 through this security mode, the security of the microprocessor 91 is ensured, and the time required for the start control at the time of turning on the power is secured to stably start the main CPU 101.

In the present embodiment, for example, the reset controller 106 can delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the reset signal input when the power is turned on for a predetermined period, and the interrupt controller 112 can delay the startup of the main CPU 101. It is also possible to delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the interrupt permission of the reset interrupt process (see FIG. 46 described later) at the time of turning on the power for a predetermined period. It is also possible for each controller to cooperate to delay the startup of the main CPU 101. Further, for example, a delay circuit may be provided in the microprocessor 91 (or in the reset controller 106 or the interrupt controller 112), and the delay circuit may delay the startup of the main CPU 101. That is, the configuration (security unit) that executes the security function in the microprocessor 91 can be appropriately modified and applied according to the specifications.

As shown in FIG. 12, the delay period in the security mode can be set to a fixed extension time (fixed period) and a random extension time (variable period). In the present embodiment, for example, by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 8 to which different fixed extension times are associated, one fixed extension from a plurality of fixed extension times is set. A plurality of random extension time ranges can be set by selecting and setting one of modes 1 to 4 in which the time can be set and different random extension time ranges are associated with each other. It is possible to set a range of one random extension time from the inside.

For example, when "mode 4" is selected as the fixed extension time and "mode 4" is selected as the random extension time, and these settings are stored in the security setting area, the microprocessor 91 turns on the power of the pachislot 1. When the reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, first, the start of the main CPU 101 is delayed for about 4 seconds (4000 ms) as the fixed extension time, and then the random extension time is in the range of 0 to 500 ms. One extension time is randomly selected, and the startup of the main CPU 101 is delayed for the selected time.

The range of the fixed extension time and the random extension time can be set as appropriate, but in the present embodiment, the range of the random extension time is set from the viewpoint of shortening the time until the setting can be changed when the power of the pachislot machine is turned on. It is desirable to set "mode 1" in which the random extension time is always "0".

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, various gaming states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and their transition flows will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. Note that FIG. 13 is a transition flow diagram of the basic gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, and FIG. 14 is a diagram in which the presence or absence of the notification (AT / ART) function is taken into consideration (that is, the gaming section is a normal section). It is a transition flow diagram of the game state (distinguished from the advantageous section).

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") is provided as a type of bonus game. The BB is a continuous accessory actuating device for a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the gaming state based on the presence or absence of winning / operating (winning) of the bonus combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the main control circuit 90 wins / operates (wins) a bonus combination (internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later). ) Is present or absent, and three types of gaming states called "bonus non-winning state", "inter-flag state", and "bonus state" are managed.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated.

The presence or absence of winning of the bonus combination is managed based on the data stored in the hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later) and the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Will be done. Further, whether or not the bonus is activated (winning) is managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, in the gaming state in which the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state), the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT5 state", respectively) are provided. The RT1 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT5 state is the gaming state in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is medium. It is a game state that becomes. Further, the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state in the bonus non-winning state is any of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state in the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is based on the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof in the gaming state (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state) in which the bonus is not activated. It also manages six types of states, RT0 state to RT5 state.

The RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, flags indicating six RT states of the RT0 state flag to the RT5 state flag are provided, and the RT state is managed by managing the on / off states of these flags by the main RAM 103. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag that is on as the current RT state. The RT0 state flag may not be provided, and when all the RT state flags are off, the main control circuit 90 may specify that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state), the bonus combination (the internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. When this is done (“bonus winning” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state (RT5 state). Further, when the bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state (“bonus is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Here, as the bonus state, a BB1 game state (BB1 state), a BB2 game state (BB2 state), a BB3 game state (BB3 state), and a BB4 game state (BB4 state) are provided. The main control circuit 90 turns on the BB1 state flag, the BB2 state flag, the BB3 state flag, and the BB4 state flag stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later), which will be described later, as in the RT state. / Manage bonus status according to off status. Further, as will be described later, since the RB game state (RB state) is always in the BB1 to BB4 states, the RB is also stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) described later. It is managed according to the on / off status of the status flag.

In the bonus non-winning state, the name "F_BB1" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination "C_red same color BB" is displayed on the effective line, the main control circuit 90 Shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the BB1 state. In the BB1 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB1 state, the BB1 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB2" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue same color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB2 state. In the BB2 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB2 state, the BB2 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB3" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_red different color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB3 state. In the BB3 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "165" or more are paid out in the BB3 state, the BB3 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB4" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue different color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB4 state. In the BB4 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "165" or more are paid out in the BB4 state, the BB4 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

In the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT1 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state to the RT1 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the effective line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state. Shift to RT3 state.

In the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state to the RT3 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT0 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT0 transition lip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state. It shifts to the RT0 state.

In the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT3 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13). "RT1 transition RT1 transition lip is established"), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT2 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT2 transition lip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state. Shift to RT2 state. When the set value is changed, or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied (in FIG. 13, "setting change / initialization condition is satisfied"), the game state is set as the initial state. Is in the RT0 state.

In the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13, “RT1 transition RT1 transition lip is established”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT1 state.

In the RT3 state, when a game is played for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, "8" game, that is, between eight games) ("8 game digestion" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the RT3 state to the RT0 state. The period during which the RT3 state continues can be set as appropriate. Further, the period during which the RT3 state continues may not be particularly specified. In this case, in the RT3 state, the internal winning combination in which the combination of symbols described later “S_RT0 transition lip” can be displayed on the effective line may be determined with a predetermined probability.

[Transition flow of game state considering whether or not the notification (AT / ART) function is activated]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not a function (AT / ART function) for notifying a stop operation advantageous to the player is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the above-mentioned bonus non-winning state, inter-flag state, and bonus state, but also the activated / non-activated state of the AT / ART function is managed as a gaming state. In the present embodiment, the section of the game in which the AT function is operating is referred to as "normal advantageous section", the section of the game in which the ART function is operating is referred to as "advantageous section", and the AT function and the ART function are The section of the game in which none of them is operating is referred to as a "non-advantageous section" or a "normal section".

Further, in the present embodiment, when a bonus state is obtained in an advantageous section (including "normal advantageous section" and "advantageous section"), the bonus state is considered to be a series of advantageous game sections for the player, and the bonus state is advantageous. The number of games that are included in the section and the above-mentioned status indicator continues to light (notification period during the advantageous section) and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (continuation is restricted) are counted. (Regulatory monitoring period) (in this embodiment, "1500" games). However, as will be described later, when a bonus state is reached in the "non-advantageous section", the bonus state may shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state. In this case, the bonus The state shall be included in the period described above. In addition, when the bonus state is reached in the non-advantageous section, the player does not shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state (when the "non-advantageous section" continues). Assuming that it is not a section of a series of advantageous games, the bonus state is not included in the advantageous section, and the bonus state is not included in the above-mentioned period. However, since the bonus state itself is an advantageous gaming state for the player, the bonus state is always an advantageous section regardless of whether or not it is a "normal advantageous section" or an "advantageous section" before and after that. It can also be included and included in the period described above.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 90 has a "normal state" as a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section) and a "high accuracy 1 state" as a gaming state in a normal advantageous section. ~ "High accuracy 4 state" and "precursor state", "line battle ready state", "line battle state", "right acquisition lottery preparation state", "right acquisition lottery state", "right" as the game state of the advantageous section It manages the "acquisition state", "ending preparation state", "ending 1 state", and "ending 2 state".

(Game state of non-advantageous section (normal section))
The normal state, which is a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section), is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. When it is determined to shift to the normal advantageous section in the normal state (“normal advantageous section transition winning” in FIG. 14), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state to the normal advantageous section according to the determination trigger. Move to one of the gaming states. The details of the flow of the game in the normal state will be described later with reference to FIG. 33 described later.

In the present embodiment, in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 33 described later) is won, any of the game states in the normal advantageous section (other than the high probability 4 state). It is usually advantageous to win an internal winning combination (other than "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including a bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. If it is decided to shift to the high probability 4 state of the section, and after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the line battle state of the advantageous section is entered. When it is decided that it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued for a predetermined period (32 games).

In addition, in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, when the internal winning combination (“F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”) including the bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between the set values is won, it is normal. It is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the normal state of the non-advantageous section continues. Further, in the inter-flag state in the normal state, no matter which combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined to shift to the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal state of the non-advantageous section is changed to the gaming state of any of the normal advantageous sections, the above-mentioned notification period during the advantageous section is started (that is, the lighting of the state indicator is started). At the same time, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is started (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500" which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections is started).

(Normally advantageous section game state)
Each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is a gaming state (AT) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (including the case where it has already been decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal state), the normal advantageous section has ended. In the case (in FIG. 14, “normal advantage section end advantageous section transition winning”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to any of the advantageous section gaming states according to the determination trigger. In addition, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section and the normal advantageous section ends (in FIG. 14, "normal advantageous section end advantageous section transition non-winning"". ), The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the normal advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 described later.

In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 has a small push order (“F_upper left bell 1”, “F_upper left bell 2”, “F_upper middle bell 1”, “F_upper middle bell 1” described later). Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 2 ”,“ F_Middle Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Middle Left "Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1", "F_Middle Middle Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Left Bell 1", "F_Middle Right Left Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1" Bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ” When any of the internal winning combinations of "Bell 2") is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and it is decided to notify the information. , Information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later).

Further, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 replays in the push order (“F_RT0 medium replay 1” to “F_RT0 medium replay 6”, “F_RT1 medium replay 1” to “F_RT1 medium replay 6” described later. , "Internal winning combination of" F_RT2 medium replay 1 "to" F_RT2 medium replay 3 ") is determined as an internal winning combination), and whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is determined. Is not performed, and information on the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation capable of shifting to the RT state advantageous to the player or maintaining the advantageous RT state) is not notified (described later). (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the RT function does not operate (except when the push order is accidentally answered correctly), and only the AT function operates (AT game state).

Here, in the present embodiment, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT3 state or the RT5 state (that is, the state between eight games or between the flags after the RT3 transition to be described later is displayed). ), The push order notification of the push order small winning combination is usually performed until the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once. Therefore, even in the game state of the same normal advantageous section, if the RT state is different, the number of times the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed also changes, so that the profit of the player based on the push order also changes. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the normal advantageous section), the bonus state is set in the normal state. Similar to when (more specifically, when winning a bonus combination during a non-advantageous section), in the bonus state, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, the player can get the most medals. Information on possible stop operations) is not notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Is not decided whether or not to notify.

In the present embodiment, in the bonus non-winning state of each game state in the normal advantageous section, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 34 described later) is won, the game is played even between the game states in the normal advantageous section. The state shift is performed, and the period (number of games) in which the normally advantageous section continues also fluctuates. In addition, when winning a bonus combination, if it has not already been decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is advantageous. If it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the section and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section will continue.

Here, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is other than the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. ), But also the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between each set value. Even if the winning is based on the above, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination including the bonus combination having a setting difference in the winning probability is determined as a common process in the normal advantageous section, Whether or not to shift to an advantageous section is decided. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the normally advantageous section is a more advantageous gaming state than the gaming state in the non-advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section is in the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the state indicator is lit) and also in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period). The number of games is being counted as "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections). However, when the normal advantageous section ends without shifting to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned notification period during the advantageous section ends (that is, the status indicator is turned off and turned off), and the above-mentioned The regulated monitoring period is terminated (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is terminated, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

(Game state of advantageous section)
Each game state in the advantageous section is a game state (ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a game advantageous to the player as compared with each game state in the normal state and the normal advantageous section. It is in a state. In each gaming state of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 basically performs a stop operation advantageous to the player when either the push order small winning combination or the pushing order replay described above is determined as the internal winning combination. Information (that is, information on a stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals, shift to the RT state advantageous to the player, or maintain the advantageous RT state) is notified (described later). (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the ART function is activated (ART gaming state). In each gaming state of the advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends without extension (continuation) (including the case where the advantageous section described later is forcibly ended) (“End of advantageous section” in FIG. 14). , The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section.

Here, in each gaming state of the advantageous section, as a result of the push order notification of the push order small winning combination and the push order replay described above, the RT2 state corresponds (maintains) as the basic RT state. ing. In addition, except for the RT4 state after the end of the bonus state, the RT3 state based on the display of the RT3 transition described later, and the RT0 state after the end of the RT3 state, each game state in the normal advantageous section is changed to each game state in the advantageous section. In the case of transition, in most cases, the RT state in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section corresponds to the RT1 state. Therefore, the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, which are the game states of the advantageous section, may shift to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state, respectively. When it has been determined and the RT state is not the RT2 state, it is positioned as a preparatory state for raising the RT state to the RT2 state.

The main control circuit 90 basically changes the game state to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition lottery state when the RT state shifts to the RT2 state in the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, respectively. And shift to the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 44 described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the advantageous section), the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section are defined. Unlike this, in the bonus state, information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation that allows the player to obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Is always notified. Therefore, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section, the profit given to the player is larger than when the bonus state is set in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the advantageous section is a more advantageous gaming state than each gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the advantageous section is in the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the state indicator is lit) and also in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, a series). The number of games is being counted for "1500" times, which is the upper limit for the advantageous game section to continue. If the number of games played during the advantageous section (including during the bonus state) does not reach the upper limit of "1500" times and the advantageous section ends, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is,). Along with the end of the status indicator lighting and extinguishing, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period ends (that is, the count of the number of games of "1500" which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections is counted. It is finished and the counting result is initialized (cleared)). In addition, when the number of games played in the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500" times, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in the case of the bonus state, only the bonus state). In this case as well, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is, the status indicator is turned off and turned off), and the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is ended (that is, , The counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is completed, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number of games played during the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaching the upper limit of "1500" times, for example, the advantageous section Even if it is decided to continue each of the gaming states in (given the right to continue), or if the remaining number of games in each gaming state in the advantageous section remains, they are After all are initialized (cleared), it shifts to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. Further, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated while the advantageous section is in the bonus state, the push order notification of the above-mentioned push order small winning combination in the bonus state is also immediately terminated. .. However, in this case, as an exception, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination described above may be performed until the bonus state ends. Further, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is not limited to "1500", and the value can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, basically, the number of games (the number of games) is the period during which each gaming state corresponding to the above-mentioned normal advantageous section and the advantageous section continues, or the period during which each gaming state is extended (continuing period). ), But the method of managing the period of each game state is not limited to this. For example, among the above-mentioned normal advantageous sections and each gaming state corresponding to the advantageous section, the period of one or more gaming states, the number of medals paid out during that period, and the number of medals inserted from the period It may be managed by the reduced difference number (net increase number), or it is managed by the number of notifications (the number of notifications) that affect the payout of medals (that is, the notification when the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won). You may.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 22. The various data tables used in the various lottery performed in each game state related to the game property described with reference to FIG. 14 will be described later together with the description of each game property.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 15). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the direction of rotation of the reels (the direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 15 toward the symbol position "0") with the symbol position "0" as a reference, " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, they are displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. In this embodiment, the symbols are "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "bell", "watermelon", "replay", and "blank". Nine kinds of symbols are used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the symbol "red 7" (symbol code 1), and the symbol "blue 7" (symbol code 2) is assigned. "00000010" is assigned as the data. The symbol "BAR" (symbol code 3) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "cherry 1" (symbol code 4) is assigned "00000100" as data, and the symbol "cherry 2" (symbol 2) is assigned. "000000101" is assigned as data to the code 5).

"00000011" is assigned as data to the symbol "bell" (symbol code 6). The symbol "watermelon" (symbol code 7) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "replay" (symbol code 8) is assigned "00001000" as data, and the symbol "blank" (symbol code 9) is assigned. ) Is assigned "000001001" as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 and 17 are internal lottery tables referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state. Further, FIG. 18 is an internal lottery table referred to in the bonus state.

The internal lottery table is provided for each game state (see FIG. 13), and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is defined for each set value (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus combination or small combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch 76 and a setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 7).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) by the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 is assigned to each internal winning combination. Add in sequence at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, when the lottery result exceeds 65535 in the predetermined internal winning combination, it is determined that the internal winning combination has won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example in which the lottery value is added to the extracted random number value to perform lottery has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random number value. Whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than "0" (whether or not the lottery result is underflowed) may be determined to determine the winning / non-winning of the internal lottery.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability of the internal winning combination being determined. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

In the internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state, as shown in FIG. 16, basically, the type and the winning probability of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of the RT state. Changes. For example, the replay combination related to the names "F_RT0 medium replay 1 (No. 40)" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6 (No. 45)" is not determined as an internal winning combination except in the RT0 state, and is internally in the RT0 state. It is decided as a winning role.

In FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" is an internal winning combination in which a bonus combination and a replay combination or a small combination are overlapped and won. For example, in "F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (No. 1)", the bonus combination "F_BB1" and the replay combination "F_confirmed lip" are duplicated and won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination "F_BB1" is "BB01". (See FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) and the combination of symbols "REP01" to "REP09" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) corresponding to the replay combination "F_fixed lip" are allowed to be derived (winning). (Allowed) It is an internal winning role.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 60" is an internal winning combination that the replay combination wins. For example, in "F_maintenance lip (No. 40)", the replay combination "F_maintenance lip" is won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination "F_maintenance lip" is "REP02" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later). ) Is allowed to be derived (winning is allowed).

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 98" is an internal winning combination that a small combination wins. For example, in "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)", the small role "F_chance eye A1" wins, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role "F_chance eye A1" is "NML14", "NML22", " It is an internal winning combination that allows the derivation of "NML26" and "NML30" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) (winning is permitted).

Although not shown, when "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)" to "F_chance eye B4 (No. 68)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "NZR01" (described later) will be described later. (See FIGS. 19 to 22) is also allowed (stop display is allowed). Here, "HZR01" is not a combination of symbols related to winning but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT3 state (RT3 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not allowed except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "NZR01" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68".

Similarly, when "F_upper left bell 1 (No. 77)" to "F_lower right middle bell 2 (No. 98)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "NZR02" (described later) will be described later. Derivation of 19 to 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR02" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT1 state (RT1 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not allowed except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "NZR02" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98".

In the present embodiment, the bonus combination is not further determined in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), that is, in the state in which the bonus combination has already been determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, "0" is set for the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). ing. However, "No. 2" to "No. 10", "No. 12" so that the winning probability of the small winning combination does not change between the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state) and the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state). The lottery value related to the small winning combination assigned in the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 38" is "No. 61" to "No. 68", "No. 68" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). It is added to the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by "72" and "No. 73". That is, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68", "No. 72" and "No. 73" does not have a high winning probability in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), but is a bonus. The probability is the same between the gaming states other than the states.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, "No. 0" indicates "off" in which derivation of any of the specified combinations of symbols (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) is not permitted. The higher the "out of place" assignment (lottery value), the more disadvantageous the player is. In the RT0 state and the RT2 state, "off" is not determined. Further, in the RT5 state, the probability that "off" is determined is described as "22289/65536", but in reality, one of the bonus combinations has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). In that sense, there is no case where "off" is determined because it is in the state of

In addition, in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the internal lottery table when the set value is “1” (setting 1) is described as an example, but “No. 21”, “No. 30”, and “No. For the internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination shown in ".39" and "No. 74", a common lottery value is set among the set values. That is, they have the same winning probability. On the other hand, with respect to the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21", "No. 30", "No. 39" and "No. 74", between each set value (or a predetermined set value and a specific set value). Between), different lottery values are set. That is, the winning probabilities are different (see (* 1), (* 2) and (* 3) in FIGS. 16 and 17).

Specifically, for example, in the internal winning combinations shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30", when the set value is "1", the lottery value of "22" is set respectively, whereas the lottery value is set. When the set value is "6", a lottery value of "77" is set respectively (that is, as the set value becomes higher, the lottery is performed in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30". The value is increasing by "11"). Although not shown, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), as the lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30" increases, "No. 21" and "No. 30" are shown. The lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 72" also increases.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 74", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively high, and the lottery value is set to increase as the set value becomes higher.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 39", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively low, and the lottery value is set to decrease as the set value becomes higher. This is to adjust the increase in the lottery value of the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21", "No. 30" and "No. 74". Therefore, for example, in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, the probability that "off" is determined does not change and "0" is maintained. It should be noted that these are examples in which the winning probabilities of specific internal winning combinations differ between the set values.

In FIG. 18, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 7" is an internal winning combination in which a small winning combination is won, and when the winning combination is won, the corresponding symbol shown in FIG. 18 is used. Derivation of combinations is allowed (winning is allowed). In the present embodiment, the replay combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the RB state (that is, the BB1 to BB4 states), but one of the replay combinations shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 Alternatively, a plurality of replay combinations may be determined as internal winning combinations.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, a symbol combination table is provided as an example of data for defining a combination of a plurality of symbols in advance, but the combination of symbols displayed on the main control circuit 90 side is identified. If possible, the data can be specified by other methods. For example, a combination of symbol codes may be defined so that the combination of symbols displayed by the combination can be identified.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the symbol combination table prescribes combinations of a plurality of symbols, and data indicating the types of combinations of these symbols is defined as a display combination (winning operation flag). There is. Further, the symbol combination table is composed of 9 bytes of data so as to correspond to the hit request flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later), and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later). At the same time, data indicating a different display combination (winning operation flag) is specified for each bit of each storage area.

In addition, in FIGS. 19 to 22, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. For example, the combination of "HZR01" is a combination of symbols in which the symbol on the left reel is "cherry 1", the symbol on the middle reel is "cherry 1", and the symbol on the right reel is "cherry 1" (that is, "cherry 1-"). (Cherry 1-Cherry 1 ") and a combination of symbols whose left reel symbol is" Cherry 2 ", middle reel symbol is" Cherry 1 ", and right reel symbol is" Cherry 1 "(that is," Cherry 2- It shows that "Cherry 1-Cherry 1") and is a combination of corresponding symbols.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR01" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT3 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT3 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR02" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT1 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT1 transition”).

Display combination (winning operation flag) "BB01", "BB02", "BB03" and "BB04" are combinations of symbols related to the bonus combination, and when each combination of symbols is displayed on the display valid line. , Activate the corresponding bonus state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP01" to "REP06" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is performed. Activate. The combination of the symbols of "REP01" can be referred to as "parallel lip" or "straight line lip", and the combination of symbols of "REP02" can be referred to as "normal lip", and the symbol of "REP03". The combination of symbols can be referred to as "hit lip", the combination of symbols of "REP04" can be referred to as "special lip", and the combination of symbols of "REP05" can be referred to as "fake lip". , The combination of the symbols of "REP06" can be referred to as "BAR matching lip".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP07" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT1 state) to an RT0 state (“RT0 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP08" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for transitioning from a state (for example, RT0 state and RT2 state) to an RT1 state (“RT1 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP09" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for transitioning from a state (for example, RT0 state) to an RT2 state (“RT2 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML01" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of the "NML01" symbols can be referred to as the "bell" symbol combination.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML02" to "NML13" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML02" to "NML13" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "batting order combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML14" to "NML30" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML14" to "NML30" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "chance combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML31" to "NML33" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, five cards are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML31" to "NML33" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "special role".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML34" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of "NML34" symbols can be referred to as the "cross-down bell" symbol combination.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML35" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, five medals are paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML35" can be referred to as the combination of the symbols of "watermelon".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML36" and "NML37" are a combination of symbols related to a small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight pieces are displayed. The medal will be paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML36" and "NML37" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACA".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML38" to "NML40" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, two sheets are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML38" to "NML40" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACB".

In this embodiment, an example is described in which data indicating one display combination (winning operation flag) includes data to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned, but one display combination (winning). It is also possible to configure the data so that only one symbol combination is assigned to the data indicating the operation flag).

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, and the like will be described.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a combination in which the symbol combinations displayed are different according to the player's stop operation order (pushing order), that is, a so-called "pushing order combination" (for example, the above-mentioned "pushing order small combination" or "pushing order") "Sequential replay") is provided. Since the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, there are a maximum of six stop operation orders (pushing order).

In FIGS. 23 and 24, the stop operation order (push order) is indicated as "left, middle, right" as "batting order 1", and the stop operation order (push order) is "left, right, middle". "Batting order 2" indicates that the order is "Batting order 2", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is indicated as "middle, left, right" as "Batting order 3", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is The order of "middle, right, left" is indicated as "batting order 4", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is indicated as "right, left, middle" as "batting order 5", and the stop operation is performed. The order (pushing order) is "right, middle, left", which is indicated as "batting order 6".

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the "F_fixed lip" is won regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing when it is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the pushing order combination. "Special lip" is established. In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, any of the other winning replay combinations may be established.

Here, "regardless of the timing of the stop operation" means that the effective lines are the "center line", the "top line", and the "bottom line", and the maximum number of sliding pieces is "4". It means that the corresponding symbols are arranged so that they can be stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, they are arranged within the range of 5 symbols). Is what you do. For example, in the left reel 3L, the symbol of "cherry 1" is stopped and not displayed within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol positions "10" to "12" are in the middle stage. (When it is done), but if the stop operation is performed at that point, the symbol of "Cherry 2" is placed at the symbol position "13" so that the symbol of "Cherry 2" can be stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is determined, for example, the symbols "cherry 1" and "cherry 2" are allowed to be stopped and displayed as the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination. As a result, even if the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces as a whole, the combination of the symbols is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation". It can be said that it holds. Hereinafter, the same applies to other display combinations (winning operation flags) and the like. However, in the push order combination, since the combination of symbols that are preferentially stopped and controlled based on the stop operation order changes, even if the symbols are arranged as described above, the type of stop operation order Depending on the case, the symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the valid line.

When the "F_maintenance lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, one of the winning "normal rips" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. To do.

"F_RT0 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT1 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip). When the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the stop control is performed so that the "fake lip" is stopped preferentially over the other "maintenance lip". That is, if the timing of the stop operation is an appropriate timing, the "fake lip" is established, and if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing, another "maintenance lip" is established. This also applies to "F_RT1 medium replay 2" and "F_RT1 medium replay 3".

"F_RT1 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

In the present embodiment, when the "RT0 transition lip" is established, the "RT1 transition lip" may be established at the same time. In this case, the main control circuit 90 determines that the "RT0 transition lip" is established as "RT1". Judgment is prioritized over the establishment of "Transition Lip". That is, when the "RT0 transition lip" and the "RT1 transition lip" are established at the same time, it is determined that the "RT0 transition lip" is established and the RT state is shifted to the RT0 state, and the "RT1 transition lip" is established. I do not judge.

"F_RT2 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

When "F_upper rip" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, "parallel rip" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel (it becomes the "upper rip").

When "F_middle lip 1" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, a "parallel lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is,). The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel (it becomes a "middle lip").

"F_Middle-stage lip 2" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" to "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle batting order 4" is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, "fake rip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If not, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 2" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

"F_Middle-stage lip 3" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle stage lip 3" is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation". If the "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "BAR aligned rip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing is not right, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 3" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

When "F_lower lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel).

When "F_hit lip" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "hit lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle row of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, but is not displayed in the middle row on the right reel 3R).

"F_JAC1_1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

Since "Bell" and "JACA" are a combination of symbols in which 8 medals are paid out, if they are established at the same time as described above, "8 + 8 = 16" medals are originally paid out. However, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of medals that can be paid out in one game is set as "15", and even if more than 15 medals are won, 15 medals are paid. I try to put it out. This also applies to "F_JAC1_2" to "F_JAC1_6".

"F_JAC1_2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the push order is correct (when the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), the "bell" and the "JACA" are duplicated and won a prize. By doing so, 15 medals are paid out, but it is not limited to this, for example, the number of medals to be paid out of "JACA" is set as "15", and if the pushing order is correct, the winning is won. If any of the existing "JACA" is established, 15 medals may be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the push order is not correct (when the stop operation is not performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), a plurality of "JACBs" are duplicated. By winning a prize, 6 medals (2 x 3 lines) are paid out, but it is not limited to this, for example, the number of "JACB" medals to be paid out is set as "6", and the pushing order is set. If the answer is not correct, six medals may be paid out if any of the winning "JACB" is established.

"F_JAC2" is not a push order combination, but when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, either "bell" or winning "JACA" regardless of the stop operation order or the stop operation timing. Is established and 15 medals are paid out. Similarly, for example, the number of medals to be paid out of "JACA" is set to "15", and 15 medals are paid out when any of the winning "JACA" is established. It may be.

When "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning combinations instead of pushing order, the timing of the stop operation is If the timing is appropriate, the "chance role" will be missed and the "RT3 transition" will be displayed on the valid line. In this case, there is no medal payout, but the RT state may shift to the RT3 state, so it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation that misses the "chance role" and displays the "RT3 transition". Is likely to be. Here, in that sense, it is explained that it is the timing of the "appropriate" stop operation that the "chance role" is missed. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one of the winning "chance roles" will be established and one medal will be paid out, but the RT state will not shift to the RT3 state. ..

Here, when any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. Whether or not the timing is correct is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation during the third stop operation. Specifically, 3/4 of the timings of all stop operations during the third stop operation are set as appropriate timings, and when the stop operation is performed at that timing, the "RT3 transition" is set. When it is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/4 timing, the "chance combination" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. As a general rule, the timing of such a stop operation is such that at least a part is different between "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4". Includes what is. Therefore, the appropriate timing can be changed depending on which internal winning combination is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the stop operation.

In the present embodiment, when "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning combinations, it depends on the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, it is assumed that the "RT3 transition" or "chance role" is established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "RT3 transition" is established when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, and the "chance combination" is established when the stop operation is not performed in the correct push order. May be good. Further, the "RT3 transition" may be established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may be defined as a combination of symbols for which medals are paid out (for example, one medal is paid out).

"F_weak rare combination A" and "F_weak rare combination B" are won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined instead of the pushing order combination. One of the "chance roles" is established and one medal is paid out. As with "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4", the "chance role" may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. You may do so. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, when any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. There are cases where the "chance role" is displayed, and cases where either "F_weak rare role A" or "F_weak rare role B" is won and "chance role" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of the bonus combination duplication winning and the expectation of the transition to RT3 depending on the internal winning combination and the stop operation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are determined not as push order but as internal winning combination, "watermelon" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. One medal will be paid out. It should be noted that the “watermelon” may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When the "F_fixed combination" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, all the winning "special combination" are established (that is, regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation). , "S_Special Role 1", "C_Special Role 2" and "S_Special Role 3" are displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 15 medals are paid out. For example, even if the number of medals to be paid out for the "special role" is set to "15" and one of the winning "special roles" is established, 15 medals will be paid out. Good.

When the "F_special bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "crossdown bell" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, and eight medals are awarded. It will be paid out.

When the "F_upper common bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel (the "upper bell"), and eight medals are paid out.

When the "F_middle stage common bell" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol will be displayed in a straight line on the middle of each reel), and eight medals will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the "bell" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, the "bell" symbol is each reel. (It becomes the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line on the lower row), and 8 medals are paid out. For example, the internal winning combination of "F_lower common bell" is not provided, but the inside of this "F_lower common bell" It is also possible to provide a winning combination so that the winning combination can be won with a predetermined probability in a gaming state other than the bonus state.

"F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right / left bell 1" and "F_upper right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In the present embodiment, "F_upper stage" in which "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" (that is, the first stop on the left) are correct answers as the "upper stage bell" when the pressing order is correct. "Left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" and "F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" where "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" (that is, the first stop in the middle) are correct answers. "F_Upper right and left bell 1" and "F_Upper right and left bell 2" where "Batting order 5" is correct, and "F_Upper right middle bell 1" and "F_Upper right middle bell 1" where "Batting order 6" is correct. 2 ”and are provided. That is, it is stipulated that the correct push order is 4 (4 choices) out of the maximum 6 push orders (6 choices), but this is the correct push order in the push order small role. This is an example of the order, and the correct push order pattern (number of choices) is not limited to this.

For example, it may be specified that the correct push order is 6 ways (6 choices), or 3 ways (3 choices). In the case of 3 ways (3 choices), the left 1st stop ("Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2"), the middle 1st stop ("Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4"), and the right 1st stop ("Batting order 3") The internal winning combination related to the "upper bell" may be configured so that either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6") is in the correct batting order. The same applies to the internal winning combination related to the above-mentioned "RT0 transition lip" to "RT2 transition lip", the internal winning combination related to the "middle bell" and the internal winning combination related to the "lower bell" shown below. That is, in the push order combination, the correct push order pattern (number of choices) can be appropriately set, and the pattern (number of choices) is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

"F_middle left bell 1" and "F_middle left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle middle bell 1" and "F_middle middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right / left bell 1" and "F_middle right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right middle bell 1" and "F_middle right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower middle bell 1" and "F_lower middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right / left bell 1" and "F_lower right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right middle bell 1" and "F_lower right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In this embodiment, any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order. If not, whether or not the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation at the time of the third stop operation. Specifically, 1/2 of all the stop operation timings at the time of the third stop operation is set as an appropriate timing, and if the stop operation is performed at that timing, the winning ". When any of the "batting order combinations" is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/2 timing, the "RT1 transition" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and 8 medals. Medal will be paid out. Further, when any one of "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" is determined as an internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. Further, when any one of "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. ..

That is, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the push order small combination is no longer the push order combination (the push order combination does not matter). However, it is not always necessary to configure in this way, and even in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out if the batting order is correct as described above (“upper row”). "Bell", "middle bell" or "lower bell") is stopped and displayed, and if the push order is not the correct answer, one medal will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the omission may occur. In this case, even if the "RT1 transition" is displayed, the gaming state does not shift to the RT1 state, so the "RT1 transition" may not be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination or the small combination and the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination (including the case where the bonus combination is carried over), the replay combination or the small combination is more than the bonus combination. Although the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination is performed, the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination may be performed over the replay combination or the small combination.

Here, the reel stop control (method for determining the stop symbol position) in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the present embodiment, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (hereinafter, referred to as "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel is started (hereinafter, referred to as "stop start position").

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the reel display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

With reference to a stop table (not shown), the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel. In the present embodiment, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table (not shown) is referred to. And change the number of sliding pieces. Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the reel stop control of the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table (not shown). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces based on the priority, the number of sliding pieces is changed to the appropriate number. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the symbol combination that allows the stop display by the internal winning combination.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

[Hit request flag storage area and winning operation flag storage area]
First, with reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) will be described. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area (flag data storage area, winning flag data storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (winning flag data storage area) have the same configuration.

In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area is composed of the hit request storage areas 1 to 9 represented by 1 byte of data, and the winning operation flag storage area is represented by 1 byte of data. It is composed of storage areas 1 to 9. The data stored in each storage area of the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 25, but in FIG. 25, for convenience of explanation, each data is stored. "Combination" indicating the symbol combination of each reel associated with the bit of the storage area (in the figure, the symbol of the left reel 3L, the symbol of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol of the right reel 3R are described in this order), and the symbol thereof. The contents (see FIGS. 19 to 22) are also described.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the hit request flag storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has won the internal winning. Further, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the winning operation storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the display combination (winning operation flag) corresponding to the predetermined bit has won a prize. That is, when "1" is stored in the predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combinations corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the effective line.

The hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area include those in which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area, as described above. , One symbol combination (combination) may be assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area.

[Carryover storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the carry-over combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" or "F_BB4" is determined, the internal winning combination (BB combination) is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as a carry-over combination. .. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the winning request storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 2-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit in the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the operation of the bonus state or RT state corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game state is the BB1 state. Further, for example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2, it indicates that the game state is the RT3 state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The press order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores a 1-byte press order flag.

In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, middle, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each of the symbol code storage areas is composed of symbol code storage areas 1 to 9 represented by 1 byte of data. The symbol code storage area has the same configuration as the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25).

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination (winning operation flag) is stored in the symbol code storage areas 1 to 9.

[Relationship between internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number]
In the various game states related to the game playability described above, various data tables are referred to in various lottery by the main control circuit 90, but as a parameter used at this time, in this embodiment, not only the internal winning combination but also the internal winning combination is supported. Each parameter with a different name (hereinafter referred to as "lottery number") is also used. The lottery numbers are grouped by grouping the internal winning combinations that play the same role (whether the winning combination is a lottery target or the winning probability, etc.) in various lottery related to playability by the main control circuit 90 and assigning the same lottery number. It is information for making it identifiable. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17), and the lottery number. Since various data tables may be provided for each, the amount of data can be compressed, and it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the internal winning combination, each parameter (hereinafter, referred to as “winning combination number”) having another name for identifying the internal winning combination in the unit game of this time is also used on the sub-control circuit 200 side. The winning combination number is a grouping of at least a part of the internal winning combination according to the game state (more specifically, whether it is a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section). This is information for making the group recognizable by assigning the same winning combination number. As a result, in the present embodiment, unique information for identifying each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) is provided. Since it is not necessary to transmit to the sub-control circuit 200 side, the amount of data can be compressed, the control load can be reduced, and appropriate information can be transmitted according to the gaming state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number will be described. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing an example of the basic correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number.

As shown in FIG. 31, the internal winning combination ("No. 1" to "No. 38" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are simultaneously won (including the bonus combination) is The lottery number "13" is assigned to the shown internal winning combination), except for "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between the set values. Further, a lottery number "0" is assigned to "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2".

In the present embodiment, the non-advantageous section (“normal” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) and the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section (“advantageous” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) Although the lottery numbers are not different in the above, for example, when different lottery or processing is performed between "normal" and "advantageous", different lottery numbers can be assigned between "normal" and "advantageous". For example, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" are won, ART lottery is not performed and it is not decided to shift to the normal advantageous section, but in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, , "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" are also drawn in the same way as the internal winning combination including other bonus combinations. Therefore, in "normal", the lottery number is assigned as described above. , In "advantage", a common lottery number "13" may be assigned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, in the internal winning combination including the bonus combination, the winning combination numbers "28" to "41" are assigned according to the type of the winning combination and the type of the replay combination or the small winning combination. One of the winning combination numbers is assigned. As a result, on the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the type of the winning bonus combination and the type of the winning replay combination or small combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination shown by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and the "No." shown in FIG. 18 The lottery numbers of any of "0" to "12" are assigned to the internal winning combinations indicated by ".1" to "No. 7").

Here, for example, "F_RT0 medium replay 1" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6" and "F_RT2 medium" that win in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, which are game states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. The same lottery number "1" is assigned to "Replay 1" to "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3". Further, for example, in the RT state other than the RT5 state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 state, and "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4" which shifts from the non-advantageous section to the normal advantageous section. Is assigned the same lottery number "6".

Further, for example, the same lottery number "10" is assigned to "F_upper common bell" and "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" where the same "upper bell" may be displayed. The same lottery number "11" is assigned to "F_middle-tier common bell" and "F_middle-tier left bell 1" to "F_middle-tier right middle-tier bell 2" that are assigned and may display the same "middle-tier bell". The same lottery number "12" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2", which may display the same "lower bell".

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination shown by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and the "No." shown in FIG. 18 For the internal winning combination indicated by ".1" to "No. 7"), any winning combination number of "0" to "27" is assigned in "normal" or "advantageous", respectively.

Here, focusing on the winning combination numbers assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2", the same winning combination number "22" is assigned to each in "normal". On the other hand, in "advantage", the winning combination number "23" is assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2", and "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" are assigned. The difference is that the winning combination number "24" is assigned to "2", and the winning combination number "25" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2".

That is, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 35 described later), when these internal winning combinations are won, the “bell” symbols are lined up in the middle of each reel (“middle bell”). When the "bell" symbol is lined up on the upper row of each reel (when the "upper bell" is established), and when the "bell" symbol is lined up on the lower row of each reel ("lower bell") The number of medals paid out is the same in both cases, but the degree of continuation of the line battle state may fluctuate. Therefore, as described above, in the case of the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. , "F_Upper Left Bell 1"-"F_Upper Right Middle Bell 2", "F_Middle Left Bell 1"-"F_Middle Right Middle Bell 2", "F_Lower Middle Bell 1"-"F_Lower Right Middle Bell 1" By assigning different winning numbers to "Bell 2", there is a possibility that the "Bell" symbols will be lined up on any effective line before the stop display (before the stop operation) of the symbols on the sub-control circuit 200 side. In the line battle state, it is possible to perform an effect with a different degree of expectation based on the receipt of this winning combination number. An example of the effect in the line battle state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41 described later.

From the same viewpoint, for example, "F_upper lip", "F_middle lip 1" to "F_middle lip 3", and "F_lower lip" are assigned the same winning combination number in "normal". , In "advantage", different winning combination numbers may be assigned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 sets the winning combination number as the information regarding the internal winning combination in the communication parameter of the start command, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200, which will be described later. Information corresponding to navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) is set in the communication parameter of the start command (or may be another command) and transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. However, the mode in which the sub-control circuit 200 side transmits information that can recognize the internal winning combination or navigation data is not limited to this.

For example, for "F_RT0 medium replay 1" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT1 medium replay 1" to "F_RT1 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT2 medium replay 1" to "F_RT2 medium replay 3", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. That is, regarding the push order replay, in each game state (advantageous section) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination, which is advantageous to the player. In each gaming state (non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation cannot be notified, the winning combination number may be transmitted as information that the internal winning combination cannot be specified.

This also applies to the push order small role. In this case, the same winning combination number may be assigned in the non-advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers may be assigned in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. Then, regarding the assignment of the winning combination number in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, for example, which effective line the symbol of "bell" may be displayed on, and the type of stop operation advantageous to the player The winning combination number may be further subdivided and assigned so that both can be identified.

In this way, for example, in each game state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified for the push order small combination and the push order replay, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination. In each game state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified, if the winning combination number is transmitted as information that the internal winning combination cannot be specified, the navigation data described later (FIG. 45 described later). It may not be necessary to transmit the information corresponding to (see) to the sub-control circuit 200. In this case, it is possible to omit the process of transmitting the information corresponding to the navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) to the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later, and it is possible to reduce the control load.

In addition, in FIG. 32, as an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number, it is explained that the presence or absence of the winning combination (carry-over) of the bonus combination is not considered, but the bonus combination is carried over. The correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number may be changed depending on whether or not the winning combination is used. For example, in the inter-flag state, various lottery related to game playability is basically not performed. Therefore, in the inter-flag state, all the lottery numbers may be assigned to "0".

<Playability in non-advantageous section (normal state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section (normal state) will be described. Note that FIG. 33 shows an outline of the gaming state that is transitioned when each internal winning combination shown in the figure is won in the normal state.

(At the time of winning the role of weak rare)
If a weak rare role ("F_weak rare role A" and "F_weak rare role B") is won in a non-advantageous section and a bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 has a high probability of 1 in the game state. Along with shifting to the state (normal advantageous section), the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, during at least nine games from the next game, the state is controlled to a high accuracy 1 state from the next game.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state. , The main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the high accuracy 2 state (normal advantageous section), and sets the "9" game in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, it is controlled to the high accuracy 2 state from the next game to at least 9 games.

At this time, as a result of the player's stop operation, the "RT3 transition" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, and the "RT3 transition" is not displayed and the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state ( That is, there is a case where the RT state other than the RT3 state continues). In each case, there is no change in shifting to the high accuracy 2 state, but it is advantageous for the player that the RT state is the RT3 state. This point will be described in detail later.

The chance item is an internal winning combination that can be won in duplicate with the bonus combination, but if the winning combination is duplicated in the bonus combination, the processing related to the bonus combination (see "Bonus combination winning time" described later). ) Is prioritized, so the control to shift to the high accuracy 2 state is not performed.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. Specifically, for example, with a probability of 8/256, it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section (that is, the ART winning is determined), 248 /. With a probability of 256, it is usually decided to shift to the high probability 3 state of the advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (that is, to determine the ART non-winning). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section.

In both cases when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-win is determined, the main CPU 101 determines the game period (precursor period) of the normally advantageous section to be transferred based on the watermelon 1 winning. Lottery is done. Specifically, for example, the precursor period of any one of the precursor period "9" to "16" games is determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the precursor period "9" game is determined, the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section, and when the precursor period "16" game is determined, the game period of the normal advantageous section is determined. The "16" game is set in. In this case, the number of games may be determined with different probabilities depending on whether the transition destination is the present precursor state or the high-accuracy 3 state. For example, in the case of shifting to the present precursor state, the lottery probability can be set so that a relatively long precursor period can be easily determined as compared with the case of shifting to the high probability 3 state.

In this way, when the watermelon 1 is won, if the ART winning is determined, it is controlled to the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section during at least the number of games determined by the precursor period lottery from the next game, and the present precursor state. After the end of, it is controlled to the ending preparation state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 34 described later). Further, if the ART non-winning is determined, it is controlled to the high accuracy 3 state of the normal advantageous section during at least the number of games determined by the lottery during the precursory period from the next game.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. If "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities among the set values, is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery is not performed. That is, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the state between the flags of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is reached without shifting to each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. After that, the non-advantageous section (normal state) becomes a bonus state, and when the bonus state ends, the non-advantageous section (normal state) returns to the bonus non-winning state.

In the ART lottery at the time of winning the bonus role, specifically, for example, with a probability of 64/256, after the end of the bonus state, the player shifts to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section. Determine (ie, determine the ART win) and, with a probability of 192/256, decide to shift to the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (ie, determine the ART non-win). To do). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the ending preparation state of the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

In both cases when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 first shifts the gaming state to the high-accuracy 4 state (normally advantageous section). As a result, it is controlled to the high accuracy 4 state from the next game. The period during which the high-accuracy 4 state continues in the inter-flag state may be until the transition from the inter-flag state to the bonus state (until the carried-over bonus combination is established), or after the high-accuracy 4 state is established. It may be between "9" games (that is, the same as in the high accuracy 1 state and the high accuracy 2 state). Further, when the ART winning is determined, the inter-flag state may be shifted to the present precursor state (normally advantageous section) instead of the high accuracy 4 state. Further, in the inter-flag state, since various lottery as the high-accuracy 4 state is not actually performed, this inter-flag state is usually an advantageous section, but the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 state and this precursor It may be defined as a state different from the state (for example, "normal advantageous state between flags"), and when a bonus combination is won, the state may be shifted to the normal advantageous state between flags (normal advantageous section).

Then, after the bonus state is reached, when the bonus state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section if the ART winning is determined, and if the ART non-winning is determined. , The high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued, and the "32" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high accuracy 4 state is controlled for at least 32 games after the end of the bonus.

<Playability during normal advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 34 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, the high accuracy 1 state that is transferred based on winning the weak rare role, and the high accuracy that is transferred based on winning the chance. It has been decided to shift to 2 states, 3 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the watermelon 1, 4 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the bonus combination, and an advantageous section (ART). Has this precursory state.

First, the main CPU 101 is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) or the bonus state, and is in the bonus non-winning state and is in the present precursor state (that is, when it has already been determined to shift to the advantageous section). ), The ART transition possible state lottery is performed for each unit game. In this ART shiftable state lottery, it is determined whether or not the player is in a state (ART shiftable state) in which it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when the bonus combination is won in the normal advantageous section. In this ART transitionable state lottery, if it is decided to be in the ART transitionable state (if the ART transitionable state lottery is won) and the bonus combination is won, it is based on the bonus combination. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, and it is not decided to make it into the ART transitionable state (when the ART transitionable state lottery is not won), when the bonus combination is won Is determined not to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and to continue the normal advantageous section (more specifically, the high probability 4 state).

In the ART transitionable state lottery, specifically, for example, in the case of the high accuracy 1 state and the high accuracy 2 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 64/256 (the ART transitionable state is won). , 192/256, the ART transitionable state is not set (the ART transitionable state is not won). Further, for example, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state and the high accuracy 4 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 128/256 (winning the ART transitionable state), and the ART transition is performed with a probability of 128/256. Do not set the possible state (not win the ART transitionable state). The winning probability of the ART transitionable state is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the winning probability to increase in the order of high accuracy 1 state, high accuracy 2 state, high accuracy 3 state, and high accuracy 4 state, or simply so that the winning probability differs in each gaming state. It can also be set to.

In addition, the ART transitionable state lottery is performed for each unit game, but once the ART transitionable state is set in the normal advantageous section, the lottery is performed until the normal advantageous section ends. It is also possible to maintain the ART transitional state. In this case, once the ART shiftable state is set, it is not necessary to perform the ART shiftable state lottery until the end of the normal advantageous section thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of performing each unit game, at the start of the unit game, before determining whether or not the bonus combination has been won, first, whether or not the unit game is in the ART transitionable state is determined. The lottery may be performed, and then it may be determined whether or not the bonus combination has been won in the unit game.

Further, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities among the set values is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. However, in the normal advantageous section, even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, if it is in the ART transitionable state, it is based on the bonus combination. It is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs control processing such as transition between states. In this inter-state transition control process, the transition control of each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the game period of the normal advantageous section is reset according to a predetermined condition. Do. The contents of the control process such as transition between states will be described in detail below.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4") is won when it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won. If the current state is the high accuracy 1 state or the high accuracy 2 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the main CPU 101 sets the high accuracy 2 state and plays the "9" game during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. For example, if a player wins a chance when playing five games in a high-accuracy 1 state (9 games), the "9" game is reset, which is substantially a normal advantageous section. The game period will be extended by 5 games.

Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 3 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the "9" game is reset during the game period of the normal advantageous section. In addition, if the current state is the high accuracy 4 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the number of remaining games in the game period of the current normal advantageous section is 8 games or less, the game period of the normal advantageous section is changed to " 9 ”Reset the game. That is, the game period of the normal advantageous section is appropriately extended based on the winning of the chance.

In the above, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset even if the player wins the chance. In the RT3 state, the winning probability of the replay combination that is advantageous to the player is set. Although it is a game state that has been played, it is basically a game state that lasts only for 8 games, and as will be described later, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, as in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed without limitation, the end of the normal advantageous section and the end of the RT3 state are linked, and the player's expectation for the bonus winning combination even in the RT3 state. This is so as not to impair the feeling.

However, when the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is set so that the end of the normal advantageous section is always one game later than the end of the RT3 state. That is, the game period of the normally advantageous section is set to be at least longer than the game period (8 games) in the RT3 state. In the present embodiment, the lighting of the status indicator is started when the normal advantageous section is started, and when the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section, the lighting is continued, while the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section. If not, the lighting usually ends when the advantageous section ends.

Therefore, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, when the same expectation effect (the effect of making the player expect the bonus winning combination or the ART winning) is performed, the normal advantageous section and RT3 If the game ends in the same state as the state, the state indicator may end lighting during the execution of the expectation effect. In this case, the player will be recognized as non-winning before the result is finally notified by the expectation effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section and the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same expectation effect is executed for eight games, and the expectation effect is finally achieved in the eighth game. Although we are trying to notify the correctness of the game, we usually continue the advantageous section for one game after that so that the game can not be recognized depending on the lighting mode of the status indicator, and the player's interest is maintained. Is possible.

Further, in the normal advantageous section, even when the RT3 state ends, the remaining period (for example, between one game) is still the normal advantageous section, so that it is usually advantageous depending on the type of the internal winning combination here. Since the section may be extended, for example, even if it is notified that the bonus role has not been won in the expectation production, the player usually wishes to extend the advantageous section and continues the game. I think. In this sense as well, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player.

The expected feeling effect that can be executed may be, for example, a continuous effect by the image displayed on the display device 11, or a continuous effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). There may be. Further, it is not always necessary to be a continuous production, and any production may be used as long as it is performed to raise the expectation of the player. For example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the predetermined number of times (for example, the eighth game) of the game in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the success or failure may be notified. In this case, the number of games in which the predetermined number of games is played may be arbitrarily determined within a range not exceeding 8 games, or by lottery.

Further, regardless of the RT state, the above-mentioned anticipation effect may be performed in the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, the period during which the expectation effect can be executed may be the same as the RT3 state or the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, or may be executed over a longer period.

In addition, when the current state is the present precursor state and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state (that is, when the "RT3 transition" is displayed), the "8" game is played during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. In this case, when the normal advantageous section ends, the section shifts to the advantageous section. Therefore, by completely linking the end of the RT3 state and the end of the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player (without leaving the normal advantageous section) Priority is given to the transition to. Further, in this case, if the above-mentioned expectation effect has already been performed, the expectation effect may be performed as it is until the end, or a new expectation effect may be performed again for eight games. You may be asked. Further, the expectation effect may be extended based on the shift of the RT state to the RT3 state.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 ("F_watermelon 1") is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 must be in the present precursor state (that is, the ART winning state has not been determined yet). B), ART lottery will be conducted in the same way as for non-advantageous sections.

Then, if the current state is one of the high accuracy 1 to high accuracy 3 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART non-winning state, the main CPU 101 sets the high accuracy 3 state. Normally, the game period of the advantageous section is not reset. In addition, if the current state is one of the high accuracy 1 to high accuracy 4 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART is won, this precursor state is set and the number of remaining games in the RT3 state is set. Reset the number of games in the normal advantageous section to the game period.

If the current state is the high accuracy 1 or high accuracy 2 state, the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the ART non-winning state, the high accuracy 3 state is set, and the above-mentioned precursor period lottery is performed again. Determine the game period of the normally advantageous section to be set. In addition, if the current state is one of the high accuracy 1 to high accuracy 4 states, and the RT state is not the RT3 state but the ART winning state, this precursor state is set, and the high accuracy 1 state and high accuracy state are set. In the case of 2 states or 4 high-accuracy states, the above-mentioned precursor period lottery is performed again to determine the game period of the normally advantageous section to be reset. In addition, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 has the current normal advantageous section ART. If it is not in the transitionable state, the high accuracy 4 state is set, and the "32" game is reset in the game period of the normal advantageous section in the high accuracy 4 state after the end of the bonus state. If the current normal advantageous section is in the ART transitionable state, the present precursor state is set, and the "0" game is reset to the game period of the normal advantageous section in the present precursor state after the end of the bonus state (that is,). Immediately after the end of the bonus state, shift to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section).

When the push order small winning combination is won in the normal advantageous section, the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state, the main CPU 101 notifies the pushing order of the pushing order small winning combination. Specifically, on the instruction monitor, a numerical value corresponding to the navigation data is displayed, and a command including information corresponding to the navigation data is transmitted so that the push order notification can be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Here, in the present embodiment, if the RT state is the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won, while the RT state is the RT3 until the end of the normal advantageous section. Except for the state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once during the normal advantageous section. When the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the upper limit of the push order notification is not limited to one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be "twice" or "three times".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won until the end of the normal advantageous section. For example, the RT state is the RT state. After 8 games have been digested in the RT3 state, the RT3 state ends, but the normal advantageous section may continue. In this case, once the RT3 state is reached, the push order notification of the push order small combination may be continued until the end of the normal advantageous section even after the end of the RT3 state, or the RT3 state may be continued. The push order notification of the push order small winning combination may be ended in conjunction with the end of, and only the normal advantageous section may be continued. That is, it is also possible to perform push order notification only during the period when the RT state is the RT3 state.

Further, for example, when the RT state is not the RT3 state, the transition to the normal advantageous section may occur, and the RT state may become the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section. In this case, if the push order notification has already been performed once, the upper limit number of times may be valid even in the subsequent RT3 state so that the push order notification is not performed, or the upper limit number of times in the subsequent RT3 state. May be disabled so that the push order notification is performed. Further, in this case, if the push order notification has not been performed even once, the push order notification may be performed only once by validating the upper limit number of times even in the subsequent RT3 state. In the RT3 state of, the upper limit number of times may be invalidated so that the push order notification is performed. The same applies when the RT state shifts to the normal advantageous section when the RT state is not the RT5 state, and the RT state becomes the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section.

Assuming that the upper limit of the push order notification is once when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the RT state becomes the RT3 state or when the push order notification is performed twice or more in the normal advantageous section. It is confirmed that the state is RT5. In the present embodiment, since the chance eye can be won in duplicate with the bonus combination, for example, in the non-advantageous section, the chance eye is won and the RT3 transition is not displayed and the normal advantageous section is entered. If this is the case, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination has been won (that is, whether or not the RT5 state is the inter-flag state) when the first push order notification is performed. When the second push order notification is performed, it is confirmed that the player is not in the RT3 state, and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the bonus combination has been won.

On the other hand, for example, when the RT3 transition is displayed and the transition is to the normal advantageous section, whether or not the bonus combination is won in the number of push order notifications (that is, whether the RT5 state is the inter-flag state). Whether or not) is difficult to recognize, and for example, it is possible to recognize that the bonus role is won by the final production content of the above-mentioned expectation effect.

That is, the RT3 state has a high probability of winning the replay combination, and is, for example, a gaming state in which the RT state does not change even if the RT1 transition or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, and if it is a normal advantageous section, the number of times is increased. Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed without limit, it is possible to advance the game in the normal advantageous section more advantageously than playing the game in the normal advantageous section in other RT states, but on the other hand, it is normal. In the advantageous section, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the player has won the bonus role.

In the present embodiment, when a bonus combination is won during an advantageous section and a bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, information (pushing order) of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified in the bonus state. On the other hand, if the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed in the bonus state. Information (pushing order) is not notified. This is the same even when the bonus combination is won when the ART transition is possible in the normal advantageous section. In this case, although the section shifts to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, the information (pushing order) of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified during the bonus state. The specific content of the push order notification will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 24, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, unlike the bonus non-winning state, the "upper bell" and the "middle stage" are irrespective of the stop operation order. "Bell" or "lower bell" is established and eight medals are paid out, but even on this premise, the normal advantageous section ends in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantageous section. Until, the push order notification similar to the bonus non-winning state is made. That is, in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, when the push order combination is won, the same push order notification as in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section is sent regardless of whether or not the profit actually given by the push order fluctuates. It is supposed to be done. As described above, this is done from the viewpoint of making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player has won the bonus role, and trying to maintain the expectation.

As described above, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, the number of medals to be paid out can be changed according to the stop operation order as in the bonus non-winning state. In this case, in the normal inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the advantageous section, there is a high possibility that the profit given by the push order notification will increase, so is the bonus combination won? Not only can you raise the expectation of whether or not, but you can also raise the expectation of the benefits to be granted.

Further, when it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won, the main CPU 101 updates the game period of the normal advantageous section for each unit game. Specifically, the number of games played during the normal advantageous section is subtracted by "1", and then whether or not the normal advantageous section game period is exhausted (that is, whether the subtraction result is "0"). To judge. In updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, the number of games is added by "1" for each unit game, and then whether or not the addition result reaches the number of games of the game period of the normal advantageous section. It may be determined whether or not the game period of the normally advantageous section has been exhausted by the determination of.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the game period of the normal advantageous section has not been digested (“period undigested” in FIG. 34), the normal advantageous section is continued and the bonus of the normal advantageous section is not won. The game in the state will be repeated.

In addition, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period digestion ART non-winning" ”), The normal advantageous section is terminated and the non-advantageous section is shifted to the bonus non-winning state.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, even if the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed even once in the normal advantageous section ( That is, if the push order small combination is not won), the normal advantageous section may be continued until the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed once. In this way, it is possible not only to guarantee that the player obtains the minimum profit in the usually advantageous section, but also, for example, before the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed. , If it becomes possible to shift to ART and win a bonus role, it will be possible to shift to an advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, so that the gameplay will be more diverse and the interest of the game will be improved. Can be done.

In addition, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the "digestion line battle win"), the normal advantageous section is terminated and the state is shifted to the line battle preparation state (bonus non-win state) of the advantageous section. In addition, since the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the line battle state of the advantageous section, the line battle preparation state is shifted as a preparation period until the transition to the RT2 state. However, if the RT2 state is accidentally reached when the advantageous section ends, the line battle state may be directly shifted to the line battle state without going through the line battle preparation state. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If (or, if the RT3 state has been completed and the RT0 state has been entered), the line battle ready state may be directly shifted to the line battle state.

In addition, as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted and it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the digestion ending 1 winning state), the normal advantageous section is ended, and the ending preparation state (bonus non-winning state) of the advantageous section is shifted. In addition, when the advantageous section usually ends, the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section, until the transition to the RT2 state is performed. As a preparation period, we try to shift to the ending preparation state, but if it happens to be in the RT2 state at the end of the advantageous section, we will shift directly to the ending 1 state without going through the ending preparation state. You may. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If (or if the RT3 state has been completed and the RT0 state has been entered), the ending 1 state may be directly shifted without going through the ending preparation state.

<Summary of playability in non-advantageous sections and normal advantageous sections>
In the following, the main parts of the playability in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section (including some of the playability in the advantageous section) will be briefly described.

(1) The "chance eye" can be determined as an internal winning role at the same time as a bonus role.
(2) When the "chance eye" is won, the RT state becomes the RT5 state if the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination at the same time. In this case, if it is a non-advantageous section, it shifts to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high probability 4 state" or "normal advantageous state between flags").
(3) When the "chance eye" is won, the "RT3 transition" is displayed based on the fact that the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination at the same time and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. If so, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. In this case, regardless of whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed, if it is a non-advantageous section, it is shifted to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 2 state").
(4) The normal advantageous section (for example, "high probability 2 state") that has been transferred by winning the "chance eye" is at least a longer period (for example, 9 games) than the period during which the RT3 state continues (for example, between 8 games). (Between games), it is possible to continue.

(5) Win a bonus combination in a non-advantageous section, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is decided, shift to the advantageous section (for example, "line battle ready state").
(6) When a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is not determined (if the ART non-winning is determined), a specific period (for example, if the ART non-winning is determined) (Between 32 games), shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 4 state").
(7) If a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section, and if the bonus combination is a bonus combination having the same winning probability among a plurality of set values, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART). However, in the case of a bonus combination in which the winning probabilities differ among a plurality of set values, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).
(8) When a bonus combination is won in a normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is a bonus combination having the same winning probability among a plurality of set values, and a bonus combination having a different winning probability among a plurality of set values. In any case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).

(9) When the RT state is the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the end of the normal advantageous section.
(10) When the RT state is the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the end of the normal advantageous section.
(11) In the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is not the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed only a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
(12) When the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, but when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. , In the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the push order notification of the push order small combination is not performed regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to control the normal advantageous section for at least 9 games, and when the ART winning combination is determined, the advantageous section. It is possible to shift the RT state to the RT3 state when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, and when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state is changed to RT5. It is possible to change to a state. In addition, it is possible to determine the "chance eye" and the bonus role as the internal winning role at the same time. Then, in the case of the RT3 state and the RT5 state, which are usually advantageous sections, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified about the push order small winning combination.

As a result, in the normal advantageous section, the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded increases as compared with the non-advantageous section, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the bonus state also increases, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the normally advantageous section can be continued (9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the RT3 state can be continued (8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player regardless of whether or not the specific game state (RT3 state) ends, and thus further improve the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "chance eye" is the case where the "RT3 transition" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, an appropriate timing) and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of an internal winning combination in which "RT3 transition" is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player is advantageous for the push order small combination until the normal advantageous section ends. When the procedure of the stop operation is notified and it is not in the RT3 state and the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Is to be notified.

As a result, when the "chance eye" is won, the degree of advantage and the content of the normal advantageous section are determined by whether or not the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed. Since it can be changed, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state based on the winning bonus combination in the non-advantageous section ends, if the ART winning is determined, the game is shifted to the advantageous section, and if the ART winning is not determined. Is designed to shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, high accuracy 4 state) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game is in any of the normally advantageous sections, either a bonus combination having the same winning probability among the plurality of set values or a bonus combination having a different winning probability among the plurality of set values. Even if you win the prize, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, but if it is a non-advantageous section, it is advantageous if you win a bonus combination with different winning probabilities among multiple set values. It is not decided whether or not to shift to the section.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (game section) can be made more diverse depending on the game state and its type when the bonus combination is won, so that the interest regarding the transition of the state that is more advantageous to the player Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the push order small combination, and the push order is small even when the bonus state is controlled in the advantageous section. It is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the combination, but if the bonus state is controlled in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is performed. It is not possible to notify.

As a result, it is possible to provide a normal advantageous section, which is a game section in which the degree of expectation for shifting to the advantageous section is increased and the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded is also increased, so that the transition to the advantageous state for the player is related. It is possible to improve the interest, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is excessively fueled. It is also possible to suppress being struck.

<Playability during line battle>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41, the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 35 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section. Further, FIG. 36 shows an example of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102, which are various tables referred to at least in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state in the advantageous section. Further, FIGS. 37 to 41 show a display example of the display device 11 in order to explain an mode in which the degree of continuation of whether or not the line battle state is continued varies. In the present embodiment, the line battle state has an interval state, a battle state, and a continuous lottery state. Further, in the present embodiment, the line battle state is basically a gaming state that is transferred via the line battle preparation state.

(Preparing for line battle)
In the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, when the ART winning is determined based on winning the bonus combination, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. .. In addition, in the line battle ready state and the line battle state of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, the line battle ready state is shifted (that is, the line battle state is restored). ). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the line battle ready state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the RT3 state is entered, the line battle preparation state may be terminated and the line battle state may be entered.

Further, as described above, for example, in a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section, when an ART lottery is performed based on winning a specific combination other than a bonus combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), the winning result. When it is possible to decide to shift to the line battle state, when the normal advantageous section ends, the line battle ready state is shifted. Also in this case, the line battle preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

However, for example, when the RT state is the RT0 state, the stop operation is performed without following the push order notification, even though the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is performed. As a result, when "RT1 transition" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the line battle state may be shifted even if the RT state is not the RT2 state. .. The same applies to the right acquisition lottery preparation state and the ending preparation state. That is, when a push order error occurs in each preparation state, the game state may be shifted to the corresponding gaming state even if the RT state is not the RT2 state.

In the line battle preparation state, an enemy selection table lottery, an ally selection table lottery, and an ally acquisition lottery are performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the line battle preparation state. Further, it is possible to make the lottery related to these game characteristics also performed in each game state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, when the normal advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery result in the normal advantageous section is reflected in the line battle state, and when the normal advantageous section does not shift to the advantageous section, the lottery in the normal advantageous section is reflected. The result may be discarded (cleared).

In the enemy selection table lottery, an enemy selection table for selecting information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the enemy selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36A, and selects one of the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Here, the number of times the enemy is defeated is the number of times the enemy HP becomes "0" in the battle state described later and is transferred to the right acquisition state, and the number of times the line battle state is determined to continue in the continuous lottery state described later. As the cumulative number of times (that is, the number of times the line battle state has continued), the number of times stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103 is shown.

In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, each information is assigned so that the continuation degree of the line battle state can be changed according to the number of times the enemy is defeated. In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, "low" indicates that the player's degree of advantage with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state is relatively low, and "medium" indicates the degree of continuation of the line battle state. Indicates that the player's degree of advantage is medium, and "high" indicates that the player's degree of advantage is high with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In this embodiment, as information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled, "A" (enemy character A), "B" (enemy character B), "C" (enemy character C), and "D" ( Enemy character D) is set, and one of them is determined in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the degree of expectation that the line battle state will continue in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D" is gradually increased. That is, the degree of advantage of the player is gradually increased in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D".

Then, in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "low", the enemy character (for example, "A") having a relatively low degree of advantage of the player is determined. Enemy characters that are easy to play and have a relatively high degree of advantage for the player (for example, "D") are difficult to determine, and if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "high", the player's An enemy character with a relatively low degree of advantage (for example, "A") is difficult to determine, and an enemy character with a relatively high degree of advantage of a player (for example, "D") is easily determined. If the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "medium", the probability is between them. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally selection table lottery, the ally selection table for selecting the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the ally selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36B, and selects any of the ally selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Since the number of times the enemy has been defeated has already been explained, the explanation here will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously, "1" (friend character 1), "2" (friend character 2), "3" (friend character 3), and "4" "(Friend character 4) is set, and it is determined whether or not one or more ally characters are given in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the higher the number of assigned ally characters, the higher the expectation that the line battle state will continue. That is, the greater the number of ally characters given, the higher the degree of advantage of the player.

Then, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle described later, if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "extremely low", the ally character is rarely given, and the information indicated by the determined ally selection table. If is "low", it is difficult to assign a ally character, and even if it is assigned, it is one, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "medium", the ally character is likely to be assigned. However, it is difficult to assign a plurality of ally characters, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "high", the ally character is likely to be assigned and a plurality of ally characters are likely to be assigned. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally acquisition lottery, it is determined in advance whether or not to grant the right to acquire the ally character, in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Whether or not the main CPU 101 acquires a ally character with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) based on winning a specific role (for example, "chance eye" or "watermelon 1"). decide. The table referred to in the ally acquisition lottery is not shown.

Here, if it is decided to grant the right as a result of the ally acquisition lottery, the number of the ally character that was not given as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle described later at the time of entering the battle state is the most. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. That is, in the battle rush ally type lottery described later, it is determined whether or not the ally character is given including the specific ally character type, whereas in the ally acquisition lottery, at least one of the ally characters is given. It is decided whether or not to decide.

In addition, the right decided to be granted as a result of the ally acquisition lottery basically disappears when the subsequent battle state ends, and in order to obtain the right again, it is necessary to win the ally acquisition lottery again. .. In this sense, the right may be said to be a "limited right" different from the "permanent right" described later.

(Interval state)
As described above, when the line battle preparation state is completed, the main CPU 101 first shifts to the interval state at the start of the line battle state. The interval state is a state in which it continues for three games, and when the game period in the interval state elapses three games, it shifts to the battle state. In the interval state, the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery is performed.

When the interval state ends, the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle and the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle are performed.

In the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the enemy selection table (any of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned enemy selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("low" ~ Any of "high") is referred to, and information (any of "A" to "D") corresponding to the enemy character to be battled is determined. In addition, the table referred to in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

In the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the ally selection table (any of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned ally selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("extremely low"" ~ (Any of "high") is referred to, and the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle in an advantageous manner is determined. In addition, in the lottery by ally type at the time of entering the battle, for example, "1" wins, "2" wins, "3" wins, "4" wins, "1.2" While it can be decided that multiple ally characters will be granted, such as "winning", ... "winning" 1 to 4 ", etc., as a permanent right (or limited right) described later," When "1" is given and "winning for" 1 "" is determined, the lottery result is discarded (not reflected). Also, in this case, if "winning for" 1 and 2 "" is decided, only the part of "winning for" 1 "" is discarded (not reflected), and "winning for" 2 "". The part of is reflected. Therefore, if no other right is granted in the ally acquisition lottery, the ally characters in this case are "1" and "2". In addition, the table referred to in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

Also, when the interval state ends, the initial value "32" is set for the enemy HP and the ally HP. Then, the enemy type is set according to the result of the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, and as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, the existence of the limited right granted based on the result of the ally acquisition lottery, and the permanence described later. The ally type is set according to the presence or absence of the permanent right granted based on the result of the right acquisition lottery.

(Battle state)
As described above, when the interval state ends, the main CPU 101 then shifts to the battle state during the line battle state. The battle state is a state that continues for at least 31 games, during which time if the ally side attacks, the enemy HP decreases by the damage of the attack, and if the enemy side attacks, the damage of the attack ally It has the playability of reducing HP. Then, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less before the end of the battle state, the game shifts to the right acquisition lottery state, and if the enemy HP does not become "0" or less before the end of the battle state. , Shift to the continuous lottery state described later.

In the battle state, when the "weak rare role" or the "chance eye" is won, the winning game is not included in the count target of the game period in the battle state. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of times the "weak rare role" or "chance eye" is won. Also, in the battle state, if the "chance eye" is won and the "RT3 transition eye" is displayed and the RT state becomes the RT3 state, the game period of the battle state is counted during the eight games in the RT3 state. Is not included in. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of games in which the RT3 state continues.

In the battle state, a counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the counter, a defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, and a damage lottery at the time of hitting rip can be performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the battle state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the relationship between the lottery related to various playability performed in the battle state and the information corresponding to the ally character will be described.

FIG. 37 shows the case where there is no ally in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when none of “1” to “4” is given as the information corresponding to the ally character). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device 11.

First, the display device 11 displays the current "status" of the player's own self-character ("self" in FIGS. 37 to 41) corresponding to the player himself / herself as the basic display content during the battle state. At the same time, the enemy character on the enemy side determined as a result of the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle described above (“enemy A” in FIGS. 37 to 41. In this case, it is assumed that the enemy type “A” is selected). Shows the current "status" of.

The status is information corresponding to the remaining numerical range of the ally HP and the enemy HP set at the time of entering the battle state, and in this embodiment, the remaining numerical range is "32 to" for each of the ally HP and the enemy HP. When the status is "25", the status "normal" is set, and when the remaining numerical range is "24 to 17", the status "small damage" is set, and when the remaining numerical range is "16 to 9". , When the status "Medium damage" is set and the remaining numerical range is "8 to 1", the status "Wreck" is set and when the remaining numerical range is "0" or less, the status "Destroy" Is set. In addition, the status "defeat" may be set for the enemy HP, but the status "defeat" may not be set for the ally HP, and when the remaining numerical range of the ally HP is "1" or less, The ally HP is fixed at "1" and is not subtracted below it.

Then, the display device 11 displays "Middle line attack effective" when there is no ally. This is related to the change in the degree of continuation of the line battle state only in the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) when none of the ally characters “1” to “4” is assigned in the battle state. It means that it functions as a judgment line.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of no ally, when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is determined. When it is done), it becomes an attack on the ally side, and while the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". (The internal winning combination that can be displayed is not determined), and if you win the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), it will be an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later will not be performed, and the shot rip described later will not be performed. When damage is drawn, lottery is done.

FIG. 38 shows the display device 11 in the case of acquiring the ally "1" (that is, when "1" is given as the information corresponding to the ally character) in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of. Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

When the ally "1" is acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective" and "upper line attack effective". This is because when the ally character "1" is assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) are line battles. It means that it functions as a judgment line regarding fluctuations in the degree of continuation of the state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring the ally "1", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed as an internal winning. When the combination is determined) and when the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is determined) Will be an attack on the ally side, and while the damage lottery described later will be performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" will not be displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" may be displayed. The internal winning combination is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and " When it hits the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), it becomes an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery at the time of the shot rip described later is performed.

In FIG. 39, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), when allies "1" and "2" are acquired (that is, "1" and "2" are given as information corresponding to the ally characters. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

When the allies "1" and "2" are acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", and "lower line attack effective". This means that when the ally characters "1" and "2" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) mean that the line battle state functions as a determination line regarding a change in the degree of continuation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed. When the internal winning combination that can be played is determined), when the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "upper lip" or "upper bell" is determined. When the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is determined), the ally side While the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display "middle rip" or "middle bell" is determined. (Not), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower lip" Or, when the "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower bell" or the "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined) and the "hit lip" ("F_hit lip") is won. Is an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery described later at the time of hitting rip is performed.

In FIG. 40, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), when allies "1" to "3" are acquired (that is, "1" to "3" are given as information corresponding to the ally characters. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

When allies "1" to "3" are acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", and "counter available". This means that when the ally characters "1" to "3" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit lip” (“F_hit lip”) is hit. It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting and the damage lottery at the time of the counter, which will be described later, can be performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "3", in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later are performed. Is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above The "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" Is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "lower rip" or "lower bell" is not determined), and when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is won, the hit rip described later Before the time damage lottery is performed, a counter attack is performed at the time of hitting to decide whether or not to activate the counter attack, and if this is won, it will be an attack on the ally side, and the counter time damage lottery described later will be performed. Is performed, and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, is not performed.

In FIG. 41, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), when allies "1" to "4" are acquired (that is, "1" to "4" are added as information corresponding to the ally characters. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", "counter available", and "defense available" when allies "1" to "4" are acquired. are doing. This means that when allies characters "1" to "4" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit lip” (“F_hit lip”) is hit. It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter can be performed, and even if the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is not won, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip described later can be performed. ing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "4", in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later, the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip described later, and the impact described below. The mode in which the counter lottery at the time of rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter are performed is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". The internal winning combination that can display "" is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display "upper lip" or "upper bell" is determined. (Not), the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the "hit lip" (" In the case of winning "F_Bombed Lip"), a counter lottery at the time of hitting rip is performed to determine whether or not to activate a counter attack before the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is performed, and this is won. If you do not do so, a defensive lottery will be performed at the time of hitting rip, and if you win this, it will be an attack on the enemy side, but the defense will be successful and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip will not be performed. ..

In the present embodiment, the damage lottery described later is performed only when the "replay" symbol and the "bell" symbol are actually aligned with the line set as the determination line. For example, the push order small winning combination If the "bell" symbols are not actually aligned due to a player's push order error even though the push order notification has been made, the damage lottery described later may not be performed. , If the internal winning combination that the "replay" symbol or "bell" symbol can be aligned (can be displayed) is determined on the line set as the judgment line, the "replay" symbol or "bell" is actually determined. The damage lottery described later may be performed regardless of whether or not the symbols of "" are aligned. Any of these methods can be adopted. When the latter method is adopted, the "judgment line" is no longer the line where the "judgment" itself is actually performed, but it has the meaning of making it possible to notify the player, for example, that the damage lottery will be performed. As it becomes a thing, it still has an important meaning for the player.

Further, in FIGS. 37 to 41, an example in which the ally characters "1" to "4" increase in order is described. However, depending on the result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, for example, " It may be given only "2", only "3", only "4", or "2" and "3", "3" and "4". Therefore, in the following, the functions of the information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character will be briefly described again.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) is in a line battle state in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41). It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the bottom line ("DL3" in FIGS. 39 to 41) is in a line battle state in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41). It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of.

When the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, the enemy HP is reduced due to the attack on the ally side even if the attack is originally on the enemy side and the ally HP is reduced. Will come to be.

When the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, the ally HP may not be reduced even if the ally HP is originally reduced due to the attack on the enemy side.

Here, regardless of whether the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). When the winning combination numbers "7", "8", or "24" are transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks, for example, the part displayed as "middle line attack effective" on the display device 11. Perform processing such as making it appear or highlighting it. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "6" is set from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Or, when "23" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as blinking or highlighting the portion displayed as "upper line attack effective" on the display device 11, for example. I do. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "10" is set from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Or, when "25" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks or highlights the portion displayed as "lower line attack effective" on the display device 11, for example. Is processed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

However, the mode of production that makes the ally side expect to attack is not limited to this. For example, the effect may be performed by another effect device (for example, speaker group 84 or LED group 85). Further, even when the winning combination number of the internal winning combination that is not in the above-mentioned correspondence relationship is transmitted, one of the above-mentioned effects may be performed with a predetermined probability.

The types and functions of information corresponding to the ally character are not limited to those described above. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the damage dealt determined in the damage dealt lottery described later increases (for example, the determined damage dealt is doubled). ) May be provided. Further, for example, when the information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, the damage received in the damage damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is reduced (for example, the determined damage received). May be halved).

Further, the line that functions as the determination line is not limited to the effective line. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character is set, even if it is a line different from the effective line, it may be set as a special line and this special line may be made to function as a determination line. Specifically, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the cross-down line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. You may try to do it. Further, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, the cross-up line in addition to the center line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state. You may.

In such a case, the symbols displayed on the actual effective line are not the "Replay" symbol alignment or the "Bell" symbol alignment, but the symbols displayed on such a special line are the "Replay" symbols. If it is configured so that the symbols of "" or "bell" are aligned, the player can recognize that the degree of advantage varies as with the effective lines, regardless of the actual number of effective lines. However, it is possible to provide the same playability. From this point of view, the judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state does not necessarily include the effective line. For example, when the effective line is one line of the cross-up line, the line battle The determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the state may be composed of a maximum of three lines of a center line, a top line, and a bottom line. That is, it is also possible to configure the judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state only from the special line different from the effective line.

Further, when defining the determination line, similarly to the above-mentioned effective line, it is possible to define as an effective line instead of each line in which the symbols are aligned, or together with this, a line in which the symbols are not aligned in a straight line. .. That is, if it is a line that passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols in each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or more lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a judgment line.

For example, a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (irregular line at V) may be defined as the determination line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 kinds of determination lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a determination line.

Here, the explanation of the battle state is returned to again. As described above, when the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, when the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is won, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip is performed. In the counter-lottery at the time of hitting, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the counter attack (winning) or not to activate the counter-attack (non-winning). It should be noted that the table referred to in the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If the counter lottery at the time of hitting is won, the damage damage lottery at the time of the counter is subsequently performed. In the counter-time damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the counter-time damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36C, and determines the value of any one of the damages given at the counter based on the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate. Further, in this case, the damage lottery is not performed at the time of the impact rip.

On the other hand, when the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not won, the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, and the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is not set, but " If "4" is set, a defensive lottery will be performed at the time of hitting. In the counter lottery at the time of hitting, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the defense (winning) or not to activate the defense (non-winning). In addition, the table referred to in the defense lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If you win the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip will not be performed. On the other hand, if the defensive lottery at the time of hitting rip is not won, the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is not set but "3" is set, and the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip is won. If not, or if the information "3" and "4" corresponding to the ally character are not set and the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is hit, the hit rip is received. Damage lottery is done.

In the damage-damaged lottery at the time of hitting rip, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage-damaged lottery table at the time of hitting rip shown in FIG. 36D, and determines one of the damaged values based on the enemy type and the lottery value. .. When the value of the damage received is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the ally HP, and the value of the ally HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the ally is updated as appropriate.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are not set, and the internal winning combination that can display the "middle lip" or "middle bell" is determined, and the watermelon (in this case). , "F_watermelon 1" may be included, or "F_watermelon 2" may be included. The same shall apply hereinafter in this section), a damage lottery will be drawn when it is determined as an internal winning combination. It is said.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination that can display "middle rip" or "middle bell", or "upper rip" or "upper bell" has been determined. In case, and when the watermelon is decided as the internal winning combination, the damage lottery is performed.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination that can display "middle rip" or "middle bell", or "lower rip" or "lower bell" has been determined. If, and if the watermelon is determined to be the internal winning combination, a damage lottery will be held.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set, "middle rip" or "middle bell", "upper rip" or "upper bell", or "lower rip" or "lower rip" or " When the internal winning combination in which the "lower bell" can be displayed is determined, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, a damage lottery is performed.

In the damage-damaged lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage-damaged lottery table shown in FIG. 36E, and determines any one of the damage-damaged values based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate.

Here, focusing on the RT state, the line battle state of the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, but when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, it can also be the RT3 state. Referring to FIG. 16, in the RT2 state, the lottery value of "F_middle rip 1" is "5000", the lottery value of "F_upper rip" and "F_lower rip" is "2450", and "F_shot". While the lottery value of "rip" is "8970", in the RT3 state, the lottery value of "F_middle rip 2" is "32768" and the lottery value of "F_shot lip" is "0".

That is, if it is possible to shift to the RT3 state in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, regardless of whether the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set. However, as a result of determining the internal winning combination that can display the "middle rip" with a high probability, it is possible to make the damage lottery performed with a high probability, and the internal winning combination that can display the "shot rip". As a result of not being determined, it is possible to prevent the damage lottery from being performed when the ball is hit. Therefore, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, the RT3 state is the most advantageous RT state.

In the battle state, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less (that is, "defeat" as the status) before the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right grant lottery state of the advantageous section from the next game. In addition, if the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state has not ended, the battle state is continued. In addition, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the game shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state from the next game.

In the present embodiment, when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is hit, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip are performed. The lottery method in the battle state is not limited to this. For example, if an internal winning combination (excluding "weak rare role", "chance eye", and bonus role) that is not subject to the damage lottery is determined, "shot lip" ("F_shot lip") ), The counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is hit, the combination of the "shot rip" symbols is displayed on the center line. Configured as a different internal winning combination, or configured as a push-order replay by pressing the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), and the combination of the "shot rip" symbols is displayed on the top line according to the stop operation procedure. , Or may be displayed on the bottom line. In this case, if the top line or bottom line is the judgment line, the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, and the damage taking lottery at the time of hitting rip may be performed. The lottery may not be held. Also, if the top line or bottom line is the judgment line, the stop operation procedure may be notified so that the combination of the "shot lip" symbols is not displayed on the top line or bottom line. Good.

(Continuous lottery state)
As described above, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 then shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state. The continuous lottery state is a state in which the game continues for 4 games or 7 games, and finally, if it is decided to shift from the line battle state to the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is entered. If it is decided to continue the line battle state, the game shifts to the interval state in the line battle state again, and if none of these decisions are made, the line battle state ends ( That is, the advantageous section ends), and the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered.

In the continuous lottery state, continuous lottery and continuous lottery result rewriting lottery can be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the continuous lottery state.

First, the main CPU 101 performs continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state when shifting from the battle state to the continuous lottery state. In the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, the main CPU 101 refers to the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, and determines the enemy type, the damage state (that is, synonymous with the above-mentioned "status"), the lottery value, and the lottery value. Based on the above, the game period in the continuous lottery state is 4 games, but it is not decided whether to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state (“4G defeat”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state. Is 7 games, but it is not decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state ("7G defeat"), the game period of the continuous lottery state is 4 games, and the line battle state It is decided to continue ("4G continuation"), the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games, and it is decided to continue the line battle state ("7G continuation"), the continuous lottery state The game period is 4 games and it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state (“4G promotion”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games and it is possible to shift to the right acquisition lottery state. One of the things to be decided (“7G promotion”) is decided.

In addition, in the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, at least the lottery result (“4G continuation”, “7G continuation”, “4G promotion”, and “7G promotion” described above) in which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. As a general rule, the probability increases in the order of enemy type "A", "B", "C", "D", and ally status is "wreck", "medium damage", "small damage". The order of "break" and "normal" is increased, and the enemy status is increased in the order of "normal", "small damage", "medium damage", and "wreck". That is, the three parameters of the enemy type, the ally status, and the enemy status are referred to, and whether or not the advantageous section continues is determined.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the battle state is entered, the information corresponding to which enemy character is set, how the ally status changes during the battle state, and which enemy status is during the battle state. It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the line battle state depending on how it changes. In addition, when changing the ally status and the enemy status, the type of information corresponding to the ally character (for example, the number of judgment lines) is important, and the degree of continuation of the line battle state is advantageous to the player. The probability of fluctuating to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player also fluctuates.

In the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, when the ally status is "wreck" and the enemy status is "wreck", it is exceptionally determined that at least the lottery result in which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. It has become. In this way, when the ally status is a specific status and the enemy status is a specific status, contrary to the above-mentioned principle, the probability that the advantageous section continues is increased or the probability that the advantageous section continues is decreased. You can also do it.

Further, when the main CPU 101 shifts from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the lottery result of the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state is the lottery result at which the advantageous section ends (the above-mentioned "4G defeat" and "4G defeat" and ". In the case of "7G defeat"), the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed in the continuous lottery state. Specifically, in the continuous lottery state, when the "chance eye" or the bonus combination is won, for example, if "4G defeat" is determined as the lottery result of the continuous lottery, rewrite it to "4G continuation", for example. If "7G defeat" has been decided, rewrite it as "7G continuation". Further, when a watermelon (in this case, only "F_watermelon 1" or "F_watermelon 2" may be included) is won, a continuous lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Decide to rewrite the lottery result of. When it is decided to rewrite the lottery result of the continuous lottery, the lottery result of the continuous lottery is appropriately rewritten in the same manner as described above.

In the present embodiment, after the continuous lottery is performed according to the enemy type and the damage state, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed, but the lottery method in the continuous lottery state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state, first, a continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed (that is, a lottery is performed for each game to determine whether or not to continue the line battle state based on the internal winning combination), and the lottery is performed. If it is not decided to continue the line battle state as a result of the above, when the continuous lottery state ends, the continuous lottery may be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous section. Decidable, and in the battle state during the line battle state, when the "replay" or "bell" symbols are displayed side by side on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is set to the degree advantageous to the player. It is possible to fluctuate, and in the continuous lottery state during the line battle state, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous section based on the degree of continuation of the determined advantageous section.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the battle state during the line battle state, when, for example, a combination of symbols of "shot lip" is displayed on the determined determination line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to change it to a certain degree.

As a result, it is possible to increase the tension during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the game during the advantageous section is not monotonous, and the interest regarding the continuation of the favorable state for the player is It can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section to the RT2 state, and when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section is displayed. Can be transferred to the RT3 state, and a specific internal winning combination (for example, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip 1") in which a combination of symbols of "middle rip" can be displayed on the determined judgment line The probability of determining any of the "rip 2") is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RT2 state, it is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_shot lip") in which the combination of the symbols of the "shot lip" can be displayed, and in the RT3 state, this predetermined value. It is not possible to determine the internal winning combination of.

As a result, during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which RT state the player is in, so that the game during the advantageous section It is possible to make the game more versatile and to improve the interest in continuing the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" and "batting order 1" in which a combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line When the stop operation is performed with, "F_middle left bell 1" where the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line, and when the stop operation is performed with "batting order 3", at the top line "F_Upper middle bell 1" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols and "F_" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols on the center line when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 3" "Middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 32, for example, "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined in the advantageous section. In that case, "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. It has become. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, when the player has a playability in which the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, such as the line battle state of the advantageous section, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

<Right acquisition lottery state and playability during the right acquisition state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 42 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state.

(Right acquisition lottery preparation status)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the right acquisition lottery preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. (That is, return to these states). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the right acquisition lottery preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus role is in the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state is entered, and if the bonus role is in the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is entered. Let me.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the state shifts to the RT3 state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state is terminated, and when returning to the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state is returned, and when returning to the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is set. It may be restored.

(Right acquisition lottery state)
As described above, when the right acquisition lottery preparation state is completed and when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. The right acquisition lottery state is in a state of continuing for 20 games, and of course, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during this period. And even if it does not shift to the right acquisition state, it returns to the line battle state. Therefore, this right acquisition lottery state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state transition lottery is performed.

In the right acquisition state transition lottery, for example, in the right acquisition state lottery, the main CPU 101 may be only the "chance eye" or the watermelon (in this case, "F_watermelon 1" or includes "F_watermelon 2". If you win (may be), it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game. In addition, when the common bell (“F_upper common bell” and “F_middle common bell”) is won, it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4). Even if it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the transition to the right acquisition state may occur when the game period (20 games) in the right acquisition lottery state ends. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the precursor period is determined within the range of the remaining number of games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state, and when this precursor period elapses, the transition to the right acquisition state is performed. You may do so. In addition, when shifting from the right acquisition lottery state to the right acquisition state, if the number of remaining games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state occurs, the remaining number of games is added to the game period in the right acquisition state. Alternatively, it may be added to the game period in the right acquisition lottery state next time (when the right acquisition state returns to the right acquisition lottery state).

(Right acquisition status)
As described above, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state, and when returning from the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition state. The right acquisition state is in a state of continuing for 10 games, and of course, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during this period. Then, regardless of whether or not the permanent right is acquired, the right acquisition lottery state is returned. Therefore, this right acquisition state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed.

In the permanent right acquisition lottery, it is decided in advance whether or not to grant the right to permanently acquire the ally character (until the end of the advantageous section), in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. The right. The main CPU 101 decides to grant a permanent right, for example, when a bonus combination is won in the right acquisition state. In addition, for example, based on winning a specific combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), it may be decided to grant a permanent right with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4).

Here, if it is decided to grant the permanent right as a result of the permanent right lottery, each time the battle state is entered, the number of the ally character that was not given as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle is the highest. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the permanent right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. The function of the granted permanent right is not limited to this. For example, if it is decided to grant the perpetual right as a result of the perpetual right lottery, the number of the ally character to which the perpetual right is not granted is fixedly assigned to the lowest number. You may. For example, when the permanent right is first granted, the ally character "1" is granted as the right content of this permanent right, and when the permanent right is granted next, the ally character "2" is granted as the right content of this permanent right. May be given.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the permanent right is granted in the right acquisition state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned limited right is granted in the right acquisition state. It may be decided whether or not to do so. In this case, for example, the same lottery as the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery may be performed, or the above-mentioned limited right is provided so that the probability of granting the limited right is higher than that of the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery. It may be decided whether or not it is granted. Further, for example, in the right acquisition state, whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted is determined for each unit game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10) regardless of the internal winning combination. May be good. If a permanent right or a limited right is granted at an opportunity other than the bonus winning combination, a plurality of rights can be acquired in the right acquisition state.

In this case, as described above, for example, when two rights are granted (when the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set), the upper limit number of judgment lines is set in the battle state. (DL1 to DL3) will be set. In addition, for example, when three rights are granted (when information "1" to "3" corresponding to a ally character is set), in addition to this, a counter may be activated in the battle state. Will be. In addition, for example, when four rights are granted (when information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character is set), in addition to this, defense may be activated in the battle state. Will be. Here, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, the rights for more than four may be carried over to the next battle state or destroyed (cleared). It may be done. Further, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, it may be determined that the advantageous section will always continue in the continuous lottery state after the end of the next battle state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a permanent right is granted so that the line battle state of the advantageous section can be advanced advantageously (information corresponding to the ally character can be set) in the right acquisition state. However, the content of rights that can be granted in the state of acquisition of rights is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, the continuation right that the line battle state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section. "Stock" or "number of sets" It may be decided whether or not the right acquisition lottery state is granted, or the right acquisition lottery state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result in the right acquisition lottery state. It may be decided whether or not the right to continue (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section, sometimes referred to as "stock", "number of sets", etc.) is granted. That is, in the right acquisition state, the content of the right that can be granted can be appropriately set as long as it brings benefits to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the advantageous section. It is possible to make a decision, and the result of the decision varies depending on whether or not the right is granted in the right acquisition state. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in the right acquisition state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the judgment line is granted in the right acquisition state, first, the judgment line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the battle state during the line battle state, for example, when the combination of the symbols of "shot lip" is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous section is continued. If the degree is changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and the granted right remains, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous section to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the permanent right is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the permanent right is not granted, one or more determination lines are determined. One of the lines is determined as the judgment line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous section can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be varied in various ways, thereby improving the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player. be able to.

<Playability during ending 1 state and ending 2 state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 43 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state. Further, FIG. 44 shows an outline of the ending effect performed during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state.

(Preparing for ending)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the ending preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends (that is, these). To return to the state of). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the ending state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus combination is in the ending 1 state, the process shifts to the ending 1 state, and if the bonus combination is won in the ending 2 state, the process shifts to the ending 2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the RT3 state is entered, the ending preparation state is terminated, and when returning to the ending 1 state, the ending 1 state is restored, and when returning to the ending 2 state, the ending 2 state is restored. You may.

Further, when the main CPU 101 is determined to shift to the ending 1 state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, for example, by the ART lottery at the time of winning the watermelon 1, the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted. At that time, it shifts to the ending ready state (that is, waits for the transition to the ending 1 state until it shifts to the RT2 state).

(Ending 1 state)
As described above, when the ending preparation state is completed and the process shifts (returns) to the ending 1 state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 1 state. The ending 1 state is a state in which it continues for 100 games, and during this period, of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Then, when the ending 1 state is completed, the line battle state is entered. It is the same as the line battle state in that it is in the gaming state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section transitioning from the normal advantageous section, but the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the line battle state. In the ending 1 state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed as in the right acquisition state.

As with the lottery in the right acquisition state, in the ending 1 state, it may be determined whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted, or the continuation right for extending the advantageous section is granted. It may be decided whether or not it is done.

Further, for example, in the ending 1 state, if the bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the game returns to the ending 1 state via the ending preparation state, the game period of 100 games is repeated. It may be counted from the beginning, or it may be counted by taking over the game period in the game that won the bonus role. In the latter case, for example, the bonus combination is won in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the player returns to the ending 1 state via the ending preparation state. In that case, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 90 games.

Further, the game period in the bonus state may be included in the game period in the ending 1 state. For example, in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus combination is won, the game period of the bonus state based on the bonus combination is 17 games, the bonus state ends, and the ending preparation state is passed. When the game is returned to the ending 1 state, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 73 games.

(Ending 2 state)
When the number of games played in the advantageous section is "1200" or more and the interval state of the line battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 2 state. The ending 2 state is a state in which it continues for 131 games, and during this time, of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Then, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself also ends, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

In this case, when the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1200" times (or more times, for example, "1369" times), the game may be shifted to the ending 2 state. Good. Further, in this case, even when there are other gaming states in the advantageous section, the transition from these gaming states to the ending 2 state may be performed. Further, the mode of counting the game period in the ending 2 state is the same as the mode of counting the game period in the ending 1 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself also ends, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the ending 2 state ends, if the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period has not yet reached "1500" times, the line battle state may be shifted again. Alternatively, the ending 2 state may be continued until the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

(Ending production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, an ending effect that can be performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state will be described.

As the phrase indicates, the ending effect basically suggests that the advantageous section will be terminated soon when the period controlled by the advantageous section becomes "1200" times or more. It has become. Further, considering the probability that the period controlled in the advantageous section is "1200" times or more, the probability of being executed is lower than that of other effects, which is a special effect.

The ending production is composed of, for example, a series of story productions consisting of episodes 1 to 8 and the final episode, and as the game period in the ending 2 state progresses, the content of the story also progresses. There is. As described above, when the ending 2 state is configured to be sustainable from the period when the ending 2 state is controlled to the advantageous section is "1200" times until the regulation monitoring period is "1500" times. The content of the story may be advanced according to the game period until the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

Here, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state when the advantageous section is started, the ending 1 state is started even though the advantageous section has just started. The ending effect is executed inside.

However, in the ending 1 state, a part of the above-mentioned series of story productions is executed, and not all of them are executed. Specifically, the first to eighth episodes of the first to eighth episodes and the final episode are executed, but the final episode is not executed. In this case as well, as in the ending 2 state, basically, the content of the story progresses as the game period in the ending 1 state progresses.

A specific example in which a part of the above-mentioned series of story effects is executed in the ending 1 state will be described with reference to FIG. 44. For example, in the ending preparation state, an introduction effect of the ending effect is performed. Then, when the ending 1 state is started (ART start), the ending effect is started, and the story progresses in sequence, such as the first episode, the second episode, and the eighth episode. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, a character such as "continue" is displayed on the display device 11, indicating that the story is not completed.

On the other hand, in the ending 2 state, when the ending 2 state is started (advantageous section ≥ 1200 interval state ends), the ending effect is started, and the first episode, the second episode, ... The story goes on. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, the story of the final episode is developed next, and when the story of the final episode is completed, a character such as "THE END" is displayed on the display device 11, indicating that the story is completed. ..

It should be noted that the above-mentioned production content of the ending effect shows an example of the production content of the ending effect that can be executed over a plurality of games, and the production content of the ending effect is not limited to this. Any production content may be used as long as it is a production content that is valuable to the player.

For example, if there is an animation or a character used as a motif of the pachislot machine 1, a special image of the animation or a special image of the character that cannot normally be seen is displayed on the display device 11 in the ending effect in the ending 2 state. It should be. In this case, in the ending effect in the ending 1 state, the contents of these images are displayed on the display device 11 shorter than the ending effect in the ending 2 state (for example, summarized, halfway through, or as another content). It should be. However, instead of or in combination with these, each ending effect can be performed according to the music and sound output from the speaker group 84 and the light emitting mode by the LED group 85.

In addition, the ending effect may be such that the content of the effect progresses regardless of the number of remaining games. For example, the time required for a unit game is tentatively set to "6 seconds" (this value is arbitrary), and the ending effect in the ending 2 state is set as a series of effects of "6 seconds x 131 games = 786 seconds". This series of effects is started at the timing controlled to the ending 2 state, and the ending effect in the ending 1 state is a part of the series of effects of "6 seconds x 100 games = 600 seconds". It is also possible to start a part of this series of effects at the timing controlled to the ending 1 state. By doing so, it is not necessary to advance the ending effect according to the number of games, so that the control burden related to the effect can be reduced. Further, in this case, when the execution of the above-mentioned series of effects is completed at a timing before the end of the advantageous section, the screen at the end is displayed as it is until the end of the advantageous section. Alternatively, the series of effects described above may be started again from the beginning (or from the middle) (that is, may be executed in a loop). Further, in this case, if the advantageous section ends at a timing before the execution of the series of effects described above is completed, the series of effects described above may be forcibly terminated even in the middle of the operation. However, the series of effects described above may be executed to the end.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, until the game period in the advantageous section becomes "1200" times (or until the ending 1 state is entered). , It is decided to continue the advantageous section (for example, it is decided to continue the line battle state in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, or the right acquisition lottery state ends and then shifts to the interval state. ) Every time, the display device 11 executes a suggestion effect suggesting a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous section.

Specifically, for example, a progress bar or a map divided into 12 squares is displayed in a predetermined area in the display device 11, and 1 square is displayed every time 100 games are played during the game period in the advantageous section. Suggestion effects such as making the display mode different one by one are executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the approximate number of game periods in the advantageous section. In addition, for example, a section such as a progress bar or a map may be set to 15 squares, and the degree of digestion during the regulation monitoring period may be displayed. Further, these are examples of the display contents of the suggestion effect, and the display contents are not limited to this. For example, the actual number of games played during the game period in the advantageous section may be displayed.

Further, the suggestion effect may be displayed only during the first game in the interval state, or may be displayed during the interval state (between three games). Further, it may be displayed only in the line battle state where the advantageous section may end, or it may be always displayed in each game state in the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state is reached, the ending effect (special effect) can be executed, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the ending 1 is performed. When it is decided to shift to the state, it is possible to execute a part of the ending effect (special effect) in the ending 1 state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special effect, which is a part of the special effect that can be executed at the end of the game in a state advantageous to the player, satisfies a predetermined execution condition. , It can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state favorable to the player. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation monitoring period becomes "1500" times, which is advantageous from the time when the ending 2 state is reached until the advantageous section ends after 131 games have passed, or from the time when the ending 2 state is reached. It is possible to execute the ending effect (special effect) until the end of the section. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time it is determined to continue the advantageous section until the game period in the advantageous section reaches "1200" times or the transition to the ending 1 state, the advantageous section is controlled. It is possible to carry out a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline for the period of time. As a result, the player can generally grasp when the execution of the special effect is started and when the advantageous section ends, so that it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

(Other examples of ending control)
In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but the stage where it is confirmed that the limit process will be performed in the future. (For example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or higher than the specified value), the main control board 71 sets the ball ejection state to "ending" (for example, ending 2 state). Transition. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state on the sub side to the "ending (END)" even when the ball ejection state is shifted to the "ending" on the main side, and is predetermined. The production state is shifted to "ending" when the conditions are used. In particular, the details of the control in which the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” will be described below. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section may include a "normal advantageous section" or the like, but in this example, the "advantageous section" and the "ART" will be described as being in exactly the same gaming state.

In this example, a main side counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and a sub side counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side are provided in relation to the advantageous section. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games that have passed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games), and uses the second counter to continue the advantageous section for a period (the number of remaining games). ) Is counted. When the value of the first counter reaches "1500", the main control board 71 performs limit processing, ends the advantageous section regardless of the value of the second counter, and the value of the first counter becomes "1500". If the value of the second counter reaches "0" before reaching, the advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 uses the third counter to count the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games), and uses the fourth counter to continue the advantageous section for a period of time ( The period of notification to the player (number of games remaining) is counted, and the game during the period during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter (number of games remaining). The unreported period (the number of unreported games (= the number of hidden additional games)) is counted for the person. When the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games, the number of notified games is added by the number of notified games, and the number of unreported games is subtracted.

Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and sub is basically the same, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side are the same (note that the advantageous section). If and "ART" do not match, the limit processing is not performed on the sub side, so it is not necessary to count the number of digested games in the advantageous section on the sub side, and the number of digested games in "ART" should be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but they are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub side, since the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported are individually counted, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub side Also, the value of the second counter on the main side and the value of the fifth counter on the sub side do not match. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub The sum of the value of the 4th counter and the value of the 5th counter on the side are the same.

The main control board 71 performs transition control to the "ending" based on the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. For example, as a result of adding the number of games, the advantageous section When the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games exceeds the specified value, the payout state is shifted to "ending".

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 sets the effect state on the sub side according to the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games). END) ”. Here, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending" by referring to, for example, a sub_ending transition lottery table (not shown).

For example, the sub_ending transition lottery table defines the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and the lottery result of whether or not to shift to the "ending" for each total value (non-winning, non-winning, Information on the lottery value for the winning) is specified. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games is "1000 to 1199G", there is a probability of 24576/32768 to the "ending". The transition lottery is not won, and the transition lottery to the "ending" is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

Further, for example, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” with a higher probability as the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. Then, when the effect state is shifted to the "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to the dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the effect stage at the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. If the ball ejection state has not shifted to the "ending" on the main side, it is not necessary to perform a lottery to shift to the "ending" on the sub side, so that the sub control board 72 is in the ball ejection state on the main side. Is shifted to the "ending" (that is, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side), the sub-side production A lottery may be performed as to whether or not to shift the state to the "ending".

By shifting to the dedicated production stage at the time of shifting to the "ending" in this way, the player can know in advance that the limit processing will be performed. Since it is confirmed that the limit processing will be performed after the transition to the "ending stage", there is no point in performing an additional notification effect on the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the "ending stage".

In addition, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the total value on the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases while the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games held unannounced (number of unannounced games) is smaller, and the greater the number of additional games held unannounced. It has a low probability.

In addition, after shifting to the "ending stage", in principle, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, the production of the "ending stage" is ended in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game ends. At the time or at the start of the next game, the stage shifts to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

Also, during the stay of the "ending stage", even if the bonus is activated, the limit processing will still be performed in the near future, so it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage". Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is "1499"), a predetermined number of games such as BB1 to BB4 are applied to the bonus required for digestion, and the bonus is activated. In this case, the first counter reaches "1500" during the operation of the bonus, the limit processing is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is terminated and the stage is shifted to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage during the bonus operation) even though the bonus operation is in a state where the number of balls is increased. , May give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the operation of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage as the "ending stage" until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (of the advantageous section). It is also possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing end notification, immersive prevention display, etc.).

Further, even if the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated such that the value of the first counter is "1498" to "1500" and is carried over without winning a prize, the sub-control board 72 can be used. It is preferable to perform the delay processing of the end of the ending state in which the "ending stage" is continued, the bonus combination being carried over wins a prize, and the end of the activated bonus is waited for to end the "ending stage". In this case, the sub-control board 72 is used because the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even if the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing and the push order and the like are not notified (normal section). It is preferable that the "ending stage" in such a non-advantageous section has a different effect from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not out of order. In addition, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section (a game that does not win a role that hinders the winning of the bonus role such as replay). It is also possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying the player that the "ending stage" will end after the end of the bonus and the notification that the instruction function has ended. Further, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the bonus operation, or when there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 is different from the other bonus operating. The effect (for example, an effect that congratulates a large amount of acquisition or an effect that includes some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, operation, or end of the bonus.

Further, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an operation of inserting a medal for the next game or an operation of automatically reinserting or starting by operating a re-game) for a predetermined time after all reels are stopped. Etc.) may not be accepted, and freeze processing may be performed at the end of the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information on the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section, the number of digested games, or the number of sets. In addition, the entanglement prevention display may be displayed in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section due to the limit process occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section due to the limit process so as not to interfere with the digestion of the bonus. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. In addition, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, a predetermined time is set at the end of the bonus for the purpose of securing time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 Only the freeze at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freeze at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 may display information on an advantageous section, a immersive prevention display, or the like. By suppressing the occurrence of a plurality of game delays due to freezes, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing of another example described later, and the specification designer may apply the above depending on the type of limiter to be activated. Whether the process is applied or not can be arbitrarily decided in consideration of the flow of the production.

(Variable limiter)
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit processing for ending the advantageous section have been described on the premise that the execution conditions for the limit processing are constant, for example, when the advantageous section reaches 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and it is sufficiently excessive gambling if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section). Can exert the effect of suppressing. Therefore, when the first counter (the number of digested games) satisfies the predetermined end condition, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section before the first counter (the number of digested games) exceeds the upper limit value. The limit processing to be terminated may be performed.

For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the timing is halfway for the number of games in one set due to the period of "normal advantageous section" and the bonus during "ART". For example, "ART" of this set may end at 1480G), which is the remaining 20G up to the upper limit. In such a case, the next set of "ART" cannot be performed for all one set (50G), and the limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. Even though the next set of "ART" has started, the player may be dissatisfied if it is forcibly terminated immediately. Therefore, although the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the "ART" of this set, which is well separated, although it is before reaching the upper limit value. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a well-separated timing, so that the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

Further, depending on the pachislot machine, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing, and therefore, a case of performing such an ending control will also be described. For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450G (with a predetermined end condition). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50G as one set for the ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for the ending is set. It is also possible to execute the limit process on the assumption that a predetermined end condition is satisfied at the time of end and end the advantageous section. That is, the limit processing is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450 G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed from 1450 to 1500 G. By allowing a certain amount of range in the execution timing of the limit processing in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of discomfort. .. In addition, even if the number of games per set of "ART" is fixed, the timing at which one set for the ending is decided is due to the addition of bonus operation and digestion such as additional specialization state different from the basic set. Since it is not always exactly 1400 games, which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to have a range in the setting range of the predetermined end condition (the period during which the limit processing can be reserved).

As will be described later, the limit processing can be performed based on the difference number of medals acquired by the player during the advantageous section and the number of occurrences of navigation (the number limiter, the payout limiter, which will be described later). Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 is not limited to the case where the limit processing execution timing reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value) of the limit processing activation counters (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation number counter, etc.). , When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold value is reached. The predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the next set "ART" is started in the set number management type "ART", the limiter is activated in the middle of the next set "ART". It is possible to adopt that it is predicted that the game will be done (in Pachislot, the amount of increase in medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications. Even when the number limiter, payout number limiter, or navigation number limiter described later is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated in the middle of "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas on this point can be summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games that can be continued in the advantageous section, the number of differences, the number of navigations), which indicates the remaining period during which a specific game state (advantageous section) can be continued, reaches the end threshold (0 games remaining, 0 cards, 0 times). When it reaches, the specific game state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value (number of digested games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Alternatively, if a range is allowed for the execution timing of the limit processing as in the modified example, the value of the second numerical value is the end if any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, etc.). Specific state termination means (main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the threshold value has not been reached.
In addition, although the specific state termination means is described collectively for both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section becomes zero such as "ART" and the case of ending the advantageous section by the limit process. , It may be provided as a separate process in the program.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery using the various data tables (including those not shown) described so far (including the lottery not particularly described as the lottery using the table), the random number circuit 110 The random number values for lottery (random number values for production) extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 255) are sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery values by the random number registers 2 to 7, and the result of the subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). That is, the winning / non-winning is determined by subtracting the lottery value from the lottery random number value, but the lottery method is not limited to this, and the lottery value is added to the extracted lottery random number value, and the addition result is It may be determined whether or not the amount exceeds 256 (whether or not a so-called "digit overflow" has occurred), and the winning / non-winning may be determined.

<Notification function controlled by the main side>
In conventional pachislot machines, it is determined by the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) whether or not to notify the player of advantageous stop operation information (pushing order, etc.). However, since the presence or absence of this notification affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection), in recent years, it has been required to control the profit of the player on the main (main control board 71) side. .. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the information display 6 controlled on the main side is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation, and is controlled by the main side. A function for notifying (instructing) information on the reel stop operation is provided.

Here, FIG. 45 shows the correspondence between each game state controlled on the main side, the internal winning combination, and the navigation data in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The navigation data "1" to "6" shown in FIG. 45 represent the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor and the notification contents of the stop operation information. Further, the navigation data "0" shown in FIG. 45 indicates that the stop operation information is not notified. Further, in FIG. 45, only the push order small winning combination and the push order replay are described and described. However, the navigation data is basically "0" for the internal winning combination other than the pushing order small winning combination and the pushing order replay.

In each gaming state of the non-advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set and the information of the stop operation is not notified regardless of which internal winning combination shown in FIG. 45 is determined. When the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, none of the numerical values is displayed on the instruction monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the numerical value of "0" is displayed on the instruction monitor. You may do so. Further, when the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to this is not transmitted to the sub side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to this is transmitted to the sub side. You may try to do it.

Navi data "1" is set when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_middle left bell 1" is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section. The flag. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 2" or "F_middle left bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2".

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 1", "F_middle middle bell 1", and "F_lower middle bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 2", "F_middle middle bell 2", and "F_lower middle bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4".

In addition, "F_upper right / left bell 1", "F_upper right / left bell 2", "F_middle right / left bell 1", "F_middle right / left bell 2", "F_lower right / left bell 1", and "F_lower right / left bell 2". If any of the internal winning combinations of, is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, "F_upper right middle bell 1", "F_upper right middle bell 2", "F_middle right middle bell 1", "F_middle right middle bell 2", "F_lower right middle bell 1", and "F_ If any of the internal winning combinations of "lower right middle bell 2" is determined, or if any of the internal winning combinations is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6".

In the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" is determined, if it is "batting order 1" or "batting order 2", Since the batting order is correct, the navigation data can be used as common navigation data. However, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the internal winning combination, a maximum of 6 selections of push order can be set for the small combination of push order, but this is set as a 4-choice push order. When the internal winning combination is determined for "F_upper left bell 1", the navigation data "1" is set, and the internal winning combination is determined for "F_upper left bell 2" so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. In that case, the navigation data "2" is set. The same applies to other push order small roles.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any of the push order replays is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state in the normal advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, the push order notification of the push order replay is not performed in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, when the internal winning combination of any of the pushing order small winning combination is determined, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed.

When the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 1" or "F_RT1 medium replay 1" is determined in each game state of the advantageous section, the navigation data "1" is set. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "1" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "1" is also determined. 1 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "1" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 2" or "F_RT1 medium replay 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "2" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "2" is also determined. 2 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "2" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 3" or "F_RT1 medium replay 3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". Also, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "3" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "3" is also determined. 3 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "3" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 4" or "F_RT1 medium replay 4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "4" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "4" is also determined. 4 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "4" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 5" or "F_RT1 medium replay 5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 3" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "5" is set by the lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "5" is also determined. 5 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "5" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 6" or "F_RT1 medium replay 6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6". Also, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "6" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "6" is also determined. 6 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "6" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main (main control board 71) side notifies the information of the reel stop operation by displaying the numerical values of "1" to "6" on the instruction monitor. Further, the numerical values of "1" to "6" displayed on the instruction monitor uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each.

Although the numerical values "1" to "6" notified on the main side (instruction monitor) uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, all the players are clear based on the numerical values. It is not always possible to grasp the content of the notification. For example, it may not be possible for some players to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying the numerical value "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information related to the stop operation of the stop button is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211 and display unit 212) controlled on the sub side is used to notify information related to the stop operation under the control of the sub side.

For example, when the push order "middle, left, right" (batting order 3) is notified, the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the middle reel 3C in the display screen of the display device 11 is displayed on the sub side. The numerical value "1" is displayed above the left reel 3L, the numerical value "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and the numerical value "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R, and the batting order is "middle, left, Notify that the order is "right".

The timing of notification on the main side can be set to any timing as long as it is at least the period of one game in which notification is performed. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the player's start operation is detected (accepted), the main side may be notified at the start of reel rotation, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the stop operations is detected. On the other hand, the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is preferably at least a timing before the first stop operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, after the internal lottery process (see S204 of FIG. 56 described later), the reel stop control process (see FIG. 56 described later). S213) is to be transmitted from the main (main control board 71) side to the sub (sub control board 72) side with a command including this navigation data (or information corresponding thereto) as a parameter. It should be. In this case, the existing command (for example, the start command or the reel rotation start command) may include the parameter of the navigation data (or information corresponding thereto), or the navigation data (or the equivalent thereof). You may send a dedicated command to send the information to be sent. This makes it possible to notify the stop operation information on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display device 11 on the sub side.

Further, as another method, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, as described above, the winning combination number may be transmitted from the main side to the sub side as information that can identify the internal winning combination. Good. According to this method, the sub side can specify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player without sending the information corresponding to the navigation data, so that the amount of data to be transmitted can be reduced.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 84, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 by using the program will be described.

[Processing when power is turned on (reset interrupt)]
First, the power-on (reset interrupt) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing when the power is turned on (reset interrupt). In the power-on (reset interrupt) processing shown in FIG. 46, when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 has started, the reset signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. It is output to the "XSRST" terminal, undergoes a delay operation in the security mode, and then executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S1). In this process, the main CPU 101 initially sets the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the frequency division ratio in the timer prescaler register (not shown), sets the timer control register (not shown) to interrupt enable, etc., and sets the timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) between the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200, and the second serial communication circuit 115 (SCU2) for the second interface board. Initialization processing is performed (S2). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 (S4).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines as a result of the write test whether or not the writing to the main RAM 103 is normally performed (S5).

In S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (when the determination in S5 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (when the determination in S5 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. (S6).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process based on the acquired state of the timer control register (S7). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of the timer count based on the acquired state of the timer control register.

In the present embodiment, when the timer time 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 in S2, the count process of the CPU built-in timer is started. After that, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be acquired by reading the information of the timer control register (not shown). Then, in the present embodiment, a bit (discrimination bit) capable of discriminating (seeing) whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (whether or not it is the timer interrupt state) in the timer control register. ) Is provided.

Therefore, in the process of S6, the main CPU 101 reads the information of the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 is in the ON / OFF state of the discrimination bit in the timer control register (not shown). By referring to "1" / "0"), it is determined whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process. When 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of counting by the timer circuit 113 (if the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the discrimination bit is turned on.

In S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (when the determination in S7 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S6 and repeats the processes after S6.

On the other hand, in S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (when the determination in S7 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the command transmission start timer (S8). The command transmission start timer is a timer for managing the start delay period (see FIG. 85 described later), which will be described later, and the period from when the command transmission start timer is set until it becomes 0 is the main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 85 described later). Command data is not transmitted from the main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72) (see FIG. 80 described later). As a result, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the time required for the activation control of the sub CPU 201 (the time until the command can be received) is secured. That is, by setting the command transmission start timer, the transmission of communication data (command data) by the communication data transmission process is delayed for a period corresponding to the timer. In the present embodiment, in S8, "21801" (21801 x 1.1172 ms = about 24.3561 seconds) is set as the value of the command transmission start timer. However, the value of the command transmission start timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the sub-control circuit 200 mounted at the same time.

The command transmission start timer is a software timer allocated in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 in 2 bytes, and is arranged at an address that is not erased by the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process (non-standard) (S9). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process of the main RAM 103, and this process is performed in an unspecified work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. The program used in this thumb check process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the thumb check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 described later.

After the process of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S10).

In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described later. On the other hand, in S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the thumb check based on the result of the thumb check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is not normal (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is normal (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the game return process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the game state to the state before the power failure detection. The details of the game return process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 described later.

When the determination in S5 or S11 is NO, the main CPU 101 displays the character string "88" indicating the occurrence of an error on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). After that, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clearing process (S14).

Here, returning to the process of S10 again, if S10 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of the setting change. The details of the setting change confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address “at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change” in the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area. Then, after the processing of S16, the main CPU 101 starts the main processing described later (see FIG. 56 described later).

[Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the game return process performed in S12 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game return process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer (SP) at the time of power failure (S21). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S22). In S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when the determination in S22 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S22.

On the other hand, in S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S22 is YES), the main CPU 101 has the on-edge data before the input port interrupt processing and the current Clear (off) the set on-edge data (S23). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the backup data of the output port from the output port backup storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 and sets it in the output port (S24). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data of the input port and saves the data in the data storage area (input port storage area 1 and input port storage area 2) of the input port at present and before the interrupt processing (S25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the rotating cylinder control data storage area (S26). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of reels to be checked (“3” in this embodiment) (S27).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires reel control management information (data related to fluctuation control of the display column when a power failure occurs) of a predetermined reel based on the address of the set rotation cylinder control data storage area (S28). The reel control management information (variation control management information of the display column) is information related to the control state (rotation status) of each reel, and is backed up and saved at the time of power failure.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel control management information is information corresponding to the rotation status during reel acceleration, constant speed waiting, or constant speed (S29).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S29 that the condition of S29 is not satisfied (when the determination in S29 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S32 described later. On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is satisfied (YES in S29), the main CPU 101 clears the spinning control data (reel control management information) (S30). By this process, after returning to the game, the rotation control of the reel is started from the acceleration process. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the reel operation timing value (execution start timing “1” of the rotation cylinder control data) (S31). When "1" is set in the reel operation timing, the excitation change timing is set in the reel control process (see S903 in FIG. 79 described later), so that the main CPU 101 accelerates the reel rotation control. Start from.

After the processing of S31 or when the determination in S29 is NO, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reels (S32). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (S33).

In S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S33 is NO), the main CPU 101 changes the reel to be checked and shifts the processing to the processing of S28. The process is returned and the processing after S28 is repeated.

On the other hand, in S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S33 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S34). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the “at the time of power recovery” address in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the final of the game RAM area from the start address. Delete (clear) the information up to the address.

Next, the main CPU 101 restores the data of all the registers saved at the time of power failure detection to all the registers (S35). Then, after the processing of S35, the main CPU 101 ends the game return processing and returns the processing to the processing at the time of power failure detection.

In the present embodiment, the game return process is performed as described above. In the game return processing of the present embodiment, as described above, the input / output state of each port at the time of power failure is secured at the time of power recovery, and when the reel is rotating at the time of power failure, reel control management is performed at the time of power recovery. The processing necessary for starting the re-rotation of the reel by acquiring the information is also performed (see the processing of S26 to S33). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reel rotation control can be stably performed even when the reel is recovered from the electric power failure during the rotation of the cylinder, and the player is not discomforted.

[Setting change confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting change confirmation process performed in S15 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process. If the setting key type switch 54 is turned on (that is, in the case of "setting confirmation" to confirm the current setting value) after the power of the game machine is turned on, this setting change confirmation is performed from S44 described later. The process may be started.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the non-standard RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S41). Next, the main CPU 101 performs one interrupt wait process (S42). In this process, when the command transmission start timer is counting up, a non-operation command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) described later. If the command transmission start timer does not count up, no command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, if the command transmission start timer does not count up, this process is omitted. You may.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address “at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change” in the gaming RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S44). The setting key (not shown) inserted into the setting key type switch 54 is an operation key for setting the setting value (settings 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1, and is set when the setting key is turned on. The key type switch 54 is turned on.

In S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S44 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation process and turns on the power (reset interrupt). ) Move to the processing of S16 of the time processing (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S44 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S45). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change start or setting confirmation start information (005H: first value) in the L register, and performs the generation and storage process of the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (S46). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (first command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and generates the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation and storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) saved in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the error count relay to the ON state (S47). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display setting process of the set value (S48). By this processing, the current set value can be displayed by the 7-segment LED in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change or the setting confirmation has been performed (S49). In S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S54 described later.

On the other hand, in S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is YES), is the main CPU 101 in the reset switch 76 in the ON state? Whether or not it is determined (S50).

In S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the set value (S51). That is, each time the reset switch 76 is operated, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the set value within the range of "1" to "6". After the processing of S51, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S48, and repeats the processing after S48. On the other hand, in S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S52). ..

When the main CPU 101 determines in S52 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S48 and repeats the processes after S48. On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 101 is set in the set value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Store the value (S53).

When the determination in S49 is NO or after the processing in S53, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (S54).

In S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the off state (when the determination in S54 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S54. On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (when the determination in S54 is YES), whether the main CPU 101 has changed the setting or confirmed the setting. (S55).

In S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S57 described later. On the other hand, in S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S56). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address (the address next to the set value storage area) of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C at the end of the setting change (not shown) as the start address of the initialization start. It is set and the information from the start address to the final address of the game RAM area is erased (cleared).

After processing S56 or when S55 determines NO, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change end or setting confirmation end information (004H: second value) in the L register, and sets the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end). ) Is generated and stored (S57). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (second command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the end of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and generates the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation and storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) saved in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the processing of S57, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S16 of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46).

[Setting change command generation and storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S46 and S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. Note that FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure for generating and storing the setting change command.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the information of the set values (1 to 6) in the E register (S61). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state information in the C register (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the command type information (02H) of the setting change command in the A register (S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (S64). In this process, the main CPU 101 has the information set in each register in S61 to S63 and the information set in the L register in S46 or S58 (see FIG. 48) (setting change start / setting change end / setting status). Setting change command data is generated using (setting confirmation start / setting confirmation end), and the generated command data is saved in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50 described later.

After the process of S64, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation and storage process. When the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S46 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is terminated, the main CPU 101 performs the process after the process of S64 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48). Move to the process of S47. Further, when ending the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation and storage process after the process of S64, and also sets the settings. The change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is also completed.

[Communication data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, for example, the communication data storage process performed in S64 during the setting change command generation / storage process (see FIG. 49) will be described. The communication data storage process is executed not only when the setting change command is generated but also when other commands are generated. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of communication data storage processing.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the A register as communication command type data in the communication data temporary storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S71). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the H register and the L register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as parameters 1 and 2 of the communication command, respectively (S72).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the D register and the E register as the parameters 3 and 4 of the communication command in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S73). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the B register and the C register as the data of the parameter 5 of the communication command and the RT state, respectively, in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S74).

Next, the main CPU 101 generates BCC data (sum value) of the communication command from the data values set in the A register to the L register (S75). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the generated BCC data in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S76).

After the processing of S76, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a free space in the communication data storage area in the main RAM 103 (S77). In this embodiment, up to nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area.

In S77, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no free space in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage process and, for example, sets change command generation and storage process (when the communication data storage area is NO). (See FIG. 49) also ends.

On the other hand, in S77, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a vacancy in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is YES), the main CPU 101 is stored in the communication data temporary storage area by the above-mentioned processes S71 to S76. Each of the data is stored (registered) in the communication data storage area as communication data (command data) (S78).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data pointer update process (S79). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly updates the communication data pointer indicating the storage address of the communication data in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data pointer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 described later.

Then, after the process of S79, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage process and, for example, the setting change command generation and storage process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when creating one packet (8 bytes) of communication data (command data), various parameters are transferred from the register and stored in the communication data temporary storage area (communication buffer). In such a command data creation method, the data stored in each register at the time of command generation is stored as it is in the communication data temporary storage area as various parameters of the command data. Therefore, when command data including unused parameters is created, the value of the unused parameters becomes an indefinite value each time it is created. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to analyze the communication data and suppress fraudulent acts such as goto, and since it is not necessary to add unnecessary goto countermeasure processing, the program of the main control circuit 90 by adding the goto countermeasure processing. The pressure on the capacity can be suppressed.

[Communication data pointer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the communication data pointer update process performed in S79 during the communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) will be described. Note that FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data pointer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the currently set communication data pointer (S81).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds and updates the value of the communication data pointer by one packet (8 bytes) (S82). In this process, if the value of the updated communication data pointer is equal to or greater than the upper limit size of the communication data storage area, the main CPU 101 sets the updated communication data pointer value to "0". This invalidates all the command data stored in the communication data storage area (makes it the same state as the discarded state).

In the present embodiment, the amount of data (1 packet) transmitted in one transmission operation is 8 bytes. That is, in the present embodiment, one command data can be transmitted by one transmission operation. Further, in the present embodiment, since a maximum of nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area, the upper limit size of the communication data storage area is 72 bytes (= 8 bytes × 9). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the range of the communication data pointer is set to "0" to "71", and in the process of S82, the value of the communication data pointer after the update (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8) is "71 (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8). If the value exceeds "upper limit value)", set the updated communication data pointer value to "0" (return the communication data storage destination address to the start address) and store the communication data. Disable all command data stored in the area (make it the same as the discarded state). If the value of the communication data pointer is set to "0", the next time the command data is stored in the communication data storage area, it is stored from the start address of the communication data storage area, so it is stored before that. The command data will be overwritten with new command data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to initialize (clear) the communication data storage area when the value of the communication data pointer exceeds "71 (upper limit value)".

Then, after the process of S82, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data pointer update process and also ends the communication data storage process (see FIG. 50).

[Processing at the time of power failure (external)]
Next, the power failure (external) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of (external) processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure (external) process shown in FIG. 52, when the power supply management circuit 93 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage (power failure) supplied to the microprocessor 91, the power failure detection signal is transmitted to the microprocessor 91. Is output to the "XINT" terminal of the above, and is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the data set in all the registers (S91). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data set in the power failure detection port (S92).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection port is in the ON state (S93).

In S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection port is not in the ON state (when the determination in S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt processing permission (S94). Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 101 ends the (external) processing at the time of power failure. It should be noted that these processes performed when S93 is a NO determination correspond to the process of countermeasures against momentary power failure that occurs when the power management circuit 93 momentarily detects a power failure.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is in the ON state (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets that the medal cannot be inserted and sets the stop of the hopper device 51. (S95).

Next, the main CPU 101 saves the currently set value of the stack pointer (SP) in the stack area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S96).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a checksum generation process of the main RAM 103 (S97). This process is performed in an unspecified work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this checksum generation process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the checksum generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets access prohibition to the main RAM 103 (S98). Then, after the processing of S98, the infinite loop processing is performed until the power supply is stopped (until the power supply voltage reaches a voltage at which the main CPU 101 cannot operate).

[Checksum generation process (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the checksum generation process performed in S97 during the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52) will be described. Note that FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum generation process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the current stack pointer (SP) value (the in-use address of the stack area of the gaming RAM area) in the non-standard stack area of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103 (S101). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the non-standard stack area in the stack pointer (S102). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address value (F0H) on the upper side of the RAM address (address of the non-standard stack area) in the Q register (S103). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure occurrence flag (S104).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer with the calculation start address of the sum value in the game RAM area, and sets the sum calculation counter with the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2". Set (S105). The sum calculation counter is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation, and is provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the sum calculation counter set in S105 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the HL register to 0 (sets the value “0”) (S106). By this process, the initial value "0" of the sum value is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an instruction code called a "POP instruction" and stores data (stored value) in an area of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) in the DE register. Read (S107).

When the "POP" instruction is executed, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the lower register of the pair register and specified by the stack pointer. The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address where the updated address is updated by 1 is loaded into the register on the upper side of the pair register. When the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding "2" to the address) is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Therefore, in the processing of S107, the data (memory contents) stored at the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and saved at the address specified by the stack pointer plus "1". The data (memory contents) is loaded into the D register.

After the processing of S107, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation processing (S108). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the DE register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S109). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S110 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S107 and repeats the processes after S107. That is, the processes of S107 to S110 are repeated until the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is completed.

On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S110 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-standard RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S111). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard storage area. Therefore, when the sum calculation counter set in S111 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103, that is, the sum value calculation process of the entire main RAM 103 is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte of the area from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S112).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S113). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S114). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S115).

In S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S115 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing in S112 and repeats the processing after S112. That is, the processes of S112 to S115 are repeated until the process of adding the sum value of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103 to the sum value of the game RAM area is completed.

On the other hand, in S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S115 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the value stored in the HL register when a power failure occurs. As the sum value of, it is stored in the sum value storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S116). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) saved in the non-standard stack area in S101 in the stack pointer (S117). Then, after the processing of S117, the main CPU 101 ends the checksum generation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S98 at the time of power failure (external) processing (see FIG. 52).

[Sum check processing (non-standard)]
Next, the thumb check process performed in S9 during the power-on processing (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the thumb check process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the current stack pointer (SP) value in the non-standard stack area (S121). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the sum value storage area in the stack pointer, and sets the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2" in the sum calculation counter (S122). The sum calculation counter set here is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation (sum value subtraction process), and is provided in the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a sum value (checksum) from the sum value storage area (S123). By this process, the checksum (initial value before subtraction) generated when the power failure occurs is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the "POP" instruction and reads the data (stored value) of the area of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) into the DE register (S124). .. At this time, by executing the "POP" instruction, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register, and the address specified by the stack pointer is used. 1 The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the updated address is loaded into the D register. When the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding 2 addresses) is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S125). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the DE register from the value stored in the HL register (initial value of the sum value or the sum value after the previous subtraction process), and the subtraction is performed. The value is stored in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S126). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S127).

In S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S127 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S124, and repeats the processing after S124. That is, the processes of S124 to S127 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S127 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-standard RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S128). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte of the area from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S129).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S130). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the A register from the value stored in the HL register, and stores the subtracted value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S131). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S132).

In S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S132 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S129, and repeats the processing after S129. That is, the processes of S129 to S132 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S132 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "sum error" in the determination result of the thumb check process. (S133). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the calculated sum value is “0” (S134).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the state (1/0) of the zero flag (bit 6) of the flag register F to determine whether or not the sum value is “0”. In the present embodiment, the sum value becomes "0" when the value of the sum calculation counter set in S128 becomes "0", that is, when the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the main RAM 103. If, the zero flag in the flag register F is set to "1", and if the sum value is not "0", the zero flag in the flag register F is set to "0". Therefore, if "1 (on state)" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F at the time of processing S134, the main CPU 101 determines that the sum value is "0".

In S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is not "0" (when the determination in S134 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is "0" (when the determination in S134 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "power failure" in the determination result (S135). ).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the power failure occurrence flag (S136). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure generation flag is in the state without power failure (off state) (S137).

In S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is in the state of no power interruption (when the determination in S137 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is not in the state without power interruption (when the determination in S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets "normal" in the determination result (S138).

After the processing of S138, if S134 is a NO determination or S137 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 saves the determination result in the thumb check determination result and clears (offs) the power failure occurrence flag (S139). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) saved in the non-standard stack area in S121 to the stack pointer (S140). Then, after the processing of S140, the main CPU 101 ends the thumb check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S10 of the power-on processing (see FIG. 46).

[Main processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main processing (main operation processing) of the pachi-slot machine 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart (hereinafter referred to as a main flow) showing the procedure of the main process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the "at the end of one game" address in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address, the game RAM area Delete (clear) the information up to the final address. The storage area in this range is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input check process for each medal sensor (see FIG. 5), a start switch 79, and the like. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: a value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes a hard latch random number) and a random number value for production used in various lottery related to playability (0 to 65535: a random number value for production used in various lottery related to game playability). 0 to 65535: the value of the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number, 0 to 255: the value of each of the random number registers 2 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number), etc. The random number value is stored in the random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random number value acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, generates an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), expands the hit request flag data, and stores the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. And so on. The details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data for a start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The start command is configured to include parameters (winning combination number, etc.) for specifying the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second interface board control process (S207). The second interface board control process is executed in the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process for outputting, for example, a test signal related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state-based control process (S208). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs at the start of the game among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each game state of the normal advantageous section, and each game state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S209). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, and the stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the game state. And the process of storing "3" in the stop button non-operation counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S210). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 79 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. Each reel is then accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which it is controlled to maintain that constant speed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has been started.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the rotation stop of the corresponding reel based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and sets the number of medals to be paid out based on the determination result. The details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an illegal hit check process (S215). In this process, the main CPU 101 synthesizes the hit request flag (internal winning combination) and the winning operation flag (display combination), and determines the presence or absence of an illegal hit error based on the combination result. The details of the illegal hit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Further, as long as each reel is stopped without causing an erroneous winning by the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72 described later), this illegal hit check process can be omitted from the viewpoint of reducing the control load.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning check / medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating a winning operation command. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the number of credits based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S214, and performs the medal payout process. The details of the winning check / medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a BB check process (S217). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. The details of the BB check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an RT check process (S218). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs RT state transition control based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the effective line. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state-based control process at the end of the game (S219). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs at the end of the game among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed. Then, after the processing of S219 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S201.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the procedure of medal reception / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. Further, the automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

In S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described later.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process, an LED lighting control process for the number of medals inserted, and the like. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). In this process, the main CPU 101 may subtract the value of the automatic insertion medal counter at a time (for example, "3") or may subtract "1" at a time. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is "0" (S224).

In S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S224 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S222 and repeats the processes after S222.

On the other hand, in S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when S224 determines YES), or when S221 determines YES, the main CPU 101 performs medal auxiliary storage. The storage switch check process is performed (S225). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the on / off state of the medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S226). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted based on the result of the medal insertion state check process (S227).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal cannot be inserted (when the determination in S227 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal can be inserted (when the determination in S227 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S228). In this process, the main CPU 101 credits the medal, for example, based on the medal sensor input state, a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally, and when the number of medals inserted exceeds a specified number. Perform processing and so on. The details of the medal insertion check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted or credited based on the result of the medal insertion check process (S229).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S229 that the medal can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S229 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later. On the other hand, in S229, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal cannot be inserted or creditable (when the determination in S229 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S230). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is degaussed), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

After the processing of S230, if S227 is a NO determination or S229 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of inserted medals is the playable start number (S231). In the present embodiment, the number of cards that can be started is 3 regardless of the game state (that is, the game can be started only when 3 cards are inserted).

In S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is the number of playable start numbers (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S234 described later. On the other hand, in S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is not the playable start number (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a medal inserted (S232). ).

In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal has been inserted (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226. On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that no medal has been inserted (NO in S232), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 48 (S233). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of setting confirmation. This makes it possible to check the set values and hall menus (various history data (errors, power failure history, etc.)) regardless of whether the game state is a bonus state (special prize operating state). Cheating can be suppressed. In the setting change confirmation process performed in S233, even if the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state, a setting change command (setting confirmation start) including at least information on the current setting value is generated and stored. Therefore, the command data may be stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Thereby, it may be possible to check whether or not the set value is appropriate (whether or not it is within the range of settings 1 to 6) for each game.

After the processing of S233 or when the determination in S231 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S234).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S234 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S234 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S234, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S234 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S235). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is degaussed), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a timer value (“72” in this embodiment) in the medal monitoring timer (S236). The medal monitoring timer is a timer for monitoring the period until the excited solenoid is degaussed (that is, the period until the select plate 804 moves from the guide position to the ejection position) in the selector 66. (See FIG. 86 described later), for example, when the period until the excited solenoid completes degaussing is 80 ms, a timer value for measuring at least a longer period (“about 80.44 ms”). Is set. That is, the medal monitoring timer actually operates after the start lever 16 is operated (the start switch 79 is turned on) and the control for prohibiting medal acceptance is started when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. Monitor a specific period of time before the acceptance of medals is (physically) banned. As a result, when a medal is inserted in the specific period in combination with the start lever ON flag described later, the medal insertion check 2 process described later, etc., the medal is accidentally swallowed (that is, the medal is inserted). However, it is prevented from being housed in the hopper device 51 without being counted). The value of the medal monitoring timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the selector 66 (mainly the solenoid). Further, as long as the prevention of swallowing of medals is guaranteed, the period until the excited solenoid is completely degaussed can be set to a period shorter than the period until the demagnetization is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag to the ON state (S237). The start lever ON flag is information for identifying whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated (the start switch 79 has been turned on) when the number of medals that can be played has been inserted. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check 2 process (S238). In this process, the main CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the medal insertion check process. The details of the medal insertion check process and the medal insertion check 2 process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is not in the off state (that is, is in the ON state) (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S240). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (when the determination in S240 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S238, and after S238. Repeat the process of.

On the other hand, in S240, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is "0" (when the determination in S240 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and performs the process in the main flow (the process is performed. (See FIG. 56).

[Medal insertion process]
Next, referring to FIG. 59, the medal insertion performed in S222 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) and S265 during the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 60 and 61) described later. The processing will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal insertion process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the medal counter (S241). The medal counter is a counter for counting the number of inserted medals, and is provided in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S242). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. That is, the medal insertion command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 each time one medal is inserted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 turns off the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals included in the LED 82 (see FIG. 6) (S243). Next, the main CPU 101 calculates LED lighting data (lighting control data) corresponding to the number of inserted medals based on the number of inserted medals (value of the medal counter) (S244). In this process, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one, the LED lighting data for lighting only the first LED for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated, and for example, when the number of inserted medals is three. LED lighting data for lighting all of the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated. The method for calculating the LED lighting data will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the calculated LED lighting data to light the corresponding LED for displaying the number of inserted medals (S245). Then, after the processing of S245, the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion processing, and performs the processing in S223 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) or the medal insertion check processing (FIGS. 60 and 61) described later. (See) to S253.

[Medal insertion check process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the medal insertion check process and the medal acceptance / start check process (FIGS. 57 and 58) performed in S228 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58). The medal insertion check 2 process performed in S238 in (see) will be described. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the medal insertion check process. The medal insertion check 2 process is started from S253 of the medal insertion check process, and the processes of S253 to S268 are the same as those in the medal insertion check process. The procedure of the input check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is being replayed (S251).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S251 that the replay is in progress (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process, and performs the medal acceptance / start check process (FIGS. 57 and 57). (Refer to 58), move to S229.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 101 determines that the replay is not in progress (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 101 permits medal acceptance (S252). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven (the solenoid that has been degaussed is excited), and the select plate 804 shifts from the ejection position to the guide position, so that the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 14. The medals are counted and accommodated in the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bet button check process (S253). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) has been operated based on the ON / OFF state of the BET switch 77. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the betting operation is completed based on the result of the betting button check processing in S253 (S254).

In S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation is completed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or the medal insertion check 2 process), and accepts the medal. The process moves to S229 of the start check process (see 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation has not been completed (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state (game medium reception state) at the time of the current processing. Acquires the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S255). The medal sensor input state is information indicating the passing status of the medals received in the medal insertion slot 14 in the selector 66, and is generated based on the detection result of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5) of the selector 66.

In the present embodiment, the medal sensor input state is represented by 1 byte (8 bits) of data, and the detection result of the first medal sensor 806 on the upstream side provided at the exit of the selector 66 in the direction of passing the medal is obtained. It corresponds to the information of bit 0 (“0” or “1”), and the detection result of the second medal sensor 807 on the downstream side corresponds to the information of bit 1 (“0” or “1”). When the passage of the medal is detected by the first medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 0, and when the passage of the medal is detected by the second medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 1. Will be done. Therefore, the medal sensor input state "0000000000B" indicates the state before or after passing the medal (at the time of passing), and the medal sensor input state "00000001B" indicates the state at the start of passing the medal, and the medal sensor input state "0000001B". "00000011B" indicates a state in which the medal is passing, and the medal sensor input state "00000010B" indicates a state immediately before the completion of passing the medal.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S256).

In S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has not changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is NO), the main CPU 101 is described in S262, which will be described later. Perform processing.

On the other hand, in S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag. If is on, the start lever ON flag is set to the off state (S257). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 inserts medals in a specific period from when the start operation is performed and the control for prohibiting medal acceptance is started until the medal acceptance is actually (physically) prohibited. When it is detected, a process of invalidating the start operation is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 generates a normal value (normal change value) of the medal sensor input state obtained at the time of the current processing by arithmetic processing based on the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S258).

In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "00000000000B" (when both the first and second medal sensors have not detected medals), it is regarded as a normal change value of the medal sensor input state. When "00000001B" (when the first medal sensor detects medals and the second medal sensor does not detect medals) is generated and the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000001B", the medal sensor "00000011B" (when both the first and second medal sensors are medal detection) is generated as a normal change value of the input state. Further, in this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "00000011B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000010B" (the first medal sensor has not detected a medal, and the second (When the medal sensor is medal detection) is generated, and when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000010B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000000000B" (first and second medals). If both sensors do not detect medals) is generated.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (S259). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal retrograde error has occurred, and if the determination condition of S259 is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal retrograde error has occurred.

In S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the processing of S263 described later. Do.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 101 is at the time of the current processing. It is determined whether or not the medal sensor input state of the above is the state at the time of passing the medal (“00000000B”) (S260). In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current process is the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S264 described later.

In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal passing check timer (S261). The time set in the medal passage check timer in this process can be set to any time as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the medal has passed the selector 66. Further, the timer value set in this process may be changed according to, for example, the medal sensor input state at the time of the current process.

After the processing of S261 or when the determination of S256 is NO, the main CPU 101 indicates whether the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the medal passing state (“000000111B”) and the medal passing check timer is stopped. (S262). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal passing error (inserted medal passing time error) has occurred, and if the determination condition of S262 is satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S262 that the determination condition of S262 is not satisfied (when the determination in S262 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253 and repeats the processes after S253.

On the other hand, in S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is satisfied (when S262 is a YES determination), or when S259 is a NO determination, that is, a medal passing error or a medal retrograde error has occurred. If it is determined, the main CPU 101 performs error processing (S263). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when an error occurs, such as an error command generation and storage process. The details of error processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 described later. Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

Here, returning to the process of S260 again, if S260 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified number of medals (three medals in this embodiment) have been inserted (S264). ..

In S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that the specified number of medals have not been inserted (when the determination in S264 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process described with reference to FIG. 59 (S265). Then, after the processing of S265, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

On the other hand, in S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that a specified number of medals have already been inserted (when the determination in S264 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (S266). ). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S267). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of credits of the medal is the upper limit value (50 in the present embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (S268).

In S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S268 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253 and repeats the processes after S253. On the other hand, in S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is the upper limit value (when the determination in S268 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or medal insertion check 2 process). , The process is transferred to S229 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

[Error handling]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, for example, the error processing performed in S263 during the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an error processing procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 turns off the medal solenoid (S271). Specifically, the main CPU 101 stops driving the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the medal payout number display data (S272). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error table setting process (S273).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires an error factor (S274). The error factor acquired in this process changes according to the process in which the error process currently being processed is read. The error factors targeted in this embodiment include "hopper empty error", "hopper jam error", "inserted medal passing count error", "inserted medal passing check error", and "inserted medal passing check error". "Insert medal passing time error", "Insert medal retrograde error", "Insert medal auxiliary storage full error", "Illegal hit error" are specified. For example, when the error process is read after the process of S259 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal retrograde error (Cr)" is acquired as an error factor in this process. Further, for example, when the error process is read after the process of S262 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal passing time error (CE)" is acquired as an error factor in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires error display data from the error table and the error cause (S275). For example, when the error factor is "insertion medal retrograde error (Cr)", the 1-byte data "001001110B" is used as the error display data to be output to the upper digit 7-segment LED among the 2-digit 7-segment LEDs in this process. Is acquired, and 1-byte data “000001001B” is acquired as error display data to be output to the lower digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the two characters "Cr" are displayed as error information on the two-digit 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (generation) generation and storage process (S276). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command when an error occurs, which is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command when an error occurs stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command when an error occurs includes a parameter indicating that an error has occurred.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process for an interrupt time (1.1172 ms) (S277). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the error has been cleared (S278).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S278 that the error has not been cleared (when the determination in S278 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S277 and repeats the processes after S277.

On the other hand, in S278, when the main CPU 101 determines that the error has been cleared (when the determination in S278 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs an error factor clearing process (S279). This process is performed in a non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restoration process of the payout number display data of the medals saved in S272 (S280).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (release) generation and storage process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command at the time of error cancellation to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command at the time of canceling the error stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command at the time of error cancellation includes a parameter indicating error cancellation. Then, after the processing of S281, the main CPU 101 ends the error processing, and shifts the processing to, for example, S253 during the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61). In the error release, the generated error factor is released, and the error state is released by pressing the reset switch 76.

[Random value acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the random number value acquisition process performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number value acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires a hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the acquired random number value as a random number value for internal winning combination lottery, and uses a random number value storage area (not) in the main RAM 103. Save in (shown) (S291).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a soft latch random number acquisition register set process for generating soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535 or 0 to 255) in the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the acquisition number (for example, 7) of the soft latch random numbers (S293). The number of acquisitions can be appropriately increased or decreased according to the number of lottery that can be performed in one game.

Next, the main CPU 101 collectively acquires the number of acquired soft latch random numbers, and stores the acquired number of soft latch random numbers in the random number value storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random numbers (effect random number values) acquired from the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 are hard latch random numbers (hard latch random numbers) acquired from the random number register 0 of the random number circuit in the random number value storage area. The random number value for the internal winning combination lottery) is stored in an area different from the area where it is stored. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 101 ends the random number value acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). In the present embodiment, in order to store one 2-byte random number (random number value for internal winning combination lottery) and six 1-byte random numbers (random number value for production), the main RAM 103 has an 8-byte storage area. It is allocated as a random number storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the soft latch random number of the 2-byte random number is not used.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S301). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the set value (any of 1 to 6) of the current game and the number of inserted medals (3 in the present embodiment).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for general games (see the internal lottery table in the “RT0” state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) and the number of lottery (98 times in this embodiment) (S302). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is in operation (S303). When the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is not in operation (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S305 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S303 that the main CPU 101 is operating the RB (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 101 has an internal lottery table for RB (see the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 18) and The number of lottery (7 times in this embodiment) is set (S304). In this process, the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for general games set in S302 are overwritten with the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for RB.

After the processing of S304 or when the determination in S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data related to the address) of the lottery target combination from the set internal lottery table, and updates the lottery table address (S305).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data is RT state-specific data (S306). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the lottery value selection table (not shown) for each RT state. ..

In S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the RT state-specific data (when the determination in S306 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described later. On the other hand, in S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the RT state-specific data (when the determination in S306 is YES), the main CPU 101 selects data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. Is acquired, and the acquired selection data is set in the determination data (S307).

After the processing of S307 or when the determination in S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data of the lottery target combination is the data for each setting (S308). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the internal lottery value table (not shown) for each setting.

In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the setting-specific data (when the determination in S308 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, in S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each setting (when the determination in S308 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds the set value data (any of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set in the determination data (S309). The set value data added to the determination data in this process is the data associated with the set value, but the set value data "0" to "5" are not the values of the set value itself, but are "0" to "5", respectively. It is the data corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6".

After the processing of S309 or when the determination in S308 is NO, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area in which the lottery value of the lottery target combination is stored based on the set determination data (address data), and sets the address to the lottery value. The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

For example, in the case of an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to both the RT state and the set value, the lottery value is referred to both the RT state lottery value selection table and the internal lottery value table for each setting. Is obtained. That is, for example, in an internal lottery table for a general game state (see FIGS. 16 and 17), an internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip") in which the lottery value fluctuates when the RT state is different based on the RT0 state. For internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip"), the lottery value is changed according to the game state (RT1 to RT5 state), and the lottery value is changed when the set value is different. The lottery value is changed according to the set value (settings 1 to 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value (any of 0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery execution process (S312). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the random number value acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the lottery target combination). In this lottery execution process, when the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (overflow), it is determined that the lottery target combination has been won (the lottery target combination has been determined as the internal winning combination). To.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores a value obtained by adding the lottery value to the random number value (random number value after the lottery execution) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery execution process has won (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning is won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table and refers to the winning request flag status (corresponding to the winning internal winning combination). For example, the special prize winning number (that is, information that can identify the type of the winning bonus combination) and the small winning combination winning number (that is, the winning small winning combination or replay combination) corresponding to "No." in FIGS. 16 to 18 The value of (information that can identify the type)) is acquired (S315). Then, after the processing of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery has not been won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is NO), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery target combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and draws. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (S317).

In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S317 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S305 and repeats the processes after S305.

On the other hand, in S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S317 is YES), that is, when the internal winning combination is "missing", the main CPU 101 determines. Set the loss status (S318). The "missing status" corresponds to the winning request flag status in which both the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number are "0". Then, after the processing of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 extracts a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number based on the winning request flag status acquired by the internal lottery process, and extracts the extracted special winning winning number and the small winning combination winning number in the main RAM 103. It is stored in the winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

In the present embodiment, the special prize winning numbers "1" to "4" are associated with the internal winning combinations "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4", respectively. In addition, the small winning combination "1" to "23" are associated with the internal winning combination "F_fixed lip" to "F_shot lip" (see FIG. 23), and the small winning combination numbers "24" to "23" are associated with each other. The internal winning combinations "F_chance eye A1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" are associated with "61" (see FIG. 24), and the small winning combinations "62" to "68" are associated with each other. Internal winning combinations "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC2" are associated with each other (see FIG. 23). Then, the value of the winning request flag status is composed of a value obtained by multiplying the special prize number indicating these values by the value of the special prize winning number and adding the small winning combination winning number. Therefore, in the process of S321, in order to extract the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number from the winning request flag status value, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 divides the winning request flag status value by the special winning number. This is an example of data compression for identifying the internal winning combination, and other data structures can be appropriately adopted as long as the special prize winning number and the small winning combination can be extracted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won based on the extracted small winning combination winning number (S322). In this process, if the small winning combination winning number is any of 1 to 68, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won, and if the small winning combination winning number is 0, , The main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has not been won.

In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has not been won (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S331 described later. On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small winning combination winning number as the initial value of the subtraction result ( S323).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a hit request flag table (not shown) (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0" (S326).

In S326, when the main CPU 101 determines that the subtraction result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the bit number calculation process (S327). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the small winning combination winning number specified in the hit request flag table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process of S328, the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit specified in the hit request flag table is calculated.

The above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 are repeated as many times as the number of small winning combination winning numbers. When the processing of S325 to S328 is repeated a plurality of times, the number of blocks acquired in the bit number calculation processing of S327 and S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data for each block are stored in another storage area. Will be done. Further, the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processing of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit are information (on-bit information) for designating the storage destination of the hit request flag data.

Here, returning to the processing of S326 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the hit request flag storage area ( (Internal winning combination storage area) is set (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 checks (updates) the hit request flag based on the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes (on-bit information) of the hit request flag data for each block. Set only the storage area. Specifically, the address of the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated) is stored in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a compressed data storage process (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated). The details of the compressed data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

After the processing of S330 or when the determination in S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26) and determines whether or not there is a carry-over combination (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the bonus combination (BB1 to BB4) based on the special prize winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Is determined (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has not been won (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process and shifts the process to S206 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has been won (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the winning special prize winning number in the carry-over combination storage area (S333).

After the processing of S333 or when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the special prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area, and sets the RT state to RT5. Set to the state (S334). Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting processing and shifts the processing to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Compressed data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, for example, the compressed data processing performed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the compressed data storage process.

The compressed data storage process shown in FIG. 66 is executed not only in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) but also in S649 during the symbol code acquisition process (see FIG. 68 described later) described later. In the compressed data storage process executed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65), the flag data to be processed is the hit request flag data (flag data related to the winning combination), but the symbol code acquisition process described later In the compressed data storage process executed in S649 (see FIG. 68 described later), the flag data to be processed is the winning operation flag data (flag data related to the winning combination). Then, both processes are the same except that the types of flag data to be processed are different.

Therefore, in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the flag data to be processed is referred to as “process target flag data”, and the flag table to be processed is referred to as “process target flag table”. In addition, in accordance with this description, in the following description of the compressed data storage process, the winning request flag data or the winning operation flag data is referred to as "processing target flag data", and the winning request flag table or the symbol-corresponding winning operation table described later is used. (Not shown) is referred to as a "process target flag table".

First, the main CPU 101 sets the storage destination check bit (S341). In this process, the storage destination check bit is stored in a register other than the A register.

The storage destination check bit is 1-byte data for designating a block that is a storage destination (transfer destination) of the processing target flag data. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area are both composed of two blocks (blocks of storage areas 1 to 8 and blocks of storage area 9). Then, for example, when the internal winning combination "F_JAC1-1" is determined, the number of blocks of the storage destination becomes "2". Therefore, in the process of S341, "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit. The bit 0 value (1/0) of this 1-byte data corresponds to the presence or absence of a storage destination in the blocks of the storage areas 1 to 8, and the bit 1 value (1/0) corresponds to the block of the storage area 9. Corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the transfer counter in byte units to "8" (S342). In the present embodiment, since the number of bytes of at least one block is "8", "8" is set as the initial value of the transfer counter.

Next, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted from the storage destination check bit (S343). The transfer instruction bit corresponds to the data of bit 0 in the storage destination check bit, and in the processing of S343, the storage destination check bit stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once (for 1 bit). As a result, the transfer instruction bit is extracted. Specifically, when the 1-byte register (register other than the A register) in which the storage destination check bit is stored is shifted to the right once, the data stored in bits 7 to 1 are changed to bits 6 to 0, respectively. As it moves, the data of bit 0 before the shift is output. Then, the data output by this shift process becomes the value of the transfer instruction bit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit (S344). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit, the transfer is performed in the first (corresponding to the first block of the storage area) and the second (corresponding to the second block of the storage area) determination process of S344. It will be judged that there is an instruction.

In S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S344 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S354 described later.

On the other hand, in S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction (when the determination in S344 is YES), the main CPU 101 acquires byte unit storage destination designation information from the processing target flag table (S345). In this process, the transfer destination is stored at the start address of the area in which the flag data of the process target combination (winning combination or winning combination) in the processing target flag table is stored as the byte unit storage destination specification information. Byte data is retrieved.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) to be referred to in the processing target flag table (S346). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets an address that specifies the head storage area of the block that is the storage (transfer) destination of the processing target flag data as the initial address. For example, in the processing of the first block, the address of the storage area 1 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346, and in the processing of the second block, the address of the storage area 9 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit from the byte unit storage destination designation information (S347). The transfer instruction bit referred to here corresponds to bit 0 of the byte unit storage destination specification information, and in the processing of S347, the byte unit storage destination specification information stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once. Extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit (outputs bit 0 data).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the transfer instruction bit extracted in the process of S347 (S348). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000001B" is set as the byte unit storage destination designation information, the bit 1 data "1" is processed in S347 of the first time (storage area 1 of the first block or storage area 9 of the second block). Is output as the value of the transfer instruction bit, and it is determined that there is a transfer instruction. However, in the second to eighth processes of S347, it is determined that there is no transfer instruction.

In S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S351 described later.

On the other hand, in S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is YES), the main CPU 101 is the processing target flag stored in the address in the currently set processing target flag table. The data (winning request flag data or winning operation flag data) is transferred (copied) to the designated storage area (S349).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) to be referred to in the processing target flag table (S350).

After the processing of S350 or when the determination in S348 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs an address update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) that specifies a storage area to be a storage destination of the processing target flag data (S351). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the transfer counter (S352).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the transfer counter is "0" (S353). In S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is not "0" (when the determination in S353 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S347 and repeats the processing after S347.

On the other hand, in S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is "0" (when the determination in S353 is YES), does the main CPU 101 have a transfer instruction target remaining in the current storage destination check bit? Whether or not it is determined (S354). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit at the time of the current process. Then, when the bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit, that is, when the block to be processed exists, the main CPU 101 gives a transfer instruction to the current storage destination check bit. Determine that the target remains.

In S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S342, and the process after S342. repeat. On the other hand, in S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target does not remain in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the compressed data storage process and performs the process. For example, it is moved to S331 in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S212 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pull-in priority storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets "3" to the number of search reels (S621). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S622). In this process, a pull-in priority table (not shown) is selected based on the internal winning combination and the operation stop button.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage area selection process (S623). In this process, the pull-in priority data storage area of the reel to be searched is selected. Next, the main CPU 101 sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (number of times) (S624).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S625). In this process, the symbol code is acquired by referring to the winning operation flag storage area and the symbol code storage area corresponding to the number of symbol checks. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation process (S626). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating the winning operation flag data. The details of the logical product calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S627). In this process, the main CPU 101 has the bit set to "1" in the winning operation flag (winning combination) storage area (see FIG. 25), and the bit is set to "1" in the winning request flag storage area. The attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the attraction priority table (not shown) for the winning combination. The details of the pull-in priority acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S628). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of main reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding main reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority. By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the pull-in priority storage area (S629). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a pull-in priority data storage area for the next check symbol. Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S630). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S631).

In S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S631 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S625 and repeats the processes after S625. On the other hand, in S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S631 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a search target reel change process (S632).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of search reels (S633). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of search reels is "0", that is, whether or not the above-mentioned series of processes has been performed on all the main reels (S634).

In S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is not "0" (when the determination in S634 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S622 and repeats the processes after S622. On the other hand, in S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is "0" (when the determination in S634 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. (Refer to 56), move to S213.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S625 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol code acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 clears the winning operation flag storage area (S641). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets "0" in all the storage areas in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the first reel symbol arrangement table (not shown) (S642).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (S643).

In S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (when the determination in S643 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is not stopped (when the determination in S643 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the second reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S644). In this process, the first reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S642 is overwritten by the second reel symbol arrangement table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (S645).

In S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (when the determination in S645 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is not stopped (when the determination in S645 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the third reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S646). In this process, the second reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S644 is overwritten by the third reel symbol arrangement table.

After the processing of S646, or when S643 or S645 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol check process at the time of executing the stop operation on the reel to be stopped controlled, and corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the symbol acquired by the symbol check process. Acquire a winning operation table (not shown) (S647). The symbol-corresponding winning operation table is a table for identifying the type of winning combination (symbol combination) that can be won if the corresponding symbol stops on the effective line in the reel to be stopped and controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area (S648). Next, the main CPU 101 performs the compressed data storage process described with reference to FIG. 66 (S649). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the winning operation flag data that can be won in the symbol-corresponding winning operation table to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area.

For example, when the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped and the symbol located on the effective line during the stop operation is "blank", the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be won are FIGS. 19 to 22. As shown in, "S_XD lip", "S_bar lip 2", "S_RT1 transition lip", and "S_special role 1".

After the processing of S649, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area updated by the compressed data storage processing, sets the symbol code storage area, and sets the data length of the winning operation flag storage area (9 bytes in this embodiment). Is set (S650). Then, after the processing of S650, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol code acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S626 of the pull-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[Logical product operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, for example, the logical product calculation process performed in S626 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the logical product calculation process. The logical product calculation process shown in FIG. 69 is performed not only in S626 in the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) but also in S686 in the attraction priority acquisition process (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later). Is also executed.

In the logical product calculation process executed in S626 during the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67), the two data to be ANDed are stored in the winning operation flag set in S650 during the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process. The data of the area and the data of the symbol code storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "9" of the data length (9 bytes) set in S650 during the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process corresponds to the "number of logical products" described later.

On the other hand, in the logical product calculation process executed in S686 in the pull-in priority acquisition process described later (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later), the two data to be logically ANDed are stored in the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area. Data and data of the winning operation flag storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag described later corresponds to the "logical product number" described later.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the logical product source data (for example, the data of the symbol code storage area) (S661). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product operation of the logical product source data and the logical product destination data (for example, data in the winning operation flag storage area), and saves the calculation result as the logical product destination data (S662).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product source data to be acquired (S663). Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product destination data to be referred to (S664).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of logical products (S665). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of logical products is "0" (S666).

In S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is not "0" (when the determination in S666 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S661 and repeats the processes after S661. On the other hand, in S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is "0" (when the determination in S666 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the logical product calculation process and stores the process, for example, in the pull-in priority order. The process moves to S627 of the process (see FIG. 67).

[Pull-in priority acquisition process]
Next, the attraction priority acquisition process performed in S627 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. 70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the attraction priority acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is time to check the right reel 3R (specific display column) (S671).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S671 that it is not the time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S671, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is the time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is YES), the main CPU 101 "ANY combination" in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not (a combination of predetermined symbols) is included (S672). The "ANY combination" here means a combination in which the winning is confirmed regardless of at least the stop symbol of the right reel 3R (at least the winning combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 3R is an arbitrary symbol). However, in this embodiment, the "ANY role" is not defined.

In S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination does not include the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination includes the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines that the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. The storage area corresponding to the "combination" is masked (S673). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "1" in the bit corresponding to the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. In addition, when "ANY combination" is not specified in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination, the processing of S671 to S673 may be unnecessary. Further, when the "ANY combination" defines the stop symbol of the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C as an arbitrary symbol, the processing of S672 and S673 is performed even when the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C is checked. It may be performed (the same applies to the processes of S681 to S683 described later).

After the processing of S673, or when S671 or S672 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) by adding "1" to the address of the last storage area. Is set, the stop prohibition data is set, and the winning operation flag data length (data length of the winning operation flag storage area: 9 bytes in this embodiment) is set (S674). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the stock button operation counter and the stop button operation state (S675). The stop button operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has been detected. Further, the operation stop button operation state is acquired by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the address of the set winning operation flag storage area by 1 (S676). Next, the main CPU 101 generates hit request flag data from the set winning operation flag storage area and the corresponding hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25), and based on the generated hit request flag data. Generate a prohibited winning operating position (S677).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (S678).

In S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is not the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is YES), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the value of the third stop. Whether or not it is determined (S679).

In S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later. On the other hand, in S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is NO), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is a value (S680).

In S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is YES), whether or not the main CPU 101 is after the right reel 3R is stopped. (S681).

In S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has been stopped (YES in S681), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has not been stopped (when the determination in S681 is NO), the main CPU 101 has a flag that the hit request flag may be interfered with by the "ANY combination". It is determined whether or not (whether or not "ANY role" is not included in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination) (S682).

In S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is not a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is NO), the main CPU 101 currently checks "ANY". It is determined whether or not it is time to check the hit request flag including the "combination" (S683).

In S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is the time to check the hit request flag including the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S683 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later.

On the other hand, in S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is not the time to check the hit request flag including "ANY combination" (when S683 is NO determination), when S678 or S680 is NO determination, or S681. Alternatively, when the determination in S682 is YES, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the winning operation flag data length (S684). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning operation flag data length is “0” (S685).

In S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is not "0" (when the determination in S685 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S676 and repeats the processing after S676.

On the other hand, in S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is "0" (when the determination in S685 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a stop control pull-in request flag setting process (S686). .. In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 performs the logical product operation process described with reference to FIG. 69. In the logical product operation process executed in the process of S686, as described above, the data of the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area is set in the "logical product destination data", and the data of the winning operation flag storage area is set. It is set in the "logical product source data", and the number of bytes "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag is set in the "logical product count". The RT operation combination display flag is a storage area in which the symbol combination related to the RT transition is defined in the winning operation flag storage area, and in the present embodiment, only the storage area 1 is provided as shown in FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the pull-in priority table address storage area and acquires the pull-in priority table (S687). In this process, the initial value "1 (001H)" of the pull-in priority data is set at the currently set address, and one of the pull-in priority tables is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (000H) (S688).

In S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (when the determination in S688 is YES), the main CPU 101 uses S705, which will be described later. Perform the processing of. On the other hand, in S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is not the end code (when the determination in S688 is NO), the main CPU 101 operates the winning operation. The flag storage area is set (S689).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data based on the attraction priority table stored in the currently set address (S690). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the block counter of the pull-in priority table (S691).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks of the attraction priority table, and adds 1 (+1 update) to the address of the attraction priority table to be referred to (S692).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires check data based on the updated pull-in priority table address, and extracts check bits from the check data (S693).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the extracted check bit is “1” (S694).

In S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is not "1" (when the determination in S694 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is "1" (when the determination in S694 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the reference pull-in priority table. (+1 update), and based on the updated address, the determination data is acquired from the pull-in priority table (S695).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target based on the determination data acquired in S695 (S696). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the currently acquired winning operation flag data with the determination data, determines whether or not the former corresponds to the latter, and the former corresponds to the latter. In that case, it is determined that the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target.

In S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is not the determination target (when the determination in S696 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is the determination target (when the determination in S696 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the attraction priority data (S697). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates (overwrites) the currently set attraction priority data with the attraction priority data associated with the determination data acquired in S697.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the check data (S698). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the check data by one bit to the right (direction from bit 7 to bit 0). In this process, "0" is set in bit 7 of the check data after the shift.

After the processing of S698, or when S694 or S696 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a bit to be checked (a bit in which "1" is set) in the check data (S699).

In S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no bit to be checked in the check data (when the determination in S699 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S702 described later. On the other hand, in S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that the check data has a bit to be checked (when the determination in S699 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be checked (+1 update). ), And the number of checks is subtracted by 1 (S700).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S701). When the main CPU 101 determines in S701 that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S701 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S698 and repeats the processes after S698.

On the other hand, in S701, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S701 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently referred to. Add and update the address of the winning operation flag storage area, and subtract 1 from the block counter value (S702). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the block counter is "0" (S703).

In S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is not "0" (when the determination in S703 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S692 and repeats the processes after S692.

On the other hand, in S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is "0" (when the determination in S703 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the pull-in priority table to be referred to (+1 update). ) (S704). Then, after the processing of S704, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S688, and repeats the processing after S688.

Here, returning to the processing of S679, S683 or S688 again, if S679, S683 or S688 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 uses the attraction order data set at this time as the final attraction priority data. Set (S705). If S679 or S683 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets "0 (00H)" as the final pull-in priority data. In this case, since the end code is assigned to the attraction priority data "0 (00H)", no attraction data (stop prohibition) is set. Then, after the processing of S705, the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority acquisition process, and shifts the process to S628 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S711). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs the port output process of the reel stop enable signal OFF data. Further, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not the speed has reached a "constant speed") (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels are not "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S712.

On the other hand, in S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal ON process (S713). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs port output process of reel stop enable signal ON data. Further, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S714).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S714 that the valid stop button is not pressed (when the determination in S714 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S713 and repeats the processes after S713. On the other hand, in S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S714 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28), and the stop button is not yet pressed. The value of the operation counter is subtracted by 1 (S715).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S716). Further, in this process, the address (start address) set process of the rotation cylinder control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S717). Similar to S711, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop selection process (S719). Although detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the addition result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the symbol code storage process (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the scheduled stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) (S722). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) based on the value of the stop button non-operation counter, and the value of the stop button non-operation counter is set. When it is "0", it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop.

In S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the control change process (S723). In this process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position. Next, the main CPU 101 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 67 (S724).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a stop interval remaining time standby process (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process until a predetermined reel stop interval time set in advance elapses. Then, after the processing of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S711, and repeats the processing after S711.

Here, returning to the process of S722 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S722 that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is YES), the main CPU 101 excites all the reels. Determines whether or not is in the stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is not in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

On the other hand, in S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is YES), the main CPU 101 keeps the stop button operated for the third stop in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (the stop button is not released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation remains in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, in S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation is not in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process. Move to S214 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Prize search process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the winning search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning search process.

First, the main CPU 101 transfers and stores the data of each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) to the corresponding storage area of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S761). .. Then, at the end of this process, the last address of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout number data table (not shown) that defines the payout number (see FIGS. 19 to 22) of the winning combination (symbol combination) in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of payout number tables (for example, "4" in this embodiment) as the initial value of the winning search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the number of medals to be paid out (in this embodiment, any one of 1, 2, 5, and 8) in the C register based on the address set in the HL register. , The determination target data is set in the A register, and "2" is added (+2 update) to the address set in the HL register (S764). In the payout number data table, the data of the payout number of medals is defined as, for example, "payout number (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0". Further, in the following, the data "0" in the data "number of medals to be paid out (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0" set in the C register will be referred to as "determination bit". This determination bit is information indicating whether or not the block is a determination target block of the winning search.

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the data of the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the block is a determination target block based on the value of the extracted determination bit (S766). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is a determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is “1”. In the present embodiment, regardless of the number of medals to be paid out, the value of the determination bit is always defined as "0", so that the processing of S766 is always a NO determination.

In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S768 described later. On the other hand, in S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register (-). 1 update) (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination in S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data of the storage area specified by the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result is a prize based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a prize.

In S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is not a prize (when the determination in S769 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S776 described later. On the other hand, in S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a winning result (when the determination in S769 is YES), the main CPU 101 has three current games (a game in which the number of medals bet is three). ) (S770).

In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described later. On the other hand, in S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is not a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is NO), the main CPU 101 pays out a two-card game (a game in which the number of medals bet is two). The number of sheets is set in the C register (S771). In this embodiment, since there is no two-card game, the processing of S770 and S771 becomes unnecessary.

After the processing of S771 or when the determination in S770 is YES, the main CPU 101 updates the number of payouts (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register to the current value of the winning number counter, and sets the added value to the number of payouts.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (S773).

In S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S775 described later. On the other hand, in S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is not less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum number of payouts "15" to the number of payouts. (S774).

After the processing of S774 or when the determination in S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

After the processing of S775 or when the determination in S769 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another prize (S776). In S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is another prize (when the determination in S776 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769 and repeats the processes after S769.

On the other hand, in S7776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no other prize (when the determination in S776 is NO), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (updates -1) the value of the prize search counter (S777). For example, when there is only one effective line, a plurality of small winning combinations will not be won in duplicate, so the determination process of S776 will always be a NO determination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning search counter is "0" (S778).

In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is not "0" (when the determination in S778 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S764 and repeats the processing after S764. On the other hand, in S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is "0" (when the determination in S778 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning search process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 56) Move to the process of S215 in.

[Illegal hit check processing]
Next, the illegal hit check process performed in S215 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the illegal hit check process. An illegal hit is a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number (internal winning combination) that are drawn by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64) and stored in the winning number storage area by the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65). Based on this, it is a term indicating that the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R have stopped on the effective line with a combination of symbols that cannot be established (symbol combination is not established).

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S781). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the size of the winning operation flag storage area (the number of bytes, “9” in the present embodiment) to the value of the check counter (S782).

Next, the main CPU 101 is based on the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently set, and the internal winning combination stored in the storage area in the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) corresponding to the address. Data (hit request flag data) is acquired (S783). Next, the main CPU 101 synthesizes the winning combination data (winning operation flag data) stored at the address of the currently set winning operation flag storage area and the internal winning combination data (winning request flag data) ( S784).

In this synthesis process, the main CPU 101 first obtains the exclusive OR of the winning combination data (winning operation flag data) and the internal winning combination data (winning request flag data). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains the logical product of the calculated exclusive OR calculation result and the winning combination data (winning operation flag data), and uses the calculated logical product as the synthesis result. If no illegal hit error has occurred, the value of this synthesis result will be "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an illegal hit error has occurred based on the result of the synthesis process of S784 (S785).

In S785, when the main CPU 101 determines that an illegal hit error has not occurred (NO in S785), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be referred to by +1 (S786). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the check counter (S787). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the check counter is "0" (S788).

In S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is not "0" (when the determination in S788 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S783 and repeats the processes after S783. On the other hand, in S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is "0" (when the determination in S788 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S216 in.

Here, returning to the processing of S785 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S785 that an illegal hit error has occurred (when the determination in S785 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the error processing described with reference to FIG. 62. (S789). By this processing, the two-character "EE" indicating the occurrence of an illegal hit error is displayed as error information on the 2-digit 7-segment LED (both for displaying the number of payouts and for displaying the error) included in the information display 6. Error display data is output. The state in which the illegal hit error occurs (error state) is released by pressing the reset switch 76 (see FIG. 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the winning number counter and the data of the hit request flag storage area (S790). Then, after the processing of S790, the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the configuration of the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) is the same as that of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), so that the winning operation flag The winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area arranged in the main RAM 103 at the time of combining the combination of the storage area combination and the internal winning combination can have the same configuration. Therefore, the calculation result of S784 in the illegal hit check process of the present embodiment (the result of synthesizing the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination) is simply a logical product of the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination. It is obtained by executing (for example, executing with the "AND" instruction). As a result, in the present embodiment, the illegal hit check process can be made more efficient and simplified, the free space of the main control program can be secured (increased), and the increased free space can be used for playability. It becomes possible to increase.

[Prize check / medal payout process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the winning check / medal payout process performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning check / medal payout processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the winning operation command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The winning operation command is configured to include a parameter for specifying a winning operation flag (display combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S802). By this process, the winning operation command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is "0" (when the determination in S803 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and performs the process in the main flow (when the winning check / medal payout process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S803 is NO), the main CPU 101 has the maximum number of medals credited (stored). In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number is 50 or more (S804).

In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (when the determination in S804 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (updates +1). S805). The added value of the credit counter is displayed by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout number check process (S806). The details of the medal payout number check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (S807). In S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal payout has been completed (when the determination in S807 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S217.

On the other hand, in S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the payout of medals has not been completed (when the determination in S807 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a payout interval standby process (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until the preset medal payout interval time (60.33 msec in this embodiment: 54 cycles of the interrupt process (1.1172 msec cycle) described later with reference to FIG. 79) elapses. Wait. Then, after the processing of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S803, and repeats the processing after S803.

Here, returning to the process of S804 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S804 that the number of credits for medals is equal to or greater than the upper limit (50) (when the determination in S804 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines. The medal payout process is performed (S809). By this process, medals that are not stored as the number of credits are paid out. In the process of S809, the processes of S806 to 806 may be repeated every time one medal is paid out until the payout of medals is completed. Then, after the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Check process for paying out medals]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the medal payout number check process performed in S806 during the winning check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75) will be described. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal payout number check process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the medal OUT counter (S811). The medal OUT counter is a counter for counting the number of times the medal is paid out. Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the payout number counter (S812). The payout number counter is a counter for counting the payout number of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number 7SEG display process (S813). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process of displaying the value of the payout number counter by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the payout number included in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process of the winning combination end number counter (S814). In addition, the bonus combination will win a prize in the counter for the number of end-of-roles (combinations "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" are available). Then, when the bonus game starts, the number of payouts that can be paid out in the bonus game is set (see Fig. 77 below), the remaining number of medals to be paid out during the bonus game is counted, and the end of the bonus game is completed. It is a counter for making a judgment (see S822 of FIG. 77 described later). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the value of the combination end number counter with the lower limit value “0”, and if the value of the combination end number counter is larger than the lower limit value “0”, the combination end number counter. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (updated by -1), and when the value of the winning combination end number counter is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the value of the winning combination ending number counter is held at "0". The number of payouts set in the combination end number counter does not mean the number actually paid out to the player. For example, 240 pieces are set in the combination end number counter and the combination end number counter is 240. If 15 medals are paid out in this state, the actual number of medals to be paid out will be 255. The number of counters for the end of the combination is set to "0" after 240 sheets are paid out, and thereafter, the lower limit of the value of the counter for the number of end of the combination is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the value of the winning number counter by 1 (S815).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a credit information command generation process (S816). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the credit information command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The credit information command is configured to include a parameter for specifying the number of credits for medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S817). By this process, the credit information command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the process of S817, the main CPU 101 ends the medal payout number check process, and shifts the process to the process of S807 during the winning check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75).

[BB check process]
Next, the BB check process performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Note that FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BB check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state (S821). In S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not the bonus state (when the determination in S821 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S831 described later.

On the other hand, in S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is the bonus state (when the determination in S821 is YES), is the main CPU 101 having a value of "0" or less for the number of consecutive ends? Whether or not it is determined (S822). In S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is not "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 56) Move to the process of S218 in.

On the other hand, in S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus end processing (S823). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears various information in the bonus state. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT4 state flag to the ON state (S824). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state after the end of the bonus state to the RT4 state. Then, after the processing of S824, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

Here, returning to the processing of S821 again, when S821 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 uses the symbol combination related to the BB combination (combination "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB"". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not "C_blue different color BB" symbol combination) is displayed (S825). When the main CPU 101 determines in S825 that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not displayed (when the determination in S825 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move on to the processing of S218 inside.

On the other hand, in S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is displayed (when the determination in S825 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus operation time processing (S826). In this process, various processes necessary for starting the operation of the bonus, such as setting the bonus state in the game state of the next game, are performed. Next, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (the number of payouts that triggers the end of the bonus: "240" in BB1 and BB2, and "165" in BB3 and BB4) in the value of the combination end number counter (in this embodiment). S827). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT5 state flag to the off state (S828). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the RT state before the start of the bonus state. Then, after the processing of S828, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check process performed in S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Note that FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the RT check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S831). In S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT5 state (inter-flag state). Is determined (S832). In S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of.

On the other hand, in S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT state is the RT3 state (S833). When the main CPU 101 determines in S833 that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S837.

On the other hand, in S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the RT game number counter (S834). That is, the main CPU 101 manages the game period in the RT3 state. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT game number counter has become 0 (S835). In S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S835 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter has become 0 (when the determination in S835 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the on state and turns the RT3 state flag off. Set (clear) to (S836). By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S836, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), has the main CPU 101 displayed a combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition (combination "S_RT3 transition")? Whether or not it is determined (S837). In S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is displayed (when the determination in S837 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT3 state flag to the ON state and sets the RT game number counter. 8 is set (S838). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. Then, after the processing of S838, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S837 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition (combination "R_RT1"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "transition eye") is displayed (S839). When the main CPU 101 determines in S839 that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S839 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip (combination "S_RT1 transition lip"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination) is displayed (S840).

In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition is displayed (when the determination in S839 is YES), and in S840, the main CPU 101 displays the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition lip. When it is determined (S840 is a YES determination), the main CPU 101 sets the RT1 state flag to the ON state (S841). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT1 state. Then, after the processing of S841, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S840, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S840 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip (combination "S_RT2"). It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols of the transition lip") is displayed (S842). In S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S842 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT2 state flag to the ON state (S843). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT2 state. Then, after the processing of S843, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S842 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip (combination "S_RT0"). It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols of the transition lip") is displayed (S844). In S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S844 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state (S845). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S845, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). On the other hand, in S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S844 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (when the RT check process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S219.

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)] Next, the interrupt process performed by the main CPU 101 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec will be described with reference to FIG. 79. Note that FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interrupt process. The interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a cycle of 1.1172 msec is generated based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (see S2 in FIG. 46). This is a process executed when an interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S902). In this process, various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch connected via the external bus interface 104, index sensors (not shown) provided on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, etc. The signals input from various sensors in are checked. In the present embodiment, these various switches and various sensors pass through the cabinet side relay board 44, the door relay terminal board 68, the reel relay terminal board 74, etc., and the input port IC (not) via the external bus interface 104. It is connected to the input terminal of the input IC connected to the output terminal (shown in the figure). Further, in the main RAM 103, an input port storage area (not shown) for the main CPU 101 to store the state of the input port IC (simply referred to as "input port" in this embodiment) connected to the external bus interface 104. ) Is assigned. Here, the input port storage area includes, for example, an input port storage area 1 for storing the current state of the input port and an input port storage area 2 for storing the state of the input port before 10 interruption processing. Consists of. Then, in this process, the main CPU 101 first stores various information stored in the input port storage area 1 in the input port storage area 2, and then stores various information read from the input port in the input port storage area 1. To do. The connection configuration of various switches and various sensors and the configuration of the input port storage area are not limited to those described above. That is, the configuration may be such that the main CPU 101 can recognize the on / off states of various switches and various sensors.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. It drives and controls three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 101 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S904). In this process, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 8) of the main control circuit 90. The details of the communication data transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a insertion medal passage check process (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the inserted medal has passed the selector 66 based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S906). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display 6, and displays, for example, the number of medals to be paid out, the number of credits, the stop button pressing order data, and the like. The details of the 7-segment LED drive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S907). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a count (subtraction) process of various set timers. The details of the timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S908). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S909). In the door open / close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open / closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on (door closed) / off (door open) state of the door open / close monitoring switch 67.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a test firing test signal control process (S910). In this process, a control process is performed when various test signals are output to the tester via the second interface boat or the like. Further, this process is executed using the non-standard work area (see FIG. 11C) of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, this process is also performed at a time other than the test firing test (after the pachislot machine 1 is installed in the game store), but at this time, the main control board 71 passes through the second interface boat or the like. Since it is not connected to the testing machine, various test signals are generated but not output.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S911). Then, after the processing of S912, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt processing.

[Communication data transmission processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the communication data transmission process performed in S904 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data transmission process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs the WDT setting process (S961). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restarting the WDT in the reset controller 106 and the like. The details of the WDT setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S962). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is being delayed. In S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when the determination in S962 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (FIG. 79). (See) Move to the process of S905 in.

On the other hand, in S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S962 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the communication data has been transmitted (S963). .. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the data stored in the command status register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and if the data indicating the completion of transmission is stored, the communication data. Determines that the transmission is completed, and if the data indicating the transmission completion is not stored, it is determined that the communication data has not been transmitted.

In S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has not been transmitted (NO in S963), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). Move to the processing of S905 inside. On the other hand, in S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has been transmitted (YES in S963), the main CPU 101 performs the communication data acquisition process (S964). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring communication data (command data) from the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (S965). In S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S969 described later.

On the other hand, in S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the non-operation command data in each register (S966). ). The non-operation command data is information related to the player's game operation (for example, input operation, start operation, stop operation, etc. as an operation for advancing the game) (for example, these operations have been performed). Each parameter is set so as not to include the information indicating the above, or, for example, the information indicating the internal winning combination determined based on the start operation). Note that each parameter of the non-operation command data includes, for example, a parameter indicating the on / off state of each switch in the pachislot 1 and a parameter indicating the on / off state of each sensor (for example, the input port storage area 1). And the information stored in the input port storage area 2) may be set. As a result, the possibility of malfunction or failure of these switches and sensors may be determined on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) (S967). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the non-operation command data generated in S966 in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data acquisition process (S968). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring non-operation command data stored in the communication data storage area in S967.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at least no operation command is transmitted for each interrupt process (see FIG. 79) even when there is no communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized communication data from being transmitted from the outside due to the absence of communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. From this point of view, the non-operation command data does not include information related to the player's game operation, but the content of each parameter to be set is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

After the processing of S968 or when the determination in S965 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets the buffer size for one packet in the transmission counter (S969). In the present embodiment, since the transmission data for one packet is 8 bytes, the buffer size for one packet is also composed of 8 bytes. Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of communication data (command data) are stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted in the order in which they are stored (first stored first) (FIFO format). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires transmission data from the communication buffer and sets it in the transmission data register (S970). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets transmission data in 1-byte units in a transmission data register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1). As a result, the set transmission data is transferred to the transmission shift register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and is transmitted one packet at a time.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates (+1) the address of the communication buffer (S971). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the transmission counter (S972). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission counter is "0" (S973). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of the transmission data for one packet is completed. In S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is not "0" (when the determination in S973 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S970 and repeats the processes after S970.

On the other hand, in S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is "0" (when the determination in S973 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a communication data pointer update process (see, for example, FIG. 51) (S974). ). Then, after the processing of S974, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S905 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[WDT setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the WDT setting process performed in S961 during the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) will be described. Note that FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the WDT setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the WDT clear register (not shown) in the WDT in the reset controller 106 (S981). Next, the main CPU 101 sets clear data (for example, "55H") at the set address (S982). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the restart data (for example, “AAH”) at the set address (S983).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the command transmission start timer with its lower limit value "0", and if the command transmission start timer is larger than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is subtracted by 1 (-1 update). If the command transmission start timer is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is held at "0" (S984). Then, after the processing of S984, the main CPU 101 ends the WDT setting processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S962 of the communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 80).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the WDT reset setting and management information (WDT permission / prohibition, reference clock, timeout time (for example, 419.4 ms), etc.) are stored in the program management area, and S982 and By performing the process of S983, the set timeout time is remeasured. When a reset signal is output due to a timeout and the main CPU 101 is restarted, the checksum generation process (FIG. 52) is performed because the system is restarted without executing the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52). The sum value calculated by 53) is not stored in the main RAM 103 (sum value storage area). Therefore, in this case, the thumb check determination result in the power-on processing (see S11 in FIG. 46) is not normal (that is, as "RAM error"), and an error occurs in the information display 6 (7-segment LED display). The character string "88" indicating the occurrence is displayed.

[7-segment LED drive processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the 7-segment LED drive process performed in S906 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment LED drive process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the interrupt counter (S921). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (S922).

In S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is not an odd number (when the determination in S922 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). ) Moves to the processing of S907. That is, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment LED drive process is performed every two interruption cycles. In the present embodiment, an example of executing the 7-segment LED drive process when the value of the interrupt counter is even has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED drive process is not limited to this when the value of the interrupt counter is odd. The LED drive process may be executed, or the execution timing of the 7-segment LED drive process may be determined by using the quotient or the remainder when the value of the interrupt counter is divided by an arbitrary integer.

On the other hand, in S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (when the determination in S922 is YES), the main CPU 101 acquires navigation data from the navigation data storage area (S923). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the push order display data storage area for storing the push order display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S924).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S925). In this process, the main CPU 101 creates push order display data (7-segment display data) based on the navigation data, and stores the generated push order display data in the push order display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the credit counter (S926). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the credit display data storage area for storing the credit display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S927).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S928). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates credit display data (7-segment display data) based on the value of the credit counter, and stores the generated credit display data in the credit display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the 7-segment common counter storage area for storing the value of the 7-segment common counter described later (S929). Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the 7-segment common counter (S930). In this process, when the updated 7-segment common counter value becomes "8", the main CPU 101 sets the 7-segment common counter value to "0". In the present embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is dynamically controlled, the value of the 7-segment common counter is updated every 8 times.

Next, the main CPU 101 creates common selection data based on the value of the 7-segment common counter, and addresses the target cathode data storage area (push order display data storage area or target storage area in the credit display data storage area). Is set (S931). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs clear data to the cathode of the 7-segment LED (S932). This process is performed in order to temporarily turn off the 7-segment LED to eliminate the influence of the afterimage.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires and sets 7-segment cathode output data from the target cathode data storage area (S933). Next, the main CPU 101 generates 7-segment common output data from the 7-segment common backup data and the common selection data (S934).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the 7-segment common output data and the 7-segment cathode output data in the 7-segment common backup data and the 7-segment cathode backup data, respectively (S935). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment cathode output data and 7-segment common output data (S936). Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S907 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[7-segment display data generation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 and S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) will be described. Note that FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment display data generation process.

The "display data" described later generated by the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 during the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) corresponds to the push order display data, and the 7-segment LED drive process (FIG. 82). The "display data" described later generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S928 in (see 82) corresponds to the credit display data.

First, the main CPU 101 divides the display data set in the cathode data storage area by "10", acquires the quotient value of the division result as the display data of the upper digit of the 2-digit 7-segment LED, and divides the data. The remaining value of the result is acquired as the display data of the lower digit (S941). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the upper digit based on the acquired display data of the upper digit (S942).

In S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that the upper digit display is to be performed (when the determination in S942 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S944 described later. On the other hand, in S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that the upper digit is not displayed (when the determination in S942 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets no display of the upper digit (S943).

After the processing of S943 or when the determination in S942 is YES, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the upper digit (S944). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired high-order digit display data in the high-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S945).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the lower digits (S946). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired low-order digit display data in the low-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S947).

Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment display data generation processing. At this time, if the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S925 during the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 changes the process to the process of S926 during the 7-segment LED drive process. Move. On the other hand, when the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S929 in the 7-segment LED drive process. ..

[Timer update process]
Next, the timer update process performed in S907 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described with reference to FIG. 84. Note that FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area (not shown) in the HL register, and sets the number of 2-byte timers in the B register (S951). The 2-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time of 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) or more (that is, a timer value exceeding 1 byte).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 2-byte timers with the lower limit value "0", and if the number of 2-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the number of 2-byte timers (updates -1). When the number of 2-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 2-byte timers is held at "0" (S952). Further, in the process of S952, the main CPU 101 subtracts 2 (-2 updates) the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area set in the HL register. Note that, for example, since the command transmission start timer also has a 2-byte timer, the update may be performed in this process (see FIG. 81).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S953). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S954).

In S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S954 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S952, and after S952. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S954 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the 1-byte timer in the HL register. The update start address of is set, and the number of 1-byte timers is set in the B register (S955). The 1-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time of less than 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) (ie, a timer value that does not exceed 1 byte). For example, the medal monitoring timer is updated as a 1-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 1-byte timers with the lower limit value "0", and if the number of 1-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value "0", the number of 1-byte timers is subtracted by 1 (-1 update). If the number of 1-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 1-byte timers is held at "0" (S956). Further, in the process of S956, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) the update start address of the 1-byte timer storage area set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S957). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S958).

In S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S958 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S956, and after S956. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S958 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs an electromagnetic counter control process (S959). ). In this process, an output control process is performed when a signal indicating IN / OUT of the medal is output to the external centralized terminal plate 47. Then, after the processing of S959, the main CPU 101 ends the timer update processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S908 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

<Explanation of operation when the power is turned on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the operation of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power is turned on.

In FIG. 85, “Main CPU” indicates the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90), and “SubCPU” indicates the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "security mode" of the "Main CPU" indicates the state of being in the above-mentioned security mode, and the operating state "startup delay period" of the "Main CPU" is described above after the end of the security mode. Indicates the period until the command transmission start timer is set and the set command transmission start timer becomes "0" (that is, the period during which the setting can be changed but the transmission of communication data is delayed). The operating state "normal operating period" of the "Main CPU" indicates a state in which the delay in transmitting the communication data has ended and the communication data can be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "initialization" of the "SubCPU" is the initialization (startup) process (hard boot time, bios (driver) initialization, kernel) when the power of the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200) is turned on. (OS) startup, etc.) indicates a state (that is, a state in which communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) cannot be received), and the operating state "normal operating period" of the "SubCPU" is It shows a state in which the initialization (startup) process at the time of turning on the power is completed and the communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) can be received.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the "setting operation A", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then "normally". The operation when the setting change is completed in the "operation period" is shown, and the "transmission mode A" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change in the case of the "setting operation A". Indicates the transmission timing of the command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode A", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode A". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the "setting operation B", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then the "setting operation B" is described. The operation when the setting change is completed in the "startup delay period" is shown, and the "transmission mode B" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting in the case of the "setting operation B". Indicates the transmission timing of the change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode B", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode B". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input, the operating state of the security mode is controlled by the security unit (not shown) of the microprocessor 91. In the security mode, the main CPU 101 is delayed in starting for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area. When the security mode ends, the main CPU 101 delays the transmission of communication data for a predetermined period of time. The main CPU 101 allows the setting to be changed even when the transmission of communication data is delayed.

Here, as shown in "setting operation A", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed after the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, the main CPU 101 communicates. When the delay in data transmission ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and when the setting change is completed, the setting change command (setting) (Change / setting confirmation completed) (COM2) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

On the other hand, as shown in "Setting operation B", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed during the delay in the transmission of the communication data, the main CPU 101 uses the communication data. When the transmission delay ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. .. That is, when the delay in transmitting communication data ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sent to the communication data storage area. If registered, these communication data are transmitted in the registered order.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by delaying the start-up of the main CPU 101 when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main control circuit 90 can be started stably and the main CPU 101 is started. By delaying the transmission of communication data after the delay is completed, the time required for starting the sub-control circuit 200 can be secured and the sub-control circuit 200 can be started stably.

Then, after the delay in starting the main CPU 101 is completed, the setting can be changed even before the delay in transmitting the communication data is completed. Therefore, for example, when opening a store in a game store, a pachislot machine is used. When the power of 1 is turned on (that is, when a reset signal is input along with this), the setting can be changed in advance without waiting for the start completion of the sub-control circuit 200. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in.

Further, if the setting change is made before the delay of the transmission of the communication data ends, the communication data indicating these is registered at the start of the setting change or the end of the setting change, and the delay of the transmission of the communication data is delayed. Since these communication data are transmitted in the order in which they are registered when the data is completed, even if the settings are changed in advance without waiting for the completion of starting the sub-control circuit 200. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the information held between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, for example, even when the sub-control circuit 200 is configured to determine fraudulent activity, error, or the like according to the order of communication data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the result of such determination It is possible to make an accurate judgment without affecting the.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the communication data transmission process is performed, at least no operation command data is transmitted even if the communication data is not registered. For example, it is possible to prevent communication data from being transmitted from the outside by an unauthorized means such as illegally accessing the connection line between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, since the registration / transmission of the non-operation command data is not performed before the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, it is possible to reduce the control load when the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on. From the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activity, the non-operation command data may not include information related to the player's game operation.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the delay period for starting the main CPU 101 is composed of a fixed period and a variable period, and these periods (or a range thereof) can be appropriately selected and set. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate delay time according to the specifications of the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. From the viewpoint of shortening the period until the setting can be changed, it is possible to set a predetermined period range (for example, "no setting" in the random extension period) in which 0 is always determined as the variable period. In that case, the range of the predetermined period may be set.

In this embodiment, an example in which the setting value setting operation (setting change operation) is possible during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) after the end of the security mode will be described. However, the operations that can be executed during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) are not limited to this. For example, the setting key type switch 54 is turned on during the period in which the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is off and the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”). In this case, the setting value confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) may be enabled during the period. As a result, for example, when opening a game store, even if the setting is not changed but the current setting value is to be confirmed, the setting confirmation is performed in advance without waiting for the start completion of the sub-control circuit 200. Since this can be done, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the power is turned on.

<Explanation of operation when inserting medals>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the operation of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention when the medal is inserted will be described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the medal is inserted.

In FIG. 86, the “start switch” indicates the start switch 79, and the “medal sensor” is the detection state of the upstream medal sensor (first medal sensor) 806 and the downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807. (Medal sensor input state), the "medal acceptance signal" indicates that the on state ("ON") indicates that the medal acceptance is permitted (medal acceptance permission), and the off state ("OFF") indicates the medal. Indicates a state in which the reception of medals is prohibited (see FIGS. 57 and 58).

Further, in FIG. 86, the “solenoid” indicates the solenoid of the selector 66 (the drive source that shifts the select plate 804 to the guide position or the discharge position), and the “monitoring timer” indicates the medal monitoring timer (FIGS. 57 and FIG. (Refer to 58), the "operating state" is a state in the pachislot machine 1 that enables the progress of the game after the start operation ("during the game") and a state that does not allow the progress of the game after the start operation ("game wait"). "), And.

When the number of medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) is inserted, the main CPU 101 can accept the start operation for the start lever 16. As shown in FIG. 86, in this state, if medals can be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is less than 50), until the start operation for the start lever 16 is performed (started by the start switch 79). Until the operation is detected), the medal acceptance state (the medal acceptance signal is "ON") continues. Although not shown, in this state, if medals cannot be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is 50), the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the medal acceptance signal is "OFF". It has changed to the state).

The main CPU 101 is started by the start switch 79 (the first start on the left side in FIG. 86) in a state where medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) are inserted and medals can be stored as the number of credits. When an operation (transition of the start switch 79 from "OFF" to "ON") is detected as "start operation A"), the medal acceptance is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). It shifts from a certain state) to a state where medal acceptance is prohibited (a state where the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"), starts shifting the solenoid of the selector 66 to a demagnetized state, and monitors with a medal monitoring timer (a state). Measurement) is started. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on.

When a medal is inserted (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state) during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the main CPU 101 inputs the medal sensor of each medal sensor. When it is determined that medals have been inserted based on the state), the inserted medals are counted by changing the solenoid of the selector 66, which was in the process of changing from the excited state to the demagnetized state, to the excited state again. It is guided into the hopper device 51. Further, in this case, the "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79, but based on the detection, the operation state is changed to the state in which the game can proceed after the start operation ("during the game"). Do not change. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned off. That is, in this case, "start operation A" is invalidated.

In the main CPU 101, when medals are inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition of the selector 66 solenoid from the excited state to the demagnetized state is completed) (medals of each medal sensor). When it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the sensor input status), the acceptance of medals is further permitted from the state in which the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the state in which the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"). It may be changed to a state (a state in which the medal reception signal is "ON").

After that, the main CPU 101 again presses the start operation 79 (in FIG. 86, the second start operation on the right side (transition of the start switch 79 from "OFF" to "ON") is referred to as "start operation B"). When is detected, the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed from the excited state to the degaussed state again, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started again. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on again.

Then, when the main CPU 101 does not insert medals during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the degaussed state) (of each medal sensor). When it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the medal sensor input state), the operating state is completed after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, after the solenoid of the selector 66 has been transferred from the excited state to the degaussed state). Is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, after the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)). Executes the processing of).

Although not shown, the main CPU 101 detects the "start operation A" by the start switch 79 and is permitted to accept medals (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). The reception of medals is prohibited (the medal reception signal is "OFF"), the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed to the demagnetized state, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started. After that, if no medals are inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state of the solenoid of the selector 66 is completed) (the medal sensor input state of each medal sensor). Even when it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the above), as in the case where "start operation B" is detected by the start switch 79, after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, the solenoid of the selector 66 is excited). After the transition from the state to the demagnetized state is completed), the operating state is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, the medal reception). -The processing after the start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) can be executed).

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is started with the start operation of the player, for example, a medal monitoring timer for preventing the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is provided. Set. By this medal monitoring timer, the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the game machine from the state where the inserted medals are stored inside the game machine (the state where the select plate 804 is in the guide position due to the solenoid being excited) in the selector 66. The time until the select plate 804 is physically transferred to the state (the state in which the select plate 804 is in the discharge position due to the solenoid being in the degaussed state) is secured.

If a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the start operation that is the basis of the medal is invalidated, and in the selector 66, the inserted medal is inside the game machine. Return to the stored state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals and to appropriately process the inserted medals.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the medal is counted, so that the inserted medal can be counted. It is possible to prevent counting omissions and to process the inserted medals more appropriately.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timer value of the medal monitoring timer (for example, "72") is changed from the state in which the inserted medals are stored inside the game machine to the state in which the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the game machine. Since the period until the physical transition (for example, 80 ms) or more (for example, "72" x 1.1172 ms) is set, the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is surely prevented. Therefore, it becomes possible to process the inserted medals more appropriately. When the drive unit is a solenoid as in the present embodiment, such an effect becomes more remarkable.

<Other effects that can be performed in this embodiment>
Next, in addition to the above-described effects, an example of other effects that can be performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. In the following, as an example of other effects, it is explained that the bonus combination winning notification effect for notifying whether or not the bonus combination is won can be executed, but its use is as a bonus combination. It is not limited to the one that notifies whether or not the prize is won.

For example, in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, or in the line battle state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section. May be performed to signal whether it has been decided to continue. Further, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state of the advantageous section, or in the right acquisition state of the advantageous section. It may be performed to inform whether it has been decided to grant the right. That is, it can be used as an effect executed to notify the player whether or not the privilege is given.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (1))
First, with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88, an production example (No. 1) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described. 87 and 88 show, for example, a bonus winning combination that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined. An production example (No. 1) of the notification effect is shown. In addition, FIG. 87 shows a display example when the bonus combination is not won (when the bonus combination is not won), and FIG. 88 shows a display example when the bonus combination is won (when the bonus combination is won). Is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the production example (No. 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Spot the difference effect" is performed. This "spot the difference effect" is based on an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work, for example, when there is an original work such as a cartoon, animation, or game used as a motif of pachislot 1. It is an image that allows the player to search for any differences (that is, mistakes) with respect to the base image. In this case, the predetermined image may be an image as it is (that is, the same) as the original work, or the image of the original work is A / D converted, the approximation ratio is changed, and the resolution is changed. Or it may be a remastered (ie, approximate) image. Further, although the image is based on the original work to the last, it may be an image newly created for use in the production of pachislot 1.

The base image is not limited to the one described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, even if there is no original work (for example, when it is an original motif), an image that is the same as or similar to an image that can be displayed in other effects in pachislot 1 may be set. Further, for example, an image that is the same as or similar to the image printed in the booklet distributed at the amusement store may be set to explain the specifications of the pachislot machine 1. Further, for example, the base image does not have to be a still image, may be a moving image, or the still images may be sequentially displayed in a slide format.

In the upper part of FIG. 87, an image in which five characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is the same as the base image. Also, below the image, there is a message and cursor that urges you to point out the differences from the base image, such as "If there is something different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!" Is displayed.

At this time, the player moves the cursor to a desired position (performs a selection operation) by tracing a predetermined area on the display surface of the sub display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19 with a finger, and the sub display is also performed. Touch the decision button (not shown) displayed on the display surface of the device 18 (perform the decision operation), and specify the part that you think is wrong.

The means for detecting various operations related to the effect such as the player's selection operation and determination operation is not limited to the sub display device 18. For example, when the display device 11 is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a touch sensor is provided at least a part of the display device 11 (for example, a place where the display in the upper part of FIG. 87 is performed). When the touch sensor detects the movement of the player's finger (when a selection operation is performed), the cursor is moved accordingly, and the enter button displayed at the place where the touch sensor is provided. When (not shown) is pressed (when a determination operation is performed), an effect of notifying the result may be performed accordingly. Further, for example, when a physical operation means (for example, a cross key and an effect button, a jog dial, etc.) capable of detecting various operations related to an effect such as a selection operation or a decision operation is provided, such a physical operation means. The selection operation and the decision operation may be detected by. That is, any means that can detect various operations related to the player's production can be applied.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87, it is assumed that the player specifies the portion where the rightmost character is displayed. Then, since the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87 does not differ from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 87, it is notified that the result of the error search in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure. The message "Out of place ~ sorry" is displayed.

On the other hand, in the upper part of FIG. 88, an image in which four characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is different from the base image in the portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. Also, at the bottom of the image, as in FIG. 87, it should be pointed out that there is a difference from the base image, such as "If there is a part different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!" A message prompting you to do so and a cursor are displayed.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player specifies a portion in which the rightmost character is not displayed. In this case, since the designated part is different from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 88, the "spot the difference effect" for notifying that the result of the mistake search was successful is ". Along with the message "Hit ~", the message "Bonus confirmed!" Is displayed to notify that the bonus role has been won.

On the other hand, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player specifies the portion where the leftmost character is displayed. In this case, since the designated part is not a part different from the base image, as in the lower part of FIG. 87, the “missing” for notifying that the result of the error search in the “spot the difference effect” was a failure. The message "~ Sorry" is displayed, and even if you win the bonus role, you will not be notified that you have won the bonus role.

Note that the effect modes shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 show an example of the effect mode in the "spot the difference effect", and for example, the following effect mode can be adopted.

For example, the base image is based on a predetermined theme in the original work (for example, the first episode in the original work), and a plurality of (for example, five) images (for example, a digest image) are displayed in a slide format. Suppose it is a thing. If the bonus combination is not won, the slide images are displayed in sequence as they are, and then each image of the slide is displayed as a thumbnail. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won, slide images in which some of the slide images are different are sequentially displayed, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape.

The player searches for whether each image displayed in the thumbnail form is based on a theme different from the predetermined theme (for example, the number of episodes different from the first episode in the original work), and determines. Perform a selection operation and a decision operation on an image that is thought to be an image with a theme different from that of. Then, when an image of a theme different from the predetermined theme is included and the player specifies the image, the result of the spot the difference in the "spot the difference effect" should be successful. Just do it. Specifically, for example, in the first episode in the original work, although only character A and character B appear, in the slide image displayed when the bonus role is won, the third and subsequent episodes in the original work are displayed. It is sufficient to include an image in which the character C that appears only in is displayed. In this way, for example, a player who is attached to the original work can perform the "spot the difference production" with particular feelings, so that it is possible to further improve the interest in the production.

Further, as described above, when displaying an image that is at least partially different from the base image in the "spot the difference effect", the part different from the base image does not have to be only one place, and a plurality of places may be different. .. In this case, for example, the number of different parts may differ depending on the type of winning bonus combination. For example, if there is one part different from the base image, it is highly likely that it has won BB3 or BB4, and if there are multiple parts different from the base image, there is a possibility that it has won BB1 or BB2. It may be made higher. In this way, it is possible to suggest the type of bonus role that is winning.

In addition, when notifying that the result of the spot the difference in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure, for example, a message such as "???" is displayed to clearly indicate that the result of the spot the difference was a failure. You may not do it.

In addition, multiple types of base images are provided. For example, when a "chance eye" is won, one of these multiple types of base images is determined, and then whether or not the bonus role is won. Depending on the situation, it may be decided whether to display the base image as it is or to display it as an image having at least a part different part. Further, in this case, the difficulty level of finding a mistake may be different depending on the type of the base image to be determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to a bonus state advantageous to the player is satisfied, the predetermined advantageous condition If is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image that is partially different from the base image) is displayed, and if the predetermined advantageous conditions are not satisfied, the second specific image (for example, the base image) is displayed. (Same image as) can be displayed, and when the first specific image is displayed and the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image, a predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is involved, so that the interest in the transition of the advantageous state to the player can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as a motif of the game machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (Part 2))
Next, an production example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 89 shows, for example, a bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined. The timing chart of the effect example (No. 2) is shown, and FIG. 90 shows a display example of the effect example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect. In the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other production devices (for example, the speaker group 84 and the like) The effect can also be executed by the LED group 85).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "long press effect" is performed. In this "long-press effect", for example, when the stop operation in the third stop operation is long-pressed in the following manner, an effect different from the case where the long-press is not performed is performed. is there.

In the present embodiment, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is the stop button (either the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, or the right stop button 17R) in the third stop operation. It is not limited to. For example, it may be a stop button (one of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R) in the first stop operation, or a stop button (left stop button 17L, middle stop button 17C) in the second stop operation. And either of the right stop button 17R). Further, the stop button may be operated at a timing not directly related to the stop operation. That is, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the "long press effect" can be performed.

Further, for example, the operating means to be "long-pressed" may be a bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) or a start lever 16. In this case, the bet button can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the medal insertion operation, and when it is operated at a timing different from the medal insertion operation timing, it is "long". It can also be the target of "push". Further, in this case, the start lever 16 can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the start operation, and "long press" when it is operated at a timing different from the timing of the start operation. It can also be the target of.

Further, for example, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is not limited to the operation means for performing the above-mentioned operation related to the game, and may be the operation means for performing the operation related to the effect. For example, it may be a sub-display device 18 provided with a touch sensor 19, a display device 11 provided with a touch sensor at least in a part thereof described above, or a physical operating means described above.

As shown in FIG. 89, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation, and the stop switch is turned on (on edge). When 3 seconds have passed (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" is executed, and then when the stop button in the third stop operation is finished and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), "Direction 2" is executed. That is, when the stop button in the third stop operation is pressed and held for a predetermined period (3 seconds), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. When the stop switch is turned off (off-edge) during the execution of the "effect 1", the execution of the "effect 1" is terminated and the execution of the "effect 2" is started even in the middle of the process.

On the other hand, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the stop switch is in the on state (on edge). When the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge) (when pressed for a short time) before 3 seconds have elapsed, "effect 1" is not executed and "effect 1" is not executed. Only "Direction 2" is executed.

The effect pattern of the "long press effect" is not limited to that described above. For example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" followed by "effect 2". It may have an effect pattern to be executed. That is, when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge). Regardless of whether or not it becomes, it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. Further, for example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), only "effect 2" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

Further, for example, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge). Then, when the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge) (when pressed for a short time), it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and subsequent "effect 2" are executed. That is, even before 3 seconds have passed with the stop switch in the on state (on-edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are displayed. It may have an effect pattern to be executed. Further, for example, even before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), only "effect 1" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

When having a plurality of effect patterns in this way, for example, one of the plurality of effect patterns is selected with a different selection probability depending on whether or not the bonus combination is won. It should be. Further, in such a case, even when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds, the "effect 2" is already executed. If this is the case, the "effect 1" may not be executed.

An example of the mode in which the “effect 1” and the “effect 2” shown in FIG. 89 are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In addition, in FIG. 90, a display example of each of the long press and the short press when the bonus combination is won will be described.

First, when it is decided that the "long press effect" is executed, first, at least at a predetermined timing before the stop operation of the third stop operation is performed, for example, "hold down". A message is displayed, and an effect urging that the stop button should be pressed and held during the stop operation of the third stop operation is executed.

After that, when the player keeps pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or more during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, "STEP 1" to "STEP 3" are sequentially displayed in "Production 1". Is executed. Then, when the player finishes pressing the stock button, for example, a display such as "WIN!" Is executed to notify that the bonus combination has been won. If the bonus combination has not been won, it may be notified in "Direction 2" that the bonus combination has not been won, for example, "LOSE" may be displayed. Further, in the "directing 1", for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination may be notified. In this case, for example, if the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP1", the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP2", and the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP3", and the bonus combination is won. It is easy to select the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3", and if the bonus combination is not won, the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3" may be difficult to select. In this way, by pressing and holding it for a long time, the degree of expectation that the bonus role is won will be notified, so it is possible to further improve the interest in the production in which the content changes according to the operation of the player. Can be done.

On the other hand, if the player does not keep pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or longer during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, the expectation degree of winning the bonus combination as described above is notified. "Production 1" is not executed, and only "Production 2" is executed, which informs whether or not the bonus combination is won.

In addition, various methods can be adopted as the method for recognizing the pressing time of the stop button on the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). For example, in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72), when the main CPU 101 transmits a reel stop command each time the stop switch detects that a valid stop button has been pressed, the sub CPU 201 has a number of positions. 3 When the reel stop command based on the press of the stop button of the stop operation is received, the time is started, and when the time is 3 seconds, "effect 1" is executed and the third stop operation is performed. When the pressing of the stop button of the above is completed and the winning operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received, the "effect 2" may be executed. Further, whether or not the sub CPU 201 executes the "effect 1" and the "effect 2" based on the parameters indicating the on / off state of the stop switch included in the non-operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The execution timing may be controlled. By doing so, in the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side), it is not necessary to time the pressing time of the stop button, so that the control load related to the effect of changing the content according to the operation of the player is reduced. be able to.

When the "long press effect" is controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side), for example, by the operation time for the touch panel or the physical operation means described above, the sub CPU 201 is independent. It is possible to time the time during which the operating means is operated and to control the content of the effect according to the timed result. Here, in the gaming machine as described in the present embodiment, the capacity is limited on the main control circuit 90 side, but there is generally no particular limitation on the sub control circuit 200 side, so at least If such an effect is controlled by the sub CPU 201, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

Further, the predetermined condition for the control to execute the "effect 2" is not limited to the end of the operation on the operating means, and can be appropriately set. For example, it is possible to set a predetermined condition that an operation is performed on an operation means different from the target operation means, and when the number of operations on the target operation means is less than the predetermined number of times, "effect" When the production is generated in the order of "1" and "effect 2" and the number of operations to the target operating means reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the "effect 1" is not generated and the "effect" is not generated. 2 ”may be generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the time measurement, " Control to execute "Effect 1", and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected), control to execute "Effect 2" is performed, and before a predetermined time elapses from the start of timing. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible not to control the execution of the "effect 1".

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (3))
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect will be described. FIG. 90 shows, for example, a case where an internal winning combination (for example, “watermelon 2”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined, and when a bonus combination is also won, a display device has a predetermined probability. A display example of the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed in 11 is shown. In addition, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other production devices (for example, the information display 6) , LED82, or an instruction monitor (instruction display)) can be used to execute the effect.

For example, the game value display unit (VL) shown in FIG. 91 may be displayed on the display device 11 in a predetermined area (payout number display unit) in which the payout number can be displayed when a small winning combination is established. If it is an advantageous section, the cumulative number of payouts in the advantageous section may be displayed in a predetermined area (acquired number display unit), or an area different from the payout number display unit and the acquired number display unit. It may be displayed in a predetermined area of. Further, as described above, the 7-segment display such as the information display 6 controlled on the main control circuit 90 side should function as the game value display unit (VL) when the effect is executed. Just do it.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Number ahead display effect" is performed. In this "number ahead display effect", for example, the number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (the number of medals to be acquired) is notified before the operation of the bonus state starts, so that the player wins the bonus role. It is a production that informs you that you have done it.

In the following, an example in which the value of the winning combination end number counter is displayed as the planned acquisition number to be notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect" is described, but it is notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect". The mode of the number of sheets to be acquired is not limited to this. For example, in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, the value of the winning combination end number counter is "165", but if all "15" medals are paid out in each game in the bonus state, the BB3 state Alternatively, in the BB4 state, "12 times" of games can be played, and the actual number of payouts is "180". Therefore, the actual number of payouts, "180", may be displayed as the number of scheduled acquisitions. Also, even in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, it is necessary to insert three medals to play the game. Therefore, if the value of the winning combination counter is "165", all the games are in the bonus state. If "15" medals are paid out, the net increase in the number of medals for each game is "15-3 = 12". Therefore, the cumulative total number of net additions is set to "12" x "11 times" = "132" according to the value of the counter for the number of end-of-roles, and this "132" is displayed as the number of planned acquisitions. You may do so. In addition, as described above, since the game can actually be played "12 times", the cumulative planned number of net increases can be "12" x "12 times" = "12 times" according to the number of times the game can actually be played. The number of "144" sheets may be set, and the "144" sheets may be displayed as the planned number of acquisitions.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the push order small winning combination is won in the BB1 to BB4 states, the medals to be paid out for each game depending on whether or not the pushing order is correct at the time of winning the pushing order small winning combination. The number of medals also fluctuates (“15” or “6”; see FIG. 23). In addition, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the bonus combination is obtained. In the bonus state based on, push order notification is performed.

Therefore, for example, when a bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in an advantageous section, the above-mentioned "144" cards ("180" cards when the number of inserted cards is not taken into consideration) is displayed as the planned number of acquisitions. However, the probability that "15" medals will be paid out when the bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state. If it is set to 50%, ("12 sheets" x "8 times" = 96 sheets) + ("3 sheets" x "8 times" = 24 sheets) = "120" sheets (when the number of inserted sheets is not considered) ("15 sheets" x "8 times" = 120 sheets) + ("6 sheets" x "8 times" = 48 sheets) = "168" sheets) may be displayed as the number of planned acquisitions. .. That is, the planned acquisition number notified in the "number-first display effect" may be the expected value of the payout number (or net increase number) in the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 91, for example, when a predetermined internal winning combination including a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2”) is determined, it is determined that the “number of sheets ahead display effect” is executed. If so, when the rotation of all reels is stopped (that is, after the third stop), the game value display unit (VL) displays the number of planned acquisitions "165". As a result, the player is notified that he / she has won the bonus combination (“F_BB3” or “F_BB4” in the example shown in FIG. 91). In the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination is preferentially stopped and controlled over the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination. Therefore, basically, the game (bonus combination) that wins this bonus combination. In the winning game), the combination of symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination (“C_watermelon” in the example shown in FIG. 91) is displayed, and the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination (in the example shown in FIG. 91, “C_red”). Different color BB ") is not displayed. Of course, in the bonus combination winning game, it is possible to display the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, but in this case, the "number of sheets ahead display effect" may not be executed, and will be described later. As described above, the game value display unit (VL) displays the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out). It can also be executed.

After that, until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed (until the bonus combination is established), the display of the number of planned acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) is continued. Then, even if the operation of the bonus state is started, the display of the planned number of acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) continues, for example, a combination of symbols related to the small winning combination in the bonus state (example shown in FIG. 91). Then, when "Bell + JACA: 15 sheets") is displayed (a prize is generated during the bonus state), the number of sheets displayed in the game value display unit (VL) is appropriately subtracted and updated to be displayed. That is, the game value display unit (VL) displays the planned number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state before the start of the bonus state, and in the bonus state, the number of medals actually paid out. Depending on the situation, the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out) is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is won, it may be decided to shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when winning a bonus combination, the number of sheets to be acquired in this advantageous section (generally the expected value may be used. For example, the line battle state is average). Forty games will continue, and if the average number of medals per game increases by one in the line battle state, "40") will be added (added) to the number of planned acquisitions in the bonus state. It may be displayed on the value display unit (VL).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, a bonus combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform a production that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that it is possible to enhance the interest in the production and the interest in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the acquired value is obtained. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the game value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

<Modification example, etc.>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine of the invention according to the present embodiment have been described above, including their effects. However, the invention according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made as long as the gist of the invention according to the present embodiment is not deviated.

[Modification example]
In the present embodiment, at least in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between the set values, are won, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. It was not decided (ART lottery is not performed), but even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between each set value, are won, between each set value. As with other internal winning combinations including bonus winning combinations that have the same winning probability in, it may be decided whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (ART lottery is performed). In this case, in the ART lottery, the probability that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section may be the same winning probability between each set value. That is, by defining a bonus combination that has a different winning probability between the set values, the probability that the transition to the advantageous section is determined may vary between the set values.

Further, in the present embodiment, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified even in the normally advantageous section, but the probability that the normal advantageous section is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. Is given preferential treatment over the non-advantageous section, but it can also be configured as a section in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. In this case, if the state indicator does not start lighting when the non-advantageous section shifts to the normal advantageous section, the status indicator lights only when the transition to the advantageous section is performed. Good.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, the normal advantageous section is the period during which the player's medals decrease as a whole (that is, the ball output rate is less than "1". The period) may be sufficient, and the advantageous section may be a period during which the player's medals increase as a whole (that is, a period during which the payout rate exceeds "1"). Further, even if there is a period in which the medals of some players decrease in the advantageous section (for example, each of the above-mentioned preparation states), the period may be included in the advantageous section.

That is, when the game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, the advantageous section raises the expectation of the player, but the increase in the number of balls is not expected to increase (for example, the "normal" of the present embodiment. It may be configured to include an "advantageous section") and an increasing section (for example, the "advantageous section" of the present embodiment) in which an increase in the number of balls actually can be expected.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT2 state during the advantageous section, even if the push order notification is performed, the player shifts to the RT1 state (falls) due to a push order error of the player. , The game period of the advantageous section is supposed to progress (update), but in this case, the game period of the advantageous section should not progress (renew) until it shifts (returns) to the RT2 state. You can also. Further, in this case, for example, a part of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state (for example, a game required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state). If the number is 10 games, only 5 games of 1/2, or 2 games regardless of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state) are the games in the advantageous section. The period may be advanced (renewed).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not directly determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART lottery is not performed). However, the internal winning combination and conditions in which the ART lottery is performed can be appropriately modified and set. For example, if the "chance role" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the "chance role" is established, the ART lottery is not performed, and if the "chance role" is missed and the "RT3 transition" is established (this). In that case, ART lottery may be performed for (regardless of whether or not the state shifts to the RT3 state). That is, when a specific internal winning combination is won, the ART lottery may not be performed if a prize is generated, and the ART lottery may be performed if the prize is missed and no prize is generated.

In addition, for example, a small winning combination that pays out medals less than the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability, and in principle, a bonus combination is not established in the state between flags, and the game is played. It is also possible to adopt a specification that allows the game to be performed with the basic game state as the state between flags. Further, in this case, the bonus state may be configured as a state in which the acquired medals are reduced or maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is set to "1500 times", but the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period may be less than or more than that. May be good. In addition, the regulation monitoring period may be changed according to the situation of the game. For example, the regulation monitoring period is determined by the net increase (or payout number) of medals, and the net decrease (that is, the player inserts medals) at a predetermined pachislot machine 1 during a predetermined business day of the game store. However, if the number of medals (or simply the number of inserted medals) that is not returned to the player by the payout and is beneficial to the game store is "500", the medals correspond to the predetermined regulatory monitoring period. It is also possible to add the "500" to the "1500" number of medals and prevent the advantageous section from being forcibly terminated until the "2000" medals are obtained in a series of advantageous sections.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in this embodiment]
Subsequently, another example of the playability (that is, the game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 144. In the present embodiment, as the game state, a bonus state (special game state) in which the bonus is activated to be a game period advantageous to the player, and a game period in which the player is not in the bonus state are relatively disadvantageous to the player. It is explained that there is a non-bonus state (normal game state), and even in the non-bonus state, there are a plurality of RT states in which the winning probability of the replay role is different, so that the degree of advantage of the player is changed. (See FIG. 13). Further, in the present embodiment, as the game section, an advantageous section (advantageous state) that becomes a game section advantageous to the player by notifying the player of the stop operation information, and a relatively advantageous section that is not the advantageous section. It has been described that there is a non-advantageous section (normal state) that is a disadvantageous game section for the player (see FIG. 14). Then, various modifications can be made to various conditions such as the game state and the start / continuation / end of the game section and their contents. Unless otherwise specified, in the other examples of game playability (game specifications) shown below (No. 1 to No. 16), the game state, the game section, the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols, etc. in the present embodiment are used. Game elements can be used as appropriate.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (1)]
First, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, another example (No. 1) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification), and FIG. 93 is a diagram for conceptually explaining another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the expected value of the game value given in.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the player usually starts the game from the (A) non-advantageous section. (A) In the non-advantageous section, the amount of game value decreases because the player is not notified of the stop operation information. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a negative value, and becomes a downward inclination.

In the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section shifts to (B) the advantageous section. (B) In the advantageous section, the amount of game value increases (at least does not decrease) due to the notification of the stop operation information to the player. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value added per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a positive value (at least not a negative value) and becomes an upslope (at least does not become a downslope). For convenience of explanation, in this example, the expected value of grant in the prepared state and the expected value of grant in the bonus state are not considered.

The expected value to be given can be calculated (designed) as follows. For example, if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is correct, 15 medals will be paid out, and if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is incorrect, no medals will be paid out. The winning probability of the push order small winning combination is 1/2. In the case of (32768/65536), in principle, when it is necessary to bet 3 medals in one game, 30 medals are required in 10 games. And, in the case of (A) non-advantageous section, when the push order small role is won during 10 games, the push order is correct and 15 medals can be paid out is 1/10. Since it is (1/2 x 1/5), if the probability is correct, the amount of medals will be -15 (15-30) during 10 games, so the expected value of grant is 1 time. It will be "-1.5 sheets" per game. On the other hand, in the case of (B) advantageous section, if the information of the stop operation is notified for all the push order small wins and the player performs the stop operation accordingly, the push order small win is won during 10 games. Since it is 1/2 that the correct answer is sometimes that 15 medals can be paid out, the amount of medals will be +45 (75) during 10 games if the probability is correct. Since it is -30), the expected value of grant is "+4.5 cards" per game. However, these are just examples for convenience of explanation, and it is also possible to calculate (design) the expected value of grant by taking into account the probability of winning the replay role and the probability of winning the bonus role (and the expected value of grant during the bonus state). Is.

In this example, in (B) advantageous section, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value (expected value α) (B-1) advantageous section 1 Then, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the second expected value (expected value β) different from the first expected value (expected value α) (B-2). ) Advantageous section 2 is provided, and when (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is shifted to (B-2) advantageous section 2. In this example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section is first shifted to (B-1) the advantageous section 1, and (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is (2). When the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-2) shifts to the advantageous section 2, but the transition is not limited to this. For example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) non-advantageous It is possible to shift from the section to (B-2) advantageous section 2 and shift to (B-1) advantageous section 2 when (2) expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied in (B-2) advantageous section 2. ..

Further, for example, when the start condition of (1) advantageous section is satisfied, it may be determined whether to shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2. , (1) Regarding the start condition of the advantageous section, (B-1) the start condition (1-1) of the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the start condition (1-2) of the advantageous section 2 are determined respectively. (A) In the non-advantageous section, shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2 depending on which start condition (1-1 or 1-2) is satisfied. It may be.

Then, in (B) advantageous section ((B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2), when the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied, (B) advantageous section to (A) non-advantageous section Move to the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section ends). In this example, it is assumed that the transition control of (A) non-advantageous section and (B) advantageous section is performed in this way.

Here, in this example, the expected value α in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is configured to be larger than the expected value β in the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, (B-). 2) The expected value β in the advantageous section 2 is configured to be smaller than the expected value α in (B-1) advantageous section 1). Specifically, for example, when the above example is used, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the probability (notification probability) that the stop operation information is notified at the time of winning the push order small winning combination is 100% (that is, that is). By setting (notification 5 times out of 5 wins), the expected value α is set to "+4.5 sheets", while in (B-2) advantageous section 2, information on the stop operation is provided when the push order small winning combination is won. By setting the probability of being notified (notification probability) to 40% (that is, notifying twice in five winnings), the expected value β is set to "+ -0 sheets".

The expected value α and the expected value β can be arbitrarily set. For example, if (B-1) advantageous section 1 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, the notification probability in advantageous section 1 is set to 1 to 100%. It can be set to any notification probability. Further, for example, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, and the notification probability is lower than (B-1) advantageous section 1. If so, the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 can be set to any notification probability from 1 to 100%.

Further, each of the notification probability in the advantageous section 1 and the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 may be a predetermined probability or may vary depending on the game value granting situation. For example, when the expected value α and the expected value β are set to “+3.0 sheets” and “+1.0 sheets”, respectively, (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 In each of the above, the expected value of grant is calculated for each predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times), and the calculated expected value of grant is a predetermined threshold (for example, plus or minus) than the expected value α and the expected value β, respectively. If the deviation exceeds (1), the notification probability is appropriately changed in the subsequent game, and in each period of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. The final expected value to be given may be (approximate) the expected value α and the expected value β.

Further, the method of setting the expected value α and the expected value β is not limited to the above-mentioned method of varying the notification probability. For example, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is high (high RT state), and (B-2) advantageous section 2 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is low (low RT state). By making the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay combination different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the winning probability of the replay combination is added to the given expected value. In addition, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 to different RT states.

Further, for example, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is set to a state in which it is not difficult for the bonus (bonus state) to operate, and (B-2) advantageous section 2 is set to a state in which it is difficult for the bonus to operate. By making the operating probability (winning probability) of the bonus different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the expected value given is the operating probability of the bonus and the given during the bonus state. The expected value is added, and the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, with respect to the operation of the bonus, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 in different control states. .. The state in which it is not difficult or difficult for the bonus to operate is the type of internal winning combination (including carry-over combination), the type of gaming state, the control content of stop control according to them, or the stop operation. It is possible to appropriately create the information by adding the notification contents of the above information in a complex manner (for an example, see the description of FIGS. 94 to 99 described later).

Further, for example, with respect to the push order small winning combination in the above example, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, 15 medals are paid out, and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the above predetermined mode. If this is done, six medals shall be paid out, and (B-1) information on the stop operation indicating the above-mentioned predetermined mode shall be notified when the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 1. (B-2) When the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation indicating the above specific mode is notified, and by making the number of payouts different, the expected value β is higher than the expected value α. May be set to be small (in this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

Further, for example, a plurality of types of push order small winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination A and pushing order small winning combination B) are provided, and the winning probability of pushing order small winning combination B is the winning probability of pushing order small winning combination A. It is set lower than the probability, and (B-1) When the push order small winning combination A wins in the advantageous section 1, the information of the stop operation is notified, while when the pushing order small winning combination B wins, the stop operation is performed. The information is not notified (although the information of the stop operation may be notified), and (B-2) When the push order small winning combination B is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation is notified. , The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by not notifying the information of the stop operation when the push order small winning combination A is won. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by making the notification target combination different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. The winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination A and the pushing order small winning combination B are the same (or substantially the same), but the number of payouts when the push order is correct is different as described above, such as 15 and 6. Then, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed.

Further, for example, the internal winning combination has a push order small combination (for example, 6 choices) and a push order replay (for example, 6 choices), and the game state has a high RT state and a low RT state. When the push order replay is won, if the push order is correct, the combination of symbols that shifts to the high RT state if it is in the low RT state and maintains the high RT state if it is in the high RT state is displayed. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the low RT state is maintained in the low RT state, and the state shifts to the low RT state in the high RT state (see, for example, FIG. 23), (B). -1) In the advantageous section 1, the correct push order is notified regardless of whether the push order small combination or the push order replay is won, so that the number of medals increases when the push order small combination is won. When the push order replay is won, the expected value α is set so as to shift to the high RT state or maintain the high RT state, and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, one of these is the correct answer. The expected value β may be set by not notifying the pressing order.

In this case, if (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state where the correct push order is notified for the push order small winning combination and the correct push order is not notified for the push order replay, the high RT is set. It is difficult to shift to the state or maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the low RT state is high), but it is easy to increase the medals when winning the push order small role. Can be created. Further, when (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state in which the correct push order is notified for the push order replay and the correct push order is not notified for the push order small winning combination, the high RT state is set. Although it is easy to shift to or maintain a high RT state (the stay rate in the high RT state is high), it is difficult to increase the number of medals when winning a small winning combination. can do. That is, even if the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by different types of internal winning combinations to be notified in (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed). In (B-2) advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set by preventing the correct push order from being notified when either the push order small winning combination or the push order replay is won. You can also do it.

Further, for example, with respect to the push order small combination (for example, 6 choices), in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, at least the push order (that is, the correct push) is the correct answer for the first stop operation and the second stop operation. The expected value α is set by notifying (all of the order), and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, the push order that is the correct answer only for the first stop operation (that is, a part of the correct push order). ) May be notified to set the expected value β. Specifically, for example, when the first stop operation is "left", the second stop operation is "middle", and the third stop operation is "right", the push order is the correct answer. (B-1) In the case of advantageous section 1, the push order of "left → middle → right" is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the number of medals can be increased with a 100% probability. (B-2) In the case of advantageous section 2, the push order of "left →? →?" Is notified, and even if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the remaining two choices must be answered correctly by the player himself. Therefore, there is only a 50% chance that the number of medals can be increased. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the notification content (selection number) of the stop operation information different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

In addition, for example, (B) the information of the stop operation is always notified in the advantageous section, and the expected value is "+ 10.0 sheets", which is a high net increase, but the duration of one time is relatively short (for example, between 8 games). ) It is configured as an increasing section (special advantageous section), and (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 are not notified of stop operation information (or are notified with a predetermined probability less than that of the special advantageous section). However, it is configured as an effect section (normal advantageous section) in which the expected value is different for each transition to the special advantageous section, and can be mutually transferred between the special advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. To do. Then, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, a lottery for transition to the special advantageous section (AT lottery) is performed, and in the lottery, for example, it is determined that the lottery shifts to the special advantageous section with a probability of about 1/5. (That is, the expected value α is set by the increase rate of the game medium in the increase section and the transfer probability to the increase section) so as to be (winning the AT lottery), while (B- 2) The AT lottery is also performed in the advantageous section 2, and in the lottery, for example, the transition probability is set so as to win the AT lottery with a probability of about 1/20 (that is, the increase of the game medium in the increase section). An expected value β smaller than the expected value α is set depending on the rate and the probability of transition to the increase interval).

That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the transition probability to the increasing section (special advantageous section) different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. You may. The migration probability described above can be set as appropriate. Further, the AT lottery may not be performed in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, and in this case, in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, there is a probability of (B-) of about 1/20. 1) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section 1 is drawn, and if the lottery is won, the shift from (B-2) advantageous section 2 to (B-1) advantageous section 1 may be performed. Further, the conditions for shifting from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2 can be appropriately set. In this case, for example, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, during 5 games) without winning the AT lottery, and the fall is performed when the AT lottery is not won. Winning a lottery, the number of consecutive transitions to the increasing section (special advantageous section) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and the number of acquisitions in the increasing section (special advantageous section) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 400). It is possible to adopt the fact that (more than one sheet). As described above, it is possible to further diversify the playability by the transition specifications between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2.

In this example, the expected value α is set (B-1) in the advantageous section 1 and the expected value β is set in the advantageous section 2 (B-2) as states in which different expected values are set. Although the description has been given by giving an example of having two states, there may be three or more states in which different expected values are set, and these states can be set as appropriate. For example, it may further have an advantageous section 3 in which the expected value γ is set (B-3). In this case, the expected value of grant can be set so that α ≧ γ ≧ β or can be set so that α ≧ β ≧ γ. That is, (B-3) advantageous section 3 which is an intermediate expected value to be given is set between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2, or (B-2) advantageous section. By setting an advantageous section 3 whose expected value of grant is smaller than 2 (B-3) and gradually changing the expected value of grant each time the fluctuation condition is satisfied, the expected value of grant can be further subdivided. It may be possible to make adjustments.

(First aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, the first aspect of the game specification on the premise of another example (No. 1) of the game property (game specification) described above will be described. In this first aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+3.0 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+2.0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value to be given can be set arbitrarily.

In this first aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) advantageous section 1. As for (1) the start condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+3”) for at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period can be set, for example, between 50 games). (.0 sheets) ”) (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. Further, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. As the conditions for determining the continuation of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the conditions for determining the continuation of ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of.

(B-1) When the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) ) Move to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, at least for a specific period (a predetermined arbitrary game period, for example, between 100 games), the expected value of grant is the expected value β (for example, "+2"). (0.0 sheets) ”) (B-2) Advantageous section 2 continues. In (B-2) advantageous section 2, it is not determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. (B-2) When the game of the specific period is performed in the advantageous section 2, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and (A) the non-advantageous section is entered.

On the other hand, when the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in (B-1) advantageous section 1, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied even if it is not decided to continue the advantageous section, and (3) A) Move to a non-advantageous section.

In addition, (B-1) when the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is once shifted to the (A) non-advantageous section, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, an arbitrary precursor state between 4 to 32 games) has elapsed in the (A) non-advantageous section. After that, the (A) non-advantageous section may be shifted to (B-2) advantageous section 2 to continue the advantageous section.

Further, in this first aspect, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is assumed to continue for the above-mentioned specific period, but this specific period is not set as a predetermined arbitrary gaming period, for example, (B-1). The period until the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+2.0 sheets”) in the entire (B) advantageous section including the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 may be set. That is, in the early stage (B-1) of the advantageous section, the expected value of grant is increased by the expected value α, and in the subsequent advantageous section (B-2), the expected value of grant is adjusted (smaller) by the expected value β. You may. In this case, the predetermined waiting period may be included in the entire advantageous section (B) or included in the entire advantageous section in order to adjust the given expected value according to the expected value β. It may not be possible.

Specifically, for example, when the game value as expected value α is given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, the amount of the game value given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is 3 cards × 50 games. It becomes "150 sheets". After that, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, a certain standard (for example, 50 games as in the above predetermined period, longer games, shorter games, or actual game time may be used. In addition, other criteria can be adopted as appropriate), and (B) the notification probability is appropriately adjusted so that the expected value of the entire advantageous section becomes the expected value β. For example, when (B) the entire advantageous section is set to 100 games, the game value of "150 cards" is given in (B-1) advantageous section 1, so that the remaining advantageous section is (B-2) advantageous. In the section 2, the notification probability is adjusted so that the game value of "50 cards" is given between 50 games, and (B) the game value of "200 cards" may be given in the entire advantageous section. ..

According to the game machine of the first aspect, a state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively high (expected value α is set) for a predetermined period after the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is started. (B-1) It becomes possible to play the game in the advantageous section 1), and the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set) for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued (expected value β). B-2) It is possible to play the game in the advantageous section 2). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

In the gaming machine of the first aspect, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period ((B-2) advantageous section 2) after the advantageous state is continued. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated and the advantageous state is after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed. May be continued (restarted). In this way, not only can the ball output rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

(Second aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, a second aspect of the game specification on the premise of another example (No. 1) of the above-mentioned game property (game specification) will be described. In this second aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+7.5 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+ −0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value to be given can be set arbitrarily.

In this second aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) advantageous section 1. As for (1) the start condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+7”) for at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period can be set, for example, between 100 games). (5 sheets) ”) (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. The predetermined period may be, for example, a period from the start of (B-1) advantageous section 1 until the given game value reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 cards). However, (B-1) the game time after the start of the advantageous section 1 may be a period until (or exceeds) a predetermined time (for example, 0.25 hours).

(B-1) When the game for the predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) the process shifts to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, (3) the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+ -0 sheets”) until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (B-2) advantageous. Section 2 continues. In this second aspect, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is set to, for example, (B) the game is played for a specific period (for example, during 1500 games) after the advantageous section is started, or ( B) It can be determined that the game value given after the advantageous section is started has reached a specific amount (for example, a net increase of 3000 sheets) (such end processing of the advantageous section is the limit described above or described later. See processing). Further, even before the end condition determined in this way is satisfied (for example, before the limit processing is executed), the bonus combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and the bonus state is activated. ), Regardless of whether it is (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2, (B) advantageous section ends, and (B) advantageous section to (A) Move to a non-advantageous section. That is, it is one of the end conditions of (3) the advantageous section that the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination that enables the transition to the bonus state is displayed in (B) the advantageous section.

As for (3) the end condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition determined to end in ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type. Further, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, until the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ((B-2)) is set for each predetermined unit (for example, 50 games in one set). ) When it is decided whether or not to continue the advantageous section 2), and when it is decided to continue the advantageous section, when it is not decided to continue the advantageous section by a predetermined unit and to continue the advantageous section. (3) The advantageous section may be terminated even before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining to continue ART) can be adopted as the conditions for determining to continue the advantageous section. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of internal winning combination.

Further, in the second aspect, it is possible to execute the specific notification in the advantageous section (B) by using, for example, the display device 11. This specific notification is a notification effect for suggesting to the player that the bonus role has been won (carried over). However, in this second aspect, since the advantageous section ends when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed, this specific notification displays (the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. Suggests information that allows the player to choose between ending the advantageous section or continuing the advantageous section (by avoiding displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination). It can be said that it is a notification effect for doing so. In addition, it may be a notification effect to suggest that it is possible to shift to the bonus state by simply displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. It may be a notification effect for suggesting that the advantageous section can be continued if the above is avoided.

For example, in this second aspect, in the (B) advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed. In the case of a game, the specific notification can be configured to be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, when the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are both won (or the bonus combination is won). In the case where the replay combination or the small combination is duplicated when the combination is carried over, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is not displayed in principle. That is, "a game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed" is not such a situation, and if the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be used. It means that it is a game that can be displayed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play the game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit processing of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding the transition to the bonus state. From this point of view, it is not always necessary to divide the (B) advantageous section into the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, the expected value of grant is the expected value α. It is not necessary to make the expected value β different from each other), and (B) the expected value given in the advantageous section may be a constant expected value (for example, “+1.5 sheets”).

Further, for example, in this second aspect, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. Can be configured so that (2) the specific notification is executed when the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification becomes feasible, the specific notification is performed when the game is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed". It may be configured to be executed. In addition, if (2) the bonus combination is won in (B-2) advantageous section 2 after the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied and (3) before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, at this time, It can be configured to execute the specific notification. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification becomes feasible, the specific notification is performed when the game is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed". It may be configured to be executed. Further, in the case of winning the bonus combination (or carrying over) in the advantageous section 1 (B-1) after the configuration in this way, "a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. If it is a "game that can be played", the specific notification may be configured to be executed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play the game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit processing of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, for example, in the game period of (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game value is dramatically increased by setting the expected value α, so that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. This is avoided and the advantageous section is continued. (B-2) In the game period of the advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set and the game value does not increase dramatically. It is also possible to display the combination of symbols to end the advantageous section, and in the subsequent game, select (1) to establish the start condition of the advantageous section again and (B-1) to shift to the advantageous section 1. You can do it, or you can choose to end the game as it is if you do not have time to spare. On the other hand, in the game period of (B-2) advantageous section 2, the game value does not increase dramatically by setting the expected value β, but it is more advantageous to the player than (A) the non-advantageous section. Since there is no change in the situation, in order to enjoy the game, it is possible to avoid displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination and to continue the advantageous section.

Further, in this second aspect, when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and (B) the advantageous section is terminated, it is possible to give a special privilege by using, for example, a display device 11. ing. Among the various benefits given to the player, this special benefit is a benefit that is not related to the addition of the game value (that is, does not affect the ball output rate). In addition, the special privilege is a privilege related to the addition of the game value (that is, it affects the ball output rate) (for example, the right to establish the transition condition of the advantageous section, or the information of the stop operation during the bonus state. It does not prevent the right to be notified), but from the viewpoint of optimizing gambling, it should be a privilege that is not related to the addition of game value (that is, does not affect the ball output rate). Is desirable.

Specific examples of the special privilege include, for example, the execution of a special effect (for example, the various ending effects and other premier effects described above) that are usually unlikely to be executed, and the special notification that informs the player of useful information (for example. For example, execution of suggestion notification of set values, expectation notification for each production content, history notification such as winning probability of bonus role and transition probability of advantageous section), information provided via the Internet using the player's mobile terminal. It is possible to give points on the provided service and release specific conditions.

When configured to have the above special benefits as described above, the player does not enjoy the direct benefits such as the addition of the game value, but the indirect benefits that are of great interest in enjoying the game. Since it can be enjoyed, the advantageous section can be set early, especially in a state where the game value does not increase dramatically due to the setting of the expected value β, as in (B-2) Advantageous section 2. It can also be given an incentive to terminate.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is when a predetermined end condition ((3) end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It ends when it shifts to the special game state (bonus state) before. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state within the range of the predetermined predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the predetermined termination condition is when a certain privilege is given (or is assumed to be given) to the player (for example, the limit processing described above or described later). May be terminated (by). In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, according to the game machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until this is done, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, according to the game machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until this is done, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give special benefits not related to the addition of the game value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not granted when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

In the game machine of the second aspect, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when it is possible to shift to the special game state, it indicates that fact. The specific notification may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state is adjusted by the probability (notification probability) that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. You may. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (Part 2)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 94, another example (No. 2) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 2) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 94, in this example, there are a general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state. The general game state (CZ state) is a game state in which the winning probability of the replay role is low and the transition to the advantageous section does not occur, and this game state itself is not a game state advantageous to the player. It is positioned as a gaming state (chance zone. Special prize consecutive villa state) that is more advantageous than the (A) BB1 state in that it can shift to the (B) BB2 state or the (C) BB3 state. Further, the general gaming state (CZ state), (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state are positioned as a series of increasing sections described later. In the general gaming state (CZ), as in the case of the (A) BB1 state, an advantageous section can be configured to occur for a specific period when a specific notification condition is satisfied.

In the general game state (CZ state), when BB1 (for example, BB1 and BB2 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (A) BB1 state. As will be described later, this is positioned as a transition of the gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), when BB2 (for example, BB3 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (B) BB2 state. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), when BB3 (for example, BB4 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (5) BB3 start condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (C) BB2 state. As will be described later, these are positioned as transitions of gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player.

Here, once the BB1 is won in the general game state (CZ state), the BB1 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (display of the combination of symbols related to BB1 is permitted). Since the BB1 permission state is continued), the BB2 and BB3 are not won in the general game state (CZ state). Further, once the BB2 or BB3 is won in the general gaming state (CZ state), the BB2 or BB3 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB2 or BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (related to the BB2 or BB3). Since the BB2 permitted state or the BB3 permitted state in which the display of the combination of symbols is permitted continues), the BB1 is not won in the general game state (CZ state). That is, in the general gaming state (CZ state), if any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won, the bonus state corresponding to the winning bonus combination ends and the general gaming state (CZ state) is not entered again. As long as it is configured so as not to win other bonus roles.

In this example, the combination of symbols related to BB2 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "red 7-red 7-red 7", and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is, for example, "blue 7-blue 7-blue". It is configured as a combination of symbols such as "7". Further, the combination of symbols related to BB1 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "red 7-red 7-cherry 1" and "blue 7-blue 7-cherry 1" (see FIG. 15). In this example, when one of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general gaming state (CZ state) after the configuration in this way, the winning notification suggesting that the bonus combination is won is sent. You may be asked. Specifically, a display such as "Aim for 7!" May be displayed to indicate to the player that the "Red 7" symbol or the "Blue 7" symbol should be aimed. In this case, for example, when the player aims at the "Red 7" symbol and hits the BB2, the "Red 7" is aligned and the state shifts to the BB2 state, and the BB3 is won. In this case, "Red 7" is not aligned, and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is not displayed, and it is recognized that the winner is BB3. If the winner is BB1, the combination of symbols related to BB1 Is displayed and the state shifts to the BB1 state. In this way, in the playability of this example, it is possible to further improve the interest in notification. Further, the above-mentioned winning notification may be performed unconditionally when any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general game state (CZ state), for example, the general game. When it is possible to generate an advantageous section in the state (CZ state), it may be performed only during the advantageous section.

The (A) BB1 state is composed of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flags, and (A-3) BB1RB. In the (A) BB1 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (A) BB1 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (B) BB2 state, and (C) There is no transition to the BB3 state.

(A-1) In BB1 in general, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. To)) Set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out when the push order is correct with 6 choices, 1 medal is paid out when the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also when the push order is incorrect. (If it is inappropriate, no medal is paid out, etc.), RB for activating the RB state in which the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (A) Whether or not the BB1 state is an advantageous section. The advantageous section lottery winning combination for which the determination is made is set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability.

(A-2) Among the BB1RB flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. As)) set. In addition, the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the incorrect push order answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues. In addition, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same or different between (A-1) BB1 general and (A-2) BB1RB flag.

(A-3) In BB1RB, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is set to "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. )) Set. In addition, the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the incorrect push order answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. Further, in (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are the same. It may be present or it may be different. Alternatively, in (A-3) BB1RB, as an internal winning combination different from the pushing order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination, the pushing order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination having the same roles are won. You may do so. Further, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same between (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, respectively. It may be different.

In the general game state (CZ state), when (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. (A-1) In BB1 general, when the above RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts between (A-2) BB1RB flags, and during (A-2) BB1RB flags, a symbol related to RB is used. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line between the (A-2) BB1RB flags, the process shifts to (A-3) BB1RB. (A-3) In BB1RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games played) is satisfied. When it is established, it shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. It should be noted that, during the (A-2) BB1RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult to display the stop (or not to display the stop), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to move into (A-3) BB1RB.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (A) BB1 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 285), (2) the end condition of BB1 is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the BB1 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if the winning combination is won in the advantageous section lottery, it is a non-advantageous section. Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined, and if it is an advantageous section, whether or not to extend the advantageous section is determined. In this case, for example, an advantageous section of 30 games is granted or extended by one winning. It should be noted that the opportunity for determining the grant or extension of the advantageous section and the period thereof are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination, etc. It may be possible to decide whether to grant or extend an advantageous section. Further, when the grant or extension of the advantageous section is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately determined by lottery or the like. Further, (A) at an arbitrary timing before the BB1 state is started (for example, when the BB1 is won, or when the general game state (CZ state) after the BB1 is won and the advantageous section lottery is won). It may be possible to determine whether or not the entire period (or a part of the period) of the BB1 state is regarded as an advantageous section.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if it is an advantageous section, for example, in the above-mentioned push order small combination. In the winning game, the information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is notified, and as a result of the stop operation being performed according to the notification, the advantageous section becomes an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). .. On the other hand, in the case of a non-advantageous section, for example, in the game winning the push order small winning combination, the information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is not notified, and as a result, the game value of the non-advantageous section decreases. It will be a period.

As described above, in this example, the (A) BB1 state does not end until the number of medals paid out in the BB1 state exceeds "285". Therefore, for example, the case where a replay combination or other small combination is won is not considered, and the case where one piece is paid out in the push order small combination is not considered, and the total winning probability of the push order small combination is not considered. When is set to about 1/2 (32768/65536), the number of payouts of 9 sheets required to end the (A) BB1 state is "32 times" (32 times x 9 sheets = 288 sheets), and the above push If the forward and small wins are won according to the probability, the shortest number of games that can end the (A) BB1 state is "64 times" (32 times ÷ 1/2). Therefore, when all of the (A) BB1 states are advantageous sections, if the game is played "64 times", the game value is increased during the game period, and the (A) BB1 state is generally terminated at an early stage. It is possible to shift to the gaming state (CZ state). On the other hand, (A) when all the BB1 states are non-advantageous sections, the probability that 9 cards will be paid out in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won is basically reduced to 1/6, so (A) The standard number of games that can end the BB1 state is "384 times" (64 times ÷ 1/6), and the game value also decreases during the game period.

The (B) BB2 state is composed of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flags, and (B-3) BB2RB. In the (B) BB2 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (B) BB2 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, and (C) There is no transition to the BB3 state.

(B-1) In BB2 in general, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is relatively high, but (B-2) BB2RB flag (Lower than) set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out when the push order is correct with 6 choices, 1 medal is paid out when the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also when the push order is incorrect. If it is inappropriate, no medal is paid out, etc.), RB for activating the RB state in which the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (B) General gaming state (CZ state) after the end of the BB2 state. ) To the (A) BB1 state, the advantageous section lottery, etc., which determines whether or not the (A) BB1 state is to be the advantageous section, wins each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. Is set to.

(B-2) Among the BB2RB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is set high. In addition, the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues.

(B-3) In BB2RB, the replay is set so as not to be drawn. Further, the push order small winning combination is set to win with a high probability, and the advantageous section lottery winning combination or the like is set to win with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). Alternatively, in (B-3) BB2RB, the RB small and medium-sized combination and the advantageous section lottery combination, which play the same roles, are won as internal winning combinations different from the pushing order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination. It may be.

However, in the (B) BB2 state, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is set in (B-3) BB2RB so that the space between the (B-2) BB2RB flags is most advantageous, and (B-1) BB2. The same configuration as in general (1/6 is correct answer in push order) and 5/6 may be incorrect answer in push order). That is, in the (B) BB2 state, on the premise that the information of the stop operation is not notified, (B-1) BB2 in general and (B-3) BB2RB are set as relatively disadvantageous periods (decrease periods). (B-2) The period between the BB2RB flags may be configured as an advantageous period (increase period). In this way, in (B-1) BB2 in general, the RB is won at an early stage and shifted between the (B-2) BB2RB flags, and then stopped so as not to shift during the (B-3) BB2RB. If the operation is performed (or by performing such stop control), the player can play the game in the most advantageous state, so that the playability in the state advantageous to the player can be further diversified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without making it monotonous. In addition, by not increasing the gaming state, which is an increase period more than necessary, it is possible to simplify the ball ejection design and make the gambling property appropriate.

Further, as described above, in the (B) BB2 state, when the configuration is such that the space between the (B-2) BB2RB flags is the most advantageous, the game in which the RB wins, and the combination of the symbols related to the RB thereafter. In the game in which RB can be displayed, it may be notified that the RB has won or that the combination of symbols related to the RB can be displayed. With this notification, the player can perform a stop operation so as not to display the combination of symbols related to RB. In addition, the notification may simply instruct or suggest that the combination of symbols related to RB should not be displayed.

In this way, it is specified in a special gaming state in which a special combination (for example, BB, which is a continuous operation device for a first-class special accessory) is won and is operated by displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination. Corresponds to the first gaming state, which is a non-winning state of a combination (for example, RB, which is a first-class special bonus), the second gaming state, which is the winning state (carry-over state) of the specific combination, and the specific combination. It has a third gaming state (specific gaming state) that is activated by displaying a combination of symbols, and in the second gaming state, the stop control of a predetermined combination (for example, a push order small combination) is advantageous for the player. The specifications in which the control is changed and the second game state can be maintained by the player's stop operation or internal control are, of course, other game features (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example. It can also be applied to the bonus state (or other increase period (increase section)) described in the example. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the specifications of such a bonus state will be referred to as a "special bonus state".

In the general gaming state (CZ state), when the (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (B-1) BB2 general. (B-1) In BB2 in general, when the RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts between the (B-2) BB2RB flags, and during the (B-2) BB2RB flags, the symbol related to the RB. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). (B-2) When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line between the BB2RB flags, the process shifts to (B-3) BB2RB. (B-3) In BB2RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games played) is satisfied. When it is established, it shifts to (B-1) BB2 general. It should be noted that, during the (B-2) BB2RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult to display the stop (or not to display the stop), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to move into (B-3) BB2RB.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (B) BB2 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 150), (4) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied, and (B) the state shifts from the BB2 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In this example, the RB that wins in (A-1) BB1 in general and the RB that wins in (B-1) BB2 in general are not described separately, but for example, (A-1). ) In BB1 general, the winning RB is "RB1" (the corresponding combination of symbols is "combination of symbols related to RB1", the corresponding RB state (A-3) is "RB1 state"), and (B-1). In BB2 in general, the winning RB is set to "RB2" (the corresponding symbol combination is "the combination of symbols related to RB2", the corresponding RB state (B-3) is the "RB2 state"), and different RB combinations can be won. By configuring the above, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is the same as that of (A-1) BB1 general in the middle of the (A-2) BB1RB flag (“RB1 permission state”). (B-2) In the middle of the BB2RB flags (“RB2 permission state”), the basic configuration of the push order small combination may be configured to be different from that of (B-1) BB2 general.

During (B-2) BB2RB flags and (B-3) BB2RB, 9 cards are paid out regardless of which push order is used in the game winning the push order small winning combination. As a result of the above, the period is an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). On the other hand, in (B-1) BB2 in general, if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct answer in the game that wins the above push order small winning combination, 9 cards are paid out, but the push that is not the correct answer is made. If the stop operations are performed in order, nine cards are not paid out, and as a result, the period is a reduction period in which the game value decreases. However, since the transition is made between (B-1) BB2 in general and (B-2) BB2RB flags with the winning of RB, (B) the entire BB2 state is an increase period in which the game value increases. It is positioned as.

It should be noted that (B) the method of setting the entire BB2 state as a period (increase period) advantageous to the player is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, it is assumed that the RB state is always controlled from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied, and in the RB state, the stop operation is performed in any pressing order. Even so, the RB small and medium-sized winning combination in which 9 (or more than 15) payouts occur may be configured to win with an extremely high probability. Alternatively, without changing the control of the basic configuration of the push order small combination, the push order is always controlled in the advantageous section from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied. When a small winning combination is won, the increase period may be set by notifying the push order of the correct answer at least with a predetermined probability that the expected value of grant is positive.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, if the winning combination of the advantageous section lottery is won, (4) BB2 end condition The right to win BB1 in the general gaming state (CZ state) in which is established and transferred, and (1) the right to set the BB1 state in which the BB1 start condition is satisfied and transferred (A) the BB1 state as an advantageous section (for example, the number of sets, stock, etc.) ) Is given or not. In this case, with one win, for example, the right to set an advantageous section between 30 games is granted. The timing and period for which the grant of the right is decided are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination, etc. The grant of the right may be decided. Further, when the grant of the right is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately decided by lottery or the like. Further, at an arbitrary timing (for example, when BB2 wins or when BB2 ends) between (3) when the BB2 start condition is satisfied and (4) when the BB2 end condition is satisfied, the BB1 state It may be possible to decide whether or not to grant the right to make the entire period (or a part of the period) advantageous.

The (C) BB3 state is composed of (C-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) BB3RB flags, and (C-3) BB3RB. The start conditions of (C-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) BB3RB flags, (C-3) BB3RB, and (5) BB3 can be changed by replacing BB2 with BB3. 1) BB2 in general, (B-2) between BB2RB flags, (B-3) in BB2RB, and (3) BB2 start conditions are the same, so the description here will be omitted. Further, (6) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied when (C) the number of medals to be paid out in the BB3 state reaches a specified number (for example, when it exceeds 60 medals).

Based on this premise, the flow of the game in this example will be described. In this example, since the non-advantageous section (A) BB1 state is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the non-advantageous section (A) BB1 state. ..

In the (A) BB1 state, there is no transition to another gaming state until the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied. Here, if (A) the BB1 state is an advantageous section, the section functions as an increase period, so that not only the game value can be increased, but also the opportunity to receive the payout increases, so that the section can be used at an early stage (A). 2) It is possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) can be shortened). On the other hand, (A) if the BB1 state is a non-advantageous section, the section functions as a decrease period, so that the game value decreases, and the chances of receiving a payout do not increase, so that (2) It is not possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) cannot be shortened).

In the (A) BB1 state, when the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied, the state shifts to the general game state (CZ state). In the general gaming state (CZ state), if BB2 or BB3 can be won before winning BB1, the general gaming state (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) → general gaming state It is configured as a state (a series of increasing sections) in which a bonus state advantageous to the player can be repeatedly operated, such as (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) ... However, if the BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, it becomes impossible to repeatedly operate the bonus state that is advantageous to the player, and the series of increase sections ends. In order to shift to a series of increasing sections again, it is necessary to end the (A) BB1 state, which is a decreasing period unless it becomes an advantageous section.

That is, in the (A) BB1 state, the player desires to shift to the advantageous section or continue the advantageous section, and if the player actually shifts to the advantageous section or continues the advantageous section, the game value is increased. It is possible to shorten the gaming period until the transition to the general gaming state (CZ state) is performed. Further, in the general gaming state (CZ state), if it is desired to win the BB2 or BB3 before winning the BB1, and if the BB2 or BB3 can be actually won, the (B) BB2 state or (C) ) The game value can be increased in the BB3 state. The same applies when these gaming states are completed and the game returns to the general gaming state (CZ state). In addition, in the case of (B) BB2 state or (C) BB3 state, it is desired that the right to make (A) BB1 state an advantageous section is granted. In this example, for example, in the total probability of winning the bonus combination (BB1 to BB3), the winning probability of BB1 is about 50%, the winning probability of BB2 is about 25%, and the winning probability of BB3 is about 25%. Therefore, BB2 or BB3 does not always continue to win in the general gaming state (CZ state). However, if (A) the right to make the BB1 state an advantageous section is granted in advance, even if the BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, if the (A) BB1 state is in the increasing period, The game value is increased, and it is possible to return to the general game state (CZ state) at an early stage. In this example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by such playability.

According to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state (general gaming state (CZ state)), when the second special combination (BB2 or BB3) is won before the first special combination (BB1) is won, the first 2 The special gaming state ((B) BB2 state or (C) BB3 state) is shifted, and the second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the state shifts to the first special game state ((A) BB1 state), and the stop operation is performed in the first special game state. When the operation information regarding the above is not notified (in the case of a non-advantageous section), the first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the normal game state is changed.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a specific notification condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, or when it is determined that the right to be an advantageous section is granted. In the first special game state, operation information related to a stop operation in which a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given when a predetermined combination (pushing order small combination) is won is notified. Become. Since the first special game state ends when a specified number (for example, more than 285 pieces) of game value is given, such information is notified to end the first special game state. You can advance the time. That is, depending on whether or not the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state, the period until the normal gaming state in which the transition to the second special gaming state can be achieved can be changed. Therefore, by making the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in variety.

In the gaming machine of this example, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increase period. In this way, the interest of the game can be maintained even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, in the first special game state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state (during the (A-2) BB1RB flag), and in the second special game state, the second specific permission is further permitted. It is possible to shift to the state (between (B-2) BB2RB flags or (C-2) between BB3RB flags), and in the first special game state, the stop operation is performed regardless of whether or not it is the first specific permission state. In the second special gaming state, the period in which the second specific permission state is set may be made to function as the increase period. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (3)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 95, another example (No. 3) of playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 3) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 95, in this example, there are a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state. The (A) RT0 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is lower than that of the (C) RT1 state, and it is possible to shift to either the (B) BB state or the (C) RT1 state. (A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the BB is controlled between the BB flags (BB permission state) in which the BB is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Between the BB flags, even if the bell spill, which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the state does not shift to the (C) RT1 state. In this example, the BB is duplicated with one of the small winning combinations (for example, a so-called rare winning combination with a relatively low winning probability, which may be a replay winning combination) so as not to win alone. In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed in the game that wins the BB. BB will be carried over to the next game or later. Then, the combination of symbols related to BB is a stop operation in a game in which the internal lottery result is "missing" between the BB flags (that is, a game in which no other replay combination or small combination is won). It is possible to display (win a prize) when the timing is appropriate. In this example, (A) the probability of "loss" in the RT0 state is defined as about "1/12". However, as long as "loss" can occur, this "loss" probability can be any value. In addition, there may be cases where the BB wins alone, and in this case, it is assumed that the combination of symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the BB wins.

(A) In the game where the BB flags are between in the RT0 state and the internal lottery result is "missing", when the combination of the symbols related to BB is displayed, (1) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (A) It shifts from the RT0 state to the (B) BB state. The (B) BB state is a gaming state that does not shift to the (C) RT1 state, and is a gaming state that is in an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In addition, (B) the method of setting the BB state as the increase period is various methods described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example, such as the above-mentioned "special bonus state". Can be adopted. (B) In the BB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 140 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (2) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, if (3) the bell spill is stopped and displayed on the valid line before the BB flag is reached (that is, between the BB non-flags), the (C) RT1 state is set. Transition. The bell spill is, for example, a combination of the same symbols as the "R_RT1 transition" in the present embodiment, and in the game in which the push order small winning combination is won, the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. It is a combination of symbols displayed in the case. Therefore, if the (A) RT0 state is the (A-2) advantageous section, the correct push order is notified, so that it is not displayed as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification. A-1) In the normal case (non-advantageous section), the correct push order is not notified, so the possibility of being displayed is high. In this example, for example, if the winning probability of BB is about 1/20 (3276/65536), the total winning probability of the push order small winning combination is about 1/3 (21845/65536), which is higher than that. It should be designed to. As for the push order small combination, various specifications described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted. For example, in the push order (for example, 6 choices). If the answer is correct, 9 cards will be paid out and the bell spilled eyes will not be displayed. If the answer is not correct in the pressing order, 1 sheet will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, and the bell spilled eyes will not be displayed and the stop operation will be performed. If the timing is not appropriate, 0 cards will be paid out, and a specification in which bell spills are displayed can be adopted.

The (C) RT1 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that of the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state does not occur. Even in the (C) RT1 state, as in the (A) RT0 state, if it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases. If it is controlled to an advantageous section, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Even in the (C) RT1 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the control is performed between the BB flags (BB permission state) as in the (A) RT0 state. However, in the (C) RT1 state, the winning probability of the replay role is increased by the amount of the "loss" probability "1/12" in the (A) RT0 state, and the "loss" probability is "0". (That is, so that "loss" does not occur). Therefore, even if it is between the BB flags, there is no case where the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state. However, even if the "loss" is made to occur with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/8192), and the combination of symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs between the BB flags. It is good (that is, the (C) RT1 state may be configured as a state in which it is more difficult to display the combination of symbols related to the BB than the (A) RT0 state).

If it is possible to generate "loss" even in the (C) RT1 state, and if the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the state is changed to (B) BB. Since the transition cannot be made and the (C) RT1 state continues after the next game, if the stop operation is performed in a manner in which the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the game The loss of the person becomes extremely large. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a loss, in the unit game in which "loss" occurs in the (C) RT1 state, the combination of symbols related to BB is used between the start operation and the effective stop operation. An effect that suggests that the display is allowed, an effect that informs that the combination of symbols related to BB should be aimed at, a freeze effect that delays the start of rotation of each reel after the start operation, and the time required for the stop operation to be effective. It is desirable that one or a plurality of effects such as a stop operation invalidation effect that takes a longer time than usual can be executed so that the player can easily display the combination of symbols related to the BB.

When (4) a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are digested in the (C) RT1 state, the state shifts from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state. That is, when the (C) RT1 state ends and the BB flags are between, the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed when "loss" occurs. Even when the state shifts from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state, there is a possibility that the state may fall to the (C) RT1 state again when the BB non-flag is not set. Therefore, in such a case, (A) the advantageous section is continued until the BB flag is reached in the RT0 state (that is, until the BB is won), and the player is rescued. You may do so.

According to the game machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set, and when the normal game state ((A) RT0 state), the combination of special symbols (BB) (Combination of symbols related to) can be displayed to shift to the special game state ((B) BB state), while the specific game state ends in the specific game state ((C) RT1 state). Until then, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state. In addition, in the specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination of push order) is won in a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a specific symbol is not performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Transition based on the combination of (bell spills) displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal game state and the specific period (advantageous section) in the specific game state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. If this is done, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only is it possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when a specific role is won is increased. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific role is won. The game value given to is increased. In addition, even if the operation information related to a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during a specific period, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the above-described aspect is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state in which the special game state does not occur.

(Modified example of this example)
In this example, it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, and in the (A) RT0 state, BB as a special role is a push order small combination as a specific role. If it wins earlier than that, it shifts to the (B) BB state without shifting to the (C) RT1 state, and by making it possible to repeat such a transition, a series of increase sections is created. Made it possible to do. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the push order small combination as a specific combination is won before the BB as a special combination, if the player's stop operation is appropriate, the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state. However, if the player's stop operation is not appropriate, (C) the state shifts to the RT1 state, and a series of increasing sections is terminated. Then, in the (C) RT1 state, the transition to the (A) RT0 state is assumed unless a certain transition condition (in this example, digestion of a specified number of games) is satisfied. However, the method of starting, continuing, and ending such a series of increasing intervals is considered to have room for further deformation, and will be described below.

The modified example is the same as this example in that it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, but MB (related to the second type special character) as a specific combination. When the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the effective line by using the accessory continuous operation device), the state shifts to (D) MB state. The winning probability of BB is set to about 1/10 (6553/65536), and the winning probability of MB is also set to about the same. The MB is a bonus combination, and once it is won, it shall be carried over until the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed (between the MB flags, the MB permitted state). The MB always wins in duplicate with any special small role group among a plurality of special small role groups (for example, special small role groups 1 to 3), and does not win alone.

(A) In the RT0 state, when MB + special small winning combination group 1 wins more than once, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the second range below and the third third below. If it is performed in a mode that is a first range different from the range, or a mode in which a stop operation is performed at the left first stop, etc.), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 2 wins in duplicate, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the above first range and the following third range. When it is performed in a mode that is a second range different from the range, or a mode in which a stop operation is performed at the middle first stop, the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 3 wins in duplicate, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the first range and the second. When it is performed in a mode that is a third range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed at the first right stop, the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

In this modified example, when a plurality of MBs (for example, MB1, MB2, and MB3) are used as specific combinations and the combination of symbols related to any of the MBs is stopped and displayed on the valid line (D). It may shift to the MB state. In this case, the total winning probability of MB may be set to be about the same as the winning probability of BB. In addition, MB1, MB2, and MB3 may always win the prize in duplicate with the special small role group, and may not win by themselves. Then, when the MB1 + special small winning combination wins in duplicate, the same control as in the MB + special small winning combination group 1 is performed, and when the MB2 + special small winning combination group wins in duplicate, the same as in the MB + special small winning combination group 2. Is controlled, and when MB3 + special small winning combination wins in duplicate, the same control as in MB + special small winning combination group 3 may be performed.

That is, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is appropriate in the game in which the MB is won (for example, when the above three choices are answered correctly), the (D) MB state. Move to. (D) The MB state is, for example, a bonus state in which two medals are always paid out with a two-card bet, and when a specified number (more than two) of game value is given, the upper limit of the game value is given. Then, the MB end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (D) MB state to the (A) RT0 state. Here, the (D) MB state itself is not an increase period in which the game value increases (however, it is not a decrease period but a non-increase / decrease period), but after the end, it shifts to the (A) RT0 state, so that (D) MB The transition to the state is positioned as a transition to the series of increase sections described above, or a continuation of the series of increase sections.

On the other hand, (A) in the RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is not appropriate in the game winning the MB (for example, when the above three choices are not answered correctly), (C) It shifts to the RT1 state. In this modification, the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags does not end until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Then, (C) the probability of "loss" in the RT1 state is set to about "1/300". That is, in order to end the (C) RT1 state and shift to the (A) RT0 state, the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs in the (C) RT1 state (D). ) It is necessary to shift to the MB state and (D) digest the game in the MB state. In addition, when (C) the above-mentioned special small winning combination group is won in the RT1 state, it may be possible to display the combination of symbols related to MB even when the above-mentioned three choices are correctly answered.

(Flow of the game of the modified example of this example)
In this modification, since the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags. To do.

In the (C) RT1 state, there is no transition to the (A) RT0 state without the transition to the (D) MB state. The player waits for the occurrence of "loss" before playing the game. If the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game in which "loss" occurs, the state shifts to (D) MB state, and after the end of (D) MB state, the state shifts to (A) RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, when a bonus combination is won, the probability that the bonus combination is BB is 1/2 (50%), and the probability that the bonus combination is MB is also 1/2 (50%). When the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is BB, a series of increase sections is started. After winning the BB, there is no winning in the MB (that is, without shifting to the (C) RT1 state), and when the combination of symbols related to the BB is displayed, (B) shifts to the BB state and (B) ) The game value can be increased in the BB state. The (B) BB state is configured as, for example, the above-mentioned "special bonus state". When (B) the BB state ends, it returns to the (A) RT0 state again, and if the BB can be won before winning the MB again with a probability of 50%, a series of increasing intervals will continue. That is, the series of increase sections are game sections that can be looped (with a loop rate of 50%) with a probability of 50%. Note that this loop rate is an example, and can be set to an arbitrary value by appropriately changing the lottery value (winning probability) of the bonus combination.

In the (A) RT0 state, which is a series of increasing sections, if the MB is won before the BB is won, and if the combination of symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the game that is won in the MB, ( D) It is possible to return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the MB state. In this case as well, a series of increasing intervals continues. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game won by the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, a series of increasing intervals ends.

Further, when the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is MB, a series of increase sections is not started. However, as described above, if the combination of symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the game in which the MB is won, the (A) RT0 state may be returned again through the transition to the (D) MB state. it can. In this case, it may be possible to start a series of increasing intervals in the returned (A) RT0 state. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game won by the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, it may not be possible to start a series of increasing intervals. In the above explanation, the start of a series of increase sections is when the bonus combination that is first won after shifting from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state is BB, but the (C) RT1 state The transition from (A) RT0 state to (A) RT0 state may be the start of a series of increasing sections, or the first winning bonus combination from (C) RT1 state to (A) RT0 state is BB, and the BB is concerned. The time when the combination of the symbols according to (B) shifts to the BB state may be set as the start of a series of increasing sections.

(The first aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the first aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The first aspect is a specification in which an advantageous section is not provided.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state → (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state, and so on. Since a series of increasing sections can be created by repeating the A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state with each other, even if the player is not notified of the stop operation information, the game has a high degree of fun. It is possible to do. Therefore, as in this first aspect, it is possible not to provide an advantageous section.

Also in this first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be given, and the RB is won in the (B) BB state. When this happens, a notice or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when the MB is won in the (A) RT0 state and when the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, at least the combination of the symbols related to the MB is displayed. It is desirable not to make such announcements or suggestions. Here, "notification or suggestion that a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" means, for example, directly announcing or suggesting that a combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed. It is not limited to those that do, but include those that announce or suggest that the above-mentioned special small role group has won, or that the combination of symbols related to the winning special small role group has been won. This is because if the probability that the (C) RT1 state is substantially terminated by such notification or suggestion is increased, the gambling of the game may become excessively high. However, since the (C) RT1 state is not included in the series of increase sections even if it is small, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, "the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. The announcement or suggestion that the game method is presumed may be made.

(Second aspect of advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a second aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The second aspect is the specification that the transition to the advantageous section is possible only in the (B) BB state.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the game value given can be changed according to the mode of the player's stop operation, such as the push order small combination in the (B) BB state. Since the internal winning combination can be determined, if (B) the player is notified of the stop operation information with the BB state as an advantageous section, the expected value of the game value given during the (B) BB state can be determined. It can be maximized, which not only improves the interest of the player, but also contributes to ensuring the fairness of the game and making it easier to manage the payout rate. Therefore, as in this second aspect, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only during the (B) BB state. In this case, the advantageous section may be started when the (B) BB state is started, and the advantageous section may be ended when the (B) BB state is finished.

In this second aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when the MB is won in the (A) RT0 state, and when the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, at least the combination of the symbols related to the MB is the same as in the first aspect. It is desirable not to make any announcement or suggestion that the game method in which is displayed is presumed.

(Third aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a third aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The third aspect is a specification capable of shifting to an advantageous section in the (A) RT0 state and the (C) RT1 state.

This third aspect is basically the same as that described in this example, and in the (A) RT0 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (A-1) normal (non) Shift from (advantageous section) to (A-2) advantageous section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, shift from (A-2) advantageous section to (A-1) normal (non-advantageous section). Further, in the (C) RT1 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is shifted to (C-2) advantageous section, and the advantageous section is changed. When the end condition is satisfied, the transition from (C-2) advantageous section to (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is performed.

However, in this example, when the (A-2) advantageous section is reached in the (A) RT0 state, the push order that is the correct answer for the push order small winning combination is notified, so that the (C) RT1 is substantially. Information that can avoid the transition to the state is also notified, but in this third aspect, the information that can avoid the transition to the (C) RT1 state is not notified. That is, in the (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than the normal (non-advantageous section). Although the game value is given, when the MB is won, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is guessed" is not made, and the player makes the MB by himself / herself. If the combination of symbols can be displayed, (A) the RT0 state is maintained, but if the player cannot display the combination of symbols related to MB by himself / herself, (C). It is designed to shift to the RT1 state.

However, for example, when (A) RT0 state becomes (A-2) advantageous section and 50 games are given as the duration of the advantageous section, 10 games later (that is, the duration of the advantageous section remains 40 games). If the MB is won and the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state, the duration may be 40 games (C-2) to shift to the advantageous section. .. That is, the duration of the given advantageous section may be inherited from the (A) RT0 state to the (C) RT1 state, or from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state (note that in the latter case). The game period in the (D) MB state may or may not be included in the advantageous section).

Further, since the (A) RT0 state is a game period included in the series of increase sections, the (A) RT0 state does not provide the (A-2) advantageous section, and the game is not included in the series of increase sections. It is a period, and the (C-2) advantageous section may be provided only in the (C) RT1 state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. That is, in this third aspect, it is advantageous for the purpose of relieving the player who plays the game during the game period ((C) RT1 state), which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and preventing the deterioration of the interest of the game. A section ((C-2) advantageous section) may be provided.

In this third aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in this third aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates the winning of the internal winning combination (for example, small combination) related to the winning, the BB is set in the (A) RT0 state. When there is a mode of stop operation (push order or timing of stop operation) that facilitates the display of the combination of symbols related to BB when winning, the stop operation is performed based on the advantageous section. It is not desirable that the mode is directly notified, but such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the second aspect and the third aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the second aspect and the third aspect are combined is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, if the (A) RT0 state that hits the BB is the (A-2) advantageous section, the stop operation information is notified even in the (B) BB state, and (A-1) the normal (non-advantageous section). ), The stop operation information may not be notified even in the (B) BB state. Further, in this case, in the (A-2) BB state shifted from the advantageous section, the duration of the advantageous section is sequentially updated as the game progresses (that is, the duration of the given advantageous section is changed. It may be set to decrease (decrease), or the duration of the advantageous section may not be updated (that is, the duration of the granted advantageous section may not decrease).

(Fourth aspect of advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a fourth aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The fourth aspect is the specification that enables the transition to the advantageous section in the (A) RT0 state.

In this fourth aspect, contrary to the above-mentioned third aspect, in the case of (A) RT0 state and (A-2) advantageous section, when the MB is won, "the combination of symbols related to MB is By making a notification or suggestion that the displayed game method can be guessed, (C) information that can avoid the transition to the RT1 state is notified, but when the push order small role is won, the answer is correct. The push order is not notified. Further, in the case of (C) RT1 state and (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. By making such a notification or suggestion, (A) information that enables the transition to the RT0 state is notified, but when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is not notified. It is a thing.

In this fourth aspect, for example, the advantageous section may be provided with only the (A-2) advantageous section and not the (C-2) advantageous section. That is, the advantageous section is configured to have a function for continuing a series of increasing sections ((A) continuing the RT0 state) and (C) not having a function for ending the RT1 state. You may.

Further, in the fourth aspect, the advantageous section is managed by the number of times (the number of times of navigation) that "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed. It is preferable to do so. For example, (C) the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed in the RT1 state, (D) shifts to the MB state, (D) the MB state ends, and (A) shifts to the RT0 state. At an arbitrary timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. Then, in the shifted (A) RT0 state ((A-2) advantageous section), for the determined number of navigations, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed". Should be done. However, in the (A) RT0 state, for example, the BB is won, the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed, the state shifts to the (B) BB state, the (B) BB state ends, and the (A) RT0 state ends. At any timing of the transition, it is decided whether or not to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. You may. Although the management based on the number of navigations has been described as preferable, it does not prevent the adoption of other management methods (for example, management based on the number of games).

In this fourth aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in this fourth aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates the continuation of a series of increasing sections, (A) when the BB is won in the RT0 state, the BB is involved. When there is a mode of stop operation (pushing order or timing of stop operation) that facilitates the display of a combination of symbols, the mode of the stop operation is directly notified based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the third aspect and the fourth aspect are described as different aspects, but the aspect of the advantageous section in which the third aspect and the fourth aspect are combined is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, in the case of (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than normal (non-advantageous section). When the game value is given and the MB is won, the transition to the (C) RT1 state is avoided by making a "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is presumed". It suffices to be notified of possible information. In addition, in the case of (C-2) advantageous section, when the push order small winning combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (C-1) more games than normal (non-advantageous section). When the value is given and the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed, so that (A) RT0 Information that enables the transition to the state may be notified. As described above, even in the (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. No announcement or suggestion may be made.

(Advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted, and as the advantageous section specification, at least the third aspect or the fourth aspect is included. The limit processing of the advantageous section when the above is adopted will be described.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, it is possible to perform the limit processing described above or described later. For example, if the "number of games limiter" is used, the advantageous section continues for "1500 games", and if the "number of games limiter" is used, if "2400" medals are won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is still in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games, the number of sets, the number of stocks, the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc. remain, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

However, according to the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, a series of increasing sections may continue even after the advantageous section ends due to the execution of such limit processing. That is, there is a problem that the significance of setting a certain restriction on the continuation of the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player may be lost due to the series of increasing sections. Therefore, in order to provide a game machine capable of limiting the advantageous section in consideration of the provision of a series of increasing sections, it is desirable to take the following measures.

For example, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the series of increase sections is started, or before the series of increase sections is started. As a specific example, if it is determined that a series of increasing sections starts when the BB is hit in the (A) RT0 state, the same time as the (A) winning the BB in the RT0 state, or (A) The advantageous section is started when the state shifts to the RT0 state. Further, as another specific example, when it is determined that a series of increase sections start when the transition to the (A) RT0 state occurs, the same time as the transition to the (A) RT0 state, or the (D) MB state Start an advantageous section when shifting to. The start of the advantageous section here means the start of the advantageous section in terms of limit processing (control), and the actual duration of the advantageous section (number of games, number of sets, stock, etc.) at the start time is not necessarily the same. It does not mean that the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc.) is given. Therefore, regarding the duration of the advantageous section, for example, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example are adopted, and the duration is given (or extended) in each game state. It may be decided whether or not the item is correct or not, and it may be granted (or extended) according to the result of the decision. However, even at the time of the start, the decision on whether or not to grant (or extend) the duration of the advantageous section may be made.

Here, in the case of the "game number limiter", the maximum number of games is, for example, "1500 games", but from this "1500", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. Multiple) that operates in a series of increasing sections. If there is a bonus state of, the expected number of games (average number of games) of which may continue for the longest number of games) is converted to the threshold value according to the loop rate (loop rate is converted to the number of games). The value multiplied by the multiplication rate (variable determined as the multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated (or specified in advance) as the number of designated stop games. For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected number of games in the bonus state is "20 games" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of instruction stop games is "1500 games-20 games". × 6 = 1380 games ”.

Here, in the case of the "number limiter", the upper limit of the number of acquired sheets is, for example, "2400 sheets", but from this "2400", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state, the expected number of medals (the one that may be awarded the most medals) is converted to the threshold value according to the loop rate (the loop rate is converted to the number of medals won). The value obtained by multiplying the value (variable determined as the multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as the number of instructed stop acquisitions (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected acquisition number of bonus states is "120" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the instruction stop acquisition number is "2400-120". × 6 = 1680 sheets ”.

Then, when the limit processing is configured to be performed by the "game number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the number of games reaches the "1380 game" (number of instructed stop games). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ).

In addition, when the limit processing is configured by the "number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the acquired number reaches "1680 sheets" (instructed stop acquired number). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ..

In addition, it is a process after the instruction function is stopped based on the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions, but if a series of increase sections is completed before the limit process is executed, At the same time, or after the end, the advantageous section is terminated. As a specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing sections wins the MB in the (A) RT0 state and ends when the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and the transition to the (C) RT1 state is performed. , (C) The advantageous section is terminated at the same time as the transition to the RT1 state, or when the next game of the game transitioned to the (C) RT1 state is started. In addition, in the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, since a series of increasing sections may still continue, it is at least (C) RT1 that the process of ending the (controllably) advantageous section is performed. It is desirable to be in the state. However, this does not apply when the advantageous section is terminated by executing the limit processing. That is, in the (A) RT0 state and (B) BB state, when "1500 games" is reached in the case of "game number limiter" and when "2400 cards" is reached in the case of "number limiter". It may be possible to end the advantageous section by executing the limit process.

It should be noted that when the advantageous section continuously reaches the number of designated stop games or the number of designated stop acquisitions, the instruction function is stopped, which is substantially synonymous with the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, the above-mentioned "1500 games" of the "game number limiter" and "2400 cards" of the "number limiter" are defined as the regulation values of the game machines that can be installed in the game store, and are modified examples of this example. In the case of a game machine equipped with a series of increasing sections such as the game playability (game specifications) of, the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions is calculated from the regulation value as described above, and the calculated instruction stop is calculated. The value of the number of games and the number of times the instruction is stopped may be predetermined as the value of the "number of games limiter" or the "number of times limiter" so that the limit process is executed. That is, when there is a possibility that the increase period in which the game value increases due to the installation of a series of increase sections greatly exceeds the planned ball ejection design or the range of the predetermined regulation value, this protrusion Any method can be adopted as long as it is possible to regulate the advantageous section (advanced), taking into account the part that will be lost.

In addition, the technical concept regarding the game playability (game specification) described in the modified example of this example, the first to fourth aspects of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example, and the advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example are described in the present invention. The game machine according to the modified example of the example is described as an example, and is not applied only to the game machine related to the modified example of this example. That is, it can be appropriately modified and applied to the game machines described in the present embodiment, this example, and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (4)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 96, another example (No. 4) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 4) of the game property (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 96, in this example, (A) RT0 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag, (C) RT1 state MB flag, (D) RT2 state BB flag, (E) BB state, And (F) there is a gaming state in the MB state. The (A) RT0 state and the (E) BB state are positioned as the above-mentioned series of increasing intervals.

In the (A) RT0 state, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, (B) between the RT1 state non-flags, (D) between the RT2 state BB flags, and ( F) It is a gaming state that can shift to the MB state. Note that BB, MB, push order small role, bell spilled eyes, etc. are the same as those described in other examples of game playability (game specifications) (3) (including modified examples), so here. The description in is omitted. However, in this example, the MB wins in duplicate with any of the small wins or replay wins (for example, the above-mentioned rare win) so as not to win alone, and in the game in which the MB wins, the combination of symbols related to the MB is used. In a game that is not displayed and the internal lottery result is "missing" between the MB flags, the symbol related to the MB is always displayed regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (that is, the mode of the stop operation). The combination is configured to be displayed, but as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification), the MB is determined according to the mode of the player's stop operation and the like. It can also be configured so that the combination of symbols related to MB may be displayed in the game won in.

(A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

In the (A) RT0 state, when (1) BB is won, the process shifts between the (D) RT2 state BB flags as the BB permitted state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, the state shifts between the MB flags as the MB permitted state, but the RT state does not change. Further, between the MB flags in the (A) RT0 state, even if the bell spill is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the transition is not made between the MB flags in the (C) RT1 state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, the "missing" probability is set to be at least higher than in the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/6"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, (4) it is easy to satisfy the MB start condition. Further, in (A) RT0 state, (5) Bell spills are effective before shifting between (D) RT2 state BB flags or before MB flags (that is, between non-flags). When the stop is displayed on the line, (C) shifts to the RT1 state non-flag.

During (B) RT1 state non-flag, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is at least higher than (A) RT0 state, (A) RT0 state, (C) RT1 state MB flag, and (D) RT2. State A gaming state that can be transferred between the BB flags. (B) Between the RT1 state non-flags, if it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (B-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and it is controlled in the advantageous section. If so, (B-2) it becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (D) RT2 state BB flags as BB permitted state. Further, when (6) MB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (C) RT1 state MB flags as MB permitted state (RT state does not change). In this example, since the game in which the MB is won is configured so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed, the transition from the (B) RT1 state non-flag to the (F) MB state is not performed. However, as described above, it can be configured so that the (B) RT1 state non-flagged state may shift to the (F) MB state. It should be noted that (B) between the RT1 state non-flags and (C) between the RT1 state MB flags are basically the same RT state (RT1 state), regardless of which of the RT1 states (B) and (C). (9) When the number of games played in the RT1 state reaches the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) (that is, when 1500 games are exhausted), the state shifts to (A) RT0 state. At this time, if it is between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state non-flags, and if it is (C) between RT1 state MB flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state MB flags. ..

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least higher than that of the (A) RT0 state, and the game state can be changed to the (A) RT0 state and the (F) MB state. .. (C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, if it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (C-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and it is controlled in the advantageous section. If so, it becomes (C-2) an advantageous section and an increase period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the probability of "loss" is set to be at least extremely lower than that of the (A) RT0 state (for example, "1/8192"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, (7) it is difficult to satisfy the MB start condition. Since (C) the RT1 state MB flag is in the MB permitted state, there is no case where the MB is newly won or the BB is won.

Between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, and the game state can be shifted to the (E) BB state. (D) When the combination of symbols related to BB is displayed between the RT2 state BB flags, (2) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (E) the state shifts to the BB state. Further, since the "missing" probability is set to be at least higher than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/12") between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the symbol related to the BB The combination is displayed, and (2) it is easy to satisfy the BB start condition. Since the BB permission state is between (C) RT2 state BB flags, there is no case where a new BB is won or an MB is won.

(E) The BB state is, for example, a gaming state that is composed of the above-mentioned "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. (E) In the BB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 140 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (3) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(F) The MB state is a game state that is configured as a normal bonus state and is an increase period in which the game value increases. It should be noted that, as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification), it can be configured as a non-increasing / decreasing period. In the (F) MB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 13 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (8) the MB end condition is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the RT0 state. If it is, it shifts from (F) MB state to (A) RT0 state, and if it shifts from (C) RT1 state MB flag, it shifts from (F) MB state to (B) RT1 state non-flag. Move to.

That is, the (F) MB state does not change the RT state depending on its operation or termination (more specifically, the (B) (C) RT1 state operates through the (F) MB state). ing. Here, the (B) and (C) RT1 states do not end during the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) after the start. Therefore, the operation or termination of the (F) MB state does not affect the specified number of games. However, the period during the (F) MB state may be included in the counting target of the specified number of games, or the counting of the specified number of games may be interrupted (not included).

The transition control between the (F) MB state and the (B) (C) RT1 state is not limited to that described above. For example, when the (F) MB state ends, even if it has shifted from between the (C) RT1 state MB flags, it may be shifted to the (A) RT0 state. That is, the RT1 state may be terminated when the MB state is activated or terminated. In this example, when shifting between (C) RT1 state MB flags, the specified number of games is exhausted and shifting between (A) RT0 state MB flags, (F) MB state is activated, and (A) RT0 Unless it shifts between the non-flags of the state, or (F) activates the MB state and (B) shifts between the RT1 state non-flags, and wins the BB there, it will not shift to a series of increasing sections. Therefore, when the (F) MB state ends, the frequency of the transition to the series of increasing sections can be increased by shifting between the non-flags of the (A) RT0 state. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended ball output rate and its contents.

According to the game machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set and the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state) is changed to the special symbol. It is not difficult to display the combination (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), but when the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state (MB permission) However, the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a combination of special symbols (symbols related to MB) until the end of the first specific game state is completed. It is difficult to display the combination of) and shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state), and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state ((A) RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination in push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that a combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and the special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state via the special game state.

Further, according to the game machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set and the game shifts to the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state), which is special. It is not difficult to display the combination of symbols (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), but when the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state ( MB permission state), but the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played and the first It is difficult to display the combination of special symbols (combination of symbols related to MB) and shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state) until the specific gaming state ends, and as a result, the normal gaming state ((A) ) It is difficult to shift to the RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination in push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that a combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state via the special game state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, if it is a special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when a specific role is won will increase. Further, even if the operation information related to the specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special role, the special role or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. Regarding the order in which the special role or the special role is won in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 5)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 97, another example (No. 5) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 5) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 97, in this example, (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state), (B) BB1 state, (C) between BB1 flags, (D) BB2 state, (E) between BB2 flags, ( There are F) BB3 state and (G) game state between BB3 flags. This example attempts to make the game playability different depending on whether or not the type of bonus combination won in the general game state (normal game state) and the combination of symbols corresponding to the game won in the bonus combination are displayed. is there.

The combination of symbols according to BB1 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB2 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_blue same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB3 is configured as, for example, "BAR-BAR-BAR" (see FIG. 15). At this time, the "red 7" symbol, the "blue 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are arranged at equal intervals (or substantially equal intervals) on at least one reel (which may be all reels). When the stop operation is performed on the reel, the timing when the "red 7" symbol is displayed, the timing when the "blue 7" symbol is displayed, and the timing when the "BAR" symbol is displayed overlap. Configure not to. That is, when the "Red 7" symbol is aimed at and pressed, the "Blue 7" and "BAR" symbols may not be displayed, and when the "Blue 7" symbol is aimed and pressed, the "Blue 7" symbol is pressed. The "Red 7" and "BAR" symbols are not displayed, and when the "BAR" symbol is aimed at and pressed, the "Red 7" and "Blue 7" symbols are not displayed. To do. The combination of symbols according to BB3 may be configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), for example, when a bonus combination (any of BB1 to BB3) can be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/45 in total), the winning bonus combination is BB1. A certain probability is "45%" (winning probability is "1/100"), and the probability that the winning bonus combination is BB2 is "45%" (winning probability is "1/100"), and the winning is won. The probability that the bonus combination is BB3 is "10%" (the winning probability is "1/450"). Note that this bonus winning ratio shows an example, and BB1 to BB3 may be won with the same winning probability (winning ratio), or may be won at a ratio different from the above. Further, in (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state), BB1, BB2, and BB3 are configured not to win as duplication with other replay combinations or small combinations, but to win each independently. In addition, as long as the combination of the corresponding symbols can be displayed in the winning game, the winning may be configured to overlap with other small winning combinations.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), in any case, (1-1) BB1 is won, (2-1) BB2 is won, or (3-1) BB3 is won. A bonus winning notification will be given for the winning game. This bonus winning notification is configured as a predetermined notification that the fact that any one of BB1 to BB3 has been determined as the internal winning combination can be notified, but the type cannot be notified. In this predetermined notification, for example, it is notified that a character such as "big hit!" Is displayed or a WIN lamp is turned on to win a bonus role, but whether the BB1 is won or the BB2 is won. Or, it is not felt whether the player won the BB3.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), when (1-1) BB1 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB1 If the combination of symbols according to the above can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (1-2) BB1 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (B) BB1 state. In the (B) BB1 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140 cards) of the game value is given in the (B) BB1 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (1-4) BB1 ends, and it shifts from (B) BB1 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB1 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (1- 3) BB1 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (C) BB1 flag.

In this example, as in the present embodiment and other examples, there is a push order small combination, which will be described as a 6-choice push order small combination 1-6. In normal stop control, if the push order small winning combination 1 is the correct answer in the left middle right and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push order is the incorrect answer in the push order and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. One piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 2, the right and left middle is the push order correct answer and 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing, and the other push order is the push order incorrect answer. If the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one sheet is paid out, if it is not appropriate, one sheet is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 3, the middle and left are the correct push order, and 9 sheets are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing, and other push orders. Is the wrong answer in the push order, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 4, the middle right left is the correct answer in the push order and 9 If the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one card is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and the push order small winning combination 5 stops with the correct push order in the middle right and left. 9 cards are paid out regardless of the operation timing, 1 card is paid out if the other push order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is appropriate, if not, it is missed (no payout), and the push order small winning combination 6 is on the right. The middle left is the correct answer in the push order and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the other push order is the wrong answer in the push order, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out, otherwise it is missed (no payout) Become.

Between the (C) BB1 flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is higher than that of the (A) general game state (non-bonus state), and the "loss" probability is set to, for example, about "1/4000". Similar to the other examples, in this example as well, the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed only in the game in which (C) BB1 flags are "lost". If the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost", (1-2) BB1 is established, and the state shifts from between the (C) BB1 flags to the (B) BB1 state. Further, (C) between the BB1 flags, a bonus type notification is performed in which the winning bonus combination is BB1 (that is, the type of the bonus combination) is notified. This bonus type notification is configured as a specific notification for notifying that the BB1 has been won (display of a combination of symbols related to the BB1 is permitted) between the BB1 flags. In this specific notification, for example, it is possible to feel that the BB1 is won by displaying characters such as "Red 7 inside hitting" or turning on the lamp corresponding to "Red 7". ing. It should be noted that this specific notification can always be performed while (C) between the BB1 flags, or can be performed in a game in which a combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed between (C) BB1 flags. You can also make it happen.

Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, the stop control is changed for the push order small winning combination 1 to 6. Specifically, when the push order small winning combination 1, the pushing order small winning combination 3, and the pushing order small winning combination 5 are won, 9 cards are paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). Therefore, if you win the push order small winning combination 2, the pushing order small winning combination 4, and the pushing order small winning combination 6, one card will be paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). The stop control is changed to. Here, since the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 have the same winning probability, normal stop control is performed on the premise that the push order is not notified (A) General game. The return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flags than between the states (non-bonus state) and the (G) BB3 flags described later. It should be noted that (C) between the BB1 flags may be configured as a reduction period (however, the reduction rate is low when viewed from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) and (G-1) non-advantageous section described later). Alternatively, it may be configured as an increase period (however, the rate of increase is low when viewed from the (G-2) advantageous section described later). In addition, the expected value of grant may be configured as a non-increase / decrease period. Further, although it has almost no effect on the expected value of grant, even between (C) BB1 flags, for example, between (C-1) non-advantageous section and (C-2) advantageous section according to specific notification conditions. The transition control may be performed with.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), when (2-1) BB2 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB2 If the combination of symbols related to the above can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (2-2) BB2 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (D) BB2 state. In the (D) BB2 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140 cards) of the game value is given in the (D) BB2 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (2-4) BB2 ends, and it shifts from (D) BB2 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "Blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB2 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (2- 3) BB2 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (E) BB2 flag. If BB1 is replaced with BB2 and "red 7" is replaced with "blue 7" between (E) BB2 flags, it is basically the same as between (C) BB1 flags, so the description here is omitted. To do. The same applies to bonus type notification and the like.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (3-1) BB3 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and the BB3 is reached. If the combination of the symbols can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (3-2) BB3 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (F) BB3 state. In the (F) BB3 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140) of the game value is given in the (F) BB3 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (3-4) BB3 ends, and it shifts from (F) BB3 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state). The (F) BB3 state can also be configured as a decrease period or a no increase / decrease period.

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB3 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (3-3). ) BB3 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (G) BB3 flag.

Between the (G) BB3 flags, the winning probability of the replay role is higher than that between the (C) BB1 flags and the (E) BB2 flags, and the "missing" probability is, for example, about "1/65536" or " It is set to "0". That is, between the (G) BB3 flags, the probability that the combination of symbols related to BB3 is displayed is extremely low, or the combination of symbols related to BB3 is not displayed. The setting of the "missing" probability is not limited to this, and may be set to the same degree as between (C) BB1 flags and (E) BB2 flags, or may be set to a higher probability than these. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended ball output rate and its contents. (G) Similarly, between the BB3 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed only in the game in which "missing" occurs. If the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost", (3-2) BB3 is established, and the state shifts from between the (G) BB3 flags to the (F) BB3 state. Note that the bonus type notification is basically the same as between the (C) BB1 flags if "red 7" is replaced with "BAR", and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, between the (G) BB3 flags, the stop control is not changed for the push order small winning combination 1 to 6, and the normal stop control is used. Therefore, on the premise that the push order is not notified, the return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flag and the (E) BB2 flag, but between the (G) BB3 flags. If it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-1) a non-advantageous section and the game value decreases, but if it is controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-2) advantageous. It becomes an increase period in which the game value increases as a section, and in the (G-2) advantageous section, at least the push order that is the correct answer at the time of winning the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 is notified, and as a result, (C) between the BB1 flags And (E) the return rate to the player is higher (the expected value of grant is higher) than between the BB2 flags. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

That is, if (1-1) BB1 is won, (1-2) BB1 is established, (B) BB1 state is set and the game value is increased, and (1-3) BB1 is not established. (C) Between the BB1 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. (C) Between the BB1 flags is configured to continue until (1-2) BB1 is established. In addition, if (2-1) BB2 is won and (2-2) BB2 is established, the game value is increased in the (D) BB2 state, and if (2-3) BB2 is not established, the game value is increased. (E) Between the BB2 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. The space between the (E) BB2 flags is configured to continue until (2-2) BB2 is established.

In addition, if (3-1) BB3 is won and (3-2) BB3 is established, the game value is increased in the (F) BB3 state, and if (3-3) BB3 is not established, the game value is increased. Between the (G) BB3 flags, the game value sharply decreases in the (G-1) non-advantageous section, while the game value sharply increases in the (G-2) advantageous section. The (G) BB3 flags are configured to continue until (3-2) BB3 is established with an extremely low probability, or basically do not end once the transition is made. Since BB1 and BB2 have a higher winning probability than BB3, a sufficient period during which gambling can be suppressed can be secured. Further, usually, the former game property is provided at the beginning when it is installed in the game store, and it is highly possible that the latter game property is provided after a while. However, it is also possible to ensure that the game playability can be changed by the initialization operation as shown below.

For example, when the setting change operation (initialization operation for initializing the game state) is performed when (C) between the BB1 flags, (E) between the BB2 flags, or (G) between the BB3 flags, the carry-over combination By clearing BB1, BB2, or BB3 as, (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is entered. That is, in the case of configuring not to end between (G) BB3 flags, (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) is cleared by clearing BB3 as a carry-over combination based on the setting change operation. ) May be used. However, when the setting change operation is performed, if (C) between the BB1 flags or (E) between the BB2 flags, BB1 or BB2 as the carry-over combination is cleared, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state). ), But if it is between (G) BB3 flags, BB3 as a carry-over combination may not be cleared and (A) it may not shift to the general gaming state (non-bonus state). Further, even if the setting change operation is performed, it can be configured so that none of BB1, BB2 or BB3 as the carry-over combination is cleared.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the first special combination (BB1) or the second special combination (BB3) is won, the game is the game, or the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags) or the second after the winning. If it is not a game in which another internal winning combination has not been determined (so-called lost) in the special permission state (between the BB3 flags), the first special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to BB1) or the second special symbol (Combination of symbols related to BB3) cannot be displayed. Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination (small winning combination 1, 3, 5 in the pushing order) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given regardless of the pushing order, and the second When a predetermined combination (small combination 2, 4, 6 in push order) is won, a predetermined number of game values are not given regardless of the push order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to be controlled to the advantageous state ((G-2) advantageous section) in which the information of the player's stop operation is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit is in an advantageous state, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, the winning probability of the first special role is made higher than the winning probability of the second special role, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. The probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed in the special permission state may be made higher. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and end than the first special permission state. In this way, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes the button. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the game machine of this example, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified (bonus winning notification), and the first In the 1 special permission state and the 2nd special permission state, the type may be notified (bonus type notification). In this way, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while making the game playability more varied.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 6)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 6) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification), and FIG. 99 is a diagram for conceptually explaining another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which showed an example of the internal lottery table used in.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, in this example, there are roughly two types, a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and a BB state, and in the general gaming state (normal gaming state), either BB1 or BB2 The state in which the bonus role of is not won is defined as (A) general game state (between non-flags), and the state in which BB1 is won (BB1 permitted state in which BB1 is carried over), and 3 cards The state in which the medals are bet (hanged) and the game is played is defined as (B) a three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, and a state in which BB2 is won (BB2 permitted state in which BB2 is carried over). Therefore, the state in which three medals are bet and the game is played is defined as (C) the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, and the BB1 is permitted state, and two medals are bet and the game is played. The state is defined as (D) a two-card bet state between BB1 flags, and a state in which two medals are bet and a game is played in the BB2 permitted state is defined as (E) a two-card bet state between BB2 flags. .. Further, the bonus state in which the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line and started is defined as (F) BB1 state, and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line and started. The bonus state is defined as the (G) BB2 state. That is, it is intended to make the game playability different according to the type of bonus combination that is won (winned) in the general game state (normal game state) and the number of bets (the number of times the game value is multiplied).

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 99, for convenience of explanation, each lottery value used in (A) the three-card bet state of the general game state (non-flag) (see the column of "non-flag three-bet"). , (A) Each lottery value used in the 2-card bet state of the general game state (between non-flags) (see the column of "2-bet between non-flags"), (B) 3-bet state between BB1 flags and (C) ) In each lottery value used in the BB2 flag 3-bet state (see the column "3 flag-bet"), and (D) in the BB1 flag 2-bet state and (E) in the BB2 flag 2-bet state. Each lottery value used (see the column of "two bets between flags") is shown in each column, but this does not mean that the gaming state (RT state) is different. That is, the RT state can be controlled as a common RT state. However, it can also be controlled as another RT state. In addition, it is assumed that at least the internal winning combination, which is the target of the advantageous section grant decision described later, is a common lottery value among the set values.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is made, the winning of BB1 is possible and the winning of BB2 is not possible (see the column of "3 bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the case of two bets, it is configured so that the winning of BB2 is possible and the winning of BB1 is not possible (see the column of "two bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). In this example, the player can start the game (perform a start operation) in either case of betting two medals or betting three medals. There is. Further, "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 14 in order to use the bet, and the player operates the bet button to obtain two or three medals from the credit. It includes both medals for medals and medals for two or three medals are automatically hung by winning a replay role.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is won, BB1 is won (the combination of symbols related to BB1 may be carried over without being displayed in the winning game). Shifts between the BB1 flags. (1-1) When a game is played with a 3-card bet between the BB1 flags, (B) a 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags is set (see the column of "3-card bet between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, (2) when the game is played with two bets between the BB1 flags, (D) the two bets between the BB1 flags are set (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost" as described in the other examples (BB1 can be established). .. The "missing" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed that it is set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, this state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). Further, when the push order bell A (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "20" to "31" in FIG. 99) is won, if the push order is correct (the push order displayed by "abbreviation" respectively), 9 If the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (“○”), then one sheet is paid out, and if the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (“×”). ) 0 cards will be paid out. Further, when the push order bell B (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "21" to "43" in FIG. 99) is won, nine cards are paid out regardless of the push order and the timing of the stop operation. That is, in the (B) 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order of the push order bell B does not matter, and if the advantageous section is not considered, the 3-card bet in the (A) general game state (between the non-flags) The return rate is higher than that of the state and the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, (B) in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when the chance is won (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "7" to "16" in FIG. 99) (or the combination of symbols related to the chance is When winning a strong bell (see No. "17" and "18" in FIG. 99) and a strong bell (see No. "17" and "18" in FIG. 99), a definite combination (No. "19" in FIG. 99). When winning the internal winning combination (see internal winning combination), when winning the cherry (see internal winning combination of No. "44" in FIG. 99), and when winning the watermelon (see internal winning combination of No. "45" in FIG. 99). ), The advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is made with the probability corresponding to the internal winning combination (100% probability for the fixed combination). When it is decided to be granted as a result of the advantageous section grant determination, for example, an advantageous section of 50 games per set is granted (if it is already in the advantageous section, it is extended by 50 games per set). It should be noted that the mode of imparting the advantageous section is an example, and various modes described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Further, in the (B) BB1 flag three-card bet state, when the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1-2) BB1 is established and the state shifts to (F) BB1 state. (F) The BB1 state is, for example, a gaming state configured as a "special bonus state", which is an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as described in other examples). , 140 cards), (1-3) BB1 ends, and (F) BB1 state shifts to (A) general game state (between non-flags).

(D) In the two-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which the BB1 wins, although it is between the BB1 flags. Therefore, even if the game is "lost", the combination of symbols related to the BB1 Cannot be displayed (BB1 cannot be established). In addition, this state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a prize is won. However, considering that it is between the BB1 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (D) in the state of betting two cards between the BB1 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, two cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. However, either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B can be configured so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (B) 3 bets between the BB1 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so as to be the same as the state, and then (B) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. In addition, (D) in the state of betting two cards between the BB1 flags, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a two-card bet is won, BB2 is won (the combination of symbols related to BB2 may be carried over without being displayed in the winning game). Shifts between the BB2 flags. (2) When a game is played with a 3-card bet between the BB2 flags, (C) a 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags is set (see the column of "3-card bet between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when (4-1) a game is played with a two-card bet between the BB2 flags, (E) a two-card bet state between the BB2 flags is set (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which the BB2 wins, although the bets are between the BB2 flags. Cannot be displayed (BB2 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a prize is won. However, considering that it is between the BB2 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (C) in the state of betting 3 cards between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, 9 cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. That is, in the (C) 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is higher than in the (B) 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags, unless the advantageous section is taken into consideration because the push order of the push order bell B does not matter. It is low and is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is performed as in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. Here, No. Focusing on "F_Rip B" of "4", (B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the "normal lip" wins regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section grant decision is not made. (C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the "chance eye" is won and the advantageous section grant decision is made regardless of the mode of the stop operation. That is, (C) in the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the internal winning combination of "F_lip B" is promoted (converted) to the internal winning combination of "chance eye", so there are many opportunities to decide to grant an advantageous section. Therefore, when the advantageous section is taken into consideration, the probability of granting the advantageous section is higher than that of the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

(E) In the two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost" as described in the other examples (BB2 can be established). .. The "missing" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed that it is set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win).

In addition, (E) in the state of betting two cards between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, two cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. However, for either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B, it is possible to configure so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (C) 3 bets between the BB2 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so that it becomes the same as the state, and then (C) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags. In the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

Further, in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state, when the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (4-2) BB2 is established and the state shifts to (G) BB2 state. (F) The BB2 state is, for example, a game state configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the game value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as described in other examples). , 60) When the game value is given, (4-3) BB1 ends, and the state shifts from (G) BB2 state to (A) general game state (between non-flags). The (F) BB2 state can also be configured as a non-increase / decrease period.

In this example, when (B) the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags and (C) the 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags are compared, in the (B) 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order for the bell B is pushed. Is unquestioned, and since it is possible to shift to the (F) BB1 state, basically, the return rate (base value, ball output rate) is better in the (B) BB1 flag 3-card bet state. It is configured so that (may be good) is high. On the other hand, in the state of (C) three-card bet between BB2 flags, there are many opportunities to determine the advantageous section grant, and the expected value of grant when the advantageous section is reached is also high. If the winning probability of the internal winning combination, the probability of determining the advantageous section grant at the time of winning the chance, and the duration of the advantageous section granted when the advantageous section grant decision is made are appropriately adjusted, the (C) BB2 flag It is also possible to configure the return rate in the 3-card bet state to be equal to or higher than the return rate in the 3-card bet state between (B) BB1 flags.

Further, in this example, comparing the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state and the (D) BB1 flag two-card bet state, the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state results in the (G) BB2 state. Basically, the return rate is higher in the two-card bet state between the (E) BB2 flags because the transition is possible. It should be noted that the return rate is high because the control is performed so that the push order of the push order bell B does not matter even in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state as in the (B) BB1 flag three-card bet state. It may be configured to be.

When the player starts the game from (A) the general gaming state (between the non-flags), for example, the player can first select whether to make a 3-card bet or a 2-card bet. If you win BB1 as a 3-card bet and do not shift to the (F) BB1 state in the winning game, there is no merit in the (D) BB1 state 2-card bet state, so (B) with the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags as it is. Advance the game. (B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the return rate is relatively high, so the player does not decrease the game value so rapidly, but shifts to the (F) BB1 state to increase the game value. Alternatively, it is possible to select whether to increase the game value by shifting to the advantageous section (as a result of being notified of the correct push order for the push order bell A) by taking the opportunity of determining the advantageous section grant. In addition, in the state of (B) three-card bet between BB1 flags, the game value does not increase so rapidly even if the shift to the advantageous section is compared with the state of (C) three-card bet between BB2 flags.

On the other hand, if the player wins BB2 as a two-card bet and does not shift to the (G) BB2 state in the winning game, the player either advances the game in the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, or (E) BB2. It is possible to select whether to proceed with the game in the state of betting two cards between the flags. (C) In the three-card bet state between BB2 flags, the return rate is relatively low and the game value does not shift to the bonus state. When the probability of obtaining is increasing and the player shifts to an advantageous section (as a result of being notified of the correct push order for push order bell A and push order bell B), the game value can be rapidly increased. there is a possibility. In addition, in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state, although the game value in a small role cannot be expected to increase, the return rate is relatively high, and the game value is increased by shifting to the (G) BB2 state. Can be increased. In this example, such playability (game specifications) can be provided.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first amount (3 cards), the first special role (BB1) can be won, while the second special role (BB2) can be won. Not possible. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (two cards), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination ("F_rip B") is won, the combination of specific symbols (chance eye) cannot be displayed in the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags), and the second special permission state (BB2) is not displayed. If it is (between flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, an advantageous state (advantageous section) is given when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. It is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous section (determination of granting an advantageous section), and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first quantity, the combination of the first special symbols (combination of symbols related to BB1) can be displayed, while the second special symbol can be displayed. (Combination of symbols related to BB2) cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, as a state in which the game is played, for example, in the first special permission state, the game is played with the first amount of the game value bet ((B) BB1 flag). (3 bets between 3 cards), 2nd special permission state, where the game is played with the first amount of game value bet ((C) 3 bets between BB2 flags), 1st special permission state There is a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played ((D) a state in which two cards are bet between BB1 flags), and a second special permission state in which a second amount of game value is bet. It is possible to create a plurality of states in which the game is played ((E) a two-card bet state between the BB2 flags).

Then, according to the gaming machine of this example, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, when the first predetermined combination (pushing order bell A) is won, for example, if the pushing order is correct, a predetermined number (for example, 9) is used regardless of the state. The game value of (sheets) is given, and if the push order is incorrect, a predetermined number of game values are not given, and if the second predetermined combination (push order bell B) is won, the first special permission state is set. In a state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, for example, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the first predetermined amount is given. The same control as the combination may be performed. In this way, it is possible to set the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first special permission state to the state in which the addition of the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

With reference to FIGS. 92 to 99, other examples of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment have been described above. The points that have been mainly described and that have been omitted or briefly explained can be applied by appropriately supplementing the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples. .. It is also possible to combine a part or all of the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified example to form the present invention.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (number limiter)]
Subsequently, another example of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. So far, as a limiter for the advantageous section, a limiter using the number of games digested during the advantageous section (hereinafter, "game number limiter") has been described, but the type of limiter for the advantageous section is not limited to the game number limiter. Absent. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. A limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a "number limiter".

FIG. 100A is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), and is also referred to as a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number is the value seen from the player, and if the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of medals inserted (plus on the player side), plus or vice versa. In the case of, it becomes negative. The horizontal axis is the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been digested from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter starts at the time when the number of medals is reduced to the maximum so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time, and forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 medals is obtained. It is something to make.

In the figure, about 100 medals have decreased since the start of the advantageous section. This means that, for example, if the start of the advantageous section is the start of the above-mentioned normal advantageous section, the number of medals is reduced due to the game period or the preparation state during the above-mentioned advantageous section. The number of medals has continued to increase from the start of the advantageous section to -100, and finally the number of medals has increased to about +2300. At this point, from the player's point of view, at least 2400 medals are at hand. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly terminate the advantageous section. Thereby, gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number limiter, and may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter and the number of games. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed by using both the limiter and the limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when one of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In this explanation, the number of games limiter is 1500 games and the number of game limiters is 2400, but this is an example, and a value smaller or larger than this is adopted according to the game specifications to make the gambling appropriate. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, it is the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase per game, expected net increase including increase due to bonus operation) and the activation condition of the number of games limiter. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C, which is a condition for activating the number limiter, will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the inclination value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is the activation condition of the number of games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) × B (100 games) = C (300 sheets)) in which the inclination value A × the number of games of the number of games limiter B = the difference number of sheets C of the number of sheets limiter is Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and it is possible to stably control an advantageous section and appropriately suppress gambling.

In the second specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games) <C (400 sheets)) is that the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B <the difference number C in the number limiter. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter is activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games The limiter is activated. If the number of bonuses is drawn more than the expected value, or if the push order role with a large net increase is drawn extremely more than the expected value, the number limiter is activated, and if the game progresses at a value close to the expected value, the number of games The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number of games limiter by reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number limiter, and the player's consciousness is the game rather than the difference number. It will lean toward the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals will be paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number of games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter> number number limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in the number of sheets, it is better to use such specifications. For example, in the case of a type in which the end condition (not the limiter) such as ending with a net increase of 100 sheets per set is managed by the difference number, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player can use it. The limiter can reduce the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off, and can suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the third specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games)> C (200 sheets)) in which the inclination value A x the number of games in the limiter B> the difference number C in the number limiter is set. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. Since the inclination value is "3", 200 medals will be paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is such that the number of games limiter <the number of games limiter. If you don't want to worry about the activation of the number of games limiter due to the number of games, you can use this specification. For example, for specifications such as a net increase of 0.1 to 1 per game, which is relatively low but the number of games continues for a long time, such specifications can suppress the frequency of activation of the limiter, and the player can use the limiter. As a result, the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off can be reduced, and the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In any specification, the end condition of the advantageous section other than the limiter is more than the ratio of the end when the limiter is reached (for example, the ART continuability period (the number of ART games), the number of sets and the stock become zero). Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to digest the advantageous section is eliminated by activating the limiter as a ball ejection design in which the rate at which the advantageous section ends is high.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end-time effects by using the display device 11 or the like when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. If each is a dedicated production, it will lead to a game motivation to see each production once. Further, the sub-control board 72 may have different distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section depending on the type of the limiter. For example, if the number limiter is used, the accuracy of setting suggestion may be higher than when the game number limiter is activated (the difference in coefficients for each setting is large, or it is easy to produce an effect in which a specific setting is fixed). By obtaining specific information such as setting suggestions or seeing a special effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-mentioned limiter specifications. For example, in terms of specifications, it is easier for the player to determine the effect (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is high) when the limiter which is difficult to activate is activated rather than the limiter which is easy to activate. May be good.

(Ending production according to the type of limiter)
Further, the sub-control board 72 has an ending effect A when the activation of the number limiter is concentrated, and an ending effect B when the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated. There is no big difference in the rate of occurrence, but if at least one of them occurs heavily, ending effect C (may be an effect having a branch to ending effect A or B), etc. It is also possible to provide an advantageous section end suggestion effect period (ending) before the limiter is activated so that the player does not feel uncomfortable due to sudden termination at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, "the situation where the number limiter is activated" means, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the difference number, the difference calculated from the difference number so far and the remaining ART period. The sum with the number of sheets (for example, "the number of remaining games x the inclination value" in the case of ART for managing the number of games) is set to the threshold value (for example, the difference number of sheets in which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number of sheets). It is when the number of sheets is reached, and when, for example, ART is managed based on the number of difference sheets, the sum of the number of sheets of difference and the number of remaining sheets reaches a threshold value. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated" is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the number of games. The sum with the number of games to be played (for example, "remaining difference number / gradient value" in the case of ART for managing the difference number) is slightly smaller than the threshold (for example, the number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated or the number of games concerned). (Small value) is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games that have passed so far and the number of remaining games reaches the threshold value.

(Notify or suggest the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen about the type of the activated limiter or the effect generated corresponding to the limiter type (the type of the ending effect, etc.). Is also good. In this case, since a large number of balls have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to motivate the game to expect a high setting.

(Outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall side can grasp which of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated by a hall computer or the like. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, in the case of the original ball ejection specification, the number of games limiter is mainly activated, and in the model where the number limiter is not activated so much, if the number limiter is activated frequently, some kind of goto action is performed or the game The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

If the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, the main control board 71 may output one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals. May be output in a predetermined order. When outputting in order, it is preferable to wait a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signal can be reliably received. Further, when the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, only one of the limit processing is performed and the other processing is not performed, and the main (main control board 71) In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the type of limiter)
Further, if there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal plate for external signal output, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal is used regardless of the type of limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter, so that the hall computer or the like can detect that the advantageous section has ended. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal immediately after the game or the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots obtained exceeds the number of number limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was inadequate, and the bonus was activated near the number limiter reached by chance to win the ball. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation (at the end of the bonus))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such a specification may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of balls is substantially increased.

(Production when the player misses a small role in a game where the number limiter may be activated)
For example, in a three-card game with six remaining sheets until the number limiter is activated, nine medals are paid out at the time of the correct answer, and the push order small role is won, and the correct answer push order is notified. Regardless, if the player makes a mistake in the push order, the number limiter may be activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game, and the production when the number limiter is activated may be started from the start of the game. .. In such a case, as a result of making a mistake in the pressing order, the number limiter is not activated, but the sub-control board 72 is scheduled to activate the number limiter that started from the start of the game (for example, the number limiter is scheduled to be activated). The effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number limiter is not activated.

(Production when the limiter to be activated is changed by the operation of the player)
In addition, the type of limiter to be activated may differ due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining games until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the number of remaining games until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out at the time of correct answer in a 3-card game. This corresponds to the case where the order of pushing the correct answer is notified by winning the small role. In such a case, if the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order without following the notification, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (In addition, there is a possibility that the number limiter will be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that the number of games limiter is activated with priority when multiple limiter activation conditions are satisfied).

In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the push order small combination is won, and at an arbitrary timing of the transition in which the non-activation of the number limiter is confirmed (first stop operation ~ When all reels are stopped, switch to the production when the number of games limiter is activated at any timing after the display of the missing or small number of symbol combinations is confirmed), or the production does not correspond to the suggestion of activating any of the limiters. It is preferable to perform a process of returning once and control so as to avoid a contradiction between the limiter to be activated and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, delay of the end effect and extension of the ending effect due to the activation of the limiter inside)
Regarding the effects and controls performed in connection with the limit processing described so far, if the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus end at the timing of the production according to the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing. By using a method of delaying the time or until immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect until then, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

[How to control the number limiter]
Subsequently, a method of controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (B). In the number limiter, the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is set as the lowest point (starting point), and the plus amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number that triggers the activation of the number limiter. .. The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, the increase / decrease of medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then the number of medals is increased to reach the number limiter (note that the batting order is reached). The small role is written as "batting order bell").

In the figure, the point where the absolute value of medals decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is "-9", so the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference is "+2391" in the N game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of correct answers in the order of pushing in the N + 2 game and the bells are aligned, the difference number from the starting point exceeds "+2400 sheets", but the number limiter has already been activated and the advantageous section (ART) has ended. , It's only temporary and there is no problem.

In the figure, the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of the payout of the game is shown, but it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to be mounted on the game machine. Of course, the corresponding counter may be mounted and used to show the player the number of acquired cards.

The starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. It may be recognized as the lowest point simply because the value of the counter (number counter) used for the limiter is 0 without having the starting point flag, but whether or not the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has started. Is produced on the sub (sub control board 72) side, etc., by referring to the starting point flag that can be performed only by ON / OFF determination, and producing the value of the number counter without transmitting it to the sub side (main control board). The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub side receives the information on the number of input and the number of payouts transmitted from the main and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub side, and produces the status of the number counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number limiter is activated). Etc.) may be performed.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated either when the value becomes the same as or less than the latest lowest point. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference becomes "-3" again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. Actually, since the number of medals has decreased since then, the absolute difference number at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is "-9", which is the starting point in the number limiter.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the digestion of one game at the start of the advantageous section (when the absolute difference number is 0) is set. It is set as the first lowest point, the end of one game is the second lowest point, the time when it becomes minus 9 is the third lowest point, and when 2400 sheets are increased from the third lowest point, the number limiter is activated. May be. Further, in the figure, when the replay wins a prize, the number counter is updated with 0 inserted and 0 paid out. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number of sheets at the time of replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, it is also possible to pay out the number of inserted sheets at the time of winning the replay and update the number counter with the number of inserted sheets being three in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay wins and the time when the start operation of the next game is performed can be matched with the actual difference number behavior, and the value of the number counter can be actually increased or decreased. It can be easily diverted to display the number of sheets for production.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display device 11 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can grasp or suggest the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated, and if the number of remaining sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first production stage, if the remaining 1000 to 1999 sheets, the second production stage, and the remaining 999 sheets. If the number of sheets is less than the number of sheets, it may be suggested that the production stage such as the background is different depending on the number range until the number limiter is activated, as in the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal and can display it on a data display for viewing game data installed on a hall computer, an upper part of a pachislot machine, or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintains the values of the starting point flag and the number counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may erase the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when the setting is changed.

[Adjustment method of number limiter]
Subsequently, the adjustment striking method of the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (C). In the specification of forcibly ending the advantageous section using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter can be considered by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the activation of the number limiter. For example, if the push order small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "9" medals are paid out and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect push order. In the specification that the payout of medals is "0", 3 medals are required in one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order at the time of winning the push order, the number counter will be "+6 sheets" is set, and if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order when the push order combination is won, the number counter is set to "-3 sheets". Therefore, for example, when the push order is won three times, if the push order is incorrect twice and the correct answer is made once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the winning of the bonus while keeping the ART (advantageous section) immediately before the number limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment striking method starts from the M game, and the adjustment striking method is performed up to the X game which wins the BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 in which the number limiter is activated, have been obtained (note that the small role (15) in BB is described as "BB medium bell". ).

In Pachislot 1, it is possible to obtain the maximum profit for the player by suggesting or notifying that it is advantageous to intentionally oppose the batting order notification (stop different from the batting order navigation). Operation) may be prompted. It should be noted that such an effect may be performed by the sub-control board 72 via the display device 11 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

In addition, if there are multiple types of bonus roles such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 cards and a relatively high winning probability (15 cards in the bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult) and a bonus with a net increase of 120 cards, the number limiter The effect of recommending the above adjustment striking method may be performed on a line in which the remaining difference number until reaching is larger than the net increase number in the mini bonus. Further, for the small winning combination other than the pushing order combination, the number of payouts may be easily adjusted (for example, the number of payouts is 3) without increasing the number of payouts exceeding 3. In this way, by making the game playable so that the ball output rate can be improved by devising the way of hitting, the interest of the game is enhanced.

If you place importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of game play being avoided by beginners, the number counter is not added by the actual net increase, but by the net increase when playing as instructed. You may do it. For example, in a three-card game, when a player wins a push order small winning combination in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer, the main control board 71 determines the operation mode of the player on the condition that the correct push order is notified. Regardless of the winning result, the number counter is set to +6. As such a specification, a specification that seals such an adjustment striking method may be used.

[Playability with specifications that block the adjustment method]
Next, the playability that can be realized by the specification that seals such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(No bonus installed)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is composed only of a small role and a replay without installing a bonus role, the player does not have to ask the player for the above-mentioned complicated striking method, and the playability becomes easy to understand.

(Equipped with a bonus that does not increase or decrease or decreases)
In addition, as another specification example of suppressing the above-mentioned striking method, the bonus may be a non-increase / decrease bonus in which only a small winning combination in which the same number of coins is paid out during operation is won, and the bonus is thrown during operation. It may be a reduced bonus in which only small wins are paid out, which is less than the number of cards. In this case, the bonus may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation in the lottery of the advantageous section instead of increasing the medals, and although the advantageous processing is not performed, the player at the game store As long as a normal game is performed, the reel control hinders the winning of the bonus, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The net increase in the number of cards during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Assuming a three-card game, there is no payout at the time of bonus winning, so the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of winnings that can be generated during the bonus operation is 6 cards or less. By doing so, the difference number of sheets from the time of bonus operation to the end of bonus does not become a positive value, so the value of the number counter does not increase due to bonus operation, and the above-mentioned complicated hitting The player does not have to do the law.

[Playability with specifications that allow adjustment striking]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(Remove small roles during bonus operation or reduce the number of acquired cards)
In addition to the specifications that can perform the above-mentioned striking method, if the number limiter is activated during the bonus operation, intentionally reduce the number of bonuses obtained, end the bonus, and after the bonus, use the above-mentioned striking method. In some cases, it is most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantageous section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to drop a small winning combination in the pressing timing or pressing order, or to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts. In this case, it is desirable that the number of winnings with a small number of payouts is smaller than the number of coins inserted during the bonus operation. For example, when a specific point is pressed, 14 cards are paid out, and when other points are pressed, 15 cards are paid out. A certain effect can be achieved even if a role that allows fine adjustment such as being received is provided.

(Normal roles other than push order are only replays or roles less than the number of inputs)
For example, it is assumed that the bonus is not activated and three cards are hung. The number of small push orders is 9, but other roles such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push order are configured as a replay role or a role with 3 or less payouts. By doing so, even if another small role is drawn in a situation where the number limiter operates with the net increase of the remaining few sheets, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty of the strategy is reduced, making it easier to play.

(The player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number of cards (1 or 2 cards) when the stop operation is different from the navigation of the push order role)
There is a specification that one piece will be paid out or missed if the stop operation is different from the push order navigation. In this case, since the increase / decrease of the game occurs in two ways, minus 2 and minus 3, it is difficult to calculate and it may be confusing while playing. Compared to such specifications, when the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 or 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring the navigation, the negative value when ignoring the navigation with the number of sheets at the last minute is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player makes a mistake in the calculation and hits the part that should be ignored by the navigation one more time according to the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

In addition, it is possible to exert a certain effect even if it is generally stabilized, such as one piece being paid out or being missed at a high frequency, not always. In addition, the number of payouts may be stable due to the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when the batting order navigation of "1, 2, 3" (left, middle, right is the correct batting order) occurs, the winning rate of 1 card is "middle 1st"> "right 1st", and 3 cards If you want to reduce it, you may choose the right first stop, and if you want to reduce two cards, you may choose the middle first stop. Also, if you miss the second stop after the first stop is correct in the game, and if you stop in the order of "1.3.2", there is a higher probability than other navigation-ignored batting orders, or one card will always win. , It is good that the player can choose how to reduce by batting order.

(Navigation mode changes when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub control board 72 displays the push order in the first mode (blue numbers, etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub control board 72. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).

(Changes depending on the situation or production that should be ignored in navigation)
The main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 may be different depending on the situation in which the mode such as BGM, video, and lamp is followed by the navigation and the situation in which the mode is against the navigation. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether or not the situation should be against the navigation when the navigation occurs in the next game before the navigation occurs.

(Lock or reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may be provided with a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) or a temporary operation acceptance invalidation period of the stop button immediately after the lever is turned on or after the reel rotation is started. As a result, the player can be alerted and the case where the advantageous section is accidentally ended can be prevented. Further, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 also alerts by audio or video.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)]
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), that is, based on the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. , Limit processing is to be performed, but it is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number of medals (for example, 2400 medals) are paid out during the advantageous section.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the input number from the payout number, but in the payout number limiter, the payout number is referred to as it is without subtracting the input number from the payout number. When the number of payouts reaches the specified value, limit processing is performed. In such a payout limiter, the main control board 71 is an advantageous section (in this case, including, for example, the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section") or an increase section (that is, a game section in which medals actually increase. In this case, for example, The payout number counter is initialized at the start of the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section"), and the payout number counter is updated every time a payout occurs due to a small winning combination. Then, when the value of the payout number counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section.

Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when the winning combination related to the replay is won is arbitrary, and it may be counted as 3 payouts, or it is counted as 0 payout. However, it is desirable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payouts when the winning combination related to the replay wins. By doing so, for example, in a 3BET game, there are cases where a three-card combination (a combination in which three medals are paid out when a prize is won) is won, and a case where a combination related to replay is won, and a payout number counter. Changes in the value of can be made different. That is, the number of payout counters does not advance when the combination related to the replay wins, compared to the case where the three-card combination wins, so that the player can feel a sense of profit, which is substantially the same. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination, which is the value, and the combination related to the replay.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (navigation number limiter)]
Further, as the type of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section, the navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation count limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers the player to be notified (navigated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) during the advantageous section (that is, the number of navigations is a specified value). When the result is reached), the limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, among the navigations performed to the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, the normal section is to maintain the medals or decrease the medals during the advantageous section. There is a navigation system to suppress it compared to the inside. In the former navigation, for example, in a 3BET game, when the correct answer is stopped (for example, when the push order is correct), more than 3 medals (for example, 9 medals) are paid out, and the correct answer is given when the winning combination is won. It means to notify the mode of the stop operation, and the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, three medals when the mode of the stop operation is the correct answer in the 3BET game, or In the case of the correct answer stop operation mode, there are less than three medals, but in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation mode (for example, when the push order is incorrect), more medals are paid out. It means to notify the aspect of. The former role that is the target of navigation can be called an increasing role that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) from that role. In pachislot, which of the plurality of roles should be used as an increasing role can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 counts the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the increasing combination, which is a condition for generating the limit processing by the navigation number limiter, while the non-increasing combination. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning may be excluded from the counting target of the number of navigations, and the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role may be included in the counting target of the number of navigations. May be good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role from the count target, the number of medals has increased too much, as in the case where many non-increasing roles were established after the start of the advantageous section (ART) by chance. If this is not the case, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter, which is to suppress excessive ball ejection, and the player will not be dissatisfied.

In such a navigation count limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation count counter (navigation counter), which is a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, to generate a navigation to be counted. The value of the navigation count counter is updated each time. Then, when the value of the navigation count counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 terminates the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section. In the various limiters described so far, the counter updating method may be an addition type or a subtraction type.

[Another example of limiter period]
Further, in the above description, an example in which a limiter such as a game number limiter, a number number limiter, a payout number limiter, and a navigation number limiter is used only in an advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section. It can be adopted at any time. For example, if you accidentally continue to hit the advantageous section, medals will be paid out only for the maximum number of medals in each advantageous section, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous section, the total Then, many medals may be paid out, which may incite excessive gambling. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, the payout rate and the difference number) indicating the increase status of the period (for example, the latest 6000 games) for the latest predetermined number of games is a predetermined predetermined value. A special limiter may be provided to end the advantageous section when the number exceeds (for example, 170% or +10000 sheets from the viewpoint of the player). According to such a special limiter, when the activation condition of the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 has just started the advantageous section, and the game number limiter and the number number limiter are completely activated. Even if the situation is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

In the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section currently acquired (for example, the duration of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets and stock, the number of gainable differences, etc.) is issued. When there is a risk that the special limiter will be activated with reference to the ball rate, the main control board 71 will reduce the occurrence rate of the addition before reaching the specified value, and the possibility of activating the special limiter will be increased. It may be controlled so that the right of the increase interval (ART) to be lowered or erased when the special limiter is activated is reduced.

Further, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10). Determine the predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as time) and a predetermined number of inserted sheets (for example, 18,000 inserted sheets) that can determine that the player has played the game over a predetermined period. May be.

The configuration of a pachislot machine using such a special limiter is shown below.
It is a game machine that can be played using the game value,
The right (pachislot) to make the gaming state an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous section in pachislot, an increasing section (AT, ART), a probabilistic state in pachinko, or a time saving state). The right granting means (for example, the main control board 71) that can grant the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc., and the right to shift to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, etc. in pachinko). When,
A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right.
Advantageous gaming state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state when there is the right (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is the number of AT stocks in the pachislot machine, etc., and the pachinko machine). It may be a continuation of the probability change state or the time saving state in)),
An increase status storage means (for example, a difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter) for storing a value indicating an increase status of the game value from a predetermined unit game to the elapse of a predetermined period. Counter for monitoring the payout rate) and
A gaming machine including a special termination means (special limiter) for terminating the advantageous state even if the right is granted when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined predetermined value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, and may be, for example, a daily limiter, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 is cut off for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours such as 2 hours and 4 hours and can be presumed to be a power failure during closing due to the closing of business). Or, a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, by resetting the information for the previous day) from the start point (starting point) of the day when the power is turned on after the power is turned off for a predetermined time or longer. The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the payout rate and the difference number. Further, the main control board 71 resets the information for the previous day from the starting point (that is, the information for the previous day) with the time when a predetermined time (1 hour or the like) or more has elapsed in the power-on state as the starting point (starting point) of the day. ), The special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number). In any case, the timekeeping method can be realized by mounting a timekeeping means such as an RTC on the main control board 71.

[Penalty for navigation mistakes]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 may be given a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of a specification in which an additional lottery of ART is performed while waiting for a transition to a high RT such as during ART preparation (each preparation state described above), the transition to a high RT is avoided and the ART is being prepared. By stretching it, you can receive a lot of extra lottery while preparing for ART. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery of ART when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether the error is an accidental error or an intentional error, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. May be.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (7)]
First, another example (No. 7) of game playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108. FIG. 103 is a diagram conceptually showing the flow of the game in another example (No. 7) of game playability (game specification), and FIGS. 104 to 106 are other examples of game playability (game specification) (No. 7). It is a figure which conceptually shows various tables used in 7), and FIG. 107 is a figure which shows the comparative example of the other example (7) of the game property (game specification), and the conventional game property. FIG. 108 is a diagram conceptually showing another specification example that can realize another example (No. 7) of game playability (game specification).

(Outline of another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 7))
The playability (No. 7) described below relates to ceiling control in an advantageous section. In a pachislot machine having an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section (normal section), as an advantageous section, an advantageous state such as ART which is advantageous for the player and a CZ (chance) in which the degree of expectation of transition to this advantageous state is different from the non-advantageous section. It may have a gaming state (usually an advantageous section) such as a zone). In such a pachislot, although the non-advantageous section shifts to the normal advantageous section (CZ) of the advantageous section, the pachislot shifts to the non-advantageous section without being able to shift to the advantageous state (ART) of the advantageous section. There is.

Here, conventionally, there is known a pachislot machine having a ceiling control that provides a ceiling for the number of throughs of the CZ and gives a privilege such as enabling a transition to an advantageous state such as ART when the CZ fails a predetermined number of times in a row. .. In this regard, in recent pachislot machines having an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section, when the advantageous section is terminated, all the information regarding the advantageous section must be reset (initialized), so that the pachislot shifts to the advantageous state (ART). It is not possible to count the number of advantageous sections (number of slews) that have been completed without being able to do so, and it is difficult to perform ceiling control based on the number of slews in advantageous sections as in conventional ceiling control.

Therefore, in game playability (No. 7), the number of slews in the advantageous section (the number of slews in the advantageous section that ended without being able to shift to the advantageous state) is grasped based on the RT state, so that ceiling control based on the number of slews in the advantageous section is performed. Is made feasible.
In the following description, an example in which the ceiling is provided for the number of slews of the CZ will be described, but the playability (No. 7) is related to the ceiling control for the number of slews to the advantageous section, and shifts to the advantageous state. The advantageous section that ended without doing so is not limited to CZ. Further, in the following explanation, the benefit of the ceiling is defined as the transition to ART, but the playability (No. 7) may be as long as the ceiling can be controlled based on the number of slews to the advantageous section, and the benefit of the ceiling is also ART. It is not limited to the transition to.

<Transition flow of game state>
First, various gaming states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachi-slot machine 1 and its transition flow will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (A) is a transition flow of a basic gaming state in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example, and FIG. 103 (B) is a transition flow of a gaming state in consideration of the presence / absence of notification in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example. Is.

(Basic game state transition flow)
As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example has a plurality of stages of RT states as RT states in which the types of combinations related to replay and their winning probabilities are different from each other. In this specification example, it is assumed that there are 6 stages of RT states, RT1 to RT6, as a plurality of stages of RT states, but the number of RT states is not limited to 6, and is arbitrary. Of RT1 to RT6, at least RT6 is a high RT in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high. The probability that the combination related to the replay in RT1 to RT5 is determined as the internal winning combination is arbitrary, but in this specification example, RT1 to RT5 are set to low RT at which the probability is low.

When the bonus state is started in the non-bonus state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the non-bonus state to the bonus state. Further, when the bonus state ends, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the non-bonus state and sets RT1 as the RT state.

Then, the main control circuit 90 shifts the RT state to RT2 when the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is displayed in RT1, and when the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition lip is displayed in RT2, the RT state is displayed. Is shifted to RT3, and when the combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition lip is displayed in RT3, the RT state is shifted to RT4, and when the combination of symbols related to the RT5 transition lip is displayed in RT4, the RT state is changed to RT5. When the combination of symbols related to the RT6 transition lip is displayed in RT5, the RT state is shifted to RT6, and when the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip is displayed in RT6, the RT state is shifted to RT1. To do.

As will be described later in FIG. 105, the RT2 transition lip is stopped in a specific operation mode when the RT1 medium lip (“RT1 medium lip_123” to “RT1 medium lip_321”) is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed by performing the operation. The same applies to the RT3 transition lip to the RT6 transition lip and the RT1 transition lip, and when the RT2 medium lip to the RT6 medium lip are determined as the internal winning combination, it is displayed by performing the stop operation in a specific operation mode. It is a combination of symbols.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, the RT states of a plurality of stages shift from RT1 to RT6 one by one. Note that gameability (No. 7) can be realized as long as it has a plurality of stages of RT states, and the RT states are not necessarily limited to those that shift one by one in order, and one or more RT states. It may be possible to shift by skipping, or it may be possible to shift the RT state (for example, shift from RT3 to RT2) so that the RT state returns.

(Transition flow of game state considering the presence or absence of notification)
As shown in FIG. 103 (B), in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, the main control circuit 90 distinguishes between a normal section (non-advantageous section) and an advantageous section based on the presence or absence of notification. The normal section is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified (or the frequency of notification is low), and is basically a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. The advantageous section includes a CZ (chance zone) and an ART, the CZ is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified (or the frequency of notification is low), and the ART is a player. It is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified (or frequently notified).

In this specification example, the main control circuit 90 performs a transition lottery to the advantageous section in the normal section, and when the transition lottery is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the CZ of the advantageous section. It should be noted that the main control circuit 90 may be able to directly shift from the normal section to the ART by determining the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination when the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is won. Since it is irrelevant in the explanation of 7), the transition from the normal section to ART will be omitted.

Further, the main control circuit 90 determines whether or not to shift to ART during CZ, and if it is determined to shift to ART, the gaming state shifts from CZ to ART. On the other hand, when the CZ ends without deciding to shift to the ART, the main control circuit 90 ends the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal section.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, when the gaming state shifts to CZ in order to realize the game playability (No. 7), the RT state shifts to the RT state at a stage earlier than the current RT state. Specifically, when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the CZ in RT1 to RT4, the main control circuit 90 sets a specific operation mode when the rip in RT1 to the rip in RT4 is determined as the internal winning combination. By notifying the above, the RT state is shifted to RT2 to RT5.

Any condition can be adopted as the transition condition from CZ to ART. As an example, in this specification example, the main control circuit 90 shifts when the transition lottery to ART performed during CZ is won. Assuming that the conditions are satisfied, the game state is shifted from CZ to ART. In addition, the end condition of CZ is also arbitrary. As an example, in this specification example, when the number of games executed in CZ reaches a specified number without winning the transition lottery to ART, the main control circuit 90 is used. Assuming that the end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended and the game state is shifted from the CZ to the normal section. At this time, the timing to start counting the number of games executed in the CZ is arbitrary. For example, the number of games is counted after the RT state is shifted to the RT state at a stage earlier than the current RT state. Alternatively, the number of games may be counted from the time of transition to CZ.

In the latter case, the number of games may exceed the specified number before shifting to the RT state of the previous stage, but in this specification example, the end condition is set before shifting to the RT state of the previous stage. It will never be satisfied. That is, in such a case, the main control circuit 90 ends the CZ when the number of games exceeds the specified number and then shifts to the RT state of the previous stage. In other words, when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to CZ in RT1 to RT4, when a predetermined period elapses after shifting to RT2 to RT5 (when the number of games played in CZ exceeds the specified number) , The advantageous section is ended, and the game state is shifted from the CZ to the normal section.

In addition, in order to shift the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage, when the player performs the stop operation without following the notification even though the player is notified of a specific operation mode. The RT state does not shift to the previous stage, but it is optional whether or not to terminate CZ in such a case. That is, when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the CZ in RT1 to RT4, the main control circuit 90 satisfies the end condition after shifting the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage (the number of games played in the CZ is increased). (When the specified number is exceeded), the advantageous section may be terminated and the gaming state may be shifted from the CZ to the normal section, and after the notification for shifting the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage is given. When the end condition is satisfied (when the number of games in the CZ exceeds the specified number), the advantageous section may be ended and the game state may be shifted from the CZ to the normal section.

Further, when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to CZ in RT5, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from CZ to ART if the number of games exceeds a predetermined number without winning the lottery for shifting to ART. That is, in this specification example, the main control circuit 90 advances the RT state one step at a time each time it shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ), and when it shifts to RT5, the number of CZ slews reaches the ceiling. Even if the CZ that has been transferred in RT5 fails, the game state is transferred to ART.

The specified number of games, which is the end condition of CZ, may be an arbitrary number, for example, a value common to all RT states, or a value different for each RT state. There may be. In this regard, in this specification example, the specified number of times when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to CZ in RT1 to RT4 is set to 100 times. Further, the specified number when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to CZ in RT5 may be 100 times, which is the same as the specified number when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to CZ in RT1 to RT4. In RT4, the value may be less than the specified number when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to CZ, and in this specification example, it is set to 30 times. That is, in this specification example, when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to CZ in RT1 to RT4, if 100 games are played without satisfying the transition condition to ART, CZ ends while RT5. When the game state shifts from the normal section to CZ, CZ ends when 30 games are played without satisfying the transition condition to ART.

Further, when the gaming state is shifted to ART, the main control circuit 90 performs predetermined control according to the ART. In the explanation of game playability (No. 7), the control during ART is irrelevant, so the description is omitted, but the main control circuit 90 is for shifting the RT state to the high RT state when the game state is shifted to ART. The notification and the notification for maintaining the RT state in the high RT state are performed, and when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during ART, the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. Further, when the termination condition of ART is satisfied during ART, the main control circuit 90 terminates the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from ART to the normal section.

(Ceiling control of advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 103 (C), the flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example will be described, thereby explaining the ceiling control of the advantageous section by the playability (No. 7).
In the example shown in FIG. 103 (C), RT1 of the normal section is set as the initial gaming state. In RT1 of the normal section, since it is a normal section, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed, and when this transition lottery is won, as a result of shifting from the normal section to CZ of the advantageous section, RT1 to CZ (advantageous section) of the normal section Move to RT1.

In CZ, the RT state is shifted to the RT state at a stage earlier than the current RT state, and as a result of the transition of the RT state from RT1 to RT2, the RT1 in the CZ (advantageous section) is changed to RT2 in the CZ (advantageous section). Transition. When this CZ ends without shifting to ART (when CZ fails), the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, and as a result, RT2 of the CZ shifts to RT2 of the normal section.

Here, at the end of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 resets (initializes) all the information related to the advantageous section, so that it can be grasped that the CZ has failed when the normal section is started. Therefore, the number of CZ slews cannot be counted. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, the number of throughs of the CZ can be indirectly counted by making the RT state different before and after the transition of the advantageous section (CZ). That is, the main control circuit 90 grasps that RT1 in the normal section is in the state of "0 times" through the CZ and RT2 in the normal section is in the state of "1 time" through the CZ. In other words, the main control circuit 90 grasps the RT1 of the CZ shifted from the RT1 of the normal section as the "first" CZ.

Although detailed description of the flow of the game when CZ is successful and the game is shifted from CZ to ART is omitted, the main control circuit 90 is notified for shifting to RT6, which is a high RT, and RT. When the notification for maintaining the state at RT6 is performed and the ART is completed, the notification is not performed, and as a result, the RT state shifts from RT6 to RT1.

Similarly, after shifting to RT2 in the normal section (the number of slews is “1 time”), if the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is won, the RT2 in the normal section shifts to RT2 in the CZ. Then, in the CZ, in order to shift the RT state to the RT state at a stage earlier than the current RT state, the RT state of the CZ is shifted to the RT3 of the CZ. When this CZ ends without shifting to ART (when CZ fails), the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, and as a result, RT3 of the CZ shifts to RT3 of the normal section. At this time, the main control circuit 90 grasps that the RT2 of the CZ shifted from the RT2 of the normal section is the “second” CZ, and the number of times the CZ passes through the RT3 of the normal section after the CZ ends. Grasp that it is in the "twice" state.

The same applies thereafter, and when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in RT3 of the normal section (number of slews "2 times"), the transition from RT3 of the normal section to RT3 of CZ (CZ of "third time") is continued. As a result of shifting to the RT state of the previous stage, the transition from RT3 of CZ to RT4 of CZ. After that, when CZ ends without shifting to ART (when CZ fails), the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, and as a result, RT4 of the CZ shifts to RT4 of the normal section (number of slews "3 times"). ..

In addition, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in RT4 of the normal section (the number of slews "3 times"), the RT4 of the normal section is shifted to RT4 of CZ (CZ of "4th time"), and then the previous section is followed. As a result of shifting to the RT state of the stage, the transition from RT4 of CZ to RT5 of CZ. After that, when CZ ends without shifting to ART (when CZ fails), the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. ..

Subsequently, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in RT5 of the normal section (the number of slews “4 times”), the RT5 of the normal section is shifted to RT5 of CZ (CZ of the “fifth time”). In this "fifth" CZ, the main control circuit 90 maintains the RT state at RT5 without shifting the RT state during the CZ. Further, in this "fifth" CZ, the main control circuit 90 ends the advantageous section even if the CZ ends without shifting to the ART (even if the CZ fails). Instead, the game state is shifted from CZ to ART. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example, the CZ of the "fifth time" (the number of throughs is "4 times") is used as the ceiling, and even if the CZ fails, the privilege associated with reaching the ceiling (transition to ART). Is given.

<Various data tables>
Subsequently, various data tables used for realizing the game playability (No. 7) will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106.

[Internal lottery table]
FIG. 104 (A) is an internal lottery table referenced in the non-bonus state. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines a lottery value when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for each of the plurality of winning combinations. It should be noted that the "RT1" column is referred to during RT1, the "RT2" column is referred to during RT2, the "RT3" column is referred to during RT3, the "RT4" column is referred to during RT4, and "RT4" is referred to during RT5. The "RT5" column is referred to, and the "RT6" column is referred to during RT6.

In the figure, the lottery value related to the winning combination related to the replay is shown for each RT state, and the lottery value related to the other winning combination is omitted. In addition, in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the figure, the combination of symbols that is allowed to win a prize when it is determined as an internal winning combination is specified. By defining the combination of symbols (display combination) in which prizes are allowed for each role in this way, it is possible to have a correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 105 described later between each role and the display combination. it can. In this specification example, it is necessary to make the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 105 feasible, and the provision of the "corresponding symbol combination" column in FIG. 104 (A) is only an example, and other methods. May make the correspondence shown in FIG. 105 feasible.

Further, in this specification example, "RT1 medium lip (" RT1 medium lip_123 "to" RT1 medium lip_321 ")" refers to a role related to replay that can be determined as an internal winning combination during RT1, and similarly, "RT2 medium". Lips ("RT2 medium lip_123" to "RT2 medium lip_321") "to" RT6 medium lip ("RT6 medium lip_123" to "RT6 medium lip_321") "are determined as internal winning roles during RT2 to RT6. A role related to a replay that can be played.

[Design combination table]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 104 (B), a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example will be described. In the description of the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 in this specification example, the types of symbols constituting the combination of symbols are not required, and therefore the description and illustration will be omitted. In the symbol combination table, combinations of a plurality of symbols are defined in advance, and data indicating the types of combinations of these symbols is defined as a display combination (winning operation flag).

The "symbol combination A (name" C_replay ")" is a combination of symbols in which a replay operation is performed when displayed along the effective line. Further, when the "symbol combination B (name" C_RT2 transition lip ")" is displayed along the valid line, the replay operation is performed and the RT state is a combination of symbols that shifts to RT2. is there. Further, when the "symbol combination C (name" C_RT3 transition lip ")" is displayed along the valid line, the replay operation is performed and the RT state is a combination of symbols that shifts to RT3. is there. Further, when the "symbol combination D (name" C_RT4 transition lip ")" is displayed along the valid line, the replay operation is performed and the RT state is a combination of symbols that shifts to RT4. is there. Further, when the "symbol combination E (name" C_RT5 transition lip ")" is displayed along the valid line, the replay operation is performed and the RT state is a combination of symbols that shifts to RT5. is there. Further, when the "symbol combination F (name" C_RT6 transition lip ")" is displayed along the effective line, the replay operation is performed and the RT state is a combination of symbols that shifts to RT6. is there. Further, when the "symbol combination G (name" C_RT1 transition lip ")" is displayed along the valid line, the replay operation is performed and the RT state is a combination of symbols that shifts to RT1. is there.

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (pushing order), and display combination]
Next, FIG. 105 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), and the display combination in the pachislot machine 1 of the present specification example. In the figure, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (pushing order), and the display combination related to the combination related to the replay is shown, and the correspondence relationship regarding the other combination is omitted.

As shown in the figure, "RT1 medium lip" has a different combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and "C_RT2" is performed when the stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order out of the six selection pressing orders. The combination of symbols related to "Transition Lip" is displayed, and the combination of symbols related to "C_Replay" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than a specific pressing order among the 6 selection pressing orders. .. When the combination of symbols related to "C_RT2 transition lip" is displayed, the RT state shifts to RT2, so that "RT1 middle lip" can be stopped in a specific pressing order out of the six selection pressing orders. When this is done, the RT state shifts from RT1 to RT2, and when the stop operation is performed in a push order other than the specific push order, the RT state is maintained at RT1.

The same applies to "RT2 medium rip" to "RT5 medium rip", and relates to "C_RT3 transition rip" to "C_RT6 transition rip" when the stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order among the six selection pressing orders. The combination of symbols is displayed, and the combination of symbols related to "C_replay" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than a specific pressing order among the six selection pressing orders. That is, in "RT2 medium lip" to "RT5 medium lip", when the stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order among the six selection pressing orders, the RT state shifts to RT2 to RT6, and the specific pressing order is selected. The RT state is maintained as the current RT state when the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the above.

Similarly, in the "RT6 middle lip", when the stop operation is performed in a specific push order among the 6-choice push orders, the combination of symbols related to the "C_RT1 transition lip" is displayed, and the 6-choice push order is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order, the combination of symbols related to "C_replay" is displayed. That is, in the "RT6 middle lip", when the stop operation is performed in a specific push order out of the six select push orders, the RT state shifts to RT1, and the stop operation is performed in a push order other than the specific push order. If done, the RT state is maintained at the current RT state. In addition, in "RT6 middle lip", when the stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order of the 6-choice pressing order, the combination of symbols related to "C_replay" is displayed, and the 6-choice pressing order is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order of, the combination of symbols related to "C_RT1 transition lip" may be displayed.

In this way, in Pachislot 1 of this specification example, when the correct answer is 6 choices, the RT state shifts to another RT state, but the number of choices for shifting the RT state is not limited to 6 choices. .. That is, in the 6-choice push order, the correct answer may be accidentally answered even when the notification is not performed. In such a case, the RT state is the RT state of the previous stage regardless of the transition to CZ. Will move to. In this respect, the playability (7) is to realize the ceiling control by indirectly grasping the number of throughs of the CZ from the RT state, but if the RT state progresses regardless of the transition to the CZ. , The number of slews and the RT state are out of sync. It is preferable that the ceiling arrival time can be changed by allowing the deviation between the number of throughs and the RT state. However, a method of suppressing such a deviation will be described below.

As an example, the number of choices for shifting the RT state may be 6 or more choices. As a method of adjusting the selection number, in addition to the method of adjusting the selection number based on the pressing order as in this specification example, it is required to perform a stop operation (pressing) at a specific position for one or all reels. The number of choices can be adjusted by doing this, and the number of choices can be adjusted by combining these push orders and the push order.

Further, by adjusting the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay that can shift the RT state, it may be possible to reduce the shift of the RT state to the RT state of the previous stage regardless of the shift to the CZ. .. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, for example, as a role related to the replay that can be determined as the internal winning combination in RT1, only the “RT1 middle lip” that can be transferred to RT2 is provided (see FIG. 104). A "normal lip" that does not shift to RT2 may also be set so that it can be determined as an internal winning combination. In this way, by lowering the winning probability of the winning combination (“RT1 medium lip” to “RT6 medium lip”) that can shift to the RT state of the previous stage, the RT state will be the first regardless of the transition to CZ. It is possible to reduce the transition to the RT state of the stage.

In addition, by adjusting both the number of choices and the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay that can shift to the RT state of the previous stage, the RT state changes to the RT state of the previous stage regardless of the transition to CZ. It is possible to reduce the transition, that is, the accidental transition of the RT state to the previous stage.

[Lottery table for transition to advantageous section during normal section]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 106 (A), the advantageous section transition lottery table in the normal section used for the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section will be described. The advantageous section transition lottery table in the normal section defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result (non-winning / winning) of the transition lottery to the advantageous section. The main control circuit 90 performs a transition lottery to the advantageous section using the advantageous section transition lottery table in the normal section in each game in the normal section, and when the transition lottery is won, the game state is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. To do.
In the figure, a uniform lottery is performed regardless of the internal winning combination, but in this specification example, the method of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is not particularly questioned, and for example, it is advantageous for each internal winning combination. Information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery to the section may be specified. In addition, as a result of the lottery of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, not only the non-winning and the winning, but also the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination such as non-winning, transition to CZ, transition to ART, etc. Good.

[ART transition lottery table in CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 106 (B), the ART transition lottery table in CZ used for the transition lottery to ART performed during CZ will be described. The ART transition lottery table in CZ defines the lottery value information for the lottery result (non-winning / winning) of the transition lottery to ART. The main control circuit 90 performs a transition lottery to ART using the ART transition lottery table in CZ in each game in CZ, and when the transition lottery is won, the game state is shifted from CZ to ART. Further, when the main control circuit 90 satisfies the end condition of the CZ without winning the transition lottery, the main control circuit 90 ends the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal section.
In the figure, a uniform lottery is performed regardless of the internal winning combination, but in this specification example, the method of transitioning from CZ to ART is not particularly questioned. For example, each internal winning combination is transferred to ART. Information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery may be specified. In addition, as a result of the lottery of the transition lottery to ART, not only the non-winning and the winning, but also the non-winning, the ART with 50 initial games, the ART of 100 initial games, etc. May be.

<Comparison between the control of this specification example and another control>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 107, the ceiling control of game playability (No. 7) will be described by comparing the control of this specification example with another control.

Comparative example 1 in the figure is a control example in which the advantageous section ends at the end of CZ. In Comparative Example 1, when the CZ is won in the general game (normal section), the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ), but if this CZ fails, the advantageous section (CZ) is accompanied by the end of the CZ. The game state shifts from to the normal section (general). In the case of such control, did the main control circuit 90 fail in CZ in this advantageous section as a result of resetting all the information about the advantageous section at the time of transition from the advantageous section (CZ) to the normal section (general)? I can't figure out whether or not.
Therefore, when the main control circuit 90 shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ), the main control circuit 90 can always grasp that this CZ is only the first CZ, as in the game playability (7). Ceiling control based on the number of CZ slews cannot be performed.

Subsequently, Comparative Example 2 in the figure is a control example in which a general game is performed in the advantageous section without ending the advantageous section at the end of CZ. That is, in Comparative Example 2, the types of advantageous sections include general games, CZ, and ART.

In Comparative Example 2, when the CZ is won in the general game (normal section), the game state shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ), and then, if this CZ fails, the CZ is terminated while the game state is advantageous. As a result of maintaining the section as it is, the section shifts from the advantageous section (CZ) to the advantageous section (general). At this time, since the advantageous section is not completed, the information is not reset, and as a result, the main control circuit 90 grasps that the CZ is a general game (advantageous section) in which the number of throughs is "1 time". Can be done. Subsequently, when the CZ is won in the general game (advantageous section) in which the number of throughs of the CZ is "1", the game state shifts from the general game (advantageous section) to the CZ (advantageous section). At this time, the main control circuit 90 can grasp that it is the "second time" CZ.

As in Comparative Example 2, the number of slews of CZ can be grasped by performing a general game in the advantageous section without ending the advantageous section at the end of CZ. Ceiling control can be performed based on the number of slews.

However, in Comparative Example 2, since the advantageous section becomes an advantageous section even during the general game after the end of CZ, the advantageous section has already continued for a long period of time at the start of ART accompanying the arrival at the ceiling. Here, since a limiter (limiter for the number of games) is provided in the advantageous section, if the advantageous section continues for a long period of time at the start of ART, the limiter is immediately after the start of ART after reaching the ceiling. May be activated, and it is not possible to secure a sufficient period of ART. Further, in Comparative Example 2, since the advantageous section becomes an advantageous section not only during CZ but also during the general game after the end of CZ, the advantageous section ratio becomes remarkably high, and the advantageous section ratio must be suppressed to less than the threshold value. It becomes difficult to meet the specifications of pachislot machines.

On the other hand, in the control of this specification example (main control), although the advantageous section ends at the end of CZ, the number of throughs of CZ can be grasped by making the RT state different before and after CZ, and through of CZ. Ceiling control is performed based on the number of times. Specifically, in this control, when the CZ is won in the general game (normal section), the game state shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ), but the RT state is changed to the RT state of the previous stage during this CZ. To migrate to. After that, if CZ fails, the gaming state shifts from the advantageous section (CZ) to the normal section (general) with the end of CZ, and all the information about the advantageous section is reset, but the RT state before and after CZ Since they are different, the main control circuit 90 can grasp the number of throughs of the CZ.

As an example, the main control circuit 90 grasps that the general game (normal section) of RT1 is in the state where the number of slews of CZ is "0 times", and the general game of RT2 (normal section) has the number of slews of CZ "0 times". It is grasped that it is in the state of "once". By doing so, after that, when the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ) while the number of throughs of the CZ has reached the ceiling, it is possible to shift to the ART regardless of the success or failure of the CZ. It is possible to grant benefits associated with reaching the ceiling. In other words, in this control, when the RT state (RT1 to RT4) of a predetermined stage among the RT states of a plurality of stages shifts to the advantageous section (CZ), if the CZ fails, the advantageous section ends and the normal section is set. On the other hand, if the transition is made to the advantageous section (CZ) in the specific stage (RT5) prior to the predetermined stage among the RT states of multiple stages, the advantageous section is terminated even if the CZ fails. It is possible to give benefits associated with reaching the ceiling, such as making it possible to shift to ART.

Further, in this control, since the advantageous section ends at the end of the CZ, the duration of the advantageous section is reset every time the CZ ends. As a result, the duration of the advantageous section at the start of ART accompanying the arrival at the ceiling is relatively short, and a sufficient period can be secured until the limiter of the advantageous section (game number limiter) is activated, and the ceiling control is used. A sufficient period of ART can be secured.

In addition, in this control, when the advantageous section ends at the end of CZ and the transition lottery to the advantageous section that wins with a predetermined probability in the normal section (general) is won, the normal section (general) to the advantageous section (CZ) ) To shift the game state. As a result, a sufficient period of the normal section (non-advantageous section) can be secured before the ART by ceiling control is started, and the ratio of the advantageous section can be lowered. That is, when the "fifth" CZ is used as the ceiling, the transition from the normal section (general) to the advantageous section (CZ) needs to be performed "five times", but the probability of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section. However, when the probability is about 1/80 (see FIG. 106 (A)) as in this specification example, about 400 games (= 80 × 5) can be secured as the period of the normal section (general). .. As a result, a sufficient period of the normal section (non-advantageous section) until reaching the ceiling can be sufficiently secured, and the ratio of the advantageous section can be reduced.

That is, in this control, the duration of the advantageous section immediately before reaching the ceiling can be shortened, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the limiter (game number limiter) from being activated immediately after reaching the ceiling. Further, in this control, the total period of the advantageous section until reaching the ceiling can be shortened (the total period of the non-advantageous section until reaching the ceiling can be lengthened), and as a result, the ratio of the advantageous section can be lowered.

Further, in this control, the number of games to reach the ceiling can be sufficiently secured, and it is possible to prevent the player from reaching the ceiling at an early stage. Specifically, since the CZ ends when the number of games played in the CZ exceeds a specified number (for example, 100 games), a fixed amount (for example, 500 games (= 100 × 5)) is set as the period of the CZ until reaching the ceiling. ) Can be secured. Further, as described above, since about 400 games can be secured as the period of the normal section (general), about 900 games can be secured as the number of games until reaching the ceiling. Depending on the player, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section may be won with a higher probability than expected, and in this case, it is not possible to secure a sufficient period of the normal section (general) until reaching the ceiling. However, even in this case, since it is possible to secure at least the period during CZ before reaching the ceiling, it is possible to prevent the ceiling from reaching the ceiling earlier than necessary, and the balance between the profit / disadvantage of the player is adjusted. can do.

(Ceiling shortening control)
Next, a method of ceiling shortening control in game playability (No. 7) will be described. In this specification example, the RT state is advanced to the next stage when shifting to the CZ, but the RT state may be advanced to a plurality of stages such as two stages ahead. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 108, an example of control capable of advancing the RT state to a plurality of stages ahead with the CZ transition will be described.

FIG. 108 (A) is a diagram for explaining Example 1 of ceiling shortening control. As described above, in this specification example, "RT1 medium lip" to "RT5 medium lip" are symbols that shift the RT state to the next previous RT state when the mode of the player's stop operation is a specific mode. ("C_RT2 transition lip" to "C_RT6 transition lip") can be displayed. On the other hand, in Example 1, the ceiling shortening control is realized by providing a plurality of types as "RT1 medium lip" to "RT5 medium lip". Note that, in FIG. 108 (A), only "Rip in RT1" is shown, but the same applies to other roles related to replay.

As shown in the figure, in Example 1, the A system ("RT1 medium lip A_123" to "RT1 medium lip A_321") and the B system ("RT1 medium lip B_123" to "RT1 medium lip" are used as "RT1 medium lip". The "RT1 middle lip" of the A system has a lip B_321 "), and is a combination of symbols that shifts the RT state to the next RT state when the player's stop operation mode is a specific mode. The display is possible, and the "RT1 middle lip" of the B system can display a combination of symbols that shifts the RT state to the next RT state when the player's stop operation mode is a specific mode. That is, when the "RT1 middle lip" of the A system is determined as the internal winning combination and the mode of the player's stop operation is a specific mode, the combination of symbols related to the "C_RT2 transition lip" is displayed and the RT state is changed. Transition from RT1 to RT2. Further, when the "RT1 middle lip" of the B system is determined as the internal winning combination and the mode of the player's stop operation is a specific mode, the combination of symbols related to the "C_RT3 transition lip" is displayed and the RT state is changed. Transition from RT1 to RT3.

In such a configuration, the main control circuit 90 notifies a specific stop operation mode only once when "RT1 middle lip" is determined as an internal winning combination in CZ. As a result, when the "RT1 middle lip" of the A system is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state only shifts to the next RT state (shifts from RT1 to RT2), but the B system "RT1" When "medium lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state shifts to the RT state two steps ahead (shifts from RT1 to RT3), and the period until reaching the ceiling can be shortened.

Subsequently, FIG. 108 (B) is a diagram for explaining Example 2 of ceiling shortening control. As described above, in the present specification example, if a winner is selected in the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed in the normal section, the process shifts to CZ, and the RT state shifts to the next stage in this CZ. Here, in Example 2, it is assumed that the RT transition navigation has one CZ and the RT transition navigation has two CZs as the lottery result of the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed in the normal section. In addition, in order to realize the ceiling shortening control, it is sufficient that the RT transition navigation has a plurality of CZs, and in Example 2, the number of times is only one example, and the number of times is arbitrarily set to 3 times or more. It may be CZ.

In such a configuration, the main control circuit 90 is a navigation (notification) for shifting the RT state in the CZ when the RT transition navigation wins one CZ in the shift lottery to the advantageous section performed in the normal section. Is performed only once. For example, in RT1, when the RT transition navigation wins one CZ, after shifting from the normal section (RT1) to the CZ (RT1), the navigation (notification) for shifting the RT state is performed once. The RT state shifts to the next RT state (shifts from RT1 to RT2).

In addition, the main control circuit 90 performs navigation (notification) for shifting the RT state twice in the CZ when the RT transition navigation wins the CZ twice in the shift lottery to the advantageous section performed in the normal section. .. For example, in RT1, when the RT transition navigation wins two CZs, after shifting from the normal section (RT1) to the CZ (RT1), the navigation (notification) for shifting the RT state is performed twice. It is possible to shorten the period until the ceiling is reached by shifting the RT state to the next RT state (shifting from RT1 to RT2 and then further shifting from RT2 to RT3).

(Other playability)
As described above, in terms of game playability (No. 7), when the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section (CZ), the RT state is advanced to the next stage, so that the number of transitions to the advantageous section (the number of CZ throughs) ) Based on ceiling control is feasible. In this regard, by advancing the RT state to the next stage when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ), in addition to the playability (7), the following playability can be further realized. ..

In the above-mentioned specification example, the winning probabilities of the winning combinations related to the replay are substantially the same in RT1 to RT5, but by making the winning probabilities different in each RT state, the normal section shifts to the advantageous section (CZ). It is possible to diversify the playability of the game until it is played. As an example, by increasing the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay as the RT state progresses, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section without inserting medals as the RT state progresses and the closer to the ceiling, and it is also specified. By increasing the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay in the RT state of, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section without inserting medals at a specific stage in the period until reaching the ceiling.
Here, when the game in the normal section is regarded as "the game during the cycle" and the number of transitions from the normal section to the advantageous section (CZ) is regarded as the "cycle number", the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay is calculated for each RT state. By making them different, the playability of the game during the cycle can be made different according to the number of cycles.

Further, in the above-mentioned specification example, the lottery for transition to ART performed during CZ is not particularly specified, but the lottery for transition to ART performed during CZ is performed with reference to the RT state, so that the playability is diversified. Can be transformed into. As an example, by increasing the probability of winning the lottery for transition to ART each time the stage of the RT state progresses, it is possible to facilitate the transition to ART without inserting medals as the RT state progresses and the closer to the ceiling. Further, by increasing the probability of winning the lottery for transition to ART in a specific RT state, it is possible to facilitate the transition to ART at a specific stage in the period until reaching the ceiling.
By doing so, the playability of the CZ after reaching the cycle can be made different according to the number of cycles.

Further, in the above-mentioned specification example, the benefit when the CZ is successful is not particularly specified, but the benefit when the CZ is successful is determined by referring to the RT state to diversify the playability. Can be done. As an example, by increasing the benefit as the RT state progresses, the benefit at the time of CZ success can be increased as the RT state progresses and approaches the ceiling, and the benefit can be increased in a specific RT state. So, if you succeed in CZ at a specific stage of the period until reaching the ceiling, you can give a big benefit.
By doing so, the benefits of cyclically performed CZ can be different depending on the number of cycles.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 7) of the playability (game specification) of the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when demonstrating another example (No. 7) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means.

Further, the main control circuit 90 can shift the RT state from the current RT state to another RT state, and also provides information necessary for shifting the RT state during CZ, specifically, the RT state. The main control circuit 90 functions as an RT control means and a notification means because the information necessary for shifting to the RT state at a stage prior to the current RT state can be notified.

Further, the main control circuit 90 can shift the gaming state to the CZ of the advantageous section when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in the normal section, and the main control circuit 90 can shift the gaming state to the CZ of the advantageous section when the lottery for transition to the ART in the CZ is won. Notification for shifting the game state to ART and shifting to the RT state at a stage earlier than the current RT state in CZ (or shifting to the RT state at a stage prior to the current RT state) When the end condition of the CZ is satisfied, the main control circuit 90 ends the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal section. Therefore, the main control circuit 90 has the first state control means and the second state control means. Functions as. At this time, when the RT states at the time of CZ transition are RT1 to RT4 (in CZ in the RT state of the predetermined stage), the main control circuit 90 satisfies the end condition without satisfying the transition condition to ART. And, while shifting the game state from the CZ to the normal section, when the RT state at the time of the CZ transition is RT5 (in the CZ in the RT state of the specific stage), the transition condition to the ART is not satisfied. Even if there is, the game state is shifted from CZ to ART by ceiling control.

When the RT states at the time of CZ transition are RT1 to RT4 (in CZ in the RT state of the predetermined stage), the main control circuit 90 changes to the RT state in the stage prior to the current RT state in CZ. When a predetermined period (100 games) elapses after the transition (or after the notification for shifting to the RT state at a stage earlier than the current RT state is given), the gaming state is shifted from the CZ to the normal section. On the other hand, when the RT state at the time of CZ transition is RT5 (in CZ in the RT state of the specific stage), the predetermined period (100 games) or the specific period (30 games) is not satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to ART. ) Elapses, the game state shifts from CZ to ART.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 is controlled in a game state so that the period of the advantageous section (advantageous section ratio) in the entire game period becomes a predetermined ratio, and the main control circuit 90 is used for a lottery to shift to the advantageous section that wins with a predetermined probability. If it wins, the game state shifts to the CZ of the advantageous section.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 8)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 109, another example (No. 8) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an outline of control in another example (No. 8) of game playability (game specifications).

(Example of pachislot specifications)
In the specification example of the pachi-slot machine that can realize the playability (No. 8), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal game that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and an advantageous state that is relatively advantageous to the player. The type of advantageous state is arbitrary, and for example, AT or ART can be used. When the condition for shifting to the advantageous state in the general state is satisfied, the main control circuit 90 can shift the gaming state from the general state to the advantageous state, and can shift to the advantageous state by the normal control, and can be used on the ceiling in the general state. When it reaches, the gaming state can be changed from the general state to the advantageous state, and the transition to the advantageous state by ceiling control is possible.

In this specification example, the method of shifting to the advantageous state by normal control is arbitrary, and the main control circuit 90, for example, performs a transition lottery to the advantageous state based on the internal winning combination determined in the general state, and this transition is performed. When the lottery is won, the transition to the advantageous state by the normal control may be performed. Further, in this specification example, the method of shifting to the advantageous state by the ceiling control is also arbitrary, and the main control circuit 90 is in the advantageous state by the ceiling control based on the number of throughs of the CZ as in the above-mentioned game playability (No. 7). It is also possible to shift to the advantageous state by ceiling control when the number of games played in the general state reaches a predetermined number without shifting to the advantageous state. .. That is, the main control circuit 90 can perform ceiling control to shift the gaming state to an advantageous state when the numerical information counted in relation to the general state (for example, the number of slews or the number of games) reaches the ceiling threshold value. ..

Further, when the end condition of the advantageous state is satisfied in the advantageous state, the main control circuit 90 ends the advantageous state and shifts the gaming state from the advantageous state to the general state. In this specification example, the end condition of the advantageous state, in other words, the method of managing the duration of the advantageous state is arbitrary. For example, the duration of the advantageous state may be managed according to the number of games, and the navigation The duration of the advantageous state may be managed by the number of times, the difference number, and the like. That is, the main control circuit 90 has a counter capable of counting numerical information (for example, the number of games, the number of navigations, and the number of differences) that determines the duration of the advantageous state, and this numerical value depends on the result of the game in the advantageous state. The information is updated (for example, the number of games is updated by 1 for each game). Then, when the numerical information reaches the end threshold value (for example, the number of remaining games is 0) as a result of the update, the main control circuit 90 terminates the advantageous state and ends the advantageous state, assuming that the end condition of the advantageous state is satisfied, and the game state. From the advantageous state to the general state.

(Outline of another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 8))
In the pachislot machine 1 of such a specification example, the playability (No. 8) relates to the benefit when reaching the ceiling. In the conventional pachislot, the benefit given when reaching the ceiling is larger than in the normal case, but if the benefit when reaching the ceiling is too large, the player may be excessively absorbed in the game, which is not preferable. On the other hand, in order to reach the ceiling, it is necessary to play for a long period of time in a general state that is disadvantageous to the player, so even though the player has reached the ceiling, the advantageous state may have ended early. , The player's willingness to play is discouraged. Therefore, in terms of game playability (No. 8), the expected value of the profit of the player per advantageous state is the same (or substantially the same) between the advantageous state shifted by the normal control and the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control. ), But control so that the player feels that a great benefit has been given by reaching the ceiling.

Here, the expected value of the profit of the player per advantageous state is the expected value of the profit per unit game during the advantageous state (gradient value of the medal increase) and the duration of the advantageous state per advantageous state. It can be obtained from the expected value of.
Expected value of profit per advantageous state = Profit per unit game x Expected value of duration In game playability (No. 8), focusing on the expected value of the duration of advantageous state per advantageous state, the following Take control. In the following, the number of games will be used as the duration of the advantageous state.

When the number of games is used as the duration of the advantageous state, the duration of the advantageous state is the number of initial games determined at the start of the advantageous state and the number of additional games added during the advantageous state (in other words, during the advantageous state). It depends on the expected degree of addition). In addition, the addition is to control so that the duration of the advantageous state is extended, and the main control circuit 90 extends the duration of the advantageous state when the addition condition is satisfied in the advantageous state. Update the numerical information that determines the duration of the favorable condition.

As shown in FIG. 109 (A), in terms of game playability (No. 8), when the main control circuit 90 shifts to an advantageous state (for example, ART) by normal control, as shown in "normal ART" in the same figure. While setting a small number of games as the initial number of games, increasing the expectation of addition during the advantageous state, and conversely, when shifting to the advantageous state by ceiling control, the initial game as shown in "Ceiling ART" in the figure. While setting a large number of games as the number, lower the expectation of addition during the advantageous state. At this time, in the main control circuit 90, the expected value of the profit of the player per advantageous state is the same (or substantially the same) between the advantageous state shifted by the normal control and the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control. In addition, the setting of the initial number of games and / or the addition expectation degree are controlled. Since the expected value of the profit per unit game in the advantageous state is the same for the advantageous state shifted by the normal control and the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control, the expected profit of the player per advantageous state is expected. The same (or substantially the same) value means that the expected value of the duration of the advantageous state shifted by the normal control and the expected value of the duration of the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control are the same (or substantially the same). Is the same as.

By doing so, the expected value of the profit of the player per advantageous state is substantially the same between the advantageous state shifted by the normal control and the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control, but the playability of both is different. Can be made. For example, the advantageous state shifted by the normal control may end immediately after the start because the number of initial games is small, but it may continue for the duration of the advantageous state because the additional expectation is high. On the other hand, the advantageous state shifted by ceiling control does not end immediately after the start due to the large number of initial games, but the upside of the duration of the advantageous state is small because the additional expectation is low. That is, the advantageous state shifted by the normal control has a large swing width of the duration, and the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control has a small swing width of the duration and the length of the duration is stable.

Subsequently, FIG. 109 (B) shows a control example of game playability (No. 8). In FIG. 109 (B), the expected value of profit per unit game in the advantageous state, in other words, the net increase in the number of cards per game in the advantageous state is set to "2". In this control example, the advantageous state shifted by the normal control is an advantageous state so that the average number of initial games is 50 games and the expected value of the player's profit per advantageous state is about 500. The additional expectation of the inside is set.

In this way, in terms of game playability (No. 8), when the player shifts to an advantageous state by ceiling control, the number of initial games is increased, while the additional expectation is lowered, so that the player's profit is expected per advantageous state. Make the value the same (or substantially the same) as the advantageous state transferred by normal control. For the player, the expected value of the profit to be given does not change, but when the ceiling is reached, the advantageous state can be stably performed for a certain period of time, and the advantageous state does not end early. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, since the additional performance deteriorates in the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control, the player does not have to dare to aim at the ceiling, and it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game. That is, in terms of playability (No. 8), while it is possible to make the player feel as if there is a great benefit when reaching the ceiling, by adjusting the additional performance with respect to the initial value of the duration, one advantageous state can be achieved. The expected value of the profit of the player can be matched between the ceiling time and the normal time, and excessive immersiveness can be prevented.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 8) of the playability (game specification) of the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when demonstrating another example (No. 8) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means.

Further, since the main control circuit 90 can shift to an advantageous state by normal control or ceiling control in a general state, the main control circuit 90 functions as a state control means. Further, the main control circuit 90 can count the numerical information that determines the duration of the advantageous state, updates this numerical information according to the result of the game in the advantageous state, and as a result of the update, the numerical information ends. Since the advantageous state can be terminated when the threshold value is reached, the main control circuit 90 functions as a duration counting means and an termination control means.

Further, the main control circuit 90 can set an initial value of the duration of the advantageous state when shifting to the advantageous state, and can additionally control so that the duration of the advantageous state is extended during the advantageous state. Therefore, the main control circuit 90 functions as an initial period setting means and an additional control means. At this time, the main control circuit 90 sets the initial value of the duration low in the advantageous state shifted by the normal control and controls so that the additional expectation is high, while in the advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control. , The initial value of the duration is set high, and the additional expectation is controlled to be low. In particular, in the main control circuit 90, the expected value of the duration per advantageous state shifted by the normal control and the expected value of the duration per advantageous state shifted by the ceiling control are the same (or substantially the same). The initial value of the duration and the expected value of addition are controlled so as to be.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 9)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 9) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an outline of control in another example (No. 9) of game playability (game specifications).

(Outline of another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 9))
The playability (No. 9) relates to the playability using the MB penetration type RT penetrating the MB state and the MB state. In this specification example, as a display combination in the MB state (that is, a combination of symbols displayed in the MB state), a display combination A in which three medals are paid out and a display in which nine medals are paid out are displayed. By having a combination B and making the display result different according to the RT state in the MB state, the degree of advantage of the MB state is made different according to the RT state. In this specification example, the MB penetration type RT refers to an RT control that maintains the current RT state without shifting the RT state before and after the MB state and during the MB state.

FIG. 110A is a transition flow of the gaming state in the pachislot machine 1 of the present specification example. As shown in FIG. 110 (A), in this specification example, when the main control circuit 90 wins the MB in the non-MB state, the operation of the MB is started and the gaming state is shifted to the MB state (in other words, the main control circuit 90). The control circuit 90 starts the bonus game when the result display corresponding to the MB combination is derived as a result of the stop control). Further, when the end condition is satisfied in the MB state, the main control circuit 90 ends the operation of the MB and shifts the game state to the non-MB state (in other words, the main control circuit 90 sets the end condition of the bonus game. If met, the bonus game ends). The condition for ending the MB state is that medals exceeding the specified number are paid out.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example has a plurality of RT states as RT states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is different. Here, in terms of playability (No. 9), it is sufficient to have a plurality of RT states having different winning probabilities of a specific replay combination (replay A or replay B described later) as a plurality of RT states, but this specification. In the example, it is assumed that a plurality of RT states have a low RT and a high RT.

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), the low RT is an RT state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is lower than that of the high RT, and the replay A is determined as the internal winning combination. It is an RT state in which the probability of being played is higher than that of high RT, and the probability that replay B is determined as an internal winning combination is lower than that of high RT. Further, the high RT is an RT state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is higher than that of the low RT, and the probability that the replay A is determined as the internal winning combination is higher than the low RT. It is a low RT state, and the probability that the replay B is determined as an internal winning combination is high with respect to the low RT. In the example shown in FIG. 110 (B), at low RT, only replay A is won, and replay B is not won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and replay B is won at low RT with a predetermined probability. It may be that. Similarly, at high RT, only replay B is won, and replay A is not won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and replay A may be won with a predetermined probability at low RT.

Returning to FIG. 110 (A), the main control circuit 90 shifts the RT state from low RT to high RT (or from high RT to low RT) when the transition condition of the RT state is satisfied in the non-MB state. In this specification example, the transition condition of the RT state is arbitrary. For example, it may be a transition condition that a transition symbol for shifting the RT state is displayed as a result of stop control, and a predetermined number of times in the RT state. The transition condition may be that the game is performed. Further, these transition conditions may be different in each of the plurality of RT states, or may be the same transition conditions. However, the main control circuit 90 sets the RT state when the MB is won in the non-MB state and the operation of the MB is started, when the end condition is satisfied in the MB state and the operation of the MB is terminated, and during the MB state. The current RT state is maintained without shifting (in other words, the main control circuit 90 maintains the current RT state before and after the bonus game and during the bonus game without shifting the RT state. , Transitions the RT state from the current RT state to another RT state when certain transition conditions are met in non-bonus games).

(Winning combination and stop control in MB state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 110 (B) and 110 (C), the winning combination and the stop control in the MB state will be described. In this specification example, in the MB state, the main control circuit 90 determines all the small winning combinations as internal winning combinations, and individually draws only the winning combinations related to the replay, and sets all the small winning combinations as internal winning combinations. The stop control is different depending on the type of replay that was individually drawn when deciding as. As an example, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), assuming that only replay A and replay B are held as the combination related to the replay, both the replay A and the replay B serve as the internal winning combination during the MB state. If not decided, the internal winning combination will be "all small winning combinations", and if Replay A is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination will be "all small winning combinations + replay A", and replay B will be the internal winning combination. If it is decided, the internal winning combination will be "all small roles + replay B".

Then, the main control circuit 90 is a combination of symbols in which many medals are paid out when the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small winning combinations + replay B" (in the case of winning the replay B). The reel stop control is performed so that (display combination B) is derived, and when the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small winning combinations" (when both replay A and replay B are non-winning) and If the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small winning combinations + replay A" (in the case of winning replay A), a combination of symbols (display combination A) that will pay out a small number of medals is derived. The reel stop control is performed so as to be performed.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), the MB state during low RT can be set as the MB for maintaining the status quo, while the MB state during high RT can be set as the MB for which medals increase. For example, in the case of an ART machine that notifies information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player during high RT, the MB during non-ART is set as the MB that maintains the status quo, while the MB during ART is set as the MB that increases medals. Can be done. That is, in the playability (No. 9), the inclination value of the medal increase in the MB state can be changed according to the RT state.

As for playability (No. 9), it suffices if the inclination value of the medal increase in the MB state can be made different according to the RT state, and the MB state in the low RT is the MB state in which the status quo is maintained and the MB state in the high RT state. Is not limited to MB with increasing medals. For example, the MB state during low RT may be an MB in which medals increase by a first amount, and the MB state during high RT may be an MB in which medals increase by a second amount more than the first amount. For example, the MB state during low RT is defined as an MB in which medals decrease by a third amount, and the MB state during high RT is defined as an MB in which medals decrease by a fourth amount, which is less than the third amount (or MB that maintains the status quo). It may be anything to do, and it is optional. Such control can be arbitrarily designed depending on the relationship between the number of medals to be paid out when the display combination A and the display combination B are derived and the number of medals used for the unit game in the MB state.

Therefore, in terms of game playability (No. 9), when the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small winning combination" (when both Replay A and Replay B are non-winning), this time. It is possible to derive the display combination A in which the same number of medals as the medals used in the game of, or fewer medals than the medals used in this game are paid out, and the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small roles + replay". In the case of "A" (in the case of winning the replay A), it is possible to derive the display combination A in which the same number of medals as the medals used in this game or fewer medals than the medals used in this game are paid out. , When the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small winning combination + replay B" (when winning the replay B), the display combination B is derived, in which more medals than the medals used in this game are paid out. It includes being possible.

Further, in the playability (No. 9), the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay in the MB state is made different according to the RT state, and the reel control (display combination) is made according to the winning or failing of the winning combination related to the replay in the MB state. ) And the number of medals to be paid out are different, so that the inclination value of the medal increase in the MB state is different according to the RT state, and the relationship between the above-mentioned reel control and the number of medals to be paid out is also arbitrary. That is, in terms of playability (No. 9), the simplest case is that the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small wins" and the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small wins + replay". It is sufficient to make the derived display combination (result display) different from the case of "related combination", and as a result, the number of medals paid out (that is, the quantity of the game value to be given) is different. Even in such a control, since the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay differs depending on the RT state, the gradient value of the medal increase in the MB state can be made different according to the RT state.

Further, in the above example, the main control circuit 90 has the same display combination A when the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small combinations" and when the internal winning combination is "all small combinations + replay A". Is controlled so that it can be derived, but it is not limited to this. That is, the main control circuit 90 controls so that the display combination B can be derived when the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small winning combinations", and the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small winning combinations". In the case of "+ replay A", the display combination A may be controlled so that it can be derived. On the contrary, when the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small combinations", the display combination A is derived. It may be possible to control so that the display combination B can be derived when the internal winning combination in the MB state is "all small combinations + replay A". In addition, the display role when the internal winning combination in the MB state is different between "all small combinations" and "all small combinations + replay A" is also in the MB state. The internal winning combination is not limited to the display combination B when "all small combinations + replay B", and other display combinations with different numbers of medals paid out may be controlled so as to be derivable. That is, as another control example of game playability (No. 9), the main control circuit 90 has "all small wins" and "all small wins + replay A" in the MB state. If the derived display combination (result display) is different between the case and the case of "all small combinations + replay B", and as a result, the number of medals paid out (that is, the quantity of the game value to be given) is different. You may let it. In this case, the number of patterns of the slope value of the medal increase in the MB state is not limited to two or three types, and by providing more types of roles as the roles related to the replay, the medals in the MB state are provided. The number of patterns of increasing slope values can be further increased.

Further, in this specification example, an example in which the inclination value of the medal increase in the MB state is different between the low RT and the high RT has been described, but the playability (No. 9) is the medal in the MB state depending on the RT state. The RT states to be compared are not limited to low RT and high RT, as long as the slopes of increase are different. As an example, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), the slope value of the medal increase in the MB state may be different between the high RT1 and the high RT2. That is, by making the winning probabilities of replay A and replay B different between the high RT1 and the high RT2, the slope value of the medal increase in the MB state can be made different. Then, by controlling to go back and forth between the high RT1 and the high RT2, for example, an ART in which the MB for maintaining the status quo is performed (ART in the high RT1) and an ART in which the MB for increasing medals is performed (in the high RT2). The ART) can be exchanged during the ART, and the playability during the ART is diversified.

Similarly, the slope value of the medal increase in the MB state may be different between the low RT1 and the low RT2. That is, by making the winning probabilities of replay A and replay B different between low RT1 and low RT2 (or adjusting the number of medals to be paid out when display combination A and display combination B are derived). The slope value of the medal increase in the MB state can be made different. Then, by controlling to go back and forth between the low RT1 and the low RT2, for example, a general state in which the MB for maintaining the status quo is performed (general state in the low RT1) and a general state in which the MB for increasing medals is performed (for example). It is possible to go back and forth between the general state in the high RT2 and the general state, and the playability in the general state is diversified.

Further, in this specification example, the low RT is set to the RT state in which the MB that maintains the status quo is performed, and the high RT is set to the RT state in which the MB that increases the medals is performed. The RT state in which the increasing MB is performed may be set, and the high RT may be set in the RT state in which the MB for maintaining the status quo is performed.
By adjusting the winning probabilities of replay A and replay B, the low RT may be set to the RT state in which the MB in which the medals increase is performed, and when the display combination A and the display combination B are derived. By adjusting the number of medals to be paid out to, the low RT may be set to the RT state in which the MB in which the medals increase is performed.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 9) of the playability (game specification) of the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when demonstrating another example (No. 9) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a stop control means and a profit-giving means in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. In the main control circuit 90, when neither replay A nor replay B is determined as the internal winning combination in the MB state, or when replay A is determined as the internal winning combination, the result display of the display combination A is derived. As a result of performing stop control so as to be performed, when the same number of medals as the medals used in this game or fewer medals than the medals used in this game are given and Replay B is determined as an internal winning combination in the MB state. Gives more medals than the medals used in this game as a result of performing stop control so that the result display of the display combination B is derived. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means.

Further, the main control circuit 90 starts the MB state when the result display corresponding to the MB combination is derived as a result of the reel stop control, and ends the MB state when the end condition of the MB state is satisfied. The main control circuit 90 functions as a game control means. Further, the main control circuit 90 maintains the current RT state without shifting the RT state before and after the MB state and during the MB state, and when the current RT state transition condition is satisfied, the current RT state is satisfied. In order to shift the RT state from the RT state to another RT state, the main control circuit 90 functions as an RT control means.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 10)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 10) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an outline of control in another example (No. 10) of game playability (game specifications).

(Example of pachislot specifications)
In the specification example of the pachi-slot machine that can realize the playability (No. 10), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a notifying state and a non-notifying state. The notification state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified (or is frequently notified), and corresponds to, for example, a gaming state such as AT or ART in an advantageous section. The non-notification state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified (or the frequency of notification is low), and a gaming state other than the notification state is applicable.

In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a notification target role that is a target role for notifying information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when it is determined as an internal winning combination. When the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode, the notification target combination can derive a predetermined result display (a combination of predetermined symbols can be displayed) and stops in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode. When the operation is performed, a result display different from the predetermined result display can be derived (a combination of symbols different from the predetermined combination of symbols can be displayed). For example, a push order small combination in the above embodiment. (Pushing order). In the pachislot machine 1, when the predetermined result display can be derived at the time of winning the notification target combination, the main control circuit 90 receives more medals than when the result display other than the predetermined result display is derived. Pay out. In the example shown below, "9" medals are paid out when a predetermined result display can be derived, and "0" medals are paid out when a result display other than the predetermined result display is derived. put out. It should be noted that the number of medals to be paid out when a result display other than the predetermined result display is derived may be less than "9" and is not limited to "0". Therefore, as for the notification target combination, many medals are paid out when the stop operation is performed in the predetermined operation mode, and few medals (or 0 medals) are paid out when the stop operation is performed in the operation mode other than the predetermined operation mode. It can be said that it is a role to be played. When the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the notification state, the main control circuit 90 notifies the player of a predetermined operation mode which is information on the stop operation which is advantageous for the player.

Further, when the condition for shifting to the notification state is satisfied in the non-notification state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the non-notification state to the notification state. In this specification example, the conditions for shifting to the notification state are arbitrary. Then, when the end condition of the notification state is satisfied in the notification state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the notification state to the non-notification state.

Here, in this specification example, the termination condition of the notification state is related to the number of medals paid out during the notification state, and for example, the number of medals paid out during the notification state reaches a specified value. That is, or the difference number of sheets (= payout number-insertion number) in the notification state may reach the specified value. In this specification example, it is used as an end condition that the number of medals paid out during the notification state reaches a specified value. Therefore, the main control circuit 90 has a counter capable of counting the total number of medals paid out in the notification state as numerical information for determining the duration of the notification state, and determines the number of medals paid out during the notification state. The counter is updated accordingly, and when the value of the counter reaches the specified value, the notification state is terminated. Further, the main control circuit 90 updates the value of this counter so that the duration of the notification state is extended when the addition condition is satisfied during the notification state. In this specification example, the addition condition is arbitrary.

(Outline of another example (No. 10) of game playability (game specifications))
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of such a specification example, the playability (No. 10) relates to a control that allows the player to adjust the end time of the notification state. Specifically, the playability (No. 10) is characterized by a method of counting the number of medals paid out during the notification state, which is a condition for ending the notification state, and the counting method described below is used. The player can adjust the end time of the notification state.

In terms of playability (No. 10), the main control circuit 90 does not update the number of medals to be paid out just by being determined as the internal winning combination during the notification state, and actually pays out when the medals are actually paid out. The number of medals to be paid out is updated according to the number of medals. That is, in the notification state, basically, the maximum profit can be obtained by performing the stop operation according to the notification, so it is possible to grasp the number of medals that will be paid out before paying out the medals. it can. Therefore, in the AT machine and the ART machine, when the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the notification state, the number of payouts is updated by notifying the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player in the game. There is.

On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, when the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the notification state, the main control circuit 90 notifies the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player in the game. The number of medals to be paid out is not updated just by doing so, but the number of medals to be paid out is updated according to the number of medals paid out along with the result display derived as a result of the player's stop operation. That is, when the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number of medals paid out during the notification state is added by "9", and when the player performs the stop operation without following the notification. Adds "0" to the number of medals paid out during the notification state.

(Example of control of game playability (No. 10))
Here, FIG. 111A shows a control example of game playability (No. 10). In the figure (a), the remaining number of payouts in the notification state is "9", and as a result of determining the notification target combination as the internal winning combination in the game, the main control circuit 90 is a stop operation advantageous to the player. The push order of "left, middle, right" is notified as the information of. When the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, as shown in Fig. (B), the bell wins and "9" medals are paid out, and as a result, the remaining number of medals in the notification state is updated to "0". , The notification state (ART) ends. On the other hand, if the player performs a stop operation without following the notification, as shown in FIG. 3C, the medal is not paid out because the bell does not win, and as a result, the remaining number of payouts in the notification state is "9". It is maintained as "sheets", the notification state (ART) is not terminated, and the game state of the next game is also the notification state (ART).

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present specification example, when the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the player can obtain many medals, but the notification state ends earlier, and conversely, the game If the player performs the stop operation without following the notification, the player can reduce the number of medals used in the game, but can postpone the end time of the notification state. Since the main control circuit 90 can perform additional control during the notification state, it is possible to finally receive a large number of medals by receiving the additional control during the extended period against the notification. Since there is also a property, it is possible to make the game playable with a strategy regarding whether or not to follow the notification. In addition, when the stop operation is performed against the notification, the player loses in the game, so that the profit of the loss can be distributed to other parts.

(Additional control example)
Subsequently, FIG. 111B is a diagram showing an example of additional control by the main control circuit 90. As shown in the figure, in terms of game playability (No. 10), by making the additional expectation degree different according to the number of elapsed games in the notification state (so-called, by providing a so-called number of games zone with a high additional expectation degree), further You can improve your strategy. As an example, consider the case where the game of the "77th game" is a game with a high degree of expectation after the notification state starts. In the "76th game" one game before the "77th game", if the remaining number of payouts in the notification state is "9" and the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the notification is made in the game. If the stop operation is performed according to the above, the notification state ends in the game even though the next game is a game with a high expectation. On the other hand, by not following the notification in the game, the game of the "77th game" with a high expectation of addition can be performed, and if the continuation period is added in the next game, the game ends. It may be more advantageous to the player than if it had happened.

In this way, while managing the end condition of the notification state by the number of payouts, by making the expected degree of addition different according to the number of games that have passed the notification state, the strategy can be enhanced and the game playability is diversified. In addition, the degree of expectation of addition may be the probability of winning the addition lottery (that is, whether or not the addition is easy to be performed), or may be the size of the addition when the addition is performed. It may be a combination of both. As an example, in the example shown in FIG. 111 (B), there is a high probability that the games of the "51st to 53rd games" will be added to the lottery after the notification state starts, and the amount of the addition will be large when the addition is performed. It is a normal game, and there is a high probability that the game of the "77th game" will be added to the lottery after the notification state starts, and the amount of addition when the addition is performed is also large, and the notification state is The game may be a game in which the probability of winning the lottery by adding the game of the "99th to 100th games" after the start is normal, and the size of the addition is large when the addition is performed. By doing so, the strategy can be further enhanced and the playability is diversified.

In the game playability (No. 10), it is used as an end condition that the number of medals paid out during the notification state (or the difference number during the notification state) reaches a specified value. Here, the main control circuit 90 updates the number of medals (or the difference number, hereinafter omitted) used as the end condition only in the game in which a part of the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. In a game in which another combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of medals used as an end condition may not be updated regardless of whether or not the medals have been paid out. For example, if it is determined as an internal winning combination, a prize is always won regardless of the player's stop operation (that is, a predetermined result display is always derived and transferred regardless of the mode of the stop operation), and a specific number of medals are awarded. In the case of the specification having the combination of the attraction 1 to be performed, if the number of medals used as the end condition is updated according to the combination of the attraction 1, the player adjusts the end time of the notification state. Can no longer be done. In this regard, the player adjusts the end time of the notification state by setting the combination of the pull-in 1 as a combination that does not update the number of medals used as the end condition when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be done. The combination of updating the number of medals used as the end condition and the combination of not updating can be arbitrarily set, but the combination to be notified may be a combination of updating the number of medals used as the end condition. It is preferable that the combination of the attraction 1 is a combination that does not update the number of medals used as the end condition. In addition, a role that is not a pull-in 1, that is, a role that may or may not be awarded according to the player's stop operation when determined as an internal winning combination (a role that may be missed) It may be a combination of updating the number of medals used as an end condition, or a combination of not updating.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 10) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when demonstrating another example (No. 10) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means and a profit-giving means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means and variable display means.

Further, since the main control circuit 90 can shift the gaming state to the notification state when the transition condition to the notification state is satisfied in the non-notification state, the main control circuit 90 functions as a state control means. Further, in the main control circuit 90, when the notification target combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the notification state, the main control circuit 90 notifies the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player via the instruction monitor. Functions as a means.

Further, the main control circuit 90 can count numerical information such as the number of payouts that determines the duration of the notification state, and this numerical information so that the duration of the notification state is extended by the additional control during the notification state. The main control circuit 90 functions as a duration counting means and an additional control means. Further, the main control circuit 90 can update this numerical information according to the number of medals paid out during the notification state, and when this numerical information reaches the end threshold value, the notification state can be terminated. The main control circuit 90 functions as a duration management means.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 11)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 112, another example (No. 11) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an outline of control in another example (11) of game playability (game specifications).

(Example of pachislot specifications)
As shown in FIG. 112 (A), in the specification example of the pachislot that can realize the playability (No. 11), the pachislot 1 has a normal section (general state) and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not included in the advantageous section. A notification state and a notification state that are more advantageous to the player than the non-notification state are included. The notification state of the advantageous section is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified (or frequently notified), and is ART in this specification example. Further, the non-notification state of the advantageous section is a gaming state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified (or the frequency of notification is low), and is CZ (chance zone) in this specification example.

The main control circuit 90 performs a shift lottery to the advantageous section in the normal section, and when the shift lottery is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal section to the CZ of the advantageous section. In addition, the main control circuit 90 may be able to directly shift from the normal section to ART by determining the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won. Since it is irrelevant in the explanation of 11), the transition from the normal section to ART will be omitted.

Further, when the main control circuit 90 satisfies the transition condition to ART during CZ, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from CZ to ART. The conditions for transition from CZ to ART are arbitrary, but in this specification example, 1/2 of CZ shifts to ART when it continues for 10 games without satisfying the end condition, and the remaining 1/2. In CZ, if the game continues for 20 games without satisfying the end condition, the game shifts to ART. Specifically, the main control circuit 90 determines either "CZ between 10 games" or "CZ between 20 games" in the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, and determines "CZ between 10 games". If this is the case, the game will shift to ART if the game continues for 10 games without satisfying the end condition, and if "CZ between 20 games" is determined, the game will continue for 20 games without satisfying the end condition. Move to ART.
In this specification example, it is assumed that there is no setting difference in the winning probabilities between "CZ between 10 games" and "CZ between 20 games". That is, it is assumed that the distribution probabilities of "CZ between 10 games" and "CZ between 20 games" are the same regardless of whether the setting is low or high.

Further, when the CZ end condition is satisfied during the CZ, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal section. Here, in the present specification example, the termination condition of CZ is that a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during CZ, and more specifically, when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during CZ, CZ Assuming that the end condition of is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the CZ to the normal section.

At this time, in this specification example, MB is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability different from other set values in at least a part of a plurality of set values. Here, FIG. 112 (B) is an internal lottery table during a general game used to determine an internal winning combination during a non-bonus state. As shown in the figure, in this specification example, the probability of determining MB as an internal winning combination is higher as the setting is lower, and lower as the setting is higher.

(Outline of another example (No. 11) of game playability (game specifications))
In this way, by making the winning probability of MB, which is the end condition of CZ that triggers the transition to ART, different according to the set value, in the playability (No. 11), the setting difference with respect to the expected degree of transition to ART. Can be given. That is, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), when the probability of winning the MB is high, the period of CZ with the winning of the MB as the end condition is shortened, and as a result, the expectation of transition to ART is low. On the contrary, when the probability of winning the MB is low, the period of CZ with the winning of the MB as the termination condition becomes long, and as a result, the expectation of transition to ART becomes high. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example, the lower the setting, the lower the expectation of transition to ART, and the higher the setting, the higher the expectation. In this way, in terms of playability (No. 11), instead of directly setting a setting difference in the probability of winning the lottery for transition to ART, by setting a setting difference in the end probability of CZ that can be expected to shift to ART, ART It is possible to set a difference in the degree of expectation of transition to ART, and it becomes possible to perform new control regarding the transition to ART.

In this specification example, since the end condition of CZ is applied to MB, even if CZ ends and it is not possible to shift to ART, the result display according to MB is derived after that. By winning a prize, it is possible to shift to the MB state (bonus state). That is, the main control circuit 90 can shift the gaming state to the MB state (bonus state) when the result display corresponding to the MB is derived. As a result, even in the low setting where the expectation of transition to ART is low, more MB states (bonus states) can be performed than in the high setting, so that the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 11) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when demonstrating another example (No. 11) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means.

Further, the main control circuit 90 can shift the gaming state to the CZ of the advantageous section when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, and changes the gaming state to ART when the transition condition to the ART in the CZ is satisfied. Since the shift is possible and the gaming state can be shifted to the normal section when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination in the CZ, the main control circuit 90 can be used as the first state control means and the second state control means. Function. Further, since the main control circuit 90 can start the bonus game of the MB state when the result display corresponding to the MB is derived and the MB wins, the main control circuit 90 functions as a bonus starting means.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 12)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 12) of the game playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. 113 and 114 are diagrams showing an outline of control in another example (No. 12) of game playability (game specifications).

(Example of pachislot specifications)
In the specification example of the pachi-slot machine that can realize playability (No. 12), the pachi-slot machine 1 has a non-bonus state and a bonus state, and the main control circuit 90 is non-bonus when the start condition of the bonus is satisfied in the non-bonus state. When the game state is changed from the bonus state to the bonus state and the end condition of the bonus is satisfied in the bonus state, the game state is changed from the bonus state to the non-bonus state. The condition for starting the bonus state is that the winning combination related to the bonus is won. The condition for ending the bonus state is that the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches a specified value, which will be described in detail later.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of stages of RT states as RT states in which the types of combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. As an example, the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example has a low RT and a high RT as RT states. It should be noted that each of the low RT and the high RT may have one RT state, or may have a plurality of RT states (for example, low RT1, low RT2, high RT1, high RT2). Such). When the main control circuit 90 satisfies the transition condition to high RT in the low RT in the non-bonus state, the RT state shifts from the low RT to the high RT, and the transition condition to the low RT is satisfied in the high RT in the non-bonus state. Then, the RT state is changed from high RT to low RT. The conditions for transitioning to the RT state in the non-bonus state are arbitrary. The conditions for shifting the RT state in the bonus state will be described later. Further, when the bonus state ends and the non-bonus state ends, the main control circuit 90 shifts to the non-bonus state while maintaining the RT state at the end of the bonus state. As an example, when the bonus state ends in the low RT state, the RT state in the non-bonus state after the bonus ends is maintained at the low RT, and when the bonus state ends in the high RT state, the non-bonus state after the bonus ends. The RT state in the bonus state is maintained at high RT.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a notification state and a non-notification state as a gaming state in the non-bonus state. The notification state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified (or frequently notified), and in this specification example, ART in the advantageous section is applicable. The non-notification state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified (or the frequency of notification is low), and a gaming state other than the notification state is applicable.

When the condition for shifting to the notification state is satisfied in the non-notification state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the non-notification state to the notification state. Then, when the end condition of the notification state is satisfied in the notification state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the notification state to the non-notification state. In this specification example, the transition condition to the notification state and the end condition of the notification state are arbitrary, but an example of the transition condition to the notification state will be described later.

(Outline of another example (No. 12) of game playability (game specifications))
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of such a specification example, the playability (No. 12) relates to the granting of benefits in the bonus state. It should be noted that the playability (No. 12) can be given some kind of privilege by the control described below during the bonus state, and the type of the privilege is not specified, but in the pachislot 1 of this specification example, The playability (No. 12) will be described as a privilege related to the notification state (ART) being given during the bonus state.

FIG. 113 (A) is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state during the bonus state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, as a bonus state, a BB which is a bonus continuous operation device related to a regular bonus (hereinafter, referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special bonus is adopted. As shown in the figure, the bonus state (BB) is composed of BB medium general, BB medium RB carryover, and BB medium RB.

When the main control circuit 90 wins a winning combination (BB) related to the bonus and the bonus state is started, first, the game state is generally changed during the BB. When the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the BB in general, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the RB carryover in the BB. It should be noted that the main control circuit 90 ends the bonus state and shifts to the non-bonus state when the end condition of the bonus state is satisfied before the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the general BB. , With the end of this bonus state, the general BB will also end.

When the result display corresponding to the RB is not derived (when the RB does not win) in the game in which the RB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, the main control circuit 90 RBs until the result display corresponding to the RB is derived. Is carried over as an internal winning role. That is, if the RB is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state, the gaming state in the bonus state is carried over to the RB during the BB until the RB wins a prize. It should be noted that the RB wins a prize when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate in a game in which a prize can be won, and does not win a prize in a game in which a prize can be won if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. That is, whether or not to win the RB is determined by whether or not the player performs the stop operation so as to win the RB, and the player can select whether or not to win the RB. Further, when the result display corresponding to the RB carried over as the internal winning combination is derived (when the RB wins) in the RB carry-over during the BB, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the RB during the BB. If the main control circuit 90 satisfies the end condition of the bonus state before the RB wins a prize, the main control circuit 90 ends the bonus state and shifts the game state to the non-bonus state. Therefore, the BB is accompanied by the end of the bonus state. Medium RB carry-over will also end.

Further, in the main control circuit 90, in the RB during the BB, the end condition of the RB (for example, there was an arbitrary predetermined number of winnings of 8 times or less, or an arbitrary predetermined number of games of 12 times or less was performed When it is satisfied, the game state is generally changed during BB. If the end condition of the bonus state (BB) is satisfied before the end condition of the RB is satisfied, the main control circuit 90 ends the bonus state and shifts the game state to the non-bonus state. RB in BB also ends with the end of the state.

Further, the main control circuit 90 controls the RT state so as to be transitionable during the bonus state. Specifically, when the main control circuit 90 wins a winning combination (BB) related to the bonus and the bonus state is started, the RT state shifts to the low RT, and then the RB is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus state. When this is done, the RT state shifts to high RT, and then when the RB determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination wins, the RT state shifts to low RT. That is, as shown in the figure, the main control circuit 90 sets the RT state to low RT in the general BB in the bonus state, sets the RT state to high RT in the RB carryover in the bonus state, and sets the BB in the bonus state. In the medium RB, the RT state is set to low RT. As described above, when the bonus state ends, the main control circuit 90 shifts to the non-bonus state while maintaining the RT state at the end of the bonus state. Therefore, the bonus state in the general BB or the RB in the BB. When is finished, the RT state in the non-bonus state becomes low RT, and when the bonus state ends in the RB carry-over during BB, the RT state in the non-bonus state becomes high RT.

Subsequently, FIG. 113 (B) is an internal lottery table used to determine the internal winning combination during the bonus state. In addition, in the "corresponding symbol combination" column of the figure, the combination of symbols that is allowed to win a prize when it is determined as an internal winning combination is specified, but it is only an example, and as explained below, " The push order bell_1st to the push order bell_3rd may function as a push order small combination (push order combination), and the "RB middle bell" may function as a combination that does not require a push order.

In the figure, "pushing order bell_1st" to "pushing order bell_3rd" are pushing order small winning combination (pushing order role), and if the correct answer is made in the three-choice pushing order, the bell wins and "9 medals" If the medals are paid out and the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing the three choices, the bell will not win and fewer medals (or 0 medals) will be paid out than when the bell was won. Further, the "RB medium bell" is a bell (common bell) in any mode of stop operation, and regardless of the mode of stop operation, the bell always wins a prize and "9" medals are paid out.

As shown in the figure, in BB middle general and BB middle RB carryover, "push order bell_1st" to "push order bell_3rd" are won, and three push orders are required to win the bell. On the other hand, in the RB in the BB, the "bell in the RB" wins, and the push order is not required to win the bell. It should be noted that the main control circuit 90 may or may not notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, the pressing order of the correct answer) in the general BB and the RB carry-over during the BB. Good. Further, the main control circuit 90 notifies the information of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player regarding the carry-over of the general BB and the carry-over of the RB during the notification state, and the carry-over of the general BB and the RB during the non-notification state. May not provide information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. In this specification example, the main control circuit 90 notifies the information of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player in the general in BB and the carry-over of RB in BB regardless of the notification state.

Further, in the figure, "normal lip" is a role related to replay. Further, in the figure, the "general medium strong rare role" is a strong rare role in BB medium general and BB medium RB carryover, and the "general medium weak rare role" is a weak rare role in BB medium general and BB medium RB carryover. Is. Similarly, the "RB medium strong rare role" is a strong rare role in the BB medium RB, and the "RB medium weak rare role" is a weak rare role in the BB medium RB.

Since the RT states are different between BB medium general (low RT), BB medium RB carryover (high RT), and BB medium RB (low RT), the winning probability of "normal lip" is different, and BB medium RB carryover is "normal". The winning probability of "Rip" is high, and the winning probability of "Normal Lip" is low for General in BB and RB in BB. In addition, in BB medium general, BB medium RB carryover, and BB medium RB, the winning probability of the winning combination (small combination) related to the payout of medals differs depending on whether or not the RB (first-class special accessory) is activated, and the winning probability of the winning combination (small combination) is different. The winning probability of the bell (“BEL_01” to “BEL_09”) is different between the RB carry-over in BB and the RB in BB. In this specification example, the winning probability of the bell is different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the RB, while the winning probability of the rare role is the same, but the winning probability of the rare role is also determined by the presence or absence of the operation of the RB. It may be different depending on the situation.

Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present specification example, since the general BB and the RB in the BB have a low RT and a low winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay, the winning probability of losing is high, and as a result, the expected value of medal payout ( That is, it is a low-base game state in which the expected value of medals given per unit game) is lower than that of RB carry-over during BB. In addition, RB carry-over in BB has a high RT and a high probability of winning a role related to replay, so the probability of winning a miss is low, and as a result, the expected value of medal payout is higher than that of general BB and RB in BB. It is a base game state. That is, from the viewpoint of the expected value of medal payout, the carry-over of RB in BB is a more advantageous gaming state than the general in BB and the RB in BB.

Subsequently, FIGS. 113 (C) and 114 (D) are lottery tables used for the ART lottery performed during the bonus state, and FIG. 113 (C) shows the BB used for the first hit lottery of the ART in the non-notification state. It is an ART first hit lottery table, and FIG. 114 (D) is an ART additional lottery table in BB used for an ART additional lottery in a notification state. Further, FIG. 114 (E) is a diagram showing an outline of lottery of ART lottery performed during the bonus state, and shows an outline of playability (No. 12).

As shown in FIGS. 113 (C) and 114 (D), the lottery table used for the ART lottery defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the ART lottery for each game state and internal winning combination. In this specification example, the first hit lottery and the additional lottery of ART are performed when the rare role is won, but the lottery may be performed even when the other role is won.

Here, the table shown in FIG. 114 (E) shows a lottery outline of the ART lottery in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example. As shown in the figure, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, the probability of granting the privilege is high in the general in BB and the carry-over of RB in BB, but the size of the privilege to be given when the privilege is given is small. For example, referring to the ART first hit lottery table in BB in FIG. 113 (C), in the BB middle general and the BB middle RB carryover, the probability of winning the first hit lottery of ART according to the rare role is high, but the case of winning. The initial number of ART games is as small as "50 games". Similarly, referring to the ART additional lottery table in BB in FIG. 114 (D), in the general BB and RB carry-over in BB, although the ART additional lottery is always won according to the rare role, the number of additional games in the case of winning Is as small as "10 games" to "50 games".

On the other hand, in the RB during BB, although the probability of granting the privilege is low, the size of the privilege to be granted when the privilege is granted is large. For example, referring to the ART first hit lottery table in BB in FIG. 113 (C), in the BB middle RB, although the probability of winning the first hit lottery of ART according to the rare role is low, the initial game of ART in the case of winning is low. As the number, not only "50 games" but also "100 games" and "200 games" may be determined. Similarly, referring to the ART additional lottery table in BB in FIG. 114 (D), in the general BB and RB carry-over in BB, the probability of winning the ART additional lottery according to the rare role is low, but the addition in the case of winning is low. The number of games is as large as "50 games" to "200 games".

In this way, in the playability (No. 12), the playability in the bonus state can be diversified by crossing the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege to be granted. For example, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), the general BB in the BB immediately after the start of the bonus state (BB) is in a stable state in which the fluctuation range of the privilege grant is small. In addition, even if the player wins the RB and shifts to the RB carry-over during the BB, the fluctuation range of the privilege grant becomes small and stable. On the other hand, if the player wins the RB and then shifts to the RB during the BB, the privilege grant will be in a rampage state with a large fluctuation range. Since the player can choose whether or not to win the RB, in terms of playability (No. 12), avoiding the winning of the RB will stabilize the fluctuation range of the privilege grant, or the RB The player can choose whether to make the swing of the privilege grant into a rampage state by winning a prize. It should be noted that the playability (No. 12) can be realized by crossing the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege to be granted between the gaming states in the bonus state, and which game state is the fluctuation range of the privilege grant. It is arbitrary whether the stable state is set to a small value, or which game state is set to the rampage state with a large fluctuation range of the privilege grant. In addition, the probability of granting benefits and the benefits to be granted are such that the overall expectation of granting benefits is the same (or substantially the same) between the gaming states that cross the probability of granting benefits and the size of the benefits to be granted. It is preferable that the size is set.

(Game example)
Subsequently, FIG. 114 (F) is a diagram showing a game example in the bonus state, game example 1 is a game example in which the swing width of the privilege grant is set to a stable state, and game example 2 is a game example. , This is an example of a game in which the fluctuation range of privilege grant is set to a rampage state.

In Game Example 1, if the RB is won during the bonus state, the game in the bonus state is performed while the RB is carried over during the BB without winning the RB. Until the RB is won (general during BB) and while the RB is carried over (RB during BB carryover), the probability of granting benefits is high, but the size of the benefits granted when granting benefits is small, so benefits are granted. The swing width is small and stable.

On the other hand, in the game example 2, when the RB is won during the bonus state, the RB is won and the game in the bonus state is performed in the RB during the BB. In RB during BB, although the probability of granting the privilege is low, the size of the privilege to be granted when the privilege is granted is large, so that the fluctuation range of the privilege grant is large and violent.

Further, in this specification example, when the bonus state ends and the state shifts to the non-bonus state, the state shifts to the non-bonus state while maintaining the RT state at the end of the bonus state. Here, if the state shifts to the bonus state during the notification state (ART), ART will be performed again after the end of the bonus state, but if the bonus state ends with the high RT, RT will be performed after the end of the bonus state. ART can be started as it is without shifting the state to high RT, and if the bonus state ends with low RT, ART is started after shifting the RT state to high RT after the bonus state ends. It will be. Therefore, if the game is performed in the bonus state with the RB carried over (high RT) during BB without winning the RB as in the game example 1, ART can be started immediately after the end of the bonus state. When the bonus state is ended in RB (low RT) during BB as in game example 2, ART is started via the preparation period for shifting the RT state to high RT after the end of the bonus state. become.

Further, as described above, the carry-over of RB during BB, which avoids winning the RB, is a high-based gaming state in which the expected value of medal payout is higher than that of the RB during BB when the RB is won. Therefore, in the BB medium RB where the fluctuation range of the privilege grant is large, not only the probability reduction of the privilege grant but also the preparation period after the end of the bonus state and the base reduction of the payout are distributed according to the size of the privilege to be granted. be able to. Therefore, for the player, the game is played so that the privilege is easily given during the bonus state but only a small privilege is given (RB carryover during BB), or the game is difficult to give the privilege but the big privilege is given. (RB in BB) or can be selected, and a new playability with strategy can be realized.

(Another example of playability (No. 12))
In the pachislot machine 1 of the specification example described above, the playability in the bonus state is diversified by crossing the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege to be granted. It is not limited, and includes the following specifications. Specifically, as described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example, the expected value of medal payout (that is, the expected value of the medal given per unit game) is set between the RB carry-over during BB and the RB during BB. different. The playability (No. 12) includes a specification that crosses the expected value of medal payout and the expected value of privilege.

Here, in the above description, the expected payout value of the medal carried over during BB and the expected payout value of the medal of RB during BB are set according to the winning probability of the winning combination related to the replay (in other words, the winning probability of losing). Explained the differences. In this regard, the expected payout value of the RB carry-over medal in BB and the expected payout value of the medal of RB in BB differ depending on the winning probability of the bell, and will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 113 (B), the winning probability of the bell (“BEL_01” to “BEL_09”) is different between the RB carry-over in BB and the RB in BB. Specifically, the individual winning probabilities in which "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" of the bell are determined as internal winning roles differ between the RB carry-over during BB and the RB during BB, and among the bells. The winning probability that at least one of "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" is determined as the internal winning combination is also different between the RB carry-over during BB and the RB during BB.

More specifically, in the RB carry-over during BB, as a result of setting a lottery value of "3000" for "push order bell 1st" to "push order bell 3rd", "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" respectively. A lottery value of "3000" is set for. On the other hand, in RB during BB, as a result of setting the lottery value of "3100" for "bell in RB", the lottery value of "3100" is set for each of "BEL_01" to "BEL_09". It is set. Therefore, in the RB carry-over in BB and the RB in BB, the individual winning probabilities in which "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" of the bells are determined as internal winning roles are higher in RB in BB (3100). > 3000). On the other hand, in the RB carry-over during BB, three types of bells ("push order bell 1st" to "push order bell 3rd") each having a lottery value of "3000" are won, whereas RB during BB Then, only one type of "RB medium bell" with a lottery value of "3000" is won. Therefore, in the RB carry-over during BB and the RB during BB, the winning probability that at least one of "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" among the bells is determined as the winning combination is higher in the RB carry-over during BB (9000). > 3100).

Therefore, in this specification example, when the individual winning probabilities of "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" are viewed independently, the winning probability of RB in BB is higher, but the overall winning probability of "BEL_01" to "BEL_09" is calculated. Overall, RB carry-over is higher than BB. Then, as described above, since the main control circuit 90 notifies the information of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player in the RB carry-over during the BB, the RB during the BB and the RB carry-over during the BB also from the viewpoint of the winning probability of the bell. Then, the former has a higher expected medal payout value.

Next, the expected value of the privilege that crosses the expected value of the medal payout will be described. The expected value of the privilege includes the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege to be granted, and these can be arbitrarily set. In the above specification example, the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege to be granted are set so that the overall expectation of the privilege grant is the same (or substantially the same). As described above, when the expected value of the medal payout and the expected value of the privilege are crossed, the expected value of the privilege does not necessarily have to be the same, and the magnitude of the expected value of the medal payout and the magnitude of the expected value of the privilege are determined. It suffices that the total degree of advantage of the players is the same (or substantially the same).

Specifically, in another example, in BB medium RB and BB medium RB carryover, BB medium RB with a low expected medal payout value is more privileged than BB medium RB carryover with a high expected medal payout value. By setting the expected value of the medal to be advantageous to the player, the expected value of the medal payout and the expected value of the privilege are crossed. As an example, in RB during BB, the probability of granting benefits is higher than that of carrying over RB during BB, and the size of the benefits to be granted is also increased to cross the expected value of medal payout and the expected value of benefits. In addition, in RB during BB, the probability of granting benefits is lower (or the same probability) than in carry-over of RB during BB, while increasing the size of benefits to be granted. It is also possible to cross the expected value of medals to be paid out and the expected value of benefits, and in RB during BB, the probability of granting benefits is higher than that of carrying over RB during BB, while the size of benefits to be granted is increased. By making it smaller (or making it the same), the expected value of medals and the expected value of benefits may be crossed.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 11) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when demonstrating another example (No. 11) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means.

Further, the main control circuit 90 can start the bonus state (BB) when the start condition of the BB is satisfied in the non-bonus state, and can end the bonus state when the end condition of the BB is satisfied in the bonus state. , The main control circuit 90 functions as a state control means.

Further, when the result display corresponding to the RB is derived in the bonus state, the main control circuit 90 can shift the gaming state in the bonus state to the RB in the BB, and the end condition of the BB or the RB in the RB in the BB. When the end condition of is satisfied, RB in BB can be ended. Further, in the bonus state, the main control circuit 90 can carry over the RB as the internal winning combination and the RB internally when the RB does not win in the game in which the RB is determined as the internal winning combination. The game state during the bonus state while being carried over as the winning role is defined as the RB carryover during BB. Therefore, the main control circuit 90 functions as a specific state control means, a first specific state control means, a second specific state control means, and a carry-over means.

Further, the main control circuit 90 can give a privilege related to the notification state (ART) during the bonus state, and in particular, the probability of giving the privilege and the size of the privilege to be given are determined in the RB carry-over during BB and the RB during BB. Since it crosses, the main control circuit 90 functions as a privilege giving means. At this time, the main control circuit 90 does not cross the probability of granting the privilege and the size of the privilege to be granted by the RB carry-over in BB and the RB in BB, but the RB carry-over in BB and the RB in BB give a medal. It may be possible to cross the expected value of payout and the expected value of benefits.

Further, the main control circuit 90 controls the RT state so that the RB carry-over in the BB in the bonus state becomes a high RT, and controls the RT state so that the RB in the BB becomes a low RT. Functions as an RT control means.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 13)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 13) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119.

(Outline of another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 13))
First, the outline of the game playability (No. 13) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. In the playability (No. 13), a new playability that has never existed before is realized by overlapping the color selection small combination and the push order small combination as the internal winning combination. As described above, as a method of adjusting the selection number, in addition to the method of adjusting the selection number based on the pressing order, it is required to perform a stop operation at a specific position (pressing) for one or all reels. There is a way to adjust the number of choices. In this specification example, the color selection small combination is a selection number small combination that wins by performing a stop operation (pressing) at a specific position for all reels, and the push order small combination is a specific small combination. A small winning combination that wins a prize by performing a stop operation in the order of pushing.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example, each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is divided into three regions having the same (or substantially the same) size: a red region, a blue region, and a yellow region. Although the reel arrangement is omitted, for example, when 21 symbols of the symbol positions "0" to "20" are arranged on each reel, the symbol positions "0" to "6" of each reel are set as the red area. , It can be realized by setting the symbol positions "7" to "13" as the blue region and the symbol positions "14" to "20" as the yellow region.

When the color selection small combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the correct area of the three areas in each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, it is specified for all reels. Assuming that the stop operation was performed at the position of, the color selection small role wins. That is, the color selection small combination wins a prize when the correct answer is 27 selections (= 3 × 3 × 3). Although details will be described later, in this specification example, the color selection small combination and the push order small combination are overlapped, and the push order small combination is prioritized over the color selection small combination, so that the color is drawn. The winning small combination will be won if the correct answer is 40.5 selection when the color selection small combination and the push order small combination are duplicated and won.

Further, in the following description, the names of the color selection small combinations are given by the names of three colors following "color selection_". The names of these three colors mean the correct area (pressing timing) in each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, in "color selection_red, blue, and yellow", the correct region is the red region on the left reel 3L, the correct region is the blue region on the middle reel 3C, and the correct region is the yellow region on the right reel 3R. It is a small role. In addition, "1st" to "3rd" are added to the name of the push order small combination as the correct push order after "push order bell_". The correct push order "1st" is for the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the correct push order "2nd" is for the reel 3C in which the first stop operation is in the middle, and the correct push order. “3rd” means that the first stop operation is for the right reel 3R. That is, in this specification example, the push order small winning combination wins a prize when the correct answer is given in the push order of three choices. Then, the name of the combination in which the color selection small combination and the push order bell overlap is written as, for example, "color selection_red, blue, yellow + push order bell_1st".

As shown in FIGS. 115 (A) and 115 (B), when the color selection small combination and the push order small combination are duplicated and won (“color selection small combination + push order small combination” is determined as the internal winning combination. If you answer correctly in the color selection, the color selection small role will win, if you answer correctly in the push order, the push order small role (bell) will win, and if you answer incorrectly in either the color selection or the push order, you will be out of the question. Then, the main control circuit 90 receives the maximum number of medals (for example, 6 medals) that can be paid out at the time of winning the "color selection small combination + push order small combination" when the color selection small combination or the push order small combination wins. ), And in the case of a loss, a smaller number of medals (for example, 1 or 2) or 0 medals than the maximum number is paid out. Further, when the color selection small winning combination is won, the main control circuit 90 is given in the case where the pushing order small winning combination is won or out of order, in addition to the payout of the maximum number of medals to be paid out. May grant benefits without.

In other words, if you answer correctly to a color selection that is more difficult than the color selection, you can receive the maximum medal payout and receive benefits, but the correct answer is easier than the color selection. If you answer correctly in order, you can get the maximum medal payout, but you cannot get the privilege. The types of benefits that can be given at the time of correct color selection are arbitrary, but in the following, benefits related to the notification state (AT or ART) shall be given. As an example, when the color selection small winning combination wins in the non-notification state, the main control circuit 90 gives a privilege (for example, AT stock) regarding the notification state with a probability of 50%. Then, when the main control circuit 90 gives a privilege related to the notification state in the non-notification state, the main control circuit 90 then shifts the game state to the notification state (for example, AT is performed for 50 games).

Subsequently, FIG. 115 (C) shows a game example in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example. As shown in FIG. 3A, the main control circuit 90 provides information on the stop operation in the non-notification state even when "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since nothing is notified (that is, neither the correct answer pressing timing nor the correct answer pressing order is notified, nor is the information on the stop operation that is out of order), the player selects a color in order to shift to the notified state. Play the game aiming for the correct answer on your own. Here, since it is difficult to win a prize for the color selection small combination because of the large number of selections, the winning probability of "color selection small combination + push order small combination" can be increased. As shown below, in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example, the winning probability of "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is set to be about 1/5 (= (162 × 81) / 65536). There is. Therefore, in terms of game playability (No. 13), it is possible to realize game playability in which a chance of giving a privilege regarding the notification state comes once every five games in the non-notification state.

In addition, since the number of choices for the color-choice small role is 40.5 choices (27-choice correct answer (= 2/3 x 1/27) when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing 3 choices), the color-choice small role wins The probability is about 1 / 202.5 (= 1/5 × 1 / 40.5), and the probability of giving a privilege accompanying the winning of the color selection small role is about 1/405 (1 / 202.5 × 50). %). That is, in terms of game playability (No. 13), although it is possible to give a player a chance at a relatively high rate of once in 5 games in the non-notification state, the rate at which the privilege related to the notification state is actually given is Since it can be performed once in about 405 games, it does not give an excessive profit to the player while giving the player many opportunities to give a privilege.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination in the notification state, the main control circuit 90 wins the push order small combination. Information on the stop operation required for (the order of pressing the correct answers of 3 choices) is notified. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example, when "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination during the notification state, the notification prompting the winning of the push order small combination instead of the color selection small combination. I do. As described above, the number of medals to be paid out when the color selection small winning combination is won and the number of medals to be paid out when the pushing order small winning combination is won are the same. There is no difference in the number of medals to be paid out even if a small winning combination is won at the time of winning. It is annoying for the player if it is necessary to press the color selection small winning combination even during the notification state, and so-called omission may occur, but the maximum number of sheets can be obtained just by following the pressing order. By controlling so that the payout can be received, the player does not feel annoyed and the occurrence of omission can be suppressed.

In this way, in terms of playability (No. 13), during the non-notification state, by granting benefits based on the color selection small role, which has a large number of choices and is difficult to win, the player is given many opportunities to grant benefits. At the same time, it is possible to realize a playability in which the player can be involved in the decision result of granting the privilege. In terms of game playability (No. 13), during the notification state, a notification is given to encourage the winning of the push order small winning combination, which is won only by the push order, so that the push order simpler than the push order is correct during the notification state. Since it is sufficient to perform the game in this way, it is possible to realize the game property that the game in the notification state can be smoothly performed.

(Example of pachislot specifications)
Next, a specification example of a pachislot machine that can realize playability (No. 13) will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 notifies (or frequently notifies) information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a non-notify state that notifies (or frequently notifies) information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. And have. When the condition for shifting to the notification state is satisfied in the non-notification state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the non-notification state to the notification state. Specifically, when the result display corresponding to the color selection small combination is derived in the non-notification state (when the color selection small combination wins), the main control circuit 90 enters the notification state with a predetermined probability (50%). Decide to migrate. Further, when the end condition of the notification state is satisfied in the notification state, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the notification state to the non-notification state. In this specification example, the termination condition of the notification state is arbitrary.

Here, FIGS. 116 and 117 are internal lottery tables during general games used to determine the internal winning combination. In the figure, the lottery value for "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is shown, and the lottery value for other combinations is omitted. Further, in the figure, the display of the "corresponding symbol combination" column is omitted, but in this specification example, a prize is won when the internal winning combination is determined so that the correspondence relationship shown in FIG. 119 can be realized. Is associated with a combination of symbols that are allowed.

As shown in the figure, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example has 81 types of "color selection small combination + push order small combination", and a lottery value "162" is specified for each. Therefore, the total lottery value of 81 kinds of "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is "13122 (= 162 × 81)", and any one of "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is about. Win with a probability of 1/5 (= 13122/65536).

Subsequently, FIG. 118 is a symbol combination table that defines combinations of symbols related to winning or the like in the pachislot machine 1 of the present specification example. In the description of the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 in this specification example, the types of symbols constituting the combination of symbols are not required, and therefore the description and illustration will be omitted. Further, in the figure, only the combination of symbols related to "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is shown, and the combination of other symbols is omitted. In the symbol combination table, combinations of a plurality of symbols are defined in advance, and data indicating the types of combinations of these symbols is defined as a display combination (winning operation flag).

In the figure, "design combination 1-1" to "design combination 1-n" are combinations of symbols related to "C_color selection_red-red-red", and "color selection_red-red-red" as an internal winning combination. Is a combination of symbols that may be displayed when is determined and the correct answer is given to the color selection. Similarly, "symbol combination 2-1" to "symbol combination 2-n" to "symbol combination 27-1" to "symbol combination 27-n" are "C_color selection_red red blue" to "C_color selection". It is a combination of symbols related to "_yellow-yellow-yellow", and is displayed when "color selection_red-red-red" to "color selection_yellow-yellow-yellow" is determined as an internal winning combination and the correct answer is given to the color selection. It is a combination of possible symbols.

Further, "symbol combination 28-1" to "symbol combination 28-n" are combinations of symbols related to "C_bell", and one of the push order small wins is determined as the internal winning combination, and the push It is a combination of symbols that may be displayed when the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer in the forward small combination. In addition, "symbol combination 29-1" to "symbol combination 29-n" are combinations of symbols related to "C_spilled eyes", and are any of "color selection small combination + push order small combination" as the internal winning combination. Is a combination of symbols that may be displayed when is determined and the color selection and pressing order are incorrect.

In each of the "color selection small combination + push order small combination", a combination of a plurality of symbols from "symbol combination 1-1" to "symbol combination 29-n" is defined as a corresponding symbol combination. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, when the "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols having the corresponding relationship shown in FIG. As shown, reel control is possible.

Subsequently, FIG. 119 is a table showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation (pushing order / pressing), and the display combination in the pachislot machine 1 of the present specification example. In the figure, the correspondence relationship of the display combination for each stop operation when "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination is shown, and the correspondence relationship related to other combinations is omitted.

As shown in the figure, when "color selection_red red red + push order bell_1st" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 performs a stop operation on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation. And (1st on the left), the reel stop control is performed so that the combination of the symbols related to "C_bell" is displayed (so that the push order small winning combination wins). Further, when a stop operation is performed on reels other than the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, the main control circuit 90 relates to "C_color selection_red-red-red" when the correct answer is correct. The reel stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols is displayed (so that the small winning combination of color selection wins), and if the correct answer is not answered for the color selection, the combination of symbols related to "C_spilled eyes" is displayed. The stop control of the reel is performed so as to be performed or to be disengaged.

Although the correspondence between the other "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is omitted, the main control circuit 90 also corrects the push order in the other "color selection small combination + push order small combination". When the push order is correct, the reel stop control is performed so that the push order small combination wins, and when the push order is incorrect and the color selection is correct, the reel stop control is performed so that the color selection small combination wins. , When both the push order and the color selection are incorrect, the reel stop control is performed so that the combination of the symbols related to "C_spilled eyes" is displayed or is out of alignment. Therefore, at the time of winning the "color selection small combination + push order small combination", the color selection small combination wins in two of the 81 stop operation modes that are a combination of the push order and the color selection, 27. In the street mode, the push order small winning combination wins, and in 52 street modes, the spilled or missed.

In the pachislot machine 1 of such a specification example, in terms of playability (No. 13), a privilege is given based on the winning of a color selection small winning combination, which has a large number of choices and is difficult to win in the non-notification state. Here, in this specification example, since the color selection small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination with a probability of 1/5, in the non-notifying state, there is a chance to give a privilege related to the notification state once every 5 games. It is possible to realize the playability. In addition, since the winning probability of the color selection small role can be increased as the number of selections is increased, the frequency of chances of granting benefits can be adjusted by adjusting the number of selections. For example, as a condition for the color selection small combination to win, the number of selections of the color selection small combination can be increased by further adding the order of the stop operation of 6 selections, and as a condition for the color selection small combination to win the prize. , It is possible to reduce the number of color selection small combinations by requesting the pressing of some reels instead of requesting the pressing of all reels.

On the other hand, if the number of choices is increased, the stop operation required during the notification state becomes complicated and troublesome, but in the playability (No. 13), the color selection small combination and the push order small combination are overlapped and notified. During the state, the push order is notified to encourage the winning of the push order small winning combination, so that the player does not feel annoyed and the occurrence of omission can be suppressed.

In the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example, in order to display the spilled eyes when the color selection and the pressing order are incorrect, the combination of the symbols related to "C_spilled eyes" is separately from the combination of the symbols related to "C_bell". However, it is not limited to this. For example, there are four effective lines (center line, top line, cross down line, and cross up line) (excluding the bottom line), and when displayed along the effective line, "2" medals are paid out. "ANY-Bell-ANY" is provided as a combination of. Then, in the game in which "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 has a symbol "bell" in the middle stage of the reel 3C inside when the correct answer is given in the push order. Is displayed as a stop, and when both the color selection and the pressing order are incorrect, the reel stop control may be performed so that the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the reel 3C inside. When the symbol "Bell" is stopped and displayed in the middle of the reel 3C in the middle with the correct answer in the push order, "ANY-Bell-ANY" is displayed along the three effective lines of the center line, cross down line and cross up line. As a result of being displayed, "6 medals (= 2 x 3)" are paid out. Then, when the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the reel 3C due to the wrong color selection and push order, "ANY-bell-ANY" is displayed along one effective line of the top line. , "2 medals (= 2x1)" will be paid out. By doing so, it becomes easy to design the pattern arrangement and the winning combination of the reels.

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example, when the "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is won, both the case where the correct answer is given to the color selection and the case where the correct answer is given in the pressing order, "color selection small combination + push". The maximum number of medals that can be paid out at the time of winning the "Shunko" is paid out, and if the answer is incorrect in either the color selection or the pushing order, the number of medals less than the maximum number is paid out. However, it is not limited to this. In terms of playability (No. 13), it suffices if the maximum number of medals can be paid out when the correct answer is given in the push order, which is the notification target during the notification state, and the number of medals to be paid out when the correct answer is selected is arbitrary. .. As an example, the main control circuit 90 pays out the maximum number of medals when the correct answer is given in the push order at the time of winning the "color selection small combination + push order small combination", and the color selection and push are performed when the correct answer is given to the color selection. In both cases where the answer is incorrect in any of the order, the number of medals smaller than the maximum number (the same number of medals in both cases) may be paid out. Further, the main control circuit 90 pays out the first number of medals, which is less than the maximum number, when the color selection is correct, and when the color selection and the pressing order are incorrect, the main control circuit 90 pays out the first number of medals. A second number of medals that is less than the maximum number and different from the first number (may be less or more) may be paid out.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 13) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200 when exhibiting another example (No. 13) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means.

Further, the pachislot 1 has a notification state and a non-notification state, and when the push order is correct (when the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode), the push order small winning combination is won, and the push order is incorrect and the color is selected. When the answer is correct (when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode), the color selection small winning combination wins, and when both the push order and the color selection are incorrect (when the stop operation is performed in the third operation mode), spills. It has a "color selection small combination + push order small combination" that is an eye or miss.

Then, the main control circuit 90 of the pachislot 1 pays out "6" medals at the time of winning the color selection small winning combination and the winning of the pushing order small winning combination, and is less than "6" in the case of spilled or missed medals. In order to pay out medals or 0 medals, the main control circuit 90 functions as a profit-giving means. Further, since the main control circuit 90 gives a privilege related to the notification state with a probability of 50% in addition to paying out the medal when the color selection small winning combination is won in the non-notification state, the main control circuit 90 grants the notification privilege. Functions as a means.

Further, since the main control circuit 90 can transition the game state from the non-notification state to the notification state when the privilege regarding the notification state is given based on the winning of the color selection small winning combination, the main control circuit 90 can control the notification. Functions as a means. Then, the main control circuit 90 does not notify any stop operation information even if "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-notification state, while "color selection small combination" in the notification state. When "small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 functions as a notification means in order to notify the push order small combination of the correct push order.

In the game in which "color selection small combination + push order small combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 is used when the timing of the stop operation for the rotating reel is performed at an appropriate timing. In other words, in the rotating reel, when the stop operation for the reel is performed at the timing when the correct answer area is displayed in the color selection small combination, the color selection small combination is regarded as the correct answer. The reel stop control is performed so that a prize can be won, and when the stop operation for the rotating reel is performed in the correct push order in the push order small winning combination, the push order small winning combination can be won as the correct answer in the pushing order. Performs stop control.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 14)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 14) of game playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 134.

(Outline of another example (No. 14) of game playability (game specifications))
The playability (No. 14) relates to a reel stop effect using the guidance of the stop timing. Until now, at a predetermined timing during the game, a state called "lock" that invalidates or delays the game operation by the player has been generated, and the reel is rotated and stopped during the lock to perform a reel action. The equipped pachislot 1 is known. In such a pachislot machine 1, since it is possible to perform an effect using a reel during locking, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. However, until now, the player's operation while locked is limited to the operation according to the display such as "Press within a certain period of time!".

Therefore, a musical score is displayed according to a predetermined reel action stop timing, the player is guided to perform a stop operation according to the musical score, and when the stop operation is performed according to the timing, the reel action is stopped by the stop operation. It may provide a production that can be made to look as if it were done. By doing so, it is possible to give more variety to the player's operation while locked.

[Flow of games during advantageous sections]
FIG. 120 is a transition flow showing the flow of the game in the advantageous section in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present modification. As shown in FIG. 120, the ART gaming state is usually composed of an ART and an additional zone. The normal ART and the additional zone are in a gaming state in which the playability is different from each other, and the normal ART displays a combination of symbols that are advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out) during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation for the purpose, etc., and the addition zone notifies the player of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and the expected value (win probability and / or win) for adding the duration of the normal ART. The size of the profit at the time) is a game state that is more advantageous than the normal ART. In this modified example, it is assumed that the game is normally played without digesting the duration of ART during the addition zone, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the duration of normal ART is usually performed even during the addition zone. It may be a specification in which the game is played while digesting.

As shown in FIG. 120, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the additional zone or the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, the transition lottery to the addition zone is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the addition zone.

On the other hand, there is a possibility of shifting to normal ART from the additional zone. Specifically, the end lottery is performed in the addition zone, and if the end lottery is won, the addition zone ends, and the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the addition zone to the normal ART.

Although not shown, the duration of the normal ART is managed, and when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the normal gaming state. The method of managing the duration of normal ART is arbitrary, and the duration may be managed by the number of games, or the duration may be managed by the number of medals or the difference in the number of medals paid out during normal ART. In addition, the duration may be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during normal ART.

Regarding the management of the duration of the additional zone, in this modification, the winning of the end lottery is set as the end condition, but the end condition is not limited to this, and the method of managing the duration of the additional zone is also arbitrary. Similar to the normal ART duration management method, the duration may be managed by the number of games, or the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out in the additional zone or the difference number.

[Structure of data table stored in main ROM]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125.

(Additional zone transition lottery table)
FIG. 121 is an additional zone transition lottery table used for the transition lottery to the additional zone. The additional zone transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value related to the transfer lottery result to the additional zone for each winning combination number for the advantageous section.

(Additional game number lottery table)
FIG. 122 is an additional game number lottery table used for the additional game number lottery performed based on the additional game number lottery number. The number of additional games lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the number of additional games.

When the main control board 71 wins the transition to the additional zone in the transition lottery to the additional zone using FIG. 121, the main control board 71 draws the number of additional games using FIG. 122.

(Additional zone release lottery table)
Subsequently, FIG. 123 is an additional zone release lottery table used for the additional zone release lottery. The additional zone cancellation lottery table defines information on the lottery value for canceling the additional zone.

(Game lock lottery table)
FIG. 124 is a game lock effect table for drawing the presence or absence of a lock effect. As shown in FIG. 124, the game lock lottery table defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the lock effect according to the winning combination number for the advantageous section.

(Main side production lottery table when locked)
FIG. 125 is a lock-on main-side effect lottery table, which is referred to when performing a reel effect while a "lock" state is occurring that invalidates or delays the game operation. As shown in FIG. 125, the main side effect lottery table at the time of locking is for determining the final stop position of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R with reference to the bottom line according to the winning combination number for the advantageous section. Specify the lottery value information. In this modification, for convenience, the final stop position of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined with reference to the bottom line, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the top line can be used as a reference. Alternatively, the center line may be used as a reference.

It is possible to predict the number of additional games by the symbol combination that is finally stopped in the reel production. For example, when the number of additional games is 30 and the lottery result is the effect number "05", the main control board 71 repeats the variable display and the stop display of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and finally. An effect of stopping and displaying the symbol combination of "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7" on the bottom line is executed.

The production number "02" is relatively easy to be selected when the number of additional games is 10, the production number "03" is relatively easy to be selected when the number of additional games is 20 games, and the production number "04" is. , When the number of additional games is 30, it is relatively easy to select, and the effect number "05" is relatively easy to be selected when the number of additional games is 30 games.

Since the effect number "05" can be selected only when the number of additional games is 30 or more, an effect of stopping and displaying the symbol combination of "red 7-red 7-red 7" on the bottom line is executed. By doing so, the player can determine that the number of additional games is 30 or more.

In this modification, it can be said that the number of additional games determined by the main control board 71 can be suggested by the symbol combination stopped in the reel effect.

In this modification, the description is made assuming that one lock is used to perform one reel effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one lock may be used to perform a plurality of reel effects.

Further, in this modification, the type of the main effect at the time of locking is described as being determined according to the number of additional games, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when determining the presence or absence of the lock effect, the type of the main effect at the time of locking may be determined together, and the number of additional games may be determined according to the type of the main effect at the time of lock. For example, when the type of the main effect at the time of locking is the effect of stopping and displaying the symbol combination of "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7", make sure that 30 or more games are determined as the number of additional games. Therefore, even if the type of the main effect at the time of locking is added and determined prior to the determination of the number of games, it is possible to have the same correspondence relationship as in this modification.

[Configuration of data table stored in ROM cartridge board]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

(Sub-side production lottery table when locked)
FIG. 126 is a sub-side effect lottery table at the time of locking, when a “locked” state occurs and the effect contents of the speaker group 84 and the sub-display device 18 are determined while the reel effect is executed on the main side. Referenced to. As shown in FIG. 126, the sub-side effect lottery table at the time of locking is set to the type of sound output from the speaker group 84 or the sub-display device 18 according to the effect number determined by referring to the main-side effect lottery table. The lottery value information for determining the type of musical score to be displayed is specified.

On the musical score displayed on the sub-display device 18, an instruction of the operation input timing for the player to operate the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is described. Then, in the reel effect on the main side, the timing at which the variation display of the symbols displayed on the surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped is predetermined, but the operation input timing instruction described on the musical score is , Corresponds to the timing when the variation display of the symbol in the reel production stops.

Here, the correspondence between the operation input timing instruction described on the musical score and the timing at which the variation display of the symbol in the reel effect is stopped will be described. In the reel production during the game lock, the variation display of the symbols displayed on the surface of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R does not always stop at the moment when the player operates the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, and the number of symbols is counted. It is possible to stop the variable display of the symbol after fluctuating by the frame. Therefore, even if the effect is to make the display of the symbol change stop by the player's operation, the symbol is changed by several frames from the timing when the player operates the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. Is acceptable. In addition, the reel effect here is different from the reel operation in a series of unit games explained in the explanation of the functional flow of FIG. 1, and the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is four symbols. You don't have to set it in minutes. Therefore, in the reel effect, 10 symbols may be moved or 20 symbols may be moved from the timing when the player operates the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. Even in this case, it is possible to execute the reel effect by appropriately outputting the pressing sound of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the sliding sound of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the stop sound of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the like. Is.

Therefore, it is not necessary to completely make the instruction of the operation input timing described on the musical score and the timing at which the variation display of the symbol in the reel production is stopped, and in the reel production in this modified example, it is described on the musical score. It does not matter if the timing at which the variation display of the symbol in the reel effect is stopped is clearly later than the instruction of the operation input timing. On the other hand, it does not matter if the timing at which the variation display of the symbol in the reel effect is stopped is slightly earlier than the instruction of the operation input timing described on the musical score, but it is clearly preferable not to make it earlier.

As described above, as long as the music is the same as in this modification, there is no problem even if the musical score (operation input timing) is the same, but it is not limited to this, and the music is the same. It is also possible that different musical scores (operation input timings) can be selected.

[Explanation of operation of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 72 by using the program will be described.

(Main operation processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU)
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to the flowcharts (hereinafter referred to as the main flow) shown in FIGS. 127 and 128.

Compared with the main flow (FIG. 56) described in the present embodiment, this modification is different in that the game lock lottery process (step S1001) is added after the internal lottery process (step S204). Further, the content of the game start state determination control process (step S208) is partially different from that of the embodiment. Further, the present modification is different in that the game start lock process (step S1003) is added after the reel stop initial setting process (step S209).

(Game lock lottery processing)
Subsequently, the game lock lottery process controlled by the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 129.

In the game lock lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the addition specialization flag is on (S1011). The additional special flag is a flag for identifying whether or not the user is in the additional zone. When the addition specialization flag is on (YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S1012. When the addition specialization flag is off (NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game lock lottery process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 120), and performs the game lock lottery according to the winning combination number (S1012). By the process of S1012, it is determined whether "without lock effect" or "with lock effect".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the game lock lottery is "with lock effect" (S1013). When the result of the game lock lottery is "with lock effect" (YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S1014. When the result of the game lock lottery is "no lock effect" (NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game lock lottery process.

When the lock effect is "Yes" (YES), the main CPU 101 subsequently refers to the main side effect lottery table (FIG. 125) at the time of locking, and determines the symbol position to be stopped according to the random value for effect (FIG. 125). S1014).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the time required for the reel effect determined in the process of S1014 in the lock timer (S1015), and ends the game lock lottery process.

(State determination control process at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 130, a game start state determination control process controlled by the main CPU 101 will be described.

In the game start state determination control process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is an advantageous section (S1021). When it is an advantageous section (YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S1022. If it is not an advantageous section (NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S1031.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the additional specialization flag is off (S1022). When the addition specialization flag is off (YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S1023. When the addition specialization flag is on (NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S1026.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 refers to the additional zone shift lottery table (FIG. 121) and draws whether or not to shift to the additional zone (S1023). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the lottery is "winning (shifting to the additional zone)" (S1024). When the result of the lottery is "winning (shift to the addition zone)" (YES), the main CPU 101 sets the addition specialization flag to ON and shifts the processing to S1026. When the result of the lottery is "non-winning" (NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S1031.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 draws the number of additional games (S1026). Here, the main CPU 101 determines the number of additional games with reference to the number of additional games lottery table (FIG. 122).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 adds the number of additional games determined by lottery (S1027).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 refers to the additional zone release lottery table (FIG. 123) and performs the additional zone release lottery (S1028). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the lottery is "winning (release of additional zone)" (S1029). When the result of the lottery is "winning (cancellation of addition zone)" (YES), the main CPU 101 sets the addition specialization flag to off (S1030), and shifts the process to S1031. As a result, the state in the advantageous section shifts from the additional zone to the normal ART. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is "non-winning (continuation of additional zone)" (NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S1031.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes other processes in the game start state determination control process (S1031), and ends the game start state determination control process.

(Lock processing at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 131, the game start lock process controlled by the main CPU 101 will be described.

In the game start lock process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the lottery result in the process of S1012 in FIG. 129 is the lock effect “Yes” (S1041). When the lock effect is “Yes” (YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S1042. When the lock effect is “none” (NO), the main CPU 101 ends the lock process at the start of the game.

When the lock effect is “Yes” (YES), the main CPU 101 subsequently executes the reel effect process (S1042). In the reel effect processing, the main CPU 101 repeats the fluctuation display (forward rotation, reverse rotation) and stop display of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R in a predetermined mode, and finally determines by the processing of S1042. An effect of stopping the fluctuation display of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is executed at the designated symbol position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the lock effect "Yes" to the lock effect "None", clears the effect number determined in the process of S1014 of FIG. 129 (S1043), and ends the game start lock process. ..

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control board 72 by using the program will be described.

(Main board communication task)
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control board 72.

First, the sub CPU 201 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S1051) and checks the reception command (S1052). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (S1053). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 201 executes the process of S1053.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has been received (YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a start command (S1054).
.. When the received command is a start command, the sub CPU 201 executes the process at the time of receiving the start command (S1055), and returns to the process of S1053. If the received command is not a start command, the sub CPU 201 creates game information from the received command and stores the created game information in the sub RAM 202 (S1056). Next, the sub CPU 201 registers the effect based on the game information created in S1056 (S1057), and returns to the process of S1053.

(Processing when a start command is received)
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reel effect is “present” (S1061). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the reel effect is “Yes” (YES), the sub CPU 201 refers to the lock-time sub-side effect table (FIG. 109), and obtains the lock effect according to the information of the effect number included in the start command. The data is registered (S1062), and the process is transferred to S1063. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reel effect is “none” (NO), the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to S1063.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 201 executes another process at the time of receiving the start command (S1063), and ends the process at the time of receiving the start command.

[Example of reel production when the game is locked]
Next, an example of the game lock in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 134. Specifically, FIG. 134 is an example in which the game lock is performed when the number of additional games is 30, and the effect number related to the reel effect is “05” (red 7-red 7-red 7).

In the game start state determination control process (S208 in FIG. 127), the main CPU 101 refers to the additional zone transition lottery table (FIG. 121), the transition lottery to the additional zone (S1023 in FIG. 113), and the additional game number lottery table (S1023 in FIG. 113). A lottery of the number of additional games (S1026 in FIG. 130) with reference to FIG. 122) is executed. By this lottery, the number of additional games is determined to be "30".

In addition, the main CPU 101 performs a game lock lottery process (S1001 in FIG. 127). In the game lock lottery process, the main CPU 101 refers to the game lock lottery table (FIG. 124) and performs the game lock lottery according to the winning number in the advantageous section (S1012 in FIG. 129). When the lock effect "Yes" is determined as the result of the lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the main side effect lottery table (FIG. 125) at the time of locking, and determines the symbol position to be stopped according to the random value for the effect (FIG. 129 S1014). In this lottery, the production number is determined to be "05". After that, the main CPU 101 generates a start command (S206 in FIG. 127). This start command also includes information on the presence or absence of the game lock and the content of the reel effect during the execution of the game lock.

Further, in the game start state determination control process (S208 in FIG. 127), the main CPU 101 draws a lottery for shifting to the additional zone (S1023 in FIG. A lottery of the number of additional games (S1026 in FIG. 130) with reference to the table (FIG. 122) is executed.

Here, the sub CPU 201 executes the start command reception processing (FIG. 133) in response to receiving the start command, which is a command different from the previous one (YES in S1053 and S1054 in FIG. 132). In this start command reception processing (FIG. 133), based on the information that the reel effect is "present", the sub-side effect table at the time of locking (FIG. 126) is referred to, and the effect number "05" included in the start command is displayed. The effect data at the time of locking is registered according to the information of (S1062 in FIG. 133). By this registration, the sound output from the speaker group 84 according to the production number "05" determined by referring to the main side production lottery table (FIG. 125), the musical score information to be displayed on the sub display device 18, and the like are set. Will be done.

On the musical score displayed on the sub-display device 18, an instruction of the operation input timing for the player to operate the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is described. Then, in the reel effect on the main side, the timing at which the variation display of the symbols displayed on the surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped is predetermined, but the operation input timing instruction described on the musical score is , Corresponds to the timing when the variation display of the symbol in the reel production stops.

FIG. 130 is a display example of the sub display device 18 at that time and the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R inside the display window 4. In (A) of FIG. 130, the sub-display device 18 is prompted to operate the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R at the operation input timing described on the musical score, and is "press the stop button according to the instruction! "Is displayed. Then, the display window 4 displays a symbol when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped and displayed in the previous unit game.

Subsequently, in (B) of FIG. 130, a musical score is displayed above the sub-display device 18. The musical score scrolls from right to left over time. A triangular sign is attached to the center of the musical score. Then, when the stop button-shaped symbol with any of the characters "left", "middle", and "right" scrolls from right to left and reaches the position of the triangular code, the player presses the stop button. It is urged to operate 17L, 17C, 17R. The word "left" prompts the player to operate the left stop button 17L. In addition, the character "middle" prompts the player to operate the central stop button 17C. In addition, the character "right" prompts the player to operate the right stop button 17R.

In FIG. 130 (B), the stop button-shaped symbol on which the character "left" is written comes to the position of the triangular code, and the player operates the left stop button 17L. Since the operation input timing instruction written on the musical score corresponds to the timing when the variation display of the symbol in the reel production stops, the stop button-shaped symbol with the letters "left" is a triangular symbol. At the timing of reaching the position of, the main CPU 101 stops the fluctuation of the symbol on the left reel 3L. At this time, on the left reel 3L, "bell" (symbol position: 11 in FIG. 15), "replay" (symbol position: 10), and "red 7" (symbol position: 9) are displayed from the upper row.

FIG. 130 (C) shows a state at the end of the reel production. Looking at the symbols displayed inside the display window 4, the symbol combination of "red 7-red 7-red 7" is stopped and displayed on the bottom line. In this modification, when "30 games" or "50 games" are determined as the number of additional games, the effect number "05" can be selected. Therefore, the sub-display device 18 displays "30 or more games added and confirmed!".

In this modification, it is assumed that the sub-display device 18 is displayed as "30 or more games are added and confirmed!" Regardless of whether or not the operation timing of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R by the player is appropriate. However, it is not limited to this. The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the operation timing is within a predetermined range from the display timing on the musical score, and when it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate, the display "30 games or more is added and confirmed!" Is executed, and if it is not appropriate. When it is determined, the display may not be executed.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to this modification, in the reel production, the variation display of the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped at the timing when the player inputs the operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. As a result, in the reel production, it is possible to make it appear as if the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped by the operation of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R of the player.

In addition, by making it appear as if the symbols related to the addition of the number of games in the advantageous section (so-called additional symbols) have stopped on the effective line according to the timing when the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are operated, the addition special feature. It is possible to continuously align the symbols according to the timing of the player's stop operation in the conversion zone or the like, and give the player an exhilarating feeling due to the number of additional games being given from the type of the stopped symbol. Therefore, in the reel effect of starting the variable display of the symbol and then stopping the variable display, it is possible to prompt the player to input the operation at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is stopped. It is possible to provide a more diversified pachislot machine 1.

In this modification, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are urged to be operated at the operation input timing described on the musical score, but the present invention is not limited to this. The button for prompting the operation may be an effect button different from the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R. As a result, since the timing at which the effect button is operated can be detected in the sub CPU 201, it is determined to what extent the timing at which the effect button is operated matches the operation input timing described on the musical score, and the determination result is obtained. It is possible to change the effect content on the sub-display device 18 according to the above.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 15)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 15) of game playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 140.

(Outline of another example (No. 15) of game playability (game specifications))
The playability (No. 15) is related to the setting suggestion by the number of sliding pieces. In pachislot 1, since data related to stop control (stop control data) is usually determined based on the internal winning combination, the timing when the internal winning combination is the same and the player performs the stop operation (stop start position) is set. If they are the same, the number of sliding pieces is the same regardless of the set value. In this respect, in game playability (No. 15), by making the stop control data when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the specific state different according to the set value, the sliding piece at the time of winning the specific combination in the specific state. Make the number different depending on the set value. As a result, in the playability (No. 15), it is possible to suggest the setting by the number of sliding pieces at the time of winning a specific combination in a specific state.

In the following, the bonus state in the advantageous section will be described as an example as the specific state, but the specific state is not limited to this. For example, the bonus state in the normal section may be the specific state. The advantageous section may be designated as a specific state regardless of whether or not it is in the bonus state, and the bonus state may be designated as a specific state regardless of whether or not it is in the advantageous section. Further, in consideration of the RT state, a specific RT state in the advantageous section or a specific RT state in the normal section may be set as a specific state, and a specific RT state may be set as a specific state regardless of whether or not the section is advantageous. May be. In addition, some of the bonus states, for example, the RB (first-class special accessory) in the BB (continuous differential device of the first-class special accessory) is not operating, or the RB is activated in the BB. The inside may be a specific state. In this case as well, only the advantageous section or the normal section may be set as the specific state, or the specific state may be set regardless of whether or not the section is advantageous.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of playability (No. 15), when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in a predetermined state different from the specific state, the main control circuit 90 has the same number of sliding pieces regardless of the set value. The reel stop control is performed so as to. Here, the predetermined state may be all states other than the specific state among all the states related to the game of the pachislot 1, and other than the specific state of all the states related to the game of the pachislot 1. It may be a part of the states. The latter case means that a state in which setting suggestion can be made by the number of slip pieces is included even in a state other than a specific state, in other words, there are a plurality of states (two) in which setting suggestion can be made by the number of slip pieces. It is not limited to, and may have three or more specific states). In such a latter case, the mode of difference in the number of sliding pieces according to the set value may be different for each of a plurality of specific states. The mode of the difference in the number of sliding pieces according to the set value can be controlled by determining the stop control data according to the set value, which will be described later.

Further, in the following, as the specific role, "watermelon" will be described as an example, but the specific role is not limited to this, and any role can be used. Further, the combination in which the number of sliding pieces differs according to the set value may be only one of a plurality of combinations that can be determined as an internal winning combination in a specific state, and a plurality of combinations among a plurality of combinations. (It is not limited to two, but may be three or more, or may be all). In addition, when a plurality of combinations are used as the specific combination, the mode of the difference in the number of sliding pieces according to the set value may be different for each of the plurality of specific combinations. Further, when a plurality of states are used as the specific states as described above, the specific combination may be different for each specific state, or the same combination may be used.

(Example of pachislot specifications)
As shown in FIG. 135 (A), in the specification example of the pachislot that can realize the playability (No. 15), the pachislot 1 has a normal section and an advantageous section, and each of the normal section and the advantageous section Includes a non-bonus state and a bonus state (BB). The advantageous section is a game section capable of executing a notification state capable of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and may include a non-notification state and a notification state. , It may be configured only by the notification state. Further, the normal section is a game section in which the notification state cannot be executed, and is composed only of the non-notification state. The main control circuit 90 shifts from the non-bonus state to the bonus state when the bonus start condition is satisfied in the non-bonus state, and changes from the bonus state to the non-bonus state when the bonus end condition is satisfied in the bonus state. Transition the state. Further, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to the advantageous section when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. The game state is transferred to. In terms of playability (No. 15), these conditions are not particularly limited and may be arbitrary conditions.

Subsequently, FIG. 135 (B) is an internal lottery table in BB, which is referred to to determine the internal winning combination during the bonus state. As shown in the figure, in this specification example, "JAC combination" and "watermelon" can be determined as internal winning combinations during the bonus state. Although the description is omitted, "JAC combination" is a combination in which "bell" symbols are displayed side by side along a predetermined line when all reels are stopped, and "watermelon" is, for example, all reels. This is a role in which "watermelon" symbols are displayed side by side along a predetermined line when the is stopped.

In this specification example, the number of sliding pieces (stop control) is the same for the "JAC combination" regardless of the set value, and for the "watermelon (specific combination)", the number of sliding pieces (stop control) is the same according to the set value. ) Is different. As shown in the figure, in this specification example, "watermelon (specific combination)" in which the number of sliding pieces differs depending on the set value is won with a probability common to all the settings. That is, there is no setting difference in the probability that a specific combination will win.

Subsequently, FIG. 135 (C) is a stop control data setting table in the bonus state during the normal section. The stop control data setting table defines information related to the rotation stop number in association with the internal winning combination. The turning cylinder stop number is information for specifying stop control data used for reel stop control, and is information including information related to the left first stop stop table as shown in the figure. The left first stop table is a stop table that is referred to when the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 (F) and 136 (G) described later. The number of sliding pieces is specified in association with the stop start position.

Here, as described above, the playability (No. 15) is suggested by the number of sliding pieces, but below, the playability (No. 15) will be described by focusing only on the left reel 3L. That is, in the following description, the left reel 3L will be taken as an example as a reel in which the number of sliding pieces differs depending on the set value. For other reels (middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), the number of sliding pieces may be different depending on the set value, or the number of sliding pieces may be the same regardless of the set value. ..

Further, the reels in which the number of sliding pieces differs depending on the set value are not limited to the left reel 3L, and may be only the middle reel 3C or only the right reel 3R. Further, the reels in which the number of sliding pieces differs depending on the set value is not limited to one reel of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but any two reels of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. It may be all reels of reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

Further, only when the stop / stop operation is performed in a predetermined push order, the number of sliding pieces in the target reel (reel having a different number of sliding pieces according to the set value) may be different depending on the set value. Further, the number of sliding pieces may be different depending on the set value for the target reel regardless of the pushing order. Further, the target reels may be different depending on the pushing order. As an example, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined push order, the predetermined reel is the target reel, while the stop operation is performed in a specific push order different from the predetermined push order. May target a specific reel different from a predetermined reel. Further, the reel on which the first stop operation has been performed may be the target reel.

As shown in FIG. 135 (C), in the bonus state (predetermined state) during the normal section, when the "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 is irrespective of the set value. The number "30" for stopping the rotation is determined. As a result, when the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, the main control circuit 90 performs stop control on the left reel 3L based on the left first stop table "02". In this way, in the bonus state (predetermined state) during the normal section, the stop control data is the same regardless of the set value. Therefore, in the predetermined state, the reel stop control is performed so that the number of sliding pieces is the same regardless of the set value. Is done.

Subsequently, FIG. 135 (D) is a stop control data setting table in the bonus state during the advantageous section. The stop control data setting table defines information related to the rotation stop number in association with the internal winning combination. In the bonus state (specific state) during the advantageous section, when the "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation stop number according to the set value. In the case of the example of the figure, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation cylinder stop number "30" in the set values "1" to "3", and the rotation cylinder stop in the set values "4" to "6". The user number "33" is determined. In this way, in the bonus state (specific state) during the advantageous section, the stop control data differs according to the set value. Therefore, in the specific state, the reel stop control is performed so that the number of sliding pieces differs according to the set value. Will be done.

In the example shown in the figure, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation stop number "30" which is the same as the bonus state (predetermined state) in the normal section in the set values "1" to "3". However, other rotation stop numbers may be determined even in the set values "1" to "3". Further, in the example shown in the figure, the setting values "1" to "3" and the set values "4" to "6" have different rotation stop numbers, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in the example shown in the figure, the number of sliding pieces is different between the low setting and the high setting by making the rotation stop number different between the set values "1" to "3" and the set values "4" to "6". As a result, it is possible to suggest a low setting and a high setting from the number of sliding pieces. That is, the mode of difference in the number of sliding pieces according to the set value is determined by the correspondence between the set value and the rotation stop number. For example, by making the rotation stop number different between the even number setting and the odd number setting. , It is possible to suggest an even number setting and an odd number setting from the number of slip pieces, and for example, by making the rotation cylinder stop number different for each set value, a specific setting value is suggested from the number of slip pieces. You can also do it.

Subsequently, FIG. 136 (E) is a symbol arrangement table relating to the left reel 3L in the pachislot machine 1 of the present specification example. As described above, since the description of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is omitted below, only the symbol arrangement table of the left reel 3L is shown in the figure (the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3C). The symbol arrangement table of the reel 3R may be the same as that of FIG. 15). Further, in the figure, the "watermelon" symbol arranged on the left reel 3L is emphasized and displayed. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present specification example, the "watermelon" symbol is arranged at the symbol positions "2, 7, 12, 17" of the left reel 3L.

Subsequently, FIG. 136 (F) is the left first stop table “02”, and FIG. 136 (G) is the left first stop table “03”. As shown in FIG. 135 (D), when the "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus state (specific state) during the advantageous section, the set values "1" to "3" are on the left. The first stop table "02" is used, and the left first stop table "03" is used in the set values "4" to "6". The left first stop table defines information on the number of sliding pieces in association with the stop start position. In the figure, the display position of the "watermelon" symbol is shown in the remarks column. With reference to FIG. 136 (F), as an example, when the stop start position is the symbol position “12”, the main control circuit 90 moves by 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation (4 piece slip). Stop the left reel 3L. As a result, the "bell" of the symbol position "16 (= 12 + 4)" is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, and the "watermelon" symbol of the symbol position "17" is displayed in the upper row of the left reel 3L. Will be done.

Here, in FIGS. 136 (F) and 136 (G), the points where the number of sliding pieces in the left first stop table “02” and the number of sliding pieces in the left first stop table “03” are different are emphasized. it's shown. That is, in this specification example, in the game in which "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus state (specific state) in the advantageous section, the stop start position is "13" to "17". In addition, the number of sliding pieces differs between the set values "1" to "3" and the set values "4" to "6".

In the figure, a setting difference is provided in the number of sliding pieces only for a part of the left reel 3L, but the setting difference is not limited to this, and the number of sliding pieces is set for all of the left reels 3L. A difference may be provided. Further, in this specification example, a predetermined range (design position "13" to "17") is used as a part of the left reel 3L, but such a range is used for the left reel 3L. A plurality of them may be provided. As an example, the symbol positions "13" to "17" may be set as the first range, and the symbol positions "3" to "7" may be set as the second range. When a plurality of ranges are provided in this way, it is possible to estimate the setting at a plurality of locations by making the setting difference of the number of sliding pieces in both ranges the same, but the setting difference of the number of sliding pieces in both ranges. If they are different, further playability can be realized. For example, the number of sliding pieces is different between the low setting and the high setting in the range of the symbol positions "13" to "17", and the number of sliding pieces is set in the even setting and the odd setting in the range of the symbol positions "3" to "7". By making the difference, the player can guess the setting from multiple sides. The number of sliding pieces does not have to be different in all the symbol positions included in such a range, and may be the same in some symbol positions included in the range. For example, among the symbol positions "13" to "17", the symbols other than the symbol position "15" are as shown in the figure (with a setting difference), and the symbol position "15" is the left first stop table "02" " Both of "03" may have "1" set as the number of sliding pieces (no setting difference).

(Game example)
Subsequently, a game example in game playability (No. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing reel control when "watermelon" is determined as an internal winning combination in a bonus state (during a normal section or an advantageous section), and FIG. 137 (A) shows a symbol at a stop start position. The reel control when the position is "13" is shown, and FIG. 137 (B) shows the reel control when the stop start position is the symbol position "14".

Since the number of sliding pieces of the left first stop table "02" with respect to the stop start position "13" is "3 pieces", when the left first stop table "02" is used (set values "1" to "3"). ”), As shown in FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (a), the left reel 3L is displayed so that the“ watermelon ”design at the symbol position“ 17 ”is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 3L. Stop control. Further, since the number of sliding pieces of the left first stop table "03" with respect to the stop start position "13" is "4 pieces", when the left first stop table "03" is used (set values "4" to ~ "6"), as shown in FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (b), the main control circuit 90 is on the left so that the "watermelon" symbol at the symbol position "17" is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. Stop control of the reel 3L is performed.

Similarly, since the number of sliding pieces of the left first stop table "02" with respect to the stop start position "14" is "3 pieces", when the left first stop table "02" is used (set value "1"). ~ "3"), as shown in FIGS. 137 (B) and (a), the main control circuit 90 is left so that the "watermelon" symbol at the symbol position "17" is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L. The stop control of the reel 3L of the above is performed. Further, since the number of sliding pieces of the left first stop table "03" with respect to the stop start position "14" is "2 pieces", when the left first stop table "03" is used (set values "4" to ~ "6"), as shown in FIGS. 137 (B) and 137 (b), the main control circuit 90 is on the left so that the "watermelon" symbol at the symbol position "17" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 3L. Stop control of the reel 3L is performed.

As described above, according to the playability (No. 15), the player can estimate the setting from the number of sliding pieces at the time of winning the specific combination in the specific state. In the setting suggestion based on the number of sliding pieces by the game playability (No. 15), it is preferable to design so that the set value cannot be estimated from the outcome (the symbol displayed as stopped). In this regard, in this specification example, as shown in FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (B), when the left first stop table "02" is used and when the left first stop table "03" is used. In both cases, the "watermelon" pattern is designed to be displayed on both the upper and middle rows, so the set value cannot be inferred from the outcome.

Of course, it may be designed so that the set value can be estimated from the result. Such a design is designed so that, for example, when the left first stop table "02" is used, the "watermelon" symbol always stops (or is easy to stop) in the upper stage, and is used for the left first stop. When the table "03" is used, it can be realized by designing the "watermelon" symbol to always stop (or easily stop) in the middle stage.

(Another example of playability (No. 15))
Subsequently, another example of game playability (No. 15) will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140. FIG. 138 (A) is a diagram showing another example 1, and further game playability is realized by devising a specific state, and FIGS. 138 (B) to 140 are diagrams showing another example 2. Therefore, further playability is realized by devising the stop control data (left first stop table).

First, another example 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 138 (A). In another example 1, both the bonus state (first specific state) in the normal section and the bonus state (second specific state) in the advantageous section are used as specific states in which the number of sliding pieces differs depending on the set value. FIG. 3A is a stop control data setting table in the bonus state (first specific state) during the normal section. In the bonus state (first specific state) during the normal section, when the "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation stop number according to the set value. .. In the case of the example of the figure, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation cylinder stop number "30" in the set values "1" to "3", and the rotation cylinder stop in the set values "4" to "6". The user number "33" is determined.

Further, FIG. 138 (B) is a stop control data setting table in the bonus state (second specific state) in the advantageous section. In the bonus state (second specific state) during the advantageous section, when the "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation stop number according to the set value. .. In the case of the example of the figure, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation cylinder stop number "30" in the odd number settings "1", "3", and "5", and in the even number settings "2", "4", and "6". , Determine the rotation stop number "33".

According to another example 1 like this, in the bonus state (first specific state) during the normal section, it is estimated whether the setting is low or high from the number of slip pieces at the time of winning the "watermelon (specific role)". can do. Further, in the bonus state (second specific state) during the advantageous section, it is possible to infer whether the setting is an even number or an odd number from the number of sliding pieces at the time of winning the "watermelon (specific role)". In the example of the figure, the rotation stop numbers "30" and "33" are used in both the first specific state and the second specific state. By using the same number for stopping the rotating cylinder in this way, it is possible to make the mode of the difference in the number of sliding pieces common in both specific states, but of course, it is not limited to this, and the rotating cylinder used in both specific states is not limited to this. The stop numbers may be different (that is, the mode of difference in the number of sliding pieces may be different in both specific states).

Subsequently, another example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 (B) to 140. In another example 2, the bonus state in the advantageous section is used as a specific state in which the number of sliding pieces differs depending on the set value. FIGS. 138 (B) and 138 (a) are stop control data setting tables in the bonus state (specific state) during the advantageous section. In the bonus state (specific state) during the advantageous section, when the "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation stop number according to the set value. In the case of the example of the figure, the main control circuit 90 determines the rotation cylinder stop number "50 (left first stop table" 11 ")" in the odd / low settings "1" and "3", and is even. In the low setting "2", the rotation cylinder stop number "53 (left first stop table" 13 ")" is determined, and in the even / high setting "4" "6", the rotation cylinder stop number "55 (" The left first stop table "15") "is determined, and the odd / high setting" 5 "determines the rotation cylinder stop number" 57 (left first stop table "17") ".

139 (b) to 140 (e) are the left first stop tables in the second example, and in the same figure, the parts different from the number of sliding pieces are highlighted. As shown in the figure, in the second example, the range of the symbol positions "13" to "17" (first range) and the range of the symbol positions "3" to "7" (second range) in the left reel 3L. There is a setting difference in the number of sliding pieces in the range). In the figure, the mode of the number of sliding pieces in the range (first range) of the symbol positions "13" to "17" is indicated by "A (A1 or A2)", and the symbol positions "3" to "7" are shown. The mode of the number of sliding pieces in the range (second range) of is indicated by "B (B1 or B2)".

For example, when the left first stop table "11" and the left first stop table "13" are compared, the number of sliding pieces in the range (first range) of the symbol positions "13" to "17" is the same (1st range). A1), the range (second range) of the symbol positions "3" to "7" is different (B1 and B2). Further, when the left first stop table "11" and the left first stop table "15" are compared, the number of sliding pieces in the range (first range) of the symbol positions "13" to "17" is different (A1). And A2), the range (second range) of the symbol positions "3" to "7" is also different (B1 and B2).

FIG. 140 (f) is a diagram showing the content of the setting suggestion in the second example. As shown in the figure, the mode "A (A1 or A2)" of the number of sliding pieces in the range (first range) of the symbol positions "13" to "17" is set to a low setting (set values "1" to "3". ") And a high setting (set values" 4 "to" 6 "), and an aspect of the number of sliding pieces in the range of symbol positions" 3 "to" 7 "(second range)" B (B1 or B2) ". Represents an odd number setting (setting values "1", "3", "5") and an even number setting (setting values "2", "4", "6").

According to another example 2 as described above, when the "watermelon (specific combination)" is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus state (specific state) during the advantageous section, the player performs the stop operation (stop). Different types of setting estimation are possible depending on the start position). That is, by performing the stop operation in the first range, the height of the set value can be estimated, and by performing the stop operation in the second range, the evenness or oddness of the set value can be estimated.

The game playability (No. 15) has been described above. In addition, the pachi-slot machine 1 may notify the player when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a specific state (that is, a game in which the setting can be estimated). As a result, the player can grasp that the setting suggestion is performed by the number of sliding pieces in the game. The mode of notification is arbitrary, and can be performed by any method such as sound output, light emission pattern, and video, and the control means for controlling notification is the main side (main control circuit 90). It may be the sub side (sub control circuit 200).

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 may notify the player of the number of sliding pieces. Even in this case, the mode of notification and the control means for controlling the notification are arbitrary. Further, the notification of the number of sliding pieces may be performed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is arbitrary, but for example, in a game in which the player accepts the selection of the number of sliding pieces to be notified and the setting is suggested, the stop control is performed based on the number of sliding pieces selected by the player. If it is broken, the number of sliding pieces may be notified. Further, for example, when the player accepts the selection of the symbol position and the player actually performs the stop operation, the symbol position (the symbol position displayed in the middle row at the timing of the stop operation) is selected. The number of sliding pieces may be notified when the symbol position is set. The number of sliding pieces and the symbol positions that can be selected by the player may be one, or may be plural.

As another example of the predetermined condition for notifying the number of sliding pieces, there may be a case where the bonus state is continuous or a case where the bonus state is not performed for a certain period (addicted). Here, when the bonus state in the advantageous section is used as a specific state as described above, the consecutive villa in the bonus state and the hamari in the bonus state may or may not be added to the advantageous section. .. In the former example, the number of games played from the previous specific state to the current specific state is less than or equal to the predetermined number (consecutive villas), or the number of games played from the previous specific state to the current specific state. Is more than a specific number of times (Hamari), the number of slip pieces is notified in this specific state. Further, in the latter example, the number of games played from the previous bonus state to the current specific state (bonus state in the advantageous section) is a predetermined number of times regardless of whether the previous bonus state is an advantageous section or not. If the number of games played from the previous bonus state to the current specific state (bonus state in the advantageous section) is equal to or greater than the specified number (Hamari), the current specific state Informs the number of slip pieces. In addition, these predetermined conditions can be used in combination as appropriate.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 15) of the playability (game specification) of the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when demonstrating another example (No. 15) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Further, since the main control circuit 90 can set one setting value from a plurality of setting values via the setting key type switch 54, the main control circuit 90 and the setting key type switch 54 are set means. Functions as. Further, since the main control circuit 90 controls a plurality of states such as a bonus state and an advantageous section so as to be transitionable, the main control circuit 90 functions as a state control means.

Further, when the main control circuit 90 detects a stop operation (stop command) via the stop switch, the main control circuit 90 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R within a range of a maximum of 4 pieces of sliding from the current symbol position (symbol stop position). In order to stop, the main control circuit 90 functions as a stop control means.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 16)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 16) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143.

(Outline of another example (No. 16) of game playability (game specifications))
The playability (No. 16) relates to the playability in which the setting suggestion effect is managed by the mode. In the pachi-slot machine 1, a setting suggestion effect suggesting that the value is a specific set value may be performed at a predetermined timing such as at the start / end of the AT (ART) or bonus state. In the conventional pachislot machine, since the setting suggestion effect is simply executed based on the set value, the same setting suggestion effect may be repeatedly performed, which is monotonous. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the mode (and the set value), and the mode is arbitrarily changed to realize a variety of effect control.

Although the setting suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing, the game playability (No. 16) manages the setting suggestion effect by the mode, and the execution timing thereof is arbitrary. Further, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect can also be performed by any method such as sound output, light emission pattern, and video. Further, the control means for controlling the setting suggestion effect may be the main side (main control circuit 90) or the sub side (sub control circuit 200).

(Overview of setting suggestion mode)
First, the outline of the setting suggestion mode for managing the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (A). Here, the setting suggestion effect is an effect of notifying the player of suggestion information suggesting which set value the current set value is. Further, the setting suggestion mode is a mode for managing the effect control related to the setting suggestion effect, and in the plurality of setting suggestion modes, among a plurality of suggestion information suggesting which setting value the current setting value is. , The decision probability of the suggestion information to be notified differs depending on the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the decision probability of the setting suggestion effect differs). It should be noted that the playability (No. 16) is sufficient if it has a plurality of setting suggestion modes in which the determination probabilities of the setting suggestion effects are different, and the specification example described below is only one example.

As shown in the figure, this specification example has a plurality of modes A to mode C-5 as setting suggestion modes. Mode A is a setting suggestion mode having the lowest suggestion reliability, and is an initial mode set in the initial state. The suggestion reliability means the accuracy of the setting suggestion based on the suggestion information possessed by the setting suggestion effect, and is the type of the setting suggestion effect (in other words, the suggestion information associated with the setting suggestion effect) to be executed in the mode. And it is decided according to the decision probability. For example, it is suggested according to the probability of determining a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that definitively reports that it is a specific set value, or the probability of determining a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that vaguely reports a set value. The reliability is determined, and the mode in which the probability of the former is high and the probability of the latter is low can be said to be a mode with high suggested reliability. Further, the timing (initial state) in which the mode A is set as the setting suggestion mode is arbitrary, and may be, for example, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on or when the setting is changed. Further, the player may arbitrarily reset the setting suggestion mode. In this case, when the reset operation by the player is accepted, the mode A is set as the setting suggestion mode. Further, in this specification example, the initial mode is set to mode A, but the present mode is not limited to this, and for example, the setting suggestion mode determined by lottery may be set as the initial mode.

Mode B (modes B-1, B-2) is a medium setting suggestion mode in which the suggestion reliability is higher than that of mode A. Mode B-1 of mode B is a setting suggestion mode in which the setting suggestion effect of setting 2 denial (in other words, suggestion information denying setting 2) is not determined, and mode B-2 is a setting suggestion mode. 4 This is a setting suggestion mode in which the negative setting suggestion effect (in other words, the suggestion information that negates the setting 4) is not determined.

In addition, mode C (modes C-1, C-2, C-3, C-4, C-5) is a setting suggestion mode having the highest suggestion reliability. Mode C-1 of the modes C is a setting suggestion mode in which the setting suggestion effect of setting 2 negative and the setting suggestion effect of setting 4 negative are not determined. Further, mode C-2 of the modes C is a setting suggestion mode in which the setting suggestion effect of setting 2 negation and the setting suggestion effect of odd number setting negation (in other words, the suggestion information denying the odd number setting) are not determined. Mode C-3 is a setting suggestion mode in which the setting suggestion effect of setting 2 denial and the setting suggestion effect of even number setting denial (in other words, the suggestion information denying even number setting) are not determined. Further, mode C-4 of modes C is a setting suggestion mode in which the setting suggestion effect of setting 4 negative and the setting suggestion effect of odd number setting negative are not determined, and mode C-5 is the setting suggestion mode of setting 4 negative. This is a setting suggestion mode in which the setting suggestion effect of and the setting suggestion effect of even number setting negation are not determined.

(Transition of setting suggestion mode)
Subsequently, the transition control of the setting suggestion mode will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (B). When the control means (main control circuit 90 or sub-control circuit 200) that manages the setting suggestion mode determines the specific suggestion information as the suggestion information (in other words, the specific suggestion effect that notifies the specific suggestion information as the setting suggestion effect) (If determined) shifts the current setting suggestion mode to another setting suggestion mode different from the current setting suggestion mode.

Here, the specific suggestion information refers to a part of the suggestion information that definitively informs that the value is a specific set value. It should be noted that deterministically reporting that it is a specific set value is synonymous with deterministically reporting that it is not a set value other than the specific set value. For example, setting 2 is determined. The suggestion information to be reported and the suggestion information to deny that it is other than setting 2 are the same. Further, the specific setting value is not limited to one setting value, and may be a plurality of setting values. For example, to inform that it is an even number setting (denying that it is an odd number setting). Can be said to inform that it is a specific set value.

In this specification example, among the suggestion information that definitively informs that it is such a specific setting value, for example, setting 2 denial that denies setting 2 and setting denying that it is setting 4 4 Negation, odd number setting denial that denies odd number setting, and even number setting denial that denies even number setting are used as specific suggestion information.

Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the control means determines the suggestion information of the setting 2 denial that denies the setting 2 in the mode A (in other words, the setting suggestion effect based on the suggestion information). When the setting suggestion mode is changed from the mode A to the mode B-1 and the suggestion information of the setting 4 denial that denies the setting 4 is determined in the mode A (in other words, based on the suggestion information). (When the setting suggestion effect is performed), the setting suggestion mode is shifted from mode A to mode B-2.

Here, as described above, the mode B-1 is a setting suggestion mode in which the suggestion information of the setting 2 negation (in other words, the setting suggestion effect of the setting 2 negation) is not determined, and the mode B-2 is a setting suggestion mode. This is a setting suggestion mode in which the suggestion information of the setting 4 negation (in other words, the setting suggestion effect of the setting 4 negation) is not determined. Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of setting 2 negation is performed in mode A (to shift to mode B-1), the setting suggestion effect of setting 2 negation is not performed after that, and the setting is set in mode A. When the setting suggestion effect of 4 denial is performed (to shift to mode B-2), the setting suggestion effect of setting 4 denial is not performed after that. In other words, when the mode A shifts to the mode B triggered by the determination of the specific suggestion information in the mode A, the specific suggestion information that triggered the transition is not determined in the transition destination mode B.

Further, when the control means determines the suggestion information of the setting 4 denial in the mode B-1 (in other words, when the setting suggestion effect based on the suggestion information is performed), the setting suggestion mode Is shifted from mode B-1 to mode C-1, and when the suggestion information of the odd number setting denial that denies the odd number setting is determined in the mode B-1 (in other words, the setting suggestion effect based on the suggestion information is performed. When the setting suggestion mode is changed from the mode B-1 to the mode C-2, and the suggestion information of the even number setting denial that denies the even number setting is determined in the mode B-1 (in other words, the relevant case). (When the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the suggestion information), the setting suggestion mode is shifted from the mode B-1 to the mode C-3.

Similarly, when the control means determines the suggestion information for setting 2 denial in mode B-2 (in other words, when the setting suggestion effect based on the suggestion information is performed), the setting suggestion is performed. When the mode is changed from mode B-2 to mode C-1 and the suggestion information of the odd number setting denial that denies the odd number setting is determined in the mode B-2 (in other words, the setting suggestion effect based on the suggestion information). When the setting suggestion mode is changed from mode B-2 to mode C-4, and the suggestion information of even number setting denial that denies the even number setting is determined in mode B-2 (in other words, (When the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the suggestion information), the setting suggestion mode is shifted from the mode B-2 to the mode C-5.

Since the contents of modes C-1 to C-5 are as shown in FIG. 141 (A), the transition from mode B to mode C is specified in mode B as in the transition from mode A to mode B. When the mode B shifts to the mode C triggered by the determination of the suggestion information, the specific suggestion information that triggered the transition to the mode C is not determined in the transition destination mode C. In addition, in the transition destination mode C, the specific suggestion information that triggered the transition from mode A to mode B (before the transition to mode C) is not determined. As a result, according to the present specification example, the same setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect based on specific suggestion information) is not repeatedly performed.

(Setting suggestion production lottery table)
Subsequently, the setting suggestion effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The setting suggestion effect lottery table is used to determine the setting suggestion effect to be executed, in other words, to determine the suggestion information to be notified to the player by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion effect lottery table defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) for each set value. The control means determines the setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) using the setting suggestion effect lottery table at an arbitrary timing before executing the setting suggestion effect, and determines the determined setting suggestion effect by the predetermined effect means (sound, Execute with light, video, etc.).

Here, in this specification example, as the determinable setting suggestion effect (suggestion information), "odd number suggestion", "even number suggestion", "setting 2 negation", "setting 4 negation", and "odd number negation" can suggest the current setting value. "Negation of even number" "Set 1, 3, 6 confirmed" "Setting 4, 5, 6 confirmed" "Setting 6 confirmed" does not suggest the current set value (or the degree of suggestion of the set value is low) "Other than the following (Standard) ”. "Other than the following (standard)" is a standard setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that may be determined regardless of the set value and cannot be basically used as a setting suggestion. Of course, the setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) shown in the figure is only an example, and other setting suggestion effects (suggestion information) can be adopted. Further, the specific suggestion information used for the transition of the setting suggestion mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be arbitrarily set.

"Odd-numbered suggestion" is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) with a high probability of being determined when the odd-numbered setting is set, and a low probability of being determined when the even-numbered setting is set. It is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that has a high probability of being determined in a certain case and a low probability of being determined in an odd number setting. Further, "setting 2 denial" is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that may be determined only when the setting value is other than "2", and "setting 4 denial" is a setting value other than "4". It is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that may be determined only in some cases.

In addition, "odd-numbered negation" is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that may be determined only when the odd-numbered setting is not set, and "even-numbered negation" may be determined only when the even-numbered setting is not set. There is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information). Further, "settings 1, 3, and 6 confirmed" are setting suggestion effects (suggestion information) that may be determined only when the setting values are "1", "3", and "6", and "settings 4, 5". ", 6 confirmed" is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that may be determined only when the set values are "4", "5", and "6", and "setting 6 confirmed" is a set value "6". It is a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that may be determined only in the case of.

In terms of playability (No. 16), only one setting suggestion effect may be associated with one suggestion information, or a plurality of setting suggestion effects may be associated with one suggestion information. As an example, there may be only one setting suggestion effect for notifying the suggestion information of "odd number suggestion", or a plurality of setting suggestion effects (odd number suggestion setting suggestion effect A and odd number suggestion setting suggestion effect B). You may.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, in mode A, there is a higher probability that "other than the following (standard)" is determined as compared with mode B and mode C, and it is definitely confirmed that the set value is specific. The probability that the setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) to be reported is decided is low. Then, in mode B and mode C, the probability that "other than the following (standard)" is determined gradually decreases, and the difference between the determination probabilities of "odd number suggestion" and "even number suggestion" gradually increases. In addition, there is a high probability that a setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) that definitively informs that the value is a specific set value is determined. Therefore, in this specification example, the suggestion reliability in the setting suggestion mode is the lowest in mode A, the next lowest in mode B, and the highest in mode C.

(Example of setting suggestion)
Next, an example of setting suggestion using the setting suggestion mode when the setting value is “6” will be described. In mode A, which is the initial mode, for example, when a setting suggestion effect corresponding to the suggestion information of "setting 4 negation" is performed, the player sets the set value to "1, 2, 3, 5, 6" from the setting suggestion effect. It can be grasped that it is either. Since "setting 4 denial" is specific suggestion information, the control means shifts the setting suggestion mode from mode A to mode B-2. After that, in the mode B, for example, when the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the suggestion information of "odd number negation" is performed, the player grasps from the setting suggestion effect that the set value is either "2, 6". be able to. Since "odd number negation" is specific suggestion information, the control means shifts the setting suggestion mode from mode B-1 to mode C-4. After that, in mode C-4, for example, when a setting suggestion effect corresponding to the suggestion information of "settings 1, 3, and 6 is confirmed" is performed, the player determines that the set value is "6" from the setting suggestion effect. Can be grasped.

In this way, in the playability (No. 16), since the setting suggestion effect is controlled according to the setting suggestion mode, the determination probability of the setting suggestion effect (suggestion information) changes according to the setting suggestion mode at that time, and is various. Production control becomes possible. Here, in the game playability (No. 16), in the transition control of the setting suggestion mode, in order to shift to the setting suggestion mode in which the specific suggestion information that triggered the transition is not determined, the specific suggestion information once executed is used. The setting suggestion effect based on it will not be executed again. As a result, new setting guessing elements (suggestion information) are piled up every time the suggestion information is notified, and as a result, it is a new pleasure to guess to narrow down the set values by stacking the setting guessing elements. Can be provided.

(Another example of playability (No. 16))
Subsequently, another example of game playability (No. 16) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. In this alternative example, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), in addition to the setting suggestion mode in the above specification example, the mode A-1 is further provided as the setting suggestion mode. Note that the example shown in FIG. 144 is merely an example for explaining another example, and is not limited to this, and may have other modes, for example.

Mode A-1 is a setting suggestion mode having the lowest suggestion reliability, and as shown in the setting suggestion effect lottery table for mode A-1 in FIG. 144 (B), setting 2 negative setting suggestion effect (in other words, setting suggestion effect). , Suggestion information that denies setting 2) is a setting suggestion mode in which the setting suggestion mode is not determined. As shown in FIG. 144 (C), when the control means determines the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial" that denies the setting 2 in the mode A (in other words, the setting suggestion effect based on the suggestion information is performed. (If done), the setting suggestion mode is shifted from mode A to mode A-1 or mode B-1.

Here, mode A-1 is a setting suggestion mode having the lowest suggested reliability, and mode B-1 is a setting suggestion mode having a higher suggested reliability than mode A-1, so that modes A to A When shifting to -1, the suggested reliability does not change, and when shifting from mode A to mode B-1, the suggested reliability increases.

In this alternative example, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), when the control means shifts to the setting suggestion mode triggered by the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial", the shift destination setting suggestion mode is mode A-1. The mode of the effect (in other words, the mode of notifying the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial") is different between a certain time and the mode B-1. For example, as shown in FIG. 6A, when the setting suggestion mode of the transition destination is mode A-1, the control means notifies the suggestion information of “setting 2 negative” in the normal pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the setting suggestion mode of the transition destination is mode B-1, the control means is an image in the gold frame corresponding to the suggestion information of “setting 2 denial”. In the special pattern for displaying (image), the suggestion information of "setting 2 negative" is notified. From the player's point of view, it is possible to determine whether or not the suggestion reliability has been promoted from the mode of the production, and when the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial" is notified in the special pattern, the setting suggestion production is expected from the next time onward. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of stopping the game while the setting guess is ambiguous, which can lead to the promotion of the operation of the game machine.

It should be noted that the method of determining the setting suggestion mode of the transition destination in the transition of the setting suggestion mode triggered by the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial" is arbitrary. For example, when the control means determines the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial" in the mode A, the control means performs a transition destination determination lottery as to whether to shift to the mode A-1 or the mode B-1, and the lottery result. The setting suggestion mode of the transition destination and the mode of the effect may be determined based on the above. Further, when the control means determines the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial" in the mode A, the control means performs an effect mode determination lottery as to whether the effect mode is a normal pattern or a special pattern, and based on the lottery result. The setting suggestion mode of the transition destination and the mode of the effect may be determined.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The other example (No. 16) of the playability (game specification) of the pachislot machine 1 of this specification example has been described above. Subsequently, various functions possessed by the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200 when exhibiting another example (No. 16) of the playability (game specification) of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described.

The main control circuit 90 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and functions as a game control means because it controls the progress of the game shown in FIG.

Further, the main control circuit 90 and / or the sub control circuit 200 has a plurality of setting suggestion modes in which the determination probabilities of the suggestion information to be notified are different among the plurality of suggestion information suggesting which set value the current set value is. Since one of the setting suggestion modes can be set, the main control circuit 90 and / or the sub control circuit 200 functions as a mode control means. At this time, when the specific suggestion information is determined as the suggestion information to be notified, the main control circuit 90 and / or the sub control circuit 200 cannot determine the specific suggestion information that determines the current setting suggestion mode. Change to mode. As an example, the main control circuit 90 and / or the sub control circuit 200 sets the setting suggestion mode from mode A to mode A-1 or mode B-when the suggestion information of "setting 2 negative" is determined in mode A. It can be changed to 1.

Further, the main control circuit 90 and / or the sub control circuit 200 determines the suggestion information to be notified from a plurality of suggestion information according to the current setting suggestion mode and the current setting value, and determines the determined suggestion information. The main control circuit 90 and / or the sub-control circuit 200 functions as a suggestion information determining means, and the predetermined effect means functions as a notification means in order to notify by the effect means (sound, light, video, etc.). In the main control circuit 90 and / or the sub control circuit 200, the mode of notifying the suggestion information of "setting 2 negative" when the setting suggestion mode is changed from the mode A to the mode A-1 and the mode A to the mode B A predetermined effect means (sound, light, video, etc.) is controlled so as to be different from the mode of notifying the suggestion information of "setting 2 denial" when the setting suggestion mode is changed to -1.

[Other variants]
As described above, the method of managing the duration of ART (advantageous section) is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference number. The duration may be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during the ART, or the continuation may be determined by the continuation judgment performed at an arbitrary timing during the ART. The period may be managed, or the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of ART such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, and the number of differences.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub control board 72) is not limited to this. The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the) side.

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) of an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of balls. If the value is specified to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to the game machines provided in a plurality of stages. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600 seconds, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the set value is adopted without changing the number of set values, it is possible to make the wave of the ball output more complicated without increasing the number of set values. In addition, if the number of set values is reduced, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only game machines that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

[Application to other game machines]
Further, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, features other than those peculiar to pachislot, such as features related to reel stop control based on a stop operation, can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effect can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to any game machine capable of playing a game (controlling a game) according to a game operation (operation) of a player.

[Extensibility of other game machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into a medal insertion slot 14 or a credited medal is inserted into a MAX bet button 15a or a 1-bet button 15b. If the game is started by (operation of inserting) and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout outlet 24, or credit. The form to be used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a game medium necessary for a game is input by a player, a game is performed based on the game, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is input (hanged) by the physical movement of the player and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. It may be possible to play a game without a medal by electromagnetically managing the above. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so that it can be connected, and a prize is awarded for the operation of lending the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role of paying out the game medium ( When the combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the action of making the player acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium), or the game medium to be used for the game. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media possessed on the front surface of the pachislot machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the game medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from mobile terminals, other various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game media management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game store and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). May be good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that only the player can know may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without medals, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control that allows the player to control the total number of game media that can be used for the game by electromagnetically recording and displaying them. You can also.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the game ball described above, the game medium management device is also provided and the player It is also possible to manage the game medium of.

In this way, by providing the game medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game. Not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the game be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced. It also reduces the power consumption of. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the game machine.

<Supplementary note (summary of the present invention)>
[Game machines with the first to fourth configurations]
In the conventional game machine, if it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and if it is in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is determined. It is known that it is possible to perform a lottery as to whether or not to continue (see, for example, JP-A-2010-240017).

However, in the game machines shown above, there are few variations in determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and it is required to devise ways to further enhance the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in continuing a state advantageous to the player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a game machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Decision of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a game machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) can determine whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Decision of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the given specific right.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a game machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) can determine whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the given specific right.

The specific state is a state in which the specific right can be granted in a number exceeding the upper limit number (for example, 2) that can be determined as the determination line by the determination line determining means.
When the specific right equal to or larger than the upper limit that can be determined as the determination line is granted, the determination line determining means determines the determination line for the upper limit using the specific right for the upper limit.
The continuation degree determining means is the continuation degree if the specific right does not remain when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The above-described gaming machine, characterized in that it is possible to change the degree of continuation to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and not to change the degree of continuation to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player if the specific right remains. ..

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, main) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Decision of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent rights acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, any one of the plurality of effective lines is always determined as the determination line among the plurality of effective lines.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or a plurality of the effective lines among the plurality of effective lines is referred to as the determination line. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to do so.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a game machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or more special lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) can determine whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent rights acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, one of the plurality of the special lines is always determined as the determination line.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or more of the special lines is referred to as the determination line. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to do so.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined advantageous condition, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and a combination of special symbols in the advantageous state (for example, For example, when the RT3 transition (RT3 transition) is displayed, the gaming state transition control means (for example, RT check by the main CPU 101) that can shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state) is displayed. Processing), and
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
When a specific combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state, the continuity degree determining means capable of changing the continuation degree of the advantageous state to a degree advantageous to the player (for example, determination of the enemy status by the main CPU 101). ) Including
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the internal winning combination determining means determines a specific internal winning combination in which a combination of the specific symbols can be displayed is higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. ..

The continuation degree determining means can change the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state.
The internal winning combination determining means can determine a predetermined internal winning combination in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be displayed in the first gaming state, and can determine the predetermined internal winning combination in the second gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether they are effective lines) are related to a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. It is possible to decide whether to use the judgment line, and in the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols (for example, "replay" or "bell" symbol alignment) is displayed on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the determined degree of continuation.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of the "shot lip") is displayed on the determined determination line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, the tension in the advantageous state can be increased, the game in the advantageous state does not become monotonous, and the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the determination result regarding the determination line regarding the change in the continuation degree of the advantageous state changes depending on whether or not the right is granted in the specific state (for example, the right acquisition state). ing. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in the specific state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the determination line is granted in the specific state, first, the determination line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of the "shot lip") is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous state If the degree of continuation of the above is changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and the granted right remains, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special right (for example, a permanent right) is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the special right is not granted, the determination line is determined. When determining, one or more lines are determined as determination lines.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous state can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be varied in various ways, so that the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player can be improved. be able to.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state in the advantageous section) to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and a special symbol. When the combination of (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Specific internal winning combinations (eg, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip 1") in which a specific combination of symbols (for example, a combination of "middle rip" symbols) can be displayed. The probability of determining any of 2) is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first gaming state, a predetermined combination of symbols that changes the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree that is advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols of the "shot lip"). It is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_shot lip") in which is possible to be displayed, and in the second gaming state, it is not possible to determine this predetermined internal winning combination.

As a result, in the advantageous state, the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which game state the player is in, so that the games in the advantageous state can be made more diverse and more advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the state.

[Game machine with the fifth configuration]
In a conventional game machine, when a player wins a predetermined internal winning combination in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the game control circuit is advantageous in notifying the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In the state, the broadcastable information that enables the notification of the stop operation procedure is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and in the normal game in which the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is not notified, the stop operation is performed. It is known that information that makes it impossible to notify the procedure according to the above procedure can be transmitted to the effect control circuit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144568).

However, in the game machine shown above, for example, a predetermined internal winning combination may have a plurality of internal winning combinations such that the combination of displayed symbols is different even if the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is the same. In the case of including, there is a problem that although the effect of notifying the procedure of the stop operation can be performed, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be performed.

Here, it is conceivable that the game control circuit transmits the type of the internal winning combination to the effect control circuit in detail, but in this case, there arises a problem that the control load of the game control circuit increases. Become.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Winning check / medal payout processing) and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a display device 11 controlled by a sub CPU 201) for executing the effect.
With an information transmission means (for example, communication data transmission processing by the main CPU 101) capable of transmitting predetermined information (for example, a winning combination number) regarding the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means to the effect executing means. ,
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantage that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified for a predetermined period A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 1"), a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the first line (for example, the top line) in the symbol display means. The first internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper left bell 1") and
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the first stop operation, the second internal winning is that the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line (for example, the center line) in the symbol display means. The role (for example, "F_middle left bell 1") and
When the stop operation is performed in the second stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 3"), a third combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the first line in the symbol display means. With the internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper middle bell 1"),
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the second stop operation, a fourth internal winning combination (for example, "for example,""a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line in the symbol display means. F_middle bell 1 ") and can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The information transmitting means
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination or the third internal winning combination, the first information (for example, the winning combination number "23" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the second internal winning combination or the fourth internal winning combination, the second information (for example, the winning combination number "24" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different effects can be executed when the first information is transmitted and when the second information is transmitted.

In the advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether one or a plurality of the lines including the first line and the second line are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Judgment line determination means (for example, determination of ally type by main CPU 101)
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the degree of continuation can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Determining means (for example, determining the enemy status by the main CPU 101),
When the predetermined period elapses, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) that determines whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determining means. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is equipped with.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, for example, when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" in which the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line and "batting order" When the stop operation is performed in "1", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line "F_middle left bell 1", and when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 3", the top The combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the line. When the stop operation is performed in "F_upper middle bell 1" and "batting order 3", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line. "F_middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and in an advantageous state, for example, when "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined, the winning "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), when the player has a game property such that the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, the displayed symbol Since the effect related to the combination can be performed, a more appropriate effect can be performed without increasing the control load.

[Game machine with the sixth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, during a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, a story of story production that is executed according to the number of transitions to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is advanced, that is, advantageous to the player. It is known that the effect content can be changed according to the duration of the state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187467).

Here, in the game machine as shown above, for example, when a state advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period, it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, an ending effect) that cannot be normally seen. ..

By the way, such a special production is executed as, for example, giving an additional privilege to the player, but a device for further increasing the player's motivation to play and improving the interest of the production is devised. It is considered that there is room for this.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing a player's motivation to play and improving the interest of production.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) that plays a game by variablely displaying a symbol based on a player's start operation and stopping and displaying a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) advantageous to the player, and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The effect executing means is
When the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes a special period (for example, the game period of the advantageous section is "1200" times or more), a special effect (for example, the ending effect in the ending 2 state) ) Is feasible,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, an ending effect in the ending 1 state).

In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
When the advantageous state continuation determination means does not determine to continue the advantageous state, the normal termination means for terminating the advantageous state and the normal termination means.
Even when the advantageous state continuation determining means determines to continue the advantageous state, a specific period (for example, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state controlling means exceeds the special period) Further provided with a specific termination means for terminating the advantageous state when the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times).
The effect executing means is characterized in that the special effect can be executed from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes the special period to the specific period. The gaming machine described above.

Each time the effect executing means is determined by the advantageous state continuation determining means to continue the advantageous state until the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state controlling means becomes the specific period. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein a suggestion effect suggesting a guideline for a period of time controlled by the advantageous state control means can be executed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period (for example, when the ending 2 state is reached), the special effect can be executed and the special effect can be executed. When it is decided to be controlled in an advantageous state, and when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. It is possible to perform special effects.

That is, according to the game machine having the above configuration, a predetermined execution condition is satisfied for the special effect which is a part of the special effect which can be usually executed at the end of the game in a state advantageous to the player. If so, it can be executed in the early stages of the game in a state favorable to the player. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a special period to the period when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a specific period and the advantageous state ends. , It is possible to perform a special production. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, until the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period, each time it is decided to continue the advantageous state, a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous state is obtained. It is possible to carry out a suggestion effect that suggests. As a result, the player can generally grasp when the execution of the special effect is started and when the advantageous state ends, so that it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. it can.

[Game machine with 7th to 12th configurations]
In a conventional game machine, a continuous effect for notifying whether or not a special role (for example, a bonus role) that enables a transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus state) is determined as an internal winning combination. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79697).

However, whether or not the special role has been decided as the internal winning role can often be inferred not only from the production content of the continuous production but also from the combination of the displayed symbols, so the situation shifts to an advantageous state. It is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in the notification regarding whether or not to do so and the mode of transition to an advantageous state itself.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player regarding a transition to a favorable state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations), the specific combination, and the special combination whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, the stop in favor of the player. A game machine characterized in that it executes an effect that can notify the operation procedure.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
In the specific combination, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed when the stop operation is in a specific mode, and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed when the stop operation is not in the specific mode. It ’s a winning role,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations), the specific combination, and the special combination whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is asked until the first advantageous state is completed. It is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the advantageous procedure of the stop operation, and when the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, one of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player until the first advantageous state is completed.
When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination when the first advantageous state is not the gaming state of either the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, the predetermined winning combination is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player only for the number of times (for example, once).

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, a first advantageous state (for example, a high probability 2 of a normal advantageous section) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, between 9 games) A second advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won) while being controllable in the state). ), And an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations), the specific combination, and the special combination whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stopping operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case where the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, the effect is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special gaming state ends, the advantageous state control means
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the game is controlled to a third advantageous state (for example, a high accuracy 4 state of a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games). Machine.

It is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) for different degrees of advantage of the player.
The special combination includes a first special combination in which the winning probabilities differ among the plurality of set values, and a second special combination in which the winning probabilities are the same among the plurality of set values.
The predetermined advantageous conditions are
When any of the first advantageous state and the third advantageous state is in the advantageous state, which of the first special combination and the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Is also decided,
When neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is advantageous, it is not determined whether or not the first special combination is established when it is determined as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations), the specific combination, and the special combination whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The advantageous state control means can determine whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special gaming state is controlled in the second advantageous state and any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a production that can notify
When the special gaming state is controlled in the first advantageous state and any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized in that it does not make it possible to perform an effect that can notify.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) and a predetermined combination. When the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) can be controlled, and a specific combination of symbols (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed. When this is done, it is possible to change the gaming state to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the gaming state. Can be transferred to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). It has become so.

As a result, in the first advantageous state, there is a higher possibility that the number of game media to be given will increase as compared with the case of the normal game, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the special game state will also increase. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a favorable state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, an appropriate timing), the specific combination of symbols is displayed and the specific combination is not performed in the specific mode. In this case, it is an internal winning combination in which a specific combination of symbols is not displayed, and in the case of the first advantageous state and the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player for the predetermined combination until the first advantageous state is completed. When the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified and the player is in the first advantageous state and not in the first normal game and the second normal game state, the player is notified of the predetermined combination only for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). The procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified.

As a result, when a specific combination is won, the degree of advantage and content of the first advantageous state varies depending on whether or not the special combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not a combination of specific symbols is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the game machine having the above configuration, when the special gaming state (for example, the bonus state) ends, if the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the second advantageous state, and the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. If not, the game shifts to a third advantageous state (for example, a high-accuracy 4 state in a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the gaming state is either the first advantageous state or the third advantageous state, the second special combination (for example, "F_BB3 + F_watermelon") in which the winning probability is the same among the plurality of set values. 2 ”and“ internal winning combination including bonus combination other than “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”), and the first special combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”) having different winning probabilities among a plurality of set values. Regardless of which case is won, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, but when neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is in the gaming state, the first special role is assigned. In the case of winning, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (advantageous state) can be made more diverse depending on the game state and its type when the special role is won, so that the interest regarding the transition of the state advantageous to the player is further improved. Can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state of the first advantageous state in which it can be determined whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination. , Even when controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state) in the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination, but the special gaming state is set in the first advantageous state. When controlled, it is not possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination.

As a result, it is possible to provide a first advantageous state, which is a gaming section in which the expectation of shifting to the second advantageous state is increased and the possibility that the number of game media to be given is increased is also increased, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the game, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is enhanced. It is also possible to suppress excessive fanning.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the start operation of the player, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation, the stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a game machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
Advantageous state control that can control a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability 2 state of a normal advantageous section) for a predetermined period when the internal winning combination is determined. Means (eg, main CPU 101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , When a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state). Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations), the specific combination, and the special combination whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. To be feasible and
In the case of the advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. To be feasible and
The normal game state transition control means is a case where the specific combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as the special combination, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, a specific period (for example, 8). (Between games), the game state is changed to the first normal game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a period longer than the specific period (for example, between 9 games).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the high accuracy 2 state of the normal advantageous section). When a specific combination of symbols (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and a special role (for example, RT3 state) can be changed. When the bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to shift the gaming state to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the advantageous state of the first normal game state and the second normal game state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). The period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, between 9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the first normal gaming state can be continued (for example, between 8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player regardless of whether or not the specific game state (first normal game state) ends, and thus the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player. It can be improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following twelfth configuration.

When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus combination is won), an advantageous state control means capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) advantageous to the player, and
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, a display device 11) and
A gaming machine provided with a detecting means (for example, a touch sensor 19) capable of detecting a player's operation.
The display means can display a specific image for notifying whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.
The specific image is a first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied. Includes a second specific image to be displayed (eg, the same image as the base image),
The first specific image and the second specific image are different in a specific part and are images common to other parts other than the specific part.
When the detection means detects that the player has performed the operation of designating the specific portion when the first specific image is displayed, it notifies that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Is displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is notified whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) advantageous to the player is satisfied. Therefore, when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the second specific image is displayed. It is possible to display an image (for example, the same image as the base image), and when the first specific image is displayed, the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image. In this case, it is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is involved, so that the interest in the transition of the advantageous state to the player can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

[Game machine of thirteenth configuration]
In a conventional game machine, the game control device side monitors the time when a specific operation means (for example, a stop button) is pressed (the time counted by the on-edge timer), and that time is sent to the effect control circuit side. As a result, it is known that the content of the production can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233278).

However, in recent game machines that require diversification of productions, it is necessary to mount many productions, and therefore, it is required to devise ways to reduce the control load of the productions.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of a specific operation means, the game machine capable of reducing the control load related to the effect is provided. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following thirteenth configuration.

An operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, a stop button),
An operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch) capable of detecting the operation of the operating means, and
A production control means (for example, sub CPU201) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
When the operation detecting means detects an operation (for example, on-edge) of the operating means, the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time measurement, the first effect (for example, 3 seconds) Control to generate "Direction 1")
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, control is performed to generate a second effect (for example, "effect 2").
A gaming machine characterized in that control for generating the first effect is not performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation detecting means detects that the operation of the operating means has been completed (for example, when an off-edge is detected).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, the time is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the time, the first time is taken. Control to execute one effect (for example, "effect 1"), and control to execute a second effect (for example, "effect 2") when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected). If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping, it is possible not to control the execution of the first effect.

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

[Game machine of the 14th configuration]
In a conventional game machine, there is known one that makes it possible to perform an effect such as notifying an internal winning combination by a light emitting mode of a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) (for example, 2010-82034). reference).

However, it is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in such production.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest in production and enhancing the interest in games.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration.

A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that generates an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
Prior to the occurrence of the advantageous state, a predetermining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to grant the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state (for example, winning a bonus combination) and
A game machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a game value display unit (VL)) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
When it is determined by the predetermining means that the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state is granted, the effect executing means notifies that the decision has been made (for example, "number of sheets ahead". "Display effect") can be executed, and a predetermined value (for example, the end of the combination as the number of planned acquisitions) regarding the game value that can be acquired in the advantageous state generated based on the right given by the decision in the specific notification effect. A gaming machine characterized in displaying (value of the number counter).

When the effect executing means displays the predetermined value in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the said The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired value of the gaming value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when it is decided that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, a bonus combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform a production that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that it is possible to enhance the interest in the production and the interest in the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the predetermined value is continuously displayed at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the game value is acquired. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the acquired game value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

[Game machines with 15th to 18th configurations]
In a conventional game machine, when it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) which is an advantageous game period (advantageous section) for the player, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state. In some cases, it is known that a lottery can be performed as to whether or not the advantageous state is continued (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

According to such a game machine, the game period that becomes an advantageous section also changes depending on the setting conditions such as the transition probability of the advantageous state and the high and low of the continuation probability, so such a setting condition is an event that influences the interest of the game. It has become.

By the way, in such a game machine, since the amount of the game value given in the predetermined period is within the range of the predetermined ball output rate, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (the amount of increase in the game value) It is designed so that the indicated slope value) is a constant value.

Therefore, when the amount of game value added per unit game in an advantageous state is set to a relatively high value, if the above setting conditions are also set to be advantageous to the player, the game There is a problem that the gambling of is excessively high.

On the other hand, in order to suppress the gambling of the game, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state is set to a relatively low value, and the above setting conditions are disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to set it, but in this case, there is a problem that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest of a game while maintaining an appropriate degree of gambling.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of a player to perform a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) smaller than the first expected value. Main CPU101) and
The advantageous state control means is
An advantageous state start determining means capable of determining whether or not to start the advantageous state when the advantageous state is not present,
Including the advantageous state continuation determining means capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state in the case of the advantageous state.
The first expected value control means controls so that the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value for at least a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started.
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state including the predetermined period is the second expected value for at least a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. A game machine characterized by being controlled in such a way.

The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state continuation determining means does not determine to continue the advantageous state for at least the specific period after the advantageous state is continued.

When the advantageous state continuation determining means decides to continue the advantageous state, the advantageous state started based on the determination that the advantageous state start determining means decides to start the advantageous state ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, and a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. Can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated and the advantageous state is continued after the predetermined waiting period has elapsed. You may try to (restart). In this way, not only can the ball output rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 16th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of a player to perform a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is provided.
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
If the combination of the special symbols is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state can be terminated.
The specific notification executing means can display the combination of the special symbols in the game when the advance determination means permits the display of the combination of the special symbols in the advantageous state. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed.

A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. With the main CPU101)
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A game machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

The predetermined end condition is established based on the fact that the game has been played for a predetermined period after the advantageous state has started, or that the game value given since the advantageous state has started has reached a predetermined amount. A game machine characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state ends when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or when the special gaming state is entered before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state within the range of the predetermined predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

It should be noted that, in the game machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it may be possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. In this way, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or the special game. It is also possible to shift to a state, end the advantageous state, and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high, so that the game can be played while making the gambling more appropriate. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the predetermined termination condition may be terminated when a certain privilege is given to the player (or when it is assumed that the privilege is given). In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 17th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of a player to perform a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A game machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means between the start of the advantageous state and the establishment of the specific variable condition. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , The gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information regarding the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled so as to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

In addition, in the game machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special game state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a start operation of a player and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a stop operation of a player to perform a game.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. Control so that
When the advantageous state ends in response to the combination of the special symbols being displayed, a special privilege giving means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of giving a special privilege not related to the addition of the game value is further provided. A game machine featuring.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means between the start of the advantageous state and the establishment of the specific variable condition. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , The gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information regarding the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled so as to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the game value is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give special benefits not related to the addition of the game value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not granted when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

In addition, in the game machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special game state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the game machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Game machine with 19th configuration]
It is known that a conventional game machine is in a state in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) that is advantageous to the player every predetermined number of games (that is, every predetermined cycle). (For example, see JP-A-2010-167197).

According to such a game machine, it is possible to raise the expectation of the transition to the advantageous state at each predetermined cycle, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

However, in such a game machine, there is a problem that the period until the state shifts to the advantageous state is constant and the change in game playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and by making the period until the state in which the transition to the advantageous state is possible can be changed, the playability can be made rich in variety. The purpose is to provide a game machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 2)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 2)), and a predetermined role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in another example (No. 2), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 2) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 2) and end the first special game state when the first special end condition is satisfied. When,
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example of the game property (No. 2)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 2) and end the second special game state when the second special end condition is satisfied. When,
It is provided with a notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The first special permission state (for example, the BB1 permission state in another example of playability (No. 2)) in which is permitted is continued.
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, the BB2 permission state in another example of gameplay (part 2)).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special permission state, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special permission state, the first special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In a normal gaming state that is neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state (for example, the general gaming state (CZ state) in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the first special combination or The second special role can be determined as an internal winning role.
The first special end condition is satisfied when a specified number (for example, more than 285) of game values are given in the first special game state.
In the first special game state, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the predetermined number of game values are not given.
At least in the first special gaming state, the period during which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as a reduction period in which the game value decreases.
The second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the first special gaming state can be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A game machine characterized by that.

A gaming machine characterized in that the period during which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first special gaming state functions as the increase period.

In the first special gaming state, when the symbol display means displays a combination of the first specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB1 in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the first specific game A first specific gaming state that can be controlled to start a state (for example, the RB1 state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) and end the first specific gaming state when the first specific end condition is satisfied. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
In the second special gaming state, when the symbol display means displays a combination of the second specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB2 in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the second specific game A second specific gaming state that can be controlled to start a state (for example, the RB2 state in another example of gameplay (No. 2)) and end the second specific gaming state when the second specific end condition is satisfied. Further equipped with a control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special gaming state, the first specific combination (for example, RB1 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special gaming state, the second specific combination (for example, RB2 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as the internal winning combination.
When the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first special game state, the first specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The first specific permission state (for example, the RB1 permission state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
When the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the second special gaming state, the second specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The second specific permission state (for example, the RB2 permission state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
In the first special gaming state, the period during which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as the reduction period regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is obtained.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second special gaming state, the period of the second specific permission state functions as the increase period.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal game state, if the second special role is won before the first special role is won, the game shifts to the second special game state, and the second special game state is the game value. Acts as an increasing period of increase. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the process shifts to the first special game state, and the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified in the first special game state. , The first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the normal game state is changed.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the first special gaming state, operation information regarding a stop operation in which a predetermined number of gaming values are given when a predetermined winning combination is won is provided. It will be notified. Since the first special game state ends when a predetermined number of game values are given, the end time of the first special game state can be accelerated by being notified of such information. That is, depending on whether or not the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state, the period until the normal gaming state in which the transition to the second special gaming state can be achieved can be changed. Therefore, by making the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in variety.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increasing period. In this way, the interest of the game can be maintained even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first special game state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state, and in the second special game state, it is possible to further shift to the second specific permission state, and the first special game state. Then, regardless of whether or not it is in the first specific permission state, the period in which the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified is made to function as the decrease period, and in the second special game state, the period in which the second specific permission state is in the increase period May function as. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Game machine with 20th to 22nd configurations]
In a conventional game machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the player shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

However, in such a game machine, when the player shifts from the predetermined state to the disadvantageous state, the player does not have an advantageous state until the predetermined state is changed again. Therefore, the motivation and interest in playing the game in the disadvantaged state are particularly reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving game motivation and interest.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Internal winning from a plurality of roles including a special role (for example, BB in another example of playability (No. 3)) and a specific role (for example, a push order small role in another example of playability (No. 3)). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining a combination, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
The gaming states include a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming (part 3)), a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming (part 3)), and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific gaming state (3)). For example, having another example of playability (RT1 state in Part 3),
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
The specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and when the specific end condition is satisfied, the above A specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the specific game state, and
It is provided with a notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (part 3)),
The specific game state control means starts the specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the normal game state that is not the special permission state.
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are played.
The stop control means
In the specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the specified number of game values, and
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state and the specific period in the specific gaming state may be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A game machine characterized by being possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it is in a special permission state, and in a normal game state, it is possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special game state. In the case of the specific gaming state, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state until the specific gaming state ends. Further, the specific game state shifts based on the fact that when a specific combination is won in a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal game state and the specific period in the specific game state, when the specific combination is won, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, The combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only is it possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when a specific role is won is increased. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific role is won. The game value given to is increased. In addition, even if the operation information related to a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during a specific period, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the mode is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state in which the special game state does not occur.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 21st gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of gameplay (4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of gameplay (4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of gameplay (4)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming (4)), It has a first specific gaming state (for example, the RT1 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)) and a second specific gaming state (for example, the RT2 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the termination of the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
It is provided with a notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (4)),
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB-permitted state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state. Let me start
The stop control means
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the specified number of game values, and
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A game machine characterized by being able to do.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if you win a special role, you will be in a special permission state, but the game state will not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, the combination of special symbols will be displayed until the end of the first specific game state. This makes it difficult to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, makes it difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific winning combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special winning combination or the special winning combination is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and the special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state via the special game state.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, if it is a special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when a specific role is won will increase. Further, even if the operation information related to the specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. Regarding the order in which the special role or the special role wins in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 22nd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of gameplay (4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of gameplay (4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of gameplay (4)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming (4)), It has a first specific gaming state (for example, the RT1 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)) and a second specific gaming state (for example, the RT2 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the termination of the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
It is provided with a notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (4)),
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB-permitted state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state. Let me start
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played, and is not satisfied when the special game state is started.
The stop control means
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the specified number of game values, and
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A game machine characterized by being able to do.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if a special combination is won, the special permission state is set, but the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, a specified number of games are played and the first specific game state ends. It is difficult to display the combination of special symbols up to and to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period in the normal game state and the first specific game state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific winning combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special winning combination or the special winning combination is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, if it is a special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when a specific role is won will increase. Further, even if the operation information related to the specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. Regarding the order in which the special role or the special role wins in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Game machines of the 23rd and 24th configurations]
In a conventional game machine, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific condition is satisfied while the special role (for example, a bonus role) is carried over. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-73810).

By the way, in such a game machine, the amount of game value given per unit game in an advantageous state (inclination value indicating the amount of increase in game value) is designed to be a constant value. Therefore, there is a problem that the change in playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in change. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 23rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
First special role (for example, BB1 in another example of gameplay (No. 5)), second special role (for example, BB3 in another example of playability (No. 5)), first predetermined role (for example, game Pushing order small winning combination 1, 3, 5 in another example of sex (No. 5) and second predetermined winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination 2, 4, 6 in another example of gameplay (No. 5)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 5) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) 1st special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 5) of
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB3 in another example (No. 5) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB3 state in the example (No. 5) of
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continues the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB3 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
The internal winning combination determining means overlaps each of the first special winning combination and the second special winning combination with other internal winning combination when neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is obtained. It can be decided as an internal winning role without doing
The stop control means
In a game in which the first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means.
In a game in which the second special winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game values is displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of the player's stop operations. Is displayed, and the combination of predetermined symbols to which is given is displayed.
In the first special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols regardless of the order of the stop operation of the player.
In the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means displays the combination of the predetermined symbols when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
In the second special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means displays the combination of the predetermined symbols when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When a specific advantageous condition is satisfied, the advantageous state control means can set the advantageous state at least for a specific period in the second special permission state.
In the advantageous state, when either the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the order is notified.

The means for determining the internal winning combination is
The first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, 1/100).
The second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, 1/450) lower than the first probability.
The probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state (for example, 1/4000) is higher than the probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state (for example, 1/65536). A game machine characterized by being expensive.

The timing of the stop operation of the player who can display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means is the timing of the player who can display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not overlap with the timing of the stop operation.

In a game in which the first special role or the second special role is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to notify that either the first special role or the second special role has been determined as the internal winning combination. However, a predetermined notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a bonus winning notification) that does not enable the notification of the type, and
In the first special permission state, it is possible to notify the symbol display means that the combination of the first special symbols is permitted to be displayed, and in the second special permission state, the symbol display means is described. Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, bonus type notification) that enables notification that the combination of the second special symbols is permitted to be displayed. A game machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, when the first special combination or the second special combination is won, another internal winning combination is determined in the game, or in the first special permission state or the second special permission state after the winning. The combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol cannot be displayed unless the game is played (so-called lost). Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, and when the second predetermined combination is won, the predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order. Not granted. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control the player to an advantageous state in which the information on the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit is in an advantageous state, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the winning probability of the first special combination is made higher than the winning probability of the second special combination, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. The probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed in the special permission state may be made higher. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and end than the first special permission state. In this way, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, in the game machine having the above configuration, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes the button. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the game machine having the above configuration, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified, and the first special permission state and the first special permission state and In the second special permission state, the type may be notified. In this way, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while making the game playability more varied.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 24th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 6)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 6)), and a specific role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including "F_lip B" in another example (No. 6), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variation display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 6) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 6), and
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example (No. 6) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) A second special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 6) of
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB2 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. When the bet game value is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the case of the first special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols with the symbol display means (for example, the chance eye in another example of game playability (No. 6)). ) Is not displayed, and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means is
The advantage when the bet game value is the first amount, at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. It is possible to decide whether or not to give a state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to impart the advantageous state.

The stop control means
When the bet game value is the first amount, in the case of the first special permission state, it is possible to make the symbol display means display the combination of the first special symbols, and the second In the case of the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the bet game value is the second amount, in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means, and the first A gaming machine characterized in that it is not possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means in the case of a special permission state.

The internal winning combination determining means further includes a first predetermined combination (for example, push order bell A in another example of playability (No. 6)) and a second predetermined combination (for example, another example of playability (No. 6)). The push order bell B) in can be determined as the internal winning role,
The stop control means
When the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the player's stop operation mode is appropriate, the symbol display means is displayed with a combination of predetermined symbols to which a predetermined number of game values are given. If the player's stop operation mode is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the bet game value is the first amount and is in the first special permission state, regardless of the mode of the player's stop operation. Instead, when the symbol display means displays the combination of the predetermined symbols and the bet game value is the first amount and is in the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second. In the case of the amount of, if the mode of the player's stop operation is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed, while if the mode of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the symbol display means is described. Without displaying the combination of predetermined symbols,
In the advantageous state, the gaming machine is characterized in that information indicating the mode of the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is notified.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the first special role can be won, but the second special role cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. Further, when a specific combination is won, the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state, and the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the second special permission state. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, if the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, whether or not to give an advantageous state. Is decidable, and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first quantity, the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed, but the combination of the second special symbols cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, as a state in which the game is performed, for example, a state in which the game is played in the first special permission state in which the first amount of the game value is bet, and the second special permission state. A state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played in a first special permission state, and a second special permission state. It is possible to create a plurality of states, that is, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played.

Then, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the inclination value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the game machine having the above configuration, when the first predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the answer is correct, regardless of which state the player is in, and the push order is irregular. If the answer is correct, a predetermined number of game values will not be given, and if the second predetermined combination is won, the game will be played with the first amount of game value bet in the first special permission state. For example, a predetermined number of game values may be given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the same control as in the first predetermined combination may be performed. In this way, it is possible to set the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first special permission state to the state in which the addition of the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

[Game machine with the 25th configuration]
In a gaming machine having an AT function, if the AT function is not activated for a long period of time, the player falls into a significantly disadvantageous situation and loses interest in the game. Therefore, a gaming machine (so-called ceiling) that activates the AT function regardless of the result of the AT lottery is known as a remedy when a certain period of time elapses without activating the AT function. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 064539 describes a gaming machine that aims to improve operation by changing the period until reaching the ceiling without fixing it.

When activating the ceiling as such a remedy, the period until reaching the ceiling can be arbitrarily set. For example, the number of games ceiling that activates the ceiling when a predetermined number of games are played, or There is known a method such as a through-number ceiling that activates the ceiling when the AT function is not activated even though the chance zone (CZ) in which the AT lottery is given preferential treatment is performed a predetermined number of times.

By the way, in recent game machines, when terminating a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section (so-called advantageous section), all information regarding the advantageous state to be terminated must be reset (initialized). In such a game machine, it is not possible to grasp the number of times through the advantageous section (CZ), and there is a problem that it becomes difficult to control the ceiling based on the number of times of through in the advantageous section like the conventional number of through times ceiling. there were.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a game machine capable of activating the ceiling as a remedy when the state in which the related information is reset at the end is terminated a plurality of times. The purpose.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 25th gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, and a plurality of stages of RT as RT states in which the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is different. It has states (for example, RT1 to RT6), and as game states related to the game, a normal state (for example, a normal section), a first predetermined state (for example, CZ in an advantageous section), and a game more than the first predetermined state. It has a predetermined state (for example, an advantageous section) including at least a second predetermined state (for example, ART in an advantageous section) that is advantageous to the person, and can shift the RT state from the current RT state to another RT state. RT control means (for example, main control circuit 90), a notification means capable of notifying information necessary for shifting the RT state (for example, main control circuit 90), and a first condition (for example, for example) in the normal state. When the transition lottery to the advantageous section is satisfied, the first state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of shifting the gaming state to the first predetermined state is further provided, and the notification means is provided. When the gaming state shifts to the first predetermined state by the first state control means, it is possible to notify the information necessary for shifting the RT state to the RT state at a stage prior to the current RT state. When the second condition (for example, winning the lottery for shifting to ART) is satisfied in the first predetermined state, the gaming state can be shifted to the second predetermined state, and the current notification means is used in the first predetermined state. When the end condition is satisfied after the information necessary for shifting to the RT state at a stage prior to the RT state is notified, the second state control means (for example, the main state) capable of shifting to the normal state. The second state control means further includes a control circuit 90), and the second state control means does not satisfy the second condition in the first predetermined state in the RT state (for example, RT1 to RT4) of the predetermined stage, and the end condition is not satisfied. When is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the normal state, but the second condition is not satisfied in the first predetermined state in the RT state (for example, RT5) of the specific stage prior to the predetermined stage. Even in this case, the gaming state is shifted to the second predetermined state without shifting to the normal state.

According to such a game machine, when the state shifts from the normal state to the first predetermined state (for example, CZ), the RT state advances to the next stage, so that the transition condition to the second predetermined state (second condition) is satisfied. Even if the first predetermined state is completed without any notice, the RT state is different before and after the first predetermined state (progresses to the previous stage). Here, in a normal game machine, when the information about the predetermined state is initialized at the end of the first predetermined state, the number of times (through number) of the first predetermined state that has ended without shifting to the second predetermined state is grasped. Although this is not possible, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, by making the RT state different before and after the first predetermined state, information on the RT state different from the predetermined state (RT state stage) can be obtained from the first predetermined state. The number of slews can be grasped. Then, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game shifts to the first predetermined state in the RT state of the specific stage, the game is played regardless of whether or not the transition condition (second condition) to the second predetermined condition is satisfied. By shifting the state to the second predetermined state (for example, ART), the ceiling in the second predetermined state can be activated based on the number of slews in the first predetermined state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the first predetermined state in the RT state of the predetermined stage, the second state control means precedes the current RT state by the notification means in the first predetermined state. When a predetermined period (for example, 100 games) elapses after the information necessary for shifting to the RT state at the stage of is notified, the gaming state is shifted to the normal state assuming that the end condition is satisfied. Then, in the first predetermined state in the RT state of the specific stage, when the predetermined period or a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, 30 games) elapses without satisfying the second condition, It is characterized in that the gaming state is shifted to the second predetermined state.

According to such a game machine, in the first predetermined state before reaching the ceiling, the game state is shifted to the normal state after the first predetermined state is continued for a predetermined period, so that the game period required to reach the ceiling is a certain amount. (= Predetermined period x number of slews (number of stages in RT state)) can be secured. As a result, even if the transition from the normal state to the first predetermined state is fortunately performed with high frequency, the game will always be played for a certain period or more before reaching the ceiling, which is necessary. As described above, it is possible to prevent the ceiling from reaching the ceiling early, and it is possible to adjust the balance between the profit / disadvantage of the player.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled so that the period in the predetermined state in the entire gaming period becomes a predetermined ratio, and the first state control means is the normal state. In the above, if it is determined with a predetermined probability that the gaming state is shifted to the first predetermined state, the gaming state is shifted to the first predetermined state, assuming that the first condition is satisfied.

In recent game machines, in order to prevent giving an excessive profit to a player, it is required to control the game state so that the period in the predetermined state in the entire game period becomes a predetermined ratio. .. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a certain amount (= period required to win a predetermined probability x number of throughs (number of stages in the RT state) is required for a gaming period other than the predetermined state (normal state) required to reach the ceiling. )) Can be secured. As a result, it is possible to keep the period in the predetermined state in the entire game period within a predetermined ratio while sufficiently securing the period of the second predetermined state that can be continued after reaching the ceiling.

[Game machine of the 26th configuration]
In a gaming machine having an AT function, if the AT function is not activated for a long period of time, the player falls into a significantly disadvantageous situation and loses interest in the game. Therefore, a gaming machine (so-called ceiling) that activates the AT function regardless of the result of the AT lottery is known as a remedy when a certain period of time elapses without activating the AT function. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 064539 describes a gaming machine that aims to improve operation by changing the period until reaching the ceiling without fixing it.

By the way, as a game machine having such a ceiling function, there is also known a game machine in which the privilege given when reaching the ceiling is larger than the privilege at the normal time, but if the privilege when reaching the ceiling is too large, the player It is not preferable because it may be overly absorbed in the game. On the other hand, if the AT is terminated early even though it has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be discouraged, resulting in a decrease in operation.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing while preventing excessive immersiveness.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 26th gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, and as game states related to the game, a first state (for example, a general state) and a second state (for example, a general state). For example, if a predetermined state is satisfied in the first state, it is possible to execute a normal transition control for shifting the gaming state to the second state, and count in relation to the first state. When the first numerical value information to be performed reaches the ceiling threshold value, the state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of executing the ceiling transition control for shifting the gaming state to the second state and the duration of the second state. The duration counting means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of counting the second numerical information for determining the second numerical information, and the second numerical information counted by the duration counting means according to the result of the game in the second state. When the second numerical information reaches the end threshold value as a result of the update, the end control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of ending the second state and the state control means are in a gaming state. The initial period setting means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of setting the initial value of the second numerical information that determines the duration of the second state to be shifted when shifting to the second state, and the first. In the two states, the initial control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of executing the additional control for updating the second numerical information so that the duration of the second state is extended is further provided. The period setting means sets the first initial value when shifting to the second state by the normal transition control, while the period setting means sets the first initial value when shifting to the second state by the ceiling transition control, rather than the first initial value. A second initial value having a long duration of the second state is set, and the additional control means is expected to extend the duration of the second state in the second state shifted by the normal transition control. In the second state in which the additional control of the first expectation is executed and the transition is made by the ceiling transition control, the second expectation has a lower expectation regarding the extension of the duration of the second state than the first expectation. It is characterized in that the additional control of the degree is executed.

According to such a game machine, in the second state shifted by the normal transition control, the initial value of the duration is small, but the expectation for adding the duration is high, and conversely, the second state shifted by the ceiling transition control. As for the state, while the initial value of the duration is large, the expectation for adding the duration is low. By increasing the initial value of the duration in the second state shifted by the ceiling shift control in this way, the second state does not end early when the ceiling is reached, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. It can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the second state of transition by the ceiling transition control, the additional performance is lowered, so that the player does not have to aim at the ceiling, and it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to make the player feel as if there is a great benefit when reaching the ceiling, but by adjusting the additional performance with respect to the initial value of the duration, the second state is once. The expected value of the hit can be adjusted between the ceiling and the normal time, and excessive immersiveness can be prevented.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the initial period setting means and / or the additional control means are shifted by the expected value of the duration of the second state shifted by the normal transition control and the ceiling transition control. It is characterized in that the initial value is set and / or the additional control is executed so that the expected value of the duration of the second state is substantially the same.

Even with such a game machine, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play while preventing excessive immersiveness as in the above-mentioned game machine.

[Game machine of 27th configuration]
In a game machine having an AT function, various measures have been taken to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724 describes a notification period (AT). ) Continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), a gaming machine that performs limit processing for forcibly ending the notification period regardless of the number of remaining games is disclosed.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, it is decided to prevent the player from being absorbed by suppressing the profit given to the player, but in order to appropriately suppress the gambling, not only the profit given to the player but also the game It is necessary to appropriately adjust the disadvantages suffered by the person and balance the profits / disadvantages.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately adjusting the balance of profits / disadvantages received by a player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 27th gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A stop control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of deriving the result display by stopping the variable display of the above, and a profit giving means (for example, the main control circuit 90) for giving a profit according to the derived result display. A gaming machine including, has a first RT state and a second RT state as RT states in which the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is different, and the variable display means is changed by the stop control means. As a result of the display being stopped, when the result display corresponding to the specific combination (for example, MB combination) is derived, the bonus game (for example, MB state) is started, and when the end condition of the bonus game is satisfied, the bonus A game control means (for example, main control circuit 90) that ends the game, and a specific RT state is maintained before and after the bonus game, and during the bonus game without shifting the RT state. Further, an RT control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) that shifts the RT state from the current RT state to another RT state when the shift condition is satisfied is further provided, and the stop control means is described in the bonus game. When the re-game combination is not determined as the winning combination (for example, the winning combination is won for "all small combinations"), the first result display can be derived, and the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination in the bonus game. In the case of (for example, winning "all small wins + replays"), a second result display different from the first result display can be derived, and the profit-giving means can derive the first result. A gaming machine characterized in that different quantities of game value can be given depending on whether the display is derived and the second result display is derived.

According to such a game machine, in the bonus game, the result display derived differs depending on whether or not the re-game combination is won, and as a result, the quantity of the game value to be given is different. Here, the probability that the re-game combination will be determined as the winning combination differs depending on the RT state, and the RT state does not shift before, after, and during the bonus game. Therefore, the bonus game is started when the bonus game is started during the RT state where the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is high, and when the bonus game is started during the RT state where the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is low. The degree of advantage of the bonus game can be different depending on the case. As a result, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the balance of benefits / disadvantages received by the player can be appropriately adjusted.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A stop control means (for example, main control circuit 90) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a main control circuit) for giving a profit according to the derived result display. 90), and as an RT state in which the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is different, the probability that the first re-game combination (for example, Replay A) is determined as the winning combination is high. , The first RT state in which the probability that the second re-game combination (for example, replay B) is determined as the winning combination is low, and the probability that the first re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is low, and the second re-game combination Has a second RT state in which is highly likely to be determined as a winning combination, and as a result of stopping the variable display of the variable display means by the stop control means, the result display according to a specific combination (for example, MB combination) is displayed. When derived, the bonus game (for example, MB state) is started, and when the end condition of the bonus game is satisfied, the game control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) that ends the bonus game and the bonus game While maintaining the current RT state before and after and during the bonus game without shifting the RT state, the RT state is changed from the current RT state to another RT state when a specific transition condition is satisfied. When the RT control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) is further provided, and neither the first re-game combination nor the second re-game combination is determined as a winning combination in the bonus game. The first result display (for example, display combination A) can be derived for (for example, winning for "all small combinations"), and the first re-game combination is determined as the winning combination in the bonus game. If this is the case (for example, winning "all small wins + replay A"), the first result display can be derived, and the first replay win is determined as the winning win in the bonus game. If this is the case (for example, winning "all small wins + replay B"), a second result display (for example, display combination B) different from the first result display can be derived, and the profit When the first result display is derived, the granting means can give a game value equal to or less than the game value used for the current game, and the second result display is derived. In some cases, the number of games is larger than the game value used for this game. It is characterized in that it can be given value.

According to such a game machine, when the second re-game combination is determined as the winning combination in the bonus game, more game value than the game value used for this game is given. If the second re-game combination is not determined as the winning combination in the bonus game, a game value equal to or less than the game value used for this game is given. The probability that the second re-game combination will be determined as the winning combination differs depending on the RT state, and the RT state does not shift before, after, and during the bonus game. Therefore, if the bonus game is started during the second RT state in which the probability that the second re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is high, the bonus game can be put in an advantageous state for the player, and conversely. If the bonus game is started during the first RT state in which the probability that the second re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is low, the bonus game can be maintained as it is or disadvantageous to the player. By making the degree of advantage of the bonus game different according to the RT state in this way, it is possible to suppress the profit given to the player during the bonus game. On the other hand, even if the bonus game is in the first RT state, the player is given a certain amount of game value, so even if the bonus game is relatively disadvantageous, the player suffers a disadvantage. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the balance of benefits / disadvantages received by the player can be appropriately adjusted.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first RT state is a low RT state in which the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is low, and the second RT state is the re-gaming combination as the winning combination. It is characterized by a high RT state with a high probability of being determined.

By doing so, the bonus game in the high RT state can be put into an advantageous state for the player, and the bonus game in the low RT state can be put into the status quo or a disadvantageous state for the player. it can.

[Game machine of 28th configuration]
According to a game machine equipped with an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue AT (navigation). We hope that the number of games) will increase. Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, only the duration of the advantageous state such as AT is extended according to the winning combination determined in this game, and the player intervenes regarding the length of the duration of the advantageous state. There was little room to do it.

The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can intervene with respect to the length of duration of an advantageous state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 28th gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, and when a winning combination is determined, a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode. It has a notification target combination that can derive the first result display and can derive the second result display when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode, and is used as a gaming state related to the game. A state control means that has a first state (for example, a non-notification state) and a second state (for example, a notification state), and can shift the gaming state to the second state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first state. (For example, when the first result display is derived in the game in which the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the main control circuit 90), a predetermined quantity of game value can be imparted. When the second result display is derived in the game, the profit-giving means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of imparting a game value less than the predetermined quantity and the notification target combination in the second state When determined as the winning combination, the notification means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of notifying the predetermined operation mode necessary for deriving the first result display and the duration of the second state are provided. A duration counting means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of counting the total number of game values given by the profit-giving means in the second state, which is numerical information to be determined, and the profit-giving means in the second state. The numerical information can be updated according to the quantity of the game value given by the means, and when the numerical information reaches the end threshold as a result of the update, the duration management means capable of ending the second state ( For example, the main control circuit 90) and the additional control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of executing the additional control for updating the numerical information so that the duration of the second state is extended in the second state. ), And the duration management means, even when the notification means notifies the predetermined operation mode in the game in which the notification target combination in the second state is determined as the winning combination. When the second result display is derived as a result of the player's stop operation, the numerical information is provided according to the quantity of the game value given according to the derived second result display. It is characterized by updating.

According to such a game machine, the second state (advantageous state) capable of notifying a predetermined operation mode when the notification target combination is determined as the winning combination is the game value given in the second state. Since it ends when the total number (numerical information) reaches the end threshold value, the so-called advantageous state can be managed by the difference number or the acquired number in the state. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the numerical information (difference number or acquired number) is not updated only by performing the notification according to the notification target combination during the second state, and the game is stopped as a result of the stop operation. Numerical information is updated according to the quantity of game value actually given along with the result display. For the player, by performing the stop operation according to the notification, a lot of game value can be obtained, but the end of the advantageous state (second state) is accelerated, and on the contrary, the stop operation is performed against the notification. By doing so, the acquisition of the value for the game is reduced, but the advantageous state can be continued, so that the player can intervene with respect to the length of the duration of the advantageous state. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since it is possible to execute the additional control for extending the duration in the second state, the value for gaming is temporarily acquired by continuing the advantageous state against the notification. However, by receiving additional control during the extended period against the notification, there is a possibility that a lot of game value will be acquired in the end, so the gameplay with unprecedented strategicity will be achieved. It can be realized.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when it is determined as a winning combination, a third result display in which a specific quantity of gaming value is given by the profit-giving means can be derived regardless of the mode of the stop operation. Further having a combination (for example, a combination of attraction 1), the duration management means grants a game value by the profit-giving means according to the determination of the specific combination among the plurality of combinations as the winning combination. If so, the numerical information is not updated.

According to such a game machine, as described above, by continuing the advantageous state against the notification, the acquisition of the game value is temporarily reduced, but it is added during the extended period against the notification. By receiving control, it is possible to eventually acquire a large amount of game value, so it is possible to realize game playability with unprecedented strategicity.

[Game machine with the 29th configuration]
Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-104425 provides the player with information that is advantageous to the player, such as information for establishing the internal winning combination, so that the role determined for the internal winning combination is not missed. The game machine to be notified is disclosed. It should be noted that the notification of information that gives the player an advantage in this way is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which the navigating is performed is called AT (assist time), and has an AT function. The game machine is called an AT machine or an ART machine. According to the AT (ART) machine, not only the lottery probability of the internal winning combination but also the profit differs depending on the presence or absence of notification, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In a game machine equipped with such an AT function, various measures have been taken to control the transition from a normal state to an advantageous state (AT). For example, there are a plurality of modes for determining the transition probability to the advantageous state. It is also known to have a control that makes the transition expectation different for each current mode, but such control is adopted in many game machines, and simply providing a mode makes the game monotonous, which is advantageous. Further improvements are needed regarding the transition to the state.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of new control over the transition to an advantageous state.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 29th gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, and as game states related to the game, a normal state (for example, a normal section) and a first predetermined state. It has (for example, CZ) and a predetermined state (for example, an advantageous section) including at least a second predetermined state (for example, ART) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined state, and is the first in the normal state. When one condition is satisfied, the first state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of shifting the gaming state to the first predetermined state, and when the second condition is satisfied in the first predetermined state, the first condition is satisfied. 2 A second state control means (for example, a second state control means capable of shifting the gaming state to the predetermined state and when a specific combination (for example, MB) is determined as the winning combination in the first predetermined state, the gaming state can be shifted to the normal state. For example, the game control means further includes a main control circuit 90), and the game control means determines the specific combination as a winning combination with a probability different from that of other set values at least a part of the plurality of set values. And.

According to such a game machine, when the second condition is satisfied in the first predetermined state, it is possible to shift to the second predetermined state, which is an advantageous state, while in the first predetermined state, the specific combination becomes the winning combination. If it is decided, it will shift to the normal state. That is, the player desires that in the first predetermined state, the transition condition (second condition) to the second predetermined state is satisfied before winning the specific combination (before the first predetermined state ends). Will play the game at. At this time, since the winning probability of the specific combination that is the end condition of the first predetermined state differs depending on the set value, the first predetermined state that can be expected to shift to the second predetermined state (advantageous state) is also the set value. The end probability will be different depending on. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, instead of directly setting a setting difference in the probability of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous state (second predetermined state), the transition to the advantageous state can be expected. (1) By setting a setting difference in the end probability of the predetermined state, a setting difference is provided in the transition probability to the advantageous state, so that new control that has never existed in the transition to the advantageous state becomes possible.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined state is a notification state capable of notifying information on a stop operation advantageous to the player, and as a result of the game, a result display corresponding to the specific combination is derived. , A bonus starting means (for example, a main control circuit 90) for starting a bonus game is further provided.

According to such a game machine, if the second condition can be satisfied in the first predetermined state without winning a specific combination, the game shifts to an advantageous notification state (second predetermined state) for the player. On the other hand, even if a specific role is won without satisfying the second condition, the bonus game is started, so that the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, the game control means determines the specific combination as a winning combination with a higher probability when the set value is a low setting value which is disadvantageous to the player among a plurality of set values. It is characterized by that.

According to such a game machine, the lower the setting, which is disadvantageous to the player, the easier it is for the specific combination to be determined as the winning combination. Therefore, the lower the setting, the more the transition to the notification state (second predetermined state) is expected. The first predetermined state that can be performed is also easy to end, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the notification state. However, when the result display according to the specific combination is derived as a result of the game, the bonus game is started. Therefore, in the case of the low setting where it is difficult to shift to the advantageous state, more than the high setting. Bonus games can be performed, and the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

[Game machine of the thirtieth configuration]
According to a game machine equipped with an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can continue AT (navigation). We hope that the number of games) will increase. Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, whether or not the privilege related to the AT period is given and the size of the given privilege are associated with each combination in advance, so that the player decides as a winning combination. From the type of role played, it was possible to grasp whether or not the privilege was given and the size of the privilege to be given, and there was a possibility that the game would become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having unprecedented playability with respect to a decision result of granting a privilege.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a thirtieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) for controlling the progress of a game using the above, having a notification state capable of notifying a mode of a stop operation, and as a game state related to the game. It has a predetermined state (for example, a non-bonus state) and a specific state (for example, a bonus state) including a first specific state (for example, RB in BB) and a second specific state (for example, carryover of RB in BB). When the start condition (for example, the start condition of the bonus state) is satisfied in the predetermined state, the specific state can be started, and when the end condition (for example, the end condition of the bonus state) is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state can be started. When the state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of terminating the state and the first condition (for example, winning of RB) are satisfied in the specific state, the gaming state can be controlled to the first specific state. The specific state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of controlling the gaming state to the second specific state when the second condition (for example, carrying over the RB as a winning combination) is satisfied in the specific state, and the above. In the specific state, the privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of granting the privilege related to the notification state is further provided, and the privilege granting means includes the first specific state of the specific state and the specific state. While the privilege related to the notification state can be given with different probabilities in the second specific state of the above, when the privilege related to the notification state is given, the first specific state of the specific state and the specific state of the specific state Of the second specific state, the state in which the probability is low is characterized in that a larger privilege can be given.

According to such a game machine, the probability that the privilege related to the notification state is different differs between the first specific state and the second specific state, and the size of the privilege given when the privilege is given gives the privilege. The lower the probability, the greater the benefits. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the probability and the magnitude of granting the privilege related to the notification state cross between the first specific state and the second specific state in the specific state. For the player, it is possible to select whether to play the game so that the privilege is easily given but only the small privilege is given during the specific state, or the game is played so that the privilege is hard to be given but the big privilege is given. Therefore, according to the game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to realize a new game property having a strategic property regarding the decision result of granting the privilege.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific state control means has a low RT state having a low probability and a high RT state as RT states in which the probability that the re-game combination is determined as the winning combination is different. When a specific result display corresponding to a specific combination (for example, RB) is derived in the specific state, it is assumed that the first condition is satisfied, and the first specific state in the specific state can be started. When the specific state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) and the specific combination are determined as the winning combination in the specific state, the second specific state of the specific state is determined as satisfying the second condition. When the specific result display that can be started is derived, the second specific state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) that can end the second specific state and the specific combination of the specific state win the prize. When the specific result display is not derived in the unit game determined as the combination, the carry-over means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of carrying over the specific combination as the winning combination until the specific result display is derived. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the specific state, the RT state is shifted to the high RT state, and the specific result display corresponding to the specific combination is derived in the specific state. Then, the RT control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) for shifting the RT state to the low RT state is further provided, and the privilege granting means is in the specific state in the first specific state of the specific state. When the privilege related to the notification state can be given with a lower probability than that of the second specific state, when the privilege related to the notification state is given in the first specific state of the specific state, the said in the specific state. It is characterized in that a larger privilege is given as compared with the case where the privilege related to the notification state is given in the second specific state.

According to such a game machine, by avoiding the derivation of the result display according to the specific role and playing the game in the state where the specific role is carried over (second specific state), the privilege given is small, but the privilege Can be played in a state where is easily given. At this time, since the specific combination is in the high RT state while the specific combination is carried over in the specific state, when the state shifts to the notification state (so-called ART) after that, the preparation period for shifting the RT state to the high RT state is set. You don't have to have it. Therefore, by playing the game in the second specific state, it is easy to shift to the notification state, and the notification state can be started immediately without the preparation period. On the other hand, by playing the game in a state in which the result display corresponding to the specific combination is derived (first specific state), it is possible to play the game in a state where the privilege is difficult to be given but the privilege to be given is large. At this time, when the result display corresponding to the specific combination is derived in the specific state, the state shifts to the low RT state, so that the base of the ball output rate is lower than in the case of the high RT state. As a result, during the first specific state, not only the decrease in the probability of granting the privilege but also the decrease in the base of the payout rate due to the low RT state can be distributed to the size of the privilege to be granted. Therefore, for the player, the game is played so that the privilege is easily given during the specific state but only the small privilege is given (a specific role is won or carried over), or the privilege is difficult to be given but the big privilege is given. It is possible to play or select a game, and it is possible to realize a new game with a strategy.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) that controls the progress of a game using a display means, has a notification state capable of notifying a mode of a stop operation, and a game state related to the game. As a predetermined state (for example, non-bonus state), and a specific state (for example, bonus state) including a first specific state (for example, RB in BB) and a second specific state (for example, carryover of RB in BB). If the start condition (for example, the start condition of the bonus state) is satisfied in the predetermined state, the specific state can be started, and if the end condition (for example, the end condition of the bonus state) is satisfied in the specific state, the specific state can be started. When the state control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of terminating the specific state and the first condition (for example, winning of RB) are satisfied in the specific state, the gaming state can be controlled to the first specific state. When the second condition (for example, carrying over the RB as a winning combination) is satisfied in the specific state, the game state can be controlled to the second specific state (for example, the main control circuit 90). A game to be given per unit game of the first specific state in the specific state, further comprising a privilege giving means (for example, a main control circuit 90) capable of giving a privilege related to the notification state in the specific state. The expected value of the utility value and the expected value of the game value given per unit game of the second specific state in the specific state are given per unit game of the second specific state of the specific state. The expected value of the game value is higher, and the expected value of the privilege in the first specific state of the specific state and the expected value of the privilege in the second specific state of the specific state are given per unit game. The expected value of the game value is lower. The first specific state of the specific state has a higher expected value of the privilege.

According to such a game machine, the expected value of the game value given per unit game is different between the first specific state and the second specific state, and the expected value of the game value given per unit game is expected. The lower the value, the higher the expected value of the privilege regarding the notification state. That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the expected value of the game value given per unit game and the expected value of the privilege related to the notification state are set in the first specific state and the second specific state in the specific state. Cross. For the player, it is possible to select whether to play the game so that the privilege is hard to be given but the value for the game is given a lot, or the game is played so that the privilege is easily given but the value for the game is not given much. Therefore, according to the game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to realize a new game property having a strategy for giving benefits.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of winning combinations include a plurality of types (for example, BEL_01 to 09) of predetermined winning combinations to which a predetermined number of gaming values are given when a prize is won, and the said first in the specific state. In the one specific state and the second specific state of the specific state, the individual winning probabilities of the plurality of types of the predetermined combination in which each of the plurality of types of the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination are the first. Although the specific state is higher, the winning probability that at least one of the plurality of types of the predetermined winning combination is determined as the winning combination is higher in the second specific state.

According to such a game machine, in the first specific state, the probability of winning each of a plurality of types of predetermined combinations is increased, but the probability that at least one of the plurality of types of predetermined combinations is determined as a winning combination is decreased. , The expected value of the game value given per unit game can be made lower than that of the second specific state. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to cross the expected value of the game value given per unit game and the expected value of the privilege related to the notification state.

[Game machine of the 31st configuration]
According to a game machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation, so that the player can use the number of AT games that continue AT ( We hope that the number of navigation games) will increase. Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732, it is stated that a specific role such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning role. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

However, in the above-mentioned game machine, whether or not the privilege related to the AT period is given and the size of the given privilege are associated with each combination in advance, so that the player decides as a winning combination. From the type of role played, it was possible to grasp whether or not the privilege was given and the size of the privilege to be given, and there was a possibility that the game would become monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having unprecedented playability with respect to a decision result of granting a privilege.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the 31st gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) that controls the progress of a game using a display means, has a notification state capable of notifying a mode of a stop operation, and is determined as a winning combination. In that case, when the stop operation (for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the color selection) is performed in the first operation mode, the first result display (for example, the winning of the color selection small winning combination) can be derived, the second. When the stop operation (for example, the stop operation of the correct answer in the push order) is performed in the operation mode, the second result display (for example, the winning of the push order small winning combination) can be derived, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are described. When the stop operation is performed in the third operation mode, which is not any of the operation modes of When the first result display or the second result display is derived, a predetermined amount of game value can be given, and when the third result display is derived, When the profit-giving means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of imparting a game value smaller than the predetermined amount and the first result display in the non-notification state are derived, the privilege regarding the notification state is provided. A notification privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 90) that can be granted, and a notification control means (for example, the main control circuit) that can transition to the notification state in response to the privilege being granted by the notification privilege granting means. 90) and a notification means (for example, a main control circuit 90) capable of notifying a player of a predetermined operation mode are further provided, and the specific combination is determined as a winning combination in the notification means in a non-notification state. When this is done, the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state without notifying any of the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify the operation mode of 2.

According to such a game machine, when a specific combination is determined as a winning combination in the non-notification state, when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode and the first result display is derived, the privilege regarding the notification state is obtained. Is given. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode and the second result display is derived, the same amount of predetermined amount of gaming value as when the first result display is derived is given. However, no privilege related to the notification state is given, and when the stop operation is performed in the third operation mode, only an amount less than a predetermined amount of game value is given, and a privilege related to the notification state is also given. Not granted. As described above, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to realize game playability in which the player can be involved in the determination result of granting the privilege.
Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a combination to be notified during the notification state is used as a specific combination to which a privilege can be given according to the type of operation mode. Here, in consideration of the profit balance, it is preferable that the first operation mode, which has the greatest profit among the plurality of operation modes, is an operation mode that is difficult to be established, but in order to impart a game value during the notification state. If the operation mode to be notified is set as the first operation mode, the first operation mode that is difficult to be established at the time of winning the specific combination (notification target combination) is required, and the player's stop operation becomes complicated. It ends up. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, during the notification state, the second operation mode in which the same amount of gaming value as the first operation mode in which the privilege related to the notification state can be given is notified, and the first operation mode is notified. The operation mode of is not notified. As a result, even if the first operation mode is a complicated operation mode in consideration of the profit balance, it is sufficient to play the game in the simpler second operation mode during the notification state. You can play the game smoothly.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, in the game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, when the stop operation for the variable display means that is variablely displayed is performed at a predetermined timing. In addition, assuming that the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, the first result display is derived, and in the game, the stop operations for the plurality of variable display means that are variablely displayed are performed in a predetermined order. When it is performed, it is characterized in that the second result display is derived on the assumption that the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode.

According to such a game machine, in order to receive the privilege related to the notification state, the player needs to perform a stop operation at an appropriate timing, but if only a predetermined amount of game value is obtained, the game is played. It suffices for the person to perform the stop operations in an appropriate order. As a result, while it is difficult to establish the first operation mode for receiving the privilege related to the notification state during the non-notification state, the game can be smoothly performed without requiring a complicated operation mode during the notification state. it can.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, according to a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification displays, and a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, a main control circuit 90) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means, which has a notification state capable of notifying a mode of a stop operation and a winning combination. When the stop operation (for example, the stop operation of the correct answer for the color selection) is performed in the first operation mode, the first result display (for example, the winning of the color selection small winning combination) can be derived. When the stop operation (for example, the stop operation of the correct answer in the push order) is performed in the second operation mode, the second result display (for example, the winning of the push order small winning combination) can be derived, and the first operation mode and the said When the stop operation is performed in the third operation mode, which is neither of the second operation modes, a specific combination (for example, "color selection small combination + push") capable of deriving a third result display (for example, spilled or missed) can be derived. When either the first result display or the second result display is derived, a profit-giving means (for example, a main control circuit) capable of imparting a predetermined amount of game value. 90) and, when the first result display is derived in the non-notification state, the notification privilege granting means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of granting the privilege related to the notification state and the notification privilege granting means are used. A notification control means (for example, the main control circuit 90) capable of transitioning to the notification state and a notification means (for example, the main control) capable of notifying the player of a predetermined operation mode according to the privilege. The circuit 90) is further provided, and when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the non-notification state, the notification means has the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode. If the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the notification state without notifying any of the above, the second operation mode can be notified, and the game control means determines the specific combination as the winning combination. In the game, when the stop operations for the plurality of variable display means that are variablely displayed are performed in a predetermined order, the second result is that the stop operation is performed in the second operation mode. When the stop operation for the plurality of variable display means for which the display is derived and the variable display means is performed in a specific order other than the predetermined order, and the stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing. , Assuming that the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, the first result display is derived and the variable display is performed. The third operation when the stop operations for the plurality of variable display means are performed in the specific order and the stop operations are performed at a specific timing other than the predetermined timing. It is characterized in that the third result display is derived on the assumption that the stop operation is performed in the embodiment.

According to such a game machine, as described above, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player can be involved in the decision result of granting the privilege, and it is possible to smoothly perform the game in the notified state.

Further, in the game machine according to the present invention, when the player randomly performs a stop operation in a game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the above Among the third operation modes, the ratio in which the first operation mode is established is the lowest.

According to such a game machine, the game in the notification state can be smoothly performed while the first operation mode is a complicated operation mode in consideration of the profit balance. Further, since the first operation mode is an operation mode that is difficult to be established, even if the winning probability of the specific combination is increased, an excessive profit (privilege regarding the notification state) is not given to the player. Therefore, in the game machine according to the present invention, the winning probability of the specific combination can be increased, and as a result, the player can be given many opportunities to be given the privilege regarding the notification state.

[Game machine of the 32nd configuration]
In such a game machine, a state called "lock" that invalidates or delays the game operation by the player is generated at a predetermined timing during the game, and the reel is rotated and stopped during the lock to perform the reel action. A game machine having an effect function to perform is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-127478). In such a game machine, since it is possible to perform an effect using a reel during locking, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

However, until now, the player's operation while locked is limited to the operation according to the display such as "Press within a certain period of time!". Therefore, even more diversity is required for the player's operation during locking.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which the effect of starting the variable display of a symbol and then stopping the variable display is further diversified. ..

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 32nd gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A symbol display means capable of variable display and stop display of a plurality of symbols (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, reel display window 4).
A symbol changing means that fluctuates and displays the symbol when a player's start operation is performed (for example, the main CPU 101).
A stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol when the player's stop operation is performed (for example, the main CPU 101).
A privilege granting determination means for determining whether to grant a privilege (for example, main CPU 101),
When a predetermined lock start condition is satisfied, a lock control means that generates a lock state and stops the progress of the game (for example, the main CPU 101),
A specific effect control means for controlling a specific effect for causing the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner and a stop state in the symbol display means while in the locked state (for example, the main CPU 101).
A timing display means for displaying an operation input timing instruction according to the specific effect (for example, sub CPU 201),
With
The operation input timing instruction corresponds to the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped in the specific effect.
It is possible to suggest the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means by the symbol stopped in the specific effect.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific effect control means can execute the control of the specific effect to change and stop the symbol in the symbol display means while the lock state in which the progress of the game is stopped occurs. is there. In response to this specific effect, the timing display means displays an instruction of operation input timing. The instruction displayed in the timing display means corresponds to the timing at which the variation display of the symbol is stopped in the specific effect, and the symbol stopped in the specific effect can suggest the result of the determination by the privilege granting determination means.

Therefore, the player inputs the operation according to the instruction. Then, the variable display of the symbol is stopped according to the timing when the player inputs the operation, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the privilege given from the type of the stopped symbol.

Therefore, in the effect of starting the variable display of the symbol and then stopping the variable display, when the player inputs an operation according to the timing displayed by the timing display means, the variable display of the symbol is stopped by the operation input. However, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the effect is further diversified in that it is possible to give a feeling that the privilege grant can be predicted.

Further, in the game machine, the timing display means displays a musical score in which instructions for operation input timing are described in response to the specific effect.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, when the player inputs an operation at the timing displayed by the musical score display means in the effect of starting the variable display of the symbol and then stopping the variable display, it is as if the operation input is performed. It is possible to provide a game machine in which the effect is further diversified in that the variable display of the symbol is stopped and a feeling that the privilege grant can be predicted can be given.

[Game machine with the 33rd configuration]
Such a game machine has a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, but in recent years, a game machine that allows the player to guess the set value set for the game machine is also known. Has been done. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-099567 has a first replaying combination and a second replaying combination, and the probability that only the first replaying combination wins is different depending on the set value. , If the first re-game combination and the second re-game combination are won at the same time, both the symbols that make up the first re-game combination and the symbols that make up the second re-game combination are stopped on the effective line. A game machine has been proposed in which the symbols constituting the second re-game combination can be stopped on the effective line by pushing the game so as to make it. In such a game machine, the player can estimate the set value by counting the number of times that the first re-game combination is established, and can improve the interest in the game machine.

By the way, in the conventional game machine, the setting difference is provided for the winning probability of a predetermined role, so that the player can guess the setting (in other words, the setting difference provided for the winning probability is used. The player has been annoyed because it is necessary to count the number of winnings of a predetermined combination having a setting difference in the winning probability. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a new setting suggestion method that has never existed before.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suggesting a setting by a new method.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 33rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine according to the present invention controls a reel (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols and a variable display of the symbol according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine including a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that advances the game by doing so, and one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is set. Setting means (for example, setting key type switch 54) and state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a plurality of states (for example, normal section / advantageous section, bonus state / non-bonus state, etc.) related to the game. When a stop command for the variation display of the symbol is detected, the stop control means (for example, within the range of 4 sliding pieces) from the current symbol position to stop the variation display of the symbol. , Main CPU 101), and when the first set value (for example, settings 4 to 6) is set by the setting means, the stop control means has a specific combination (for example, watermelon) as a winning combination. When the stop command is detected at the specific symbol position (for example, symbol position "13") in the determined game in the specific state (for example, the bonus state in the advantageous section), the first movement amount destination from the symbol at the specific symbol position. The variation display of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol (for example, 4 frames ahead) is displayed, and a second set value (for example, settings 1 to 3) different from the first set value is set by the setting means. If this is the case, when the stop command is detected at the specific symbol position in the game in the specific state in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the symbol at the specific symbol position is different from the first movement amount. It is characterized in that the variation display of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol of the movement amount destination (for example, 3 frames ahead) is displayed.

According to such a game machine, in a game in which a specific combination is determined as a winning combination in a specific state, the amount of movement (number of sliding pieces) of the symbol accompanying the stop control differs depending on the set value, so that during stop control Setting suggestions can be made using the amount of movement of the symbol. Here, since the movement amount in which the setting difference occurs is the movement amount at the time of winning the same combination of the specific combination, the setting suggestion can be made without using the combination having the setting difference in the winning probability as in the conventional game machine. Since it is possible, the setting suggestion can be made by a new method that has never existed before.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the stop control means is a stop command in a game in a predetermined state (for example, a bonus state during a normal section) different from the specific state in which the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. When is detected, the variation display of the symbol is stopped based on the same movement amount depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value is set. And.

According to such a game machine, when the state related to the game is a predetermined state, it is not possible to suggest the setting using the movement amount of the symbol at the time of stop control, and when it is a specific state, it stops. Setting suggestions can be made using the amount of movement of the symbol during control.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific state is a state in which a notification state (for example, AT) capable of notifying the player of a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player can be executed (for example, an advantageous section). ).

According to such a game machine, it is possible to suggest the setting by using the movement amount of the symbol at the time of stop control while the notification state can be executed (so-called advantageous section).

[Game machine of the 34th configuration]
Such a game machine has a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, but in recent years, a game machine that allows the player to guess the set value set for the game machine is also known. Has been done. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-104278, it is determined whether or not to give a privilege based on the probability associated with the set value, but the actually set set value is not referred to. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a set value suggested to a player is determined based on the number of winnings of a privilege actually won. In such a game machine, the set value suggested to the player is determined from the number of wins actually won for the privilege, instead of referring to the set value actually set. Therefore, as the game is continued, the actual set value is actually set. Since it is expected to be close to the set value, it is possible to improve the reliability of the set value suggested by the effect as the game is continued.

By the way, more diversity is required for the method for estimating the set value.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to diversify a method for estimating a set value and to provide a game machine capable of providing the enjoyment of estimating the set value.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 34th gaming machine having the following configuration.

The game machine according to the present invention is a game machine capable of playing a game by using one set value set from a plurality of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. Therefore, among a plurality of suggestion information (for example, odd number suggestion, even number suggestion, etc.) suggesting which set value the current set value is, a plurality of suggestion modes (for example, setting) in which the determination probability of the suggestion information to be notified is different A mode control means (for example, main CPU 101, sub CPU 201) having a suggestion mode) and capable of setting one suggestion mode from the plurality of suggestion modes, a current suggestion mode, and a current setting value. Suggestion information determining means (for example, main CPU 101, sub CPU 201) capable of determining suggestion information to be notified from the plurality of suggestion information, and notifying means capable of notifying the suggestion information determined by the suggestion information determining means (for example). , The display device 11), and the mode control means sets the current suggestion mode as the current suggestion mode when the specific suggestion information (for example, setting 2 is denied) is determined by the suggestion information determining means. Is characterized by changing to a different suggestion mode.

According to such a game machine, the suggestion mode is updated when the specific suggestion information is determined, so that the probability of determining the suggestion information differs before and after the specific suggestion information. As a result, the method can be diversified in that it provides a method for estimating the setting from an unprecedented viewpoint of updating the suggestion mode (probability of determining the suggestion information), and it is possible to provide the enjoyment of guessing the set value. A game machine can be provided.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific suggestion information (for example, setting 2 is denied) is determined by the suggestion information determining means, the mode control means sets the current suggestion mode and the specific suggestion information. It is characterized by changing to an undecidable suggestion mode (for example, mode B-1).

According to such a game machine, in the update of the suggestion mode triggered by the specific suggestion information, the suggestion mode is updated to the suggestion mode in which the specific suggestion information once determined is not determined, so that each time a notification is received. New setting estimation elements (suggestion information) are accumulated in. As a result, it is possible to provide a new enjoyment of guessing to narrow down the set value by accumulating the setting guessing elements.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, at least a part of the plurality of suggestion modes has a different reliability of the setting suggestion from the other suggestion modes, and the plurality of suggestion modes include the specific suggestion information. A first mode (for example, mode A) in which (for example, setting 2 denial) can be determined, and a second mode (for example, mode A-1) and a third mode (for example, mode) in which the specific suggestive information cannot be determined. B-1) is included, the reliability of the setting suggestion is higher in the third mode than in the first mode, and the mode control means determines the specific suggestion information in the first mode. In addition, the current suggestion mode can be changed to the second mode or the third mode, and the notification means starts from the first mode when the specific suggestion information is determined by the mode control means. It is characterized in that the specific suggestion information is notified in different modes depending on the case where the mode is changed to the second mode and the case where the mode is changed from the first mode to the third mode due to the trigger.

According to such a game machine, even when the specific suggestion information is determined, the notification mode of the specific suggestion information differs depending on the suggestion mode after the update. Therefore, for example, the suggestion mode after the update has a high reliability. In the case of the high suggestion mode, by notifying the specific suggestion information in a special manner, it is possible to inform the player that the next setting suggestion effect is a highly reliable effect. Since it is possible for the player to grasp that the reliability of the setting suggestion is increasing, it is possible to reduce the possibility of stopping the game while the setting guess is ambiguous, which can lead to the promotion of the operation of the game machine.

1 ... Pachislot, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 6 ... Information display, 11 ... Display device, 17L, 17C, 17R ... Stop button, 18 ... Sub display device, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 90 ... Main control circuit, 91 ... Microprocessor, 101 ... Main CPU, 102 ... Main ROM, 103 ... Main RAM, 107 ... Arithmetic circuit, 114 ... First serial communication circuit, 115 ... Second serial Communication circuit, 200 ... Sub control circuit, 201 ... Sub CPU 201, 301 ... First interface board, 302 ... Second interface board

Claims (3)

It is a gaming machine including a reel capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols and a game control means for advancing a game by controlling the variable display of the symbols according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of winning combinations. hand,
A setting means for setting one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and
State control means that can control multiple states related to the game,
When a stop command for the variation display of the symbol is detected, the stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol within a predetermined movement amount from the current symbol position and
With more
The stop control means
When the first set value is set by the setting means, when the stop command is detected at the specific symbol position in the game in the specific state in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the first movement is performed from the symbol at the specific symbol position. Stop the variable display of the symbol so that the symbol of the quantity destination is displayed,
When a second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, when the stop command is detected at the specific symbol position in the game in the specific state in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. , A gaming machine characterized in that the variation display of the symbol is stopped so that a symbol of a second movement amount destination different from the first movement amount is displayed from the symbol at the specific symbol position. When the stop control means detects the stop command in a game in a predetermined state different from the specific state in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the first set value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the variation display of the symbol is stopped based on the same movement amount as in the case where the second set value is set. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the specific state is a state in which a notification state capable of notifying the player of a mode of a stop operation advantageous to the player can be executed.

Images